texlive[61131] Master/texmf-dist: glossaries-extra (23nov21)
commits+karl at tug.org
commits+karl at tug.org
Tue Nov 23 23:39:50 CET 2021
Revision: 61131
http://tug.org/svn/texlive?view=revision&revision=61131
Author: karl
Date: 2021-11-23 23:39:49 +0100 (Tue, 23 Nov 2021)
Log Message:
-----------
glossaries-extra (23nov21)
Modified Paths:
--------------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-code.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbr-styles.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-abbrv.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-accsupp.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym-desc.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-acronym.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alias.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-altmodifier.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-marginpar.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree-sym.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-alttree.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex-hyp.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-autoindex.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-crossref2.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-docdef.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-entrycount.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-external.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-fmt.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-footnote.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-header.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-indexhook.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-initialisms.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-linkcount.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixed-abbrv-styles.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixedsort.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-mixture.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-name-font.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-nested.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-noidx-restricteddocdefs.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onelink.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-utf8.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly-xetex.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-onthefly.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-pages.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postdot.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-postlink.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-prefix.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record-nameref.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-record.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-restricteddocdefs.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-hyp.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl-main.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-suppl.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-trans.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-undef.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-unitentrycount.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.ins
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-bib2gls.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-stylemods.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossary-bookindex.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossary-longextra.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/glossaries-extra/glossary-topic.sty
Added Paths:
-----------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-multientry.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/sample-multientry.tex
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES 2021-11-23 22:38:59 UTC (rev 61130)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/CHANGES 2021-11-23 22:39:49 UTC (rev 61131)
@@ -1,3 +1,69 @@
+1.48 (2021-11-22):
+
+ * glossaries-extra.sty:
+
+ - new command \glslinkwrcontent used to encapsulate link text and
+ indexing within commands like \gls and \glslink. This adds
+ grouping, which will hopefully fix issue #189
+ https://www.dickimaw-books.com/bugtracker.php?key=189
+ (spacing issues caused by whatsit)
+
+ This is currently added as a trial. If no issues are reported
+ it will be added to the base package as well.
+
+ If the grouping causes a problem, redefine this command without
+ it:
+
+ \renewcommand*{\glslinkwrcontent}[1]{#1}
+
+
+ - New multi (combined/compound) entry feature:
+
+ \multiglossaryentry and associated commands
+
+ See chapter "Multi (or Compound) Entries" for details.
+
+ - New commands:
+
+ \glssetcategoriesattribute
+ \glssetcategoriesattributes
+
+ - bug fix #190: hypergroup, \glsnavhyperlinkname and targetnameprefix
+ don't work together
+ https://www.dickimaw-books.com/bugtracker.php?key=190
+
+ - new abbreviation styles:
+
+ long-only-short-sc-only
+ long-only-short-sc-only-desc
+ long-postshort-sc-user
+ long-postshort-sc-user-desc
+
+ - new debugging package option `showtargets`
+
+ * glossaries-extra-bib2gls.sty:
+
+ - added multi-entry commands for use with bib2gls:
+
+ \glsxtrmultientryadjustedname
+ \Glsxtrmultientryadjustedname
+ \GlsXtrmultientryadjustedname
+ \GLSxtrmultientryadjustedname
+
+ \glsxtrmultientryadjustednamesep
+ \glsxtrmultientryadjustednamepresep
+ \glsxtrmultientryadjustednamepostsep
+
+ \glsxtrmultientryadjustednamefmt
+ \Glsxtrmultientryadjustednamefmt
+ \GlsXtrmultientryadjustednamefmt
+ \GLSxtrmultientryadjustednamefmt
+
+ \glsxtrmultientryadjustednameother
+ \Glsxtrmultientryadjustednameother
+ \GlsXtrmultientryadjustednameother
+ \GLSxtrmultientryadjustednameother
+
1.47 (2021-11-04):
* glossaries-extra.sty:
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README 2021-11-23 22:38:59 UTC (rev 61130)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/README 2021-11-23 22:39:49 UTC (rev 61131)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-LaTeX Package : glossaries-extra v1.47 (2021-11-04)
+LaTeX Package : glossaries-extra v1.48 (2021-11-22)
Author : Nicola Talbot
https://www.dickimaw-books.com/contact
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-code.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html 2021-11-23 22:38:59 UTC (rev 61130)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-manual.html 2021-11-23 22:39:49 UTC (rev 61131)
@@ -15,6 +15,7 @@
<!--
/* start css.sty */
+.cmmi-5{font-size:50%;font-style: italic;}
.cmmi-10{font-style: italic;}
.cmr-17{font-size:170%;}
.cmr-12{font-size:120%;}
@@ -61,6 +62,7 @@
.cmtt-8{font-family: monospace,monospace;}
.cmtt-8{font-family: monospace,monospace;}
.cmti-8{font-size:80%; font-style: italic;}
+.small-caps{font-variant: small-caps; }
p{margin-top:0;margin-bottom:0}
p.indent{text-indent:0;}
p + p{margin-top:1em;}
@@ -77,7 +79,6 @@
li p.indent { text-indent: 0em }
li p:first-child{ margin-top:0em; }
li p:last-child, li div:last-child { margin-bottom:0.5em; }
-li p:first-child{ margin-bottom:0; }
li p~ul:last-child, li p~ol:last-child{ margin-bottom:0.5em; }
.enumerate1 {list-style-type:decimal;}
.enumerate2 {list-style-type:lower-alpha;}
@@ -129,7 +130,6 @@
.hline hr, .cline hr{ height : 0px; margin:0px; }
.hline td, .cline td{ padding: 0; }
.hline hr, .cline hr{border:none;border-top:1px solid black;}
-.hline {border-top: 1px solid black;}
.tabbing-right {text-align:right;}
div.float, div.figure {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
div.float img {text-align:center;}
@@ -175,6 +175,11 @@
.abstracttitle{text-align:center;margin-bottom:1em;}
.alltt P { margin-bottom : 0em; margin-top : 0em; }
.alltt { margin-bottom : 1em; margin-top : 1em; font-family:monospace,monospace; }
+.uline{ text-decoration:underline; }
+.uuline{ text-decoration:underline; }
+span.sout {text-decoration: line-through }
+span.xout {text-decoration: line-through }
+span.uwave {text-decoration:underline }
.equation td{text-align:center; }
.equation-star td{text-align:center; }
table.equation-star { width:100%; }
@@ -207,13 +212,13 @@
</style>
</head><body
>
-<!--l. 235--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 250--><p class="noindent" ><a
id="top"></a>
-</p><!--l. 235--><p class="indent" >
+</p><!--l. 250--><p class="indent" >
-</p><!--l. 235--><p class="indent" >
+</p><!--l. 250--><p class="indent" >
@@ -220,9 +225,9 @@
</p>
<div class="center"
>
-<!--l. 235--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 235--><p class="noindent" ><span
-class="cmr-17">glossaries-extra.sty v1.47: an extension to the</span>
+<!--l. 250--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 250--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="cmr-17">glossaries-extra.sty v1.48: an extension to the</span>
<span
class="cmr-17">glossaries package</span>
</p>
@@ -245,12 +250,12 @@
href="http://www.dickimaw-books.com/" class="url" ><span
class="cmtt-12">http://www.dickimaw-books.com/</span></a></td></tr></table>
</div>
-<!--l. 235--><p class="noindent" ><span
-class="cmr-12">2021-11-04</span></p></div>
+<!--l. 250--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="cmr-12">2021-11-22</span></p></div>
<div
class="abstract"
>
-<!--l. 237--><p class="indent" >
+<!--l. 252--><p class="indent" >
@@ -258,8 +263,7 @@
<h3 class="abstracttitle">
<span
class="cmbx-10">Abstract</span>
-</h3>
-<!--l. 238--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+</h3> The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package is an extension to the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package, providing
additional features. Some of the features provided by this package are only available
@@ -267,10 +271,10 @@
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>version 4.19 (or above). This document assumes familiarity with the
<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package.
-</p><!--l. 244--><p class="indent" > The file <span
-class="cmtt-10">example-glossaries-xr.tex </span>contains dummy entries with
-cross-references that may be used for creating minimal working examples for testing
-the <span
+<!--l. 259--><p class="noindent" >The file <span
+class="cmtt-10">example-glossaries-xr.tex </span>contains dummy entries with cross-references
+that may be used for creating minimal working examples for testing the
+<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package. (The base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package provides additional files, but
this one needs <span
@@ -280,7 +284,7 @@
id="dx1-2"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>.
-</p><!--l. 252--><p class="indent" > <span
+</p><!--l. 267--><p class="indent" > <span
class="cmbx-10">The </span><span
class="cmssbx-10">glossaries-extra </span><span
class="cmbx-10">package uses a different set of defaults to the base</span>
@@ -287,13 +291,13 @@
<span
class="cmssbx-10">glossaries </span><span
class="cmbx-10">package. </span>See the Introduction for more details.
-</p><!--l. 254--><p class="indent" >
+</p><!--l. 269--><p class="indent" >
</p>
</div>
-<!--l. 256--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Since <span
+<!--l. 271--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Since <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>internally loads the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package, you also need to have
<span
@@ -323,21 +327,18 @@
href="http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/55437/how-do-i-update-my-tex-distribution" >How do I update my TeX distribution?</a> or <a
href="http://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/14925/updating-tex-on-linux" >Updating TeX on Linux</a>.)
</div>
-</p><!--l. 271--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 273--><p class="indent" > Additional resources: </p>
+</p><!--l. 286--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 288--><p class="indent" > Additional resources: </p>
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 275--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ <li class="itemize">The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>documented code <a
href="http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-extra/glossaries-extra-code.pdf" >glossaries-extra-code.pdf</a>.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 278--><p class="noindent" >The <a
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">The <a
href="http://www.dickimaw-books.com/gallery/#glossaries-extra" ><span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>gallery</a>.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 281--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>and <a
id="dx1-11"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>: An Introductory Guide.
@@ -344,21 +345,18 @@
(<a
href="http://mirrors.ctan.org/support/bib2gls/bib2gls-begin.pdf" ><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls-begin.pdf</span></a>).
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 285--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="https://www.dickimaw-books.com/latex/buildglossaries/" >Incorporating makeglossaries or makeglossaries-lite or bib2gls into the
document build</a>.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 289--><p class="noindent" >The <a
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">The <a
href="http://www.dickimaw-books.com/software/bib2gls" ><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> application.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 293--><p class="noindent" >The base <a
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">The base <a
href="https://ctan.org/pkg/glossaries" ><span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries</span></a> package.</p></li></ul>
+class="cmss-10">glossaries</span></a> package.</li></ul>
@@ -374,7 +372,7 @@
<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >2 <a
href="#sec:modifications" id="QQ2-1-5">Modifications to Existing Commands and Styles</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >2.1 <a
-href="#definingentries" id="QQ2-1-6">Defining Entries</a></span>
+href="#sec:definingentries" id="QQ2-1-6">Defining Entries</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >2.2 <a
href="#sec:wrglossary" id="QQ2-1-7">Entry Indexing</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >2.3 <a
@@ -386,13 +384,13 @@
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >2.6 <a
href="#sec:glsunset" id="QQ2-1-11">First Use Flag</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >2.7 <a
-href="#plurals" id="QQ2-1-12">Plurals</a></span>
+href="#sec:plurals" id="QQ2-1-12">Plurals</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >2.8 <a
href="#sec:nested" id="QQ2-1-13">Nested Links</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >2.9 <a
href="#sec:acronymmods" id="QQ2-1-14">Acronym Style Modifications</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >2.10 <a
-href="#glossaries" id="QQ2-1-16">Glossaries</a></span>
+href="#sec:glossaries" id="QQ2-1-16">Glossaries</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >2.11 <a
href="#sec:glosstylemods" id="QQ2-1-17">Glossary Style Modifications</a></span>
<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >2.11.1 <a
@@ -400,19 +398,15 @@
<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >2.11.2 <a
href="#sec:glosstylenumlist" id="QQ2-1-19">Number List</a></span>
<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >2.11.3 <a
-href="#x1-190002.11.3" id="QQ2-1-20">The <span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-stylemods </span>Package</a></span>
+href="#sec:stylemods" id="QQ2-1-20">The glossaries-extra-stylemods Package</a></span>
<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >3 <a
-href="#newglossarystyles" id="QQ2-1-24">New Glossary Styles</a></span>
+href="#sec:newglossarystyles" id="QQ2-1-24">New Glossary Styles</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >3.1 <a
-href="#x1-240003.1" id="QQ2-1-25"><span
-class="cmss-10">glossary-bookindex </span>package</a></span>
+href="#sec:bookindex" id="QQ2-1-25">glossary-bookindex package</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >3.2 <a
-href="#x1-250003.2" id="QQ2-1-26"><span
-class="cmss-10">glossary-longextra </span>package</a></span>
+href="#sec:longextra" id="QQ2-1-26">glossary-longextra package</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >3.3 <a
-href="#x1-260003.3" id="QQ2-1-27"><span
-class="cmss-10">glossary-topic </span>package</a></span>
+href="#sec:topic" id="QQ2-1-27">glossary-topic package</a></span>
<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >4 <a
href="#sec:abbreviations" id="QQ2-1-28">Abbreviations</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >4.1 <a
@@ -432,70 +426,137 @@
<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >5 <a
href="#sec:headtitle" id="QQ2-1-37">Entries in Sectioning Titles, Headers, Captions and Contents</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >5.1 <a
-href="#simplisticapproach" id="QQ2-1-38">Simplistic Approach</a></span>
+href="#sec:simplisticapproach" id="QQ2-1-38">Simplistic Approach</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >5.2 <a
-href="#newcommandsdesignedforchaptersectionheadings" id="QQ2-1-39">New Commands Designed for Chapter/Section Headings</a></span>
+href="#sec:headingcommands" id="QQ2-1-39">New Commands Designed for Chapter/Section Headings</a></span>
<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >6 <a
-href="#sec:categories" id="QQ2-1-40">Categories</a></span>
-<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >7 <a
-href="#sec:countref" id="QQ2-1-41">Counting References</a></span>
+href="#sec:multientries" id="QQ2-1-40">Multi (or Compound) Entries</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.1 <a
+href="#sec:mglsexamples" id="QQ2-1-41">Examples</a></span>
-<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >7.1 <a
-href="#sec:entrycount" id="QQ2-1-42">Entry Counting (First Use Flag)</a></span>
-<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >7.2 <a
-href="#sec:linkcount" id="QQ2-1-43">Link Counting</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.1.1 <a
+href="#sec:mglsexhier" id="QQ2-1-42">Example: Hierarchical</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.1.2 <a
+href="#sec:mglsexsuffix" id="QQ2-1-43">Example: Suffix</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.1.3 <a
+href="#sec:mglsexcatsuffix" id="QQ2-1-44">Example: Category Suffix</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.1.4 <a
+href="#sec:mglsexsep" id="QQ2-1-45">Example: Separators</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.1.5 <a
+href="#sec:exskipfirstsuffix" id="QQ2-1-46">Example: Skipping Elements (Fragment Element)</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.1.6 <a
+href="#sec:exskippostlink" id="QQ2-1-47">Example: Skipping Elements (Prefix and Post-Link Hooks)</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.2 <a
+href="#sec:mglsmain" id="QQ2-1-48">Main and Other Elements</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.3 <a
+href="#sec:mglsfixes" id="QQ2-1-49">Prefixes and Suffixes</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.4 <a
+href="#sec:mglssep" id="QQ2-1-50">Separators</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.5 <a
+href="#sec:mglselementhooks" id="QQ2-1-51">mgls Element Hooks</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.6 <a
+href="#sec:mglspostlinkhook" id="QQ2-1-52">Post-Link Hook</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.6.1 <a
+href="#sec:mglspostlinkhooklastelement" id="QQ2-1-53">Last Element</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.6.2 <a
+href="#sec:mglspostlinkhookmainelement" id="QQ2-1-54">Main Element</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.7 <a
+href="#sec:mglsfirstuse" id="QQ2-1-55">Multi-Entry First Use</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.8 <a
+href="#sec:multiglscategory" id="QQ2-1-56">Multi-Entry Category</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.9 <a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptions" id="QQ2-1-57">Multi-Entry Settings</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.9.1 <a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptionsindexing" id="QQ2-1-58">Indexing</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.9.2 <a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptionsencap" id="QQ2-1-59">Location Formats (Encaps)</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.9.3 <a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptionspostlink" id="QQ2-1-60">Post-Link Hooks</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.9.4 <a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptionsfixes" id="QQ2-1-61">Prefixes and Suffixes</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.9.5 <a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptionsskip" id="QQ2-1-62">Skipping Elements</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.9.6 <a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptionsgeneral" id="QQ2-1-63">General</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.10 <a
+href="#sec:mglsopts" id="QQ2-1-64">mgls Options</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.11 <a
+href="#sec:mglslike" id="QQ2-1-65">Variants of mgls</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.11.1 <a
+href="#sec:mglsbasic" id="QQ2-1-66">gls-like</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.11.2 <a
+href="#sec:mglsabbrv" id="QQ2-1-67">Abbreviations</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.11.3 <a
+href="#sec:mglsotherfields" id="QQ2-1-68">Other Fields</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >6.11.4 <a
+href="#sec:mpgls" id="QQ2-1-69">Support for glossaries-prefix (pgls)</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.12 <a
+href="#sec:msee" id="QQ2-1-70">Cross-References</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.13 <a
+href="#sec:multiextras" id="QQ2-1-71">Additional Commands</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >6.14 <a
+href="#sec:mbib2gls" id="QQ2-1-72">bib2gls</a></span>
+<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >7 <a
+href="#sec:categories" id="QQ2-1-73">Categories</a></span>
<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >8 <a
-href="#sec:autoindex" id="QQ2-1-44">Auto-Indexing</a></span>
+href="#sec:countref" id="QQ2-1-74">Counting References</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >8.1 <a
+href="#sec:entrycount" id="QQ2-1-75">Entry Counting (First Use Flag)</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >8.2 <a
+href="#sec:linkcount" id="QQ2-1-76">Link Counting</a></span>
<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >9 <a
-href="#sec:bib2gls" id="QQ2-1-45"><span
-class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>: Managing Reference Databases</a></span>
-<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >9.1 <a
-href="#selection" id="QQ2-1-46">Selection</a></span>
-<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >9.2 <a
-href="#sortinganddisplayingtheglossary" id="QQ2-1-47">Sorting and Displaying the Glossary</a></span>
-<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >9.3 <a
-href="#x1-460009.3" id="QQ2-1-48">The <span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls </span>package</a></span>
-<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >9.3.1 <a
-href="#sec:supplocations" id="QQ2-1-49">Supplemental Locations</a></span>
-<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >9.3.2 <a
-href="#sec:recordnameref" id="QQ2-1-50">Nameref Record</a></span>
-<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >9.3.3 <a
-href="#sec:resourcecommands" id="QQ2-1-51">Helper Commands for Resource Options</a></span>
-<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >9.4 <a
-href="#supplementarycommands" id="QQ2-1-52">Supplementary Commands</a></span>
-<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >9.5 <a
-href="#sec:recordcount" id="QQ2-1-53">Record Counting</a></span>
+href="#sec:autoindex" id="QQ2-1-77">Auto-Indexing</a></span>
<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >10 <a
-href="#sec:miscnew" id="QQ2-1-54">Miscellaneous New Commands</a></span>
+href="#sec:bib2gls" id="QQ2-1-78">bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >10.1 <a
-href="#sec:fields" id="QQ2-1-55">Entry Fields</a></span>
+href="#sec:bib2glsselection" id="QQ2-1-79">Selection</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >10.2 <a
-href="#sec:printunsrt" id="QQ2-1-56">Display All Entries Without Sorting or Indexing</a></span>
-<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >10.2.1 <a
-href="#sec:printunsrthooks" id="QQ2-1-57">Hooks</a></span>
-<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >10.2.2 <a
-href="#sec:printunsrtfilter" id="QQ2-1-58">Filtering</a></span>
+href="#sec:bib2glssortprint" id="QQ2-1-80">Sorting and Displaying the Glossary</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >10.3 <a
-href="#sec:printunsrtinner" id="QQ2-1-59">Partial Glossaries</a></span>
+href="#sec:bib2glssty" id="QQ2-1-81">The glossaries-extra-bib2gls package</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >10.3.1 <a
+href="#sec:supplocations" id="QQ2-1-82">Supplemental Locations</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >10.3.2 <a
+href="#sec:recordnameref" id="QQ2-1-83">Nameref Record</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >10.3.3 <a
+href="#sec:resourcecommands" id="QQ2-1-84">Helper Commands for Resource Options</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >10.4 <a
-href="#sec:glossentry" id="QQ2-1-60">Standalone Entry Items</a></span>
+href="#sec:bib2glssupplementarycommands" id="QQ2-1-85">Supplementary Commands</a></span>
<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >10.5 <a
-href="#sec:alias" id="QQ2-1-61">Entry Aliases</a></span>
+href="#sec:recordcount" id="QQ2-1-86">Record Counting</a></span>
<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >11 <a
-href="#sec:onthefly" id="QQ2-1-62">On-the-Fly Document Definitions</a></span>
+href="#sec:miscnew" id="QQ2-1-87">Miscellaneous New Commands</a></span>
+
+
+
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >11.1 <a
+href="#sec:fields" id="QQ2-1-88">Entry Fields</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >11.2 <a
+href="#sec:printunsrt" id="QQ2-1-89">Display All Entries Without Sorting or Indexing</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >11.2.1 <a
+href="#sec:printunsrthooks" id="QQ2-1-90">Hooks</a></span>
+<br />   <span class="subsectionToc" >11.2.2 <a
+href="#sec:printunsrtfilter" id="QQ2-1-91">Filtering</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >11.3 <a
+href="#sec:printunsrtinner" id="QQ2-1-92">Partial Glossaries</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >11.4 <a
+href="#sec:glossentry" id="QQ2-1-93">Standalone Entry Items</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >11.5 <a
+href="#sec:alias" id="QQ2-1-94">Entry Aliases</a></span>
<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >12 <a
-href="#sec:supplemental" id="QQ2-1-63">Supplemental Packages</a></span>
-<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >12.1 <a
-href="#sec:prefix" id="QQ2-1-64">Prefixes or Determiners</a></span>
-<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >12.2 <a
-href="#sec:accsupp" id="QQ2-1-65">Accessibility Support</a></span>
+href="#sec:onthefly" id="QQ2-1-95">On-the-Fly Document Definitions</a></span>
<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >13 <a
-href="#sec:samples" id="QQ2-1-66">Sample Files</a></span>
+href="#sec:supplemental" id="QQ2-1-96">Supplemental Packages</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >13.1 <a
+href="#sec:prefix" id="QQ2-1-97">Prefixes or Determiners</a></span>
+<br />  <span class="sectionToc" >13.2 <a
+href="#sec:accsupp" id="QQ2-1-98">Accessibility Support</a></span>
<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >14 <a
-href="#sec:lang" id="QQ2-1-67">Multi-Lingual Support</a></span>
+href="#sec:samples" id="QQ2-1-99">Sample Files</a></span>
+<br /> <span class="chapterToc" >15 <a
+href="#sec:lang" id="QQ2-1-100">Multi-Lingual Support</a></span>
<br /> <span class="chapterToc" > <a
href="#glossary">Glossary</a></span>
</div>
@@ -502,15 +563,15 @@
-<!--l. 298--><p class="indent" > <div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">1. <a
+<!--l. 313--><p class="indent" > <div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">1. <a
id="sec:intro"></a>Introduction</h2>
-</p><!--l. 301--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 316--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package is a flexible package, but it’s also a heavy-weight package
that uses a lot of resources. As package developer, I’m caught between those users
who complain about the drawbacks of a heavy-weight package with a large user
manual and those users who want more features (which necessarily adds to the
package weight and manual size).
-</p><!--l. 308--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 323--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package is an attempt to provide a compromise for this
conflict. Version 4.22 of the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package is the last version to incorporate new
@@ -526,10 +587,10 @@
extra features available will have more of a chance of getting their feature requests
accepted.
</p>
-<!--l. 322--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 337--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">1.1 </span> <a
id="sec:defaults"></a>Package Defaults</h3>
-<!--l. 325--><p class="noindent" >I’m not happy with some of the default settings assumed by the <span
+<!--l. 340--><p class="noindent" >I’m not happy with some of the default settings assumed by the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package,
and, judging from code I’ve seen, other users also seem unhappy with them, as
certain package options are often used in questions posted on various sites. I can’t
@@ -539,10 +600,9 @@
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>is a separate package, I have decided to implement some of
these commonly-used options by default. You can switch them back if they’re not
appropriate.
-</p><!--l. 335--><p class="indent" > The new defaults are: </p>
+</p><!--l. 350--><p class="indent" > The new defaults are: </p>
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 337--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#styopt.toc"><span
class="cmss-10">toc</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=true</span><a
@@ -552,9 +612,8 @@
class="cmss-10">=false</span><a
id="dx1-3002"></a> to
switch this back off.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 340--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#styopt.nopostdot"><span
class="cmss-10">nopostdot</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=true</span><a
@@ -568,9 +627,8 @@
class="cmss-10">postdot</span></a><a
id="dx1-3005"></a> to restore the
terminating full stop (period).
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 345--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#styopt.noredefwarn"><span
class="cmss-10">noredefwarn</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=true</span><a
@@ -590,12 +648,8 @@
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package has already been loaded
before you use the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package.
-
-
-
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 352--><p class="noindent" >If <span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">If <span
class="cmss-10">babel</span><a
id="dx1-3010"></a> has been loaded, the <a
href="#styopt.translate"><span
@@ -612,9 +666,11 @@
change to the default if <span
class="cmss-10">babel</span><a
id="dx1-3014"></a> hasn’t been loaded.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 357--><p class="noindent" >The default style used by <span
+
+
+
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">The default style used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span><a
id="dx1-3015"></a> is <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-nolong"><span
@@ -623,9 +679,8 @@
form is not shown on <a
id="dx1-3017"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>.)
-</p>
</li></ul>
-<!--l. 363--><p class="indent" > The examples below illustrate the difference in explicit package options between
+<!--l. 378--><p class="indent" > The examples below illustrate the difference in explicit package options between
<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>and <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>. There may be other differences resulting from
@@ -636,20 +691,18 @@
class="cmbx-10">2</span>
</a><a
href="#sec:modifications">Modifications to Existing Commands and Styles<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:modifications --></a>).
-</p><!--l. 369--><p class="indent" >
+</p><!--l. 384--><p class="indent" >
</p><ol class="enumerate1" >
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-3019x1">
- <!--l. 370--><p class="noindent" >Basic defaults:
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-3019x1">Basic defaults:
-</p>
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-1">
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
</pre>
- <!--l. 374--><p class="nopar" > This is like:
+ <!--l. 389--><p class="nopar" > This is like:
@@ -659,21 +712,19 @@
\usepackage[toc,nopostdot]{glossaries}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
</pre>
- <!--l. 380--><p class="nopar" >
+ <!--l. 395--><p class="nopar" >
</p></li>
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-3021x2">
- <!--l. 382--><p class="noindent" >Language defaults:
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-3021x2">Language defaults:
-</p>
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-3">
\documentclass[british]{article}
\usepackage{babel}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
</pre>
- <!--l. 387--><p class="nopar" > This is like:
+ <!--l. 402--><p class="nopar" > This is like:
@@ -684,22 +735,20 @@
\usepackage[toc,nopostdot,translate=babel]{glossaries}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
</pre>
- <!--l. 394--><p class="nopar" >
+ <!--l. 409--><p class="nopar" >
</p></li>
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-3023x3">
- <!--l. 396--><p class="noindent" >Combined with <span
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-3023x3">Combined with <span
class="cmss-10">memoir</span><a
id="dx1-3024"></a>
-</p>
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-5">
\documentclass{memoir}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
</pre>
- <!--l. 400--><p class="nopar" > This is like:
+ <!--l. 415--><p class="nopar" > This is like:
@@ -709,7 +758,7 @@
\usepackage[toc,nopostdot,noredefwarn]{glossaries}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
</pre>
- <!--l. 406--><p class="nopar" > <span
+ <!--l. 421--><p class="nopar" > <span
class="cmti-10">However</span>
@@ -720,7 +769,7 @@
\usepackage{glossaries}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
</pre>
- <!--l. 412--><p class="nopar" > This is like:
+ <!--l. 427--><p class="nopar" > This is like:
@@ -730,7 +779,7 @@
\usepackage[toc,nopostdot]{glossaries}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
</pre>
- <!--l. 418--><p class="nopar" > Since by the time <span
+ <!--l. 433--><p class="nopar" > Since by the time <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>has been loaded, <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>has already
redefined <span
@@ -737,14 +786,12 @@
class="cmss-10">memoir</span><a
id="dx1-3025"></a>’s glossary-related commands.
</p></li>
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-3027x4">
- <!--l. 423--><p class="noindent" >Abbreviations are defined with <span
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-3027x4">Abbreviations are defined with <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>:
-</p>
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-9">
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
\newabbreviation{svm}{SVM}{support vector machine}
@@ -752,7 +799,7 @@
First use: \gls{svm}. Explicit full form: \glsxtrfull{svm}.
\end{document}
</pre>
- <!--l. 430--><p class="nopar" > This is the closest to:
+ <!--l. 445--><p class="nopar" > This is the closest to:
@@ -764,7 +811,7 @@
First use: \gls{svm}. Explicit full form: \acrfull{svm}.
\end{document}
</pre>
- <!--l. 438--><p class="nopar" > If you want to continue using <span
+ <!--l. 453--><p class="nopar" > If you want to continue using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym </span>then you will need to change the
style for the <span
class="cmss-10">acronym</span><a
@@ -781,14 +828,14 @@
First use: \gls{svm}. Explicit full form: \glsxtrfull{svm}.
\end{document}
</pre>
- <!--l. 448--><p class="nopar" ></p></li></ol>
-<!--l. 451--><p class="indent" > Another noticeable change is that by default <span
+ <!--l. 463--><p class="nopar" ></p></li></ol>
+<!--l. 466--><p class="indent" > Another noticeable change is that by default <span
class="cmtt-10">\printglossary </span>will now display
information text in the document if the external glossary file doesn’t exist. This is
explanatory text to help new users who can’t work out what to do next to complete
the document build. Once the document is set up correctly and the external files have
been generated, this text will disappear.
-</p><!--l. 458--><p class="indent" > This change is mostly likely to be noticed by users with one or more
+</p><!--l. 473--><p class="indent" > This change is mostly likely to be noticed by users with one or more
redundant empty glossaries who ignore transcript messages, explicitly use
<a
id="dx1-3029"></a><a
@@ -818,7 +865,7 @@
\printglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 482--><p class="nopar" > The above document will only display the list of acronyms at the place where
+<!--l. 497--><p class="nopar" > The above document will only display the list of acronyms at the place where
<span
class="cmtt-10">\printglossaries</span><a
id="dx1-3033"></a> occurs. However it will also attempt to input the <span
@@ -825,7 +872,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">.gls </span>file
associated with the <span
class="cmtt-10">main </span>glossary.
-</p><!--l. 488--><p class="indent" > If you use <a
+</p><!--l. 503--><p class="indent" > If you use <a
id="dx1-3034"></a><a
href="#glo:makeglossaries"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeglossaries</span></a>, you’ll get the warning message:
@@ -839,7 +886,7 @@
Remember to use package option 'nomain' if you
don't want to use the main glossary.
</pre>
-<!--l. 494--><p class="nopar" > (where the original file is called <span
+<!--l. 509--><p class="nopar" > (where the original file is called <span
class="cmtt-10">test.tex</span>) but if you simply call <a
id="dx1-3035"></a><a
href="#glo:makeindex"><span
@@ -855,7 +902,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-14">
No file test.gls.
</pre>
-<!--l. 501--><p class="nopar" > This doesn’t occur with <a
+<!--l. 516--><p class="nopar" > This doesn’t occur with <a
id="dx1-3036"></a><a
href="#glo:makeglossaries"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeglossaries</span></a> as it will create the <span
@@ -862,7 +909,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">.gls </span>file containing
the single command <span
class="cmtt-10">\null</span>.
-</p><!--l. 505--><p class="indent" > If you simply change from <span
+</p><!--l. 520--><p class="indent" > If you simply change from <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>to <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>in this document, you’ll
find a change in the resulting PDF if you don’t use <a
@@ -873,7 +920,7 @@
id="dx1-3038"></a><a
href="#glo:makeindex"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span></a>.
-</p><!--l. 510--><p class="indent" > The transcript file will still contain the message about the missing <span
+</p><!--l. 525--><p class="indent" > The transcript file will still contain the message about the missing <span
class="cmtt-10">.gls</span>, but now
you’ll also see information in the actual PDF document. The simplest remedy is to
follow the advice inserted into the document at that point, which is to add the
@@ -897,7 +944,7 @@
\printglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 534--><p class="nopar" > (Note the need to set the acronym style using <span
+<!--l. 549--><p class="nopar" > (Note the need to set the acronym style using <span
class="cmtt-10">\setabbreviationstyle</span>
before <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span>. See <a
@@ -906,12 +953,12 @@
class="cmbx-10">4</span> </a><a
href="#sec:abbreviations">Abbreviations<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:abbreviations --></a> for further
details.)
-</p><!--l. 539--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 554--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 539--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 554--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">1.2 </span> <a
id="sec:pkgopts"></a>New or Modified Package Options</h3>
-<!--l. 542--><p class="noindent" >If you haven’t already loaded <span
+<!--l. 557--><p class="noindent" >If you haven’t already loaded <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>, you can use any of the package options
provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>when you load <span
@@ -926,7 +973,7 @@
remember that not all of the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package options may be used in that
command.
-</p><!--l. 550--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> This section only lists options that are either unrecognised by the <span
+</p><!--l. 565--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> This section only lists options that are either unrecognised by the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>
package or are a modified version of options of the same name provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>.
@@ -933,8 +980,8 @@
See the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>user manual for details about the unmodified options.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 556--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 558--><p class="indent" > The new and modified options provided by <span
+</p><!--l. 571--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 573--><p class="indent" > The new and modified options provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>are described
below:
@@ -941,13 +988,11 @@
</p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 563--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.debug"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">debug</span><a
- id="dx1-4002"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 563--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ id="dx1-4002"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package has a <span
class="cmss-10">debug </span>option that allows the values <span
class="cmss-10">false</span>,
@@ -963,7 +1008,7 @@
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>you
must make sure that your version of <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>supports it.
- </p><!--l. 571--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ <!--l. 586--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package extends this option to provide the additional
values <a
href="#styopt.debug"><span
@@ -974,7 +1019,7 @@
class="cmss-10">debug</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=all</span><a
id="dx1-4005"></a>.
- </p><!--l. 575--><p class="noindent" >The <a
+ </p><!--l. 590--><p class="noindent" >The <a
href="#styopt.debug"><span
class="cmss-10">debug</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=showwrgloss</span><a
@@ -983,10 +1028,10 @@
class="cmss-10">debug</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=true</span><a
id="dx1-4007"></a> and uses
- </p><!--l. 577--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 592--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-4008"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrwrglossmark </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 579--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 594--><p class="noindent" >
to show a mark <span
class="cmsy-10">⋅ </span>just before the write operation performed by the
indexing commands. If you use <a
@@ -1007,7 +1052,7 @@
id="dx1-4012"></a><a
href="#glo:xindy"><span
class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a>.
- </p><!--l. 587--><p class="noindent" >The <a
+ </p><!--l. 602--><p class="noindent" >The <a
href="#styopt.debug"><span
class="cmss-10">debug</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=all</span><a
@@ -1022,93 +1067,132 @@
class="cmss-10">=showwrgloss</span><a
id="dx1-4015"></a>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 590--><p class="noindent" >
<a
+ id="styopt.showtargets"></a><span
+class="cmssbx-10">showtargets</span><a
+ id="dx1-4016"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This implements <a
+href="#styopt.debug"><span
+class="cmss-10">debug</span></a><span
+class="cmss-10">=showtargets</span><a
+ id="dx1-4017"></a> and can also adjust the way the
+ targets are shown. By default, any links that occur in TeX’s “outer” mode are
+ placed in the margin according to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsshowtargetouter</span><a
+ id="dx1-4018"></a> (provided by the base
+ <span
+class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package). This can lead to the “too many floats” error if there are
+ multiple instances of commands like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>in a single line. This option
+ provides a way of changing this to an in-line annotation. Available
+ values:
+ <dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">left</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">A marker is placed to the left of the link/target and a marginal note
+ is used in outer mode;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">right</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">A marker is placed to the right of the link/target and a marginal
+ note is used in outer mode;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">innerleft</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">A marker and annotation are placed to the left of the link/target
+ in all modes;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">innerright</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">A marker and annotation are placed to the right of the
+ link/target in all modes;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">annoteleft</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Markers are placed on either side of the link/target and the
+ annotation is on the left;
+
+
+
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">annoteright</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Markers are placed on either side of the link/target and the
+ annotation is on the right.</dd></dl>
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<a
id="styopt.postdot"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">postdot</span><a
- id="dx1-4016"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 590--><p class="noindent" >(New to version 1.12.) This option is just a shortcut for <a
+ id="dx1-4019"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to version 1.12.) This option is just a shortcut for <a
href="#styopt.nopostdot"><span
class="cmss-10">nopostdot</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=false</span><a
- id="dx1-4017"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 593--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-4020"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="styopt.postpunc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">postpunc</span><a
- id="dx1-4018"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 593--><p class="noindent" >(New to version 1.21.) This option sets the post-description punctuation to the
- given value. For example: <span
+ id="dx1-4021"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to version 1.21.) This option sets the post-description punctuation to
+ the given value. For example: <span
class="cmss-10">postpunc=; </span>does
-</p>
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-16">
\renewcommand{\glspostdescription}{;}
</pre>
- <!--l. 598--><p class="nopar" > The value may also be one of the following keywords:
+ <!--l. 636--><p class="nopar" > The value may also be one of the following keywords:
</p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 601--><p class="noindent" >
<span
class="cmtt-10">comma</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">:</span> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 601--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="cmbx-10">:</span> </dt><dd
+class="description"><a
href="#styopt.postpunc"><span
class="cmss-10">postpunc</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=comma</span><a
- id="dx1-4019"></a> is equivalent to
+ id="dx1-4022"></a> is equivalent to
-</p>
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-17">
\renewcommand{\glspostdescription}{,}
</pre>
- <!--l. 605--><p class="nopar" >
+ <!--l. 643--><p class="nopar" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 607--><p class="noindent" >
<span
class="cmtt-10">dot</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">:</span> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 607--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="cmbx-10">:</span> </dt><dd
+class="description"><a
href="#styopt.postpunc"><span
class="cmss-10">postpunc</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=dot</span><a
- id="dx1-4020"></a> is equivalent to
+ id="dx1-4023"></a> is equivalent to
-</p>
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-18">
\renewcommand{\glspostdescription}{.\spacefactor\sfcode`\. }
</pre>
- <!--l. 611--><p class="nopar" >
+ <!--l. 649--><p class="nopar" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 613--><p class="noindent" >
<span
class="cmtt-10">none</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">:</span> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 613--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="cmbx-10">:</span> </dt><dd
+class="description"><a
href="#styopt.postpunc"><span
class="cmss-10">postpunc</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=none</span><a
- id="dx1-4021"></a> is equivalent to
+ id="dx1-4024"></a> is equivalent to
-</p>
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-19">
\renewcommand{\glspostdescription}{}
</pre>
- <!--l. 617--><p class="nopar" ></p></dd></dl>
- <!--l. 619--><p class="noindent" >The default definition is
+ <!--l. 655--><p class="nopar" ></p></dd></dl>
+ <!--l. 657--><p class="noindent" >The default definition is
@@ -1118,30 +1202,30 @@
  \ifglsnopostdot\else.\spacefactor\sfcode`\. \fi
}
</pre>
- <!--l. 624--><p class="nopar" > where the conditional is determined by the <a
+ <!--l. 662--><p class="nopar" > where the conditional is determined by the <a
href="#styopt.nopostdot"><span
class="cmss-10">nopostdot</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4022"></a> package option.
+ id="dx1-4025"></a> package option.
The <a
href="#styopt.postpunc"><span
class="cmss-10">postpunc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4023"></a> option removes the conditional from the definition of
+ id="dx1-4026"></a> option removes the conditional from the definition of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glspostdescription</span>. The package options <a
href="#styopt.nopostdot"><span
class="cmss-10">nopostdot</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4024"></a> and <a
+ id="dx1-4027"></a> and <a
href="#styopt.postdot"><span
class="cmss-10">postdot</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4025"></a> will restore
+ id="dx1-4028"></a> will restore
the original definition of <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspostdescription</span>.
- </p><!--l. 631--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ </p><!--l. 669--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-stylemods</span><a
- id="dx1-4026"></a> package adjusts the predefined styles
+ id="dx1-4029"></a> package adjusts the predefined styles
that had a hard-coded <span
class="cmtt-10">\space </span>before the <a
- id="dx1-4027"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4030"></a><a
href="#glo:numberlist">number list</a> so that they use
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrprelocation </span>instead (which is defined to <span
@@ -1149,9 +1233,9 @@
redefine this command in combination with <a
href="#styopt.postpunc"><span
class="cmss-10">postpunc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4028"></a> to alter the separator
+ id="dx1-4031"></a> to alter the separator
before the <a
- id="dx1-4029"></a>number list. For example, to have a comma followed by
+ id="dx1-4032"></a>number list. For example, to have a comma followed by
<span
class="cmtt-10">\hfil</span>:
@@ -1162,11 +1246,11 @@
\usepackage[postpunc=comma,stylemods]{glossaries-extra}
\renewcommand{\glsxtrprelocation}{\hfil}
</pre>
- <!--l. 641--><p class="nopar" > Be careful with doing this as it will look odd if the <a
- id="dx1-4030"></a><a
+ <!--l. 679--><p class="nopar" > Be careful with doing this as it will look odd if the <a
+ id="dx1-4033"></a><a
href="#glo:numberlist">number list</a> is missing.
(With <a
- id="dx1-4031"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4034"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> you can instead redefine <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrprelocation </span>to do nothing
@@ -1173,36 +1257,32 @@
and set the location prefixes with <span
class="cmtt-10">loc-prefix </span>which will only apply if the entry
has a <a
- id="dx1-4032"></a>number list.)
+ id="dx1-4035"></a>number list.)
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 648--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.prefix"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">prefix</span><a
- id="dx1-4033"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 648--><p class="noindent" >Load the <span
+ id="dx1-4036"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Load the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-prefix</span><a
- id="dx1-4034"></a> package (if not already loaded).
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 651--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-4037"></a> package (if not already loaded).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="styopt.accsupp"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">accsupp</span><a
- id="dx1-4035"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 651--><p class="noindent" >Load the <span
+ id="dx1-4038"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Load the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp</span><a
- id="dx1-4036"></a> package (if not already loaded).
- </p><!--l. 654--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> The <span
+ id="dx1-4039"></a> package (if not already loaded).
+ <!--l. 692--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp</span><a
- id="dx1-4037"></a> package is still experimental and so accessibility features
+ id="dx1-4040"></a> package is still experimental and so accessibility features
are liable to change. </div>
- </p><!--l. 657--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 659--><p class="noindent" >If you want to define styles that can interface with the accessibility support
+ </p><!--l. 695--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 697--><p class="noindent" >If you want to define styles that can interface with the accessibility support
provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp</span><a
- id="dx1-4038"></a> use the <span
+ id="dx1-4041"></a> use the <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsaccess</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">xxx</span>⟩ type of commands
instead of <span
@@ -1209,12 +1289,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsentry</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">xxx</span>⟩ (for example, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsaccesstext</span><a
- id="dx1-4039"></a> instead of
+ id="dx1-4042"></a> instead of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentrytext</span><a
- id="dx1-4040"></a>). If <span
+ id="dx1-4043"></a>). If <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp</span><a
- id="dx1-4041"></a> hasn’t been loaded those commands are
+ id="dx1-4044"></a> hasn’t been loaded those commands are
equivalent (for example, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsaccesstext </span>just does <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentrytext</span>) but if it
@@ -1224,39 +1304,34 @@
information. (See <a
href="#sec:accsupp"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">12.2</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">13.2</span> </a><a
href="#sec:accsupp">Accessibility Support<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:accsupp --></a> for further
details.)
- </p><!--l. 669--><p class="noindent" >Note that the <a
+ </p><!--l. 707--><p class="noindent" >Note that the <a
href="#styopt.accsupp"><span
class="cmss-10">accsupp</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4042"></a> option can only be used as a package option (and can’t
+ id="dx1-4045"></a> option can only be used as a package option (and can’t
be set with <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossariesextrasetup</span><a
- id="dx1-4043"></a>) since the <span
+ id="dx1-4046"></a>) since the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp</span><a
- id="dx1-4044"></a> package must
+ id="dx1-4047"></a> package must
be loaded before <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>if it’s required.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 674--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.stylemods"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">stylemods</span><a
- id="dx1-4045"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
-
-
-
- <!--l. 674--><p class="noindent" >This is a ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-4048"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is a ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">key</span>⟩=⟨<span
class="cmti-10">value</span>⟩ option used to load the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-stylemods</span><a
- id="dx1-4046"></a> package.
- The value may be a comma-separated list of options to pass to that package.
- (Remember to group ⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">value</span>⟩ if it contains any commas.) The value may be
- omitted if no options need to be passed. See <a
+ id="dx1-4049"></a>
+ package. The value may be a comma-separated list of options to pass to that
+ package. (Remember to group ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">value</span>⟩ if it contains any commas.) The value may
+ be omitted if no options need to be passed. See <a
href="#sec:glosstylemods"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
class="cmbx-10">2.11</span> </a><a
@@ -1266,52 +1341,53 @@
href="#styopt.stylemods"><span
class="cmss-10">stylemods</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=default</span><a
- id="dx1-4047"></a> (equivalent to omitting the value) and <a
+ id="dx1-4050"></a> (equivalent to omitting the value) and <a
href="#styopt.stylemods"><span
class="cmss-10">stylemods</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=all</span><a
- id="dx1-4048"></a>, which
+ id="dx1-4051"></a>, which
loads all the predefined styles.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 685--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="styopt.undefaction"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">undefaction</span><a
- id="dx1-4049"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 685--><p class="noindent" >This is a ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-4052"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is a ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">key</span>⟩=⟨<span
class="cmti-10">value</span>⟩ option, which has two allowed values: <span
-class="cmss-10">warn </span>and <span
-class="cmss-10">error</span>. This
- indicates what to do if an undefined glossary entry is referenced. The default
- behaviour is <a
+class="cmss-10">warn </span>and
+
+
+
+ <span
+class="cmss-10">error</span>. This indicates what to do if an undefined glossary entry is referenced. The
+ default behaviour is <a
href="#styopt.undefaction"><span
class="cmss-10">undefaction</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=error</span><a
- id="dx1-4050"></a>, which produces an error message (the default
- for <span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>). You can switch this to a warning message (and ?? appearing in
- the text) with <a
+ id="dx1-4053"></a>, which produces an error message (the
+ default for <span
+class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>). You can switch this to a warning message (and ??
+ appearing in the text) with <a
href="#styopt.undefaction"><span
class="cmss-10">undefaction</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=warn</span><a
- id="dx1-4051"></a>.
- </p><!--l. 694--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> Undefined entries can’t be picked up by any commands that iterate
+ id="dx1-4054"></a>.
+ <!--l. 732--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> Undefined entries can’t be picked up by any commands that iterate
over a glossary list. This includes <span
class="cmtt-10">\forglsentries</span><a
- id="dx1-4052"></a> and <span
+ id="dx1-4055"></a> and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsaddall</span><a
- id="dx1-4053"></a>.
+ id="dx1-4056"></a>.
</div>
- </p><!--l. 698--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 700--><p class="noindent" >Note that <span
+ </p><!--l. 736--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 738--><p class="noindent" >Note that <span
class="cmtt-10">\ifglsused</span><a
- id="dx1-4054"></a> will display ?? in the document text with <a
+ id="dx1-4057"></a> will display ?? in the document text with <a
href="#styopt.undefaction"><span
class="cmss-10">undefaction</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=warn</span><a
- id="dx1-4055"></a>
+ id="dx1-4058"></a>
if the entry hasn’t been defined, as the underlying boolean variable
doesn’t exist and so is neither true nor false. (There will also be a
warning in the transcript.) See <a
@@ -1321,13 +1397,11 @@
href="#sec:glsunset">First Use Flag<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:glsunset --></a> for further
details.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 706--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.indexcrossrefs"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">indexcrossrefs</span><a
- id="dx1-4056"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 706--><p class="noindent" >This is a boolean option. If <span
+ id="dx1-4059"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is a boolean option. If <span
class="cmss-10">true</span>, this will automatically index any
cross-referenced entries that haven’t been marked as used at the end of the
document. Note that this necessarily adds to the overall document build time,
@@ -1335,26 +1409,26 @@
class="cmss-10">false</span>,
but it will be automatically switched on if you use the <span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
- id="dx1-4057"></a> or <span
+ id="dx1-4060"></a> or <span
class="cmss-10">seealso</span><a
- id="dx1-4058"></a> keys
+ id="dx1-4061"></a> keys
in any entries (unless <a
href="#styopt.autoseeindex"><span
class="cmss-10">autoseeindex</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=false</span><a
- id="dx1-4059"></a>). To force it off, even if you
+ id="dx1-4062"></a>). To force it off, even if you
use the <span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
- id="dx1-4060"></a> or <span
+ id="dx1-4063"></a> or <span
class="cmss-10">seealso</span><a
- id="dx1-4061"></a> key, you need to explicitly set <a
+ id="dx1-4064"></a> key, you need to explicitly set <a
href="#styopt.indexcrossrefs"><span
class="cmss-10">indexcrossrefs</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4062"></a> to
+ id="dx1-4065"></a> to
<span
class="cmss-10">false</span>.
- </p><!--l. 718--><p class="noindent" >Note that <a
- id="dx1-4063"></a><a
+ <!--l. 756--><p class="noindent" >Note that <a
+ id="dx1-4066"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> can automatically find dependent entries when it
parses the <span
@@ -1361,44 +1435,39 @@
class="cmtt-10">.bib </span>source file. The <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4064"></a> option automatically implements
+ id="dx1-4067"></a> option automatically implements
<a
href="#styopt.indexcrossrefs"><span
class="cmss-10">indexcrossrefs</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=false</span><a
- id="dx1-4065"></a>.
+ id="dx1-4068"></a>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
-
-
-
- <!--l. 723--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.autoseeindex"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">autoseeindex</span><a
- id="dx1-4066"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 723--><p class="noindent" > (New to v1.16.) This is a boolean option. If true (default), this makes the <span
+ id="dx1-4069"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description"> (New to v1.16.) This is a boolean option. If true (default), this makes
+ the <span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
- id="dx1-4067"></a>
- and <span
+ id="dx1-4070"></a> and <span
class="cmss-10">seealso</span><a
- id="dx1-4068"></a> keys automatically index the cross-reference when an entry is
- defined. If false, the value of those keys will still be stored in their
+ id="dx1-4071"></a> keys automatically index the cross-reference when an entry
+ is defined. If false, the value of those keys will still be stored in their
corresponding fields (and can be accessed using commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrusesee</span>
and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtruseseealso</span>) but cross-reference won’t be automatically
indexed.
- </p><!--l. 732--><p class="noindent" >Note that the <a
+ <!--l. 770--><p class="noindent" >Note that the <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=only</span><a
- id="dx1-4069"></a> option automatically implements <a
+ id="dx1-4072"></a> option automatically implements <a
href="#styopt.autoseeindex"><span
class="cmss-10">autoseeindex</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=false</span><a
- id="dx1-4070"></a>.
- </p><!--l. 735--><p class="noindent" >For example, if an entry is defined as
+ id="dx1-4073"></a>.
+ </p><!--l. 773--><p class="noindent" >For example, if an entry is defined as
@@ -1406,7 +1475,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-22">
\newglossaryentry{foo}{name={foo},description={},see={bar,baz}}
</pre>
- <!--l. 738--><p class="nopar" > then with <span
+ <!--l. 776--><p class="nopar" > then with <span
class="cmtt-10">autoseeindex=true</span>, this is equivalent to
@@ -1418,7 +1487,7 @@
\glossariesextrasetup{indexcrossrefs=true}
\GlsXtrSetField{foo}{see}{bar,baz}
</pre>
- <!--l. 745--><p class="nopar" > but with <span
+ <!--l. 783--><p class="nopar" > but with <span
class="cmtt-10">autoseeindex=false</span>, this is equivalent to
@@ -1428,19 +1497,19 @@
\newglossaryentry{foo}{name={foo},description={}}
\GlsXtrSetField{foo}{see}{bar,baz}
</pre>
- <!--l. 750--><p class="nopar" > Note that <a
+ <!--l. 788--><p class="nopar" > Note that <a
href="#styopt.indexcrossrefs"><span
class="cmss-10">indexcrossrefs</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4071"></a> isn’t automatically implemented by the presence of the
+ id="dx1-4074"></a> isn’t automatically implemented by the presence of the
<span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
- id="dx1-4072"></a> key when <a
+ id="dx1-4075"></a> key when <a
href="#styopt.autoseeindex"><span
class="cmss-10">autoseeindex</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4073"></a> is false.
- </p><!--l. 755--><p class="noindent" >It’s therefore possible to remove the cross-references from the location lists and
+ id="dx1-4076"></a> is false.
+ </p><!--l. 793--><p class="noindent" >It’s therefore possible to remove the cross-references from the location lists and
set their position within the glossary style.
- </p><!--l. 758--><p class="noindent" >Another method of preventing the automatic indexing is to define the entries
+ </p><!--l. 796--><p class="noindent" >Another method of preventing the automatic indexing is to define the entries
before the external indexing files have been opened with <span
class="cmtt-10">\makeglossaries</span>.
Since the appropriate file isn’t open, the information can’t be written to it.
@@ -1449,50 +1518,45 @@
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>) to
prevent an error occurring.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 765--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.record"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">record</span><a
- id="dx1-4074"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 765--><p class="noindent" >(New to v1.08.) This is a ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-4077"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to v1.08.) This is a ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">key</span>⟩=⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">value</span>⟩ option provided for the benefit of <a
- id="dx1-4075"></a><a
+class="cmti-10">value</span>⟩ option provided for the benefit of
+ <a
+ id="dx1-4078"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
-class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>
- (see <a
+class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> (see <a
href="#sec:bib2gls"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">9</span> </a><a
-href="#sec:bib2gls"><span
-class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>: Managing Reference Databases<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:bib2gls --></a>). If you want to
- use <a
- id="dx1-4076"></a><span
+class="cmbx-10">10</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:bib2gls">bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:bib2gls --></a>). If you
+ want to use <a
+ id="dx1-4079"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>, the recommended setting is <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=nameref</span><a
- id="dx1-4077"></a> if you have hyperlinks
- and <a
+ id="dx1-4080"></a> if you have
+ hyperlinks and <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=only</span><a
- id="dx1-4078"></a> if you don’t have hyperlinks.
- </p><!--l. 771--><p class="noindent" >The option may only be set in the preamble and can’t be used after
+ id="dx1-4081"></a> if you don’t have hyperlinks.
+ <!--l. 809--><p class="noindent" >The option may only be set in the preamble and can’t be used after
<span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrLoadResources</span>. If the value is missing <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=only</span><a
- id="dx1-4079"></a> is assumed.
+ id="dx1-4082"></a> is assumed.
Permitted values:
</p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 775--><p class="noindent" >
<span
-class="cmssbx-10">off</span> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 775--><p class="noindent" >This is the default setting. The indexing is performed as normal using
+class="cmssbx-10">off</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is the default setting. The indexing is performed as normal using
either <span
class="cmtt-10">\makeglossaries </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\makenoidxglossaries</span>. This setting
@@ -1500,21 +1564,18 @@
href="#styopt.undefaction"><span
class="cmss-10">undefaction</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=error</span><a
- id="dx1-4080"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 779--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-4083"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<span
-class="cmssbx-10">only</span> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 779--><p class="noindent" >The indexing (recording) is performed by <a
- id="dx1-4081"></a><span
+class="cmssbx-10">only</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">The indexing (recording) is performed by
+ <a
+ id="dx1-4084"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>(see <a
href="#sec:bib2gls"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">9</span>
- </a><a
-href="#sec:bib2gls"><span
-class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>: Managing Reference Databases<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:bib2gls --></a>).
+class="cmbx-10">10</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:bib2gls">bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:bib2gls --></a>).
Neither <span
class="cmtt-10">\makeglossaries </span>nor <span
class="cmtt-10">\makenoidxglossaries </span>is permitted.
@@ -1522,21 +1583,18 @@
href="#styopt.undefaction"><span
class="cmss-10">undefaction</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=warn</span><a
- id="dx1-4082"></a> and automatically loads
+ id="dx1-4085"></a> and automatically loads
the supplementary <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-4083"></a> package. (There should be
+ id="dx1-4086"></a> package. (There should be
no need to explicitly load <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-4084"></a>.)
-
-
-
- </p><!--l. 786--><p class="noindent" >The glossaries should be displayed using <span
+ id="dx1-4087"></a>.)
+ <!--l. 824--><p class="noindent" >The glossaries should be displayed using <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossary </span>(or
<span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossaries</span>).
- </p><!--l. 789--><p class="noindent" >The document build process is (assuming the file is called <span
+ </p><!--l. 827--><p class="noindent" >The document build process is (assuming the file is called <span
class="cmtt-10">myDoc.tex</span>):
@@ -1547,11 +1605,11 @@
bib2gls myDoc
pdflatex myDoc
</pre>
- <!--l. 795--><p class="nopar" > If you want letter groups you will need the <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+ <!--l. 833--><p class="nopar" > If you want letter groups you will need the <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">--group</span></span></span> or <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">-g</span></span></span> switch when
invoking <a
- id="dx1-4085"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4088"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>:
@@ -1563,55 +1621,53 @@
bib2gls -g myDoc
pdflatex myDoc
</pre>
- <!--l. 802--><p class="nopar" >
- </p><!--l. 804--><p class="noindent" >Note that <a
+ <!--l. 840--><p class="nopar" >
+ </p><!--l. 842--><p class="noindent" >Note that <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=only</span><a
- id="dx1-4086"></a> will prevent the <span
+ id="dx1-4089"></a> will prevent the <span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
- id="dx1-4087"></a> from automatically
+ id="dx1-4090"></a> from automatically
implementing <span
class="cmtt-10">\glssee</span>. (<a
- id="dx1-4088"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4091"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> deals with the <span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
- id="dx1-4089"></a> field.) You
+ id="dx1-4092"></a> field.) You
may explicitly use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glssee </span>in the document, but <a
- id="dx1-4090"></a><span
+ id="dx1-4093"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>will
ignore the cross-reference if the <span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
- id="dx1-4091"></a> field was already set for that
+ id="dx1-4094"></a> field was already set for that
entry.
- </p><!--l. 810--><p class="noindent" >The <a
+ </p><!--l. 848--><p class="noindent" >The <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=only</span><a
- id="dx1-4092"></a> option will automatically set the <span
+ id="dx1-4095"></a> option will automatically set the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package’s
<a
href="#styopt.sort"><span
class="cmss-10">sort</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=none</span><a
- id="dx1-4093"></a> option if available. (That option value was only introduced to
+ id="dx1-4096"></a> option if available. (That option value was only introduced to
<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>v4.30.)
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 815--><p class="noindent" >
<span
-class="cmssbx-10">nameref</span> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 815--><p class="noindent" >(New to v1.37 and requires <a
- id="dx1-4094"></a><span
+class="cmssbx-10">nameref</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to v1.37 and requires <a
+ id="dx1-4097"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>v1.8+.) This option is like
<a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=only</span><a
- id="dx1-4095"></a> but additionally records the current label information given by
+ id="dx1-4098"></a> but additionally records the current label information given by
<span
class="cmtt-10">\@currentlabel </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\@currentHref</span>, and provides a more reliable way of
@@ -1620,7 +1676,7 @@
class="cmti-10">counter</span>⟩ for the given location. This option requires
<span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
- id="dx1-4096"></a> otherwise it will fall back on the usual location records.
+ id="dx1-4099"></a> otherwise it will fall back on the usual location records.
Remember that <span
class="cmtt-10">\@currentHref </span>is always globally updated whenever
<span
@@ -1630,117 +1686,113 @@
<a
href="#styopt.indexcounter"><span
class="cmss-10">indexcounter</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4097"></a> option increments the associated counter every time an entry
+ id="dx1-4100"></a> option increments the associated counter every time an entry
is indexed, which affects this option. See <a
href="#sec:recordnameref"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">9.3.2</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">10.3.2</span> </a><a
href="#sec:recordnameref">Nameref
Record<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:recordnameref --></a> for further details.
- </p><!--l. 828--><p class="noindent" >This option is best used with <a
+ <!--l. 866--><p class="noindent" >This option is best used with <a
href="#styopt.counter"><span
class="cmss-10">counter</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=chapter</span><a
- id="dx1-4098"></a> or <a
+ id="dx1-4101"></a> or <a
href="#styopt.counter"><span
class="cmss-10">counter</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=section</span><a
- id="dx1-4099"></a> if you
+ id="dx1-4102"></a> if you
want the title included in the location list. If the indexing counter is the
default <span
class="cmss-10">page</span><a
- id="dx1-4100"></a>, only the location number is shown. Similarly for
+ id="dx1-4103"></a>, only the location number is shown. Similarly for
<a
href="#styopt.counter"><span
class="cmss-10">counter</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=equation</span><a
- id="dx1-4101"></a> (or <a
+ id="dx1-4104"></a> (or <a
href="#styopt.equations"><span
class="cmss-10">equations</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=true</span><a
- id="dx1-4102"></a>).
+ id="dx1-4105"></a>).
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 834--><p class="noindent" >
<span
-class="cmssbx-10">alsoindex</span> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 834--><p class="noindent" >Deprecated synonym of <span
+class="cmssbx-10">alsoindex</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Deprecated synonym of <span
class="cmss-10">hybrid</span>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 836--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<span
-class="cmssbx-10">hybrid</span> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 836--><p class="noindent" >This is a hybrid setting that uses <a
- id="dx1-4103"></a><span
-class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>to fetch entry information from
-
-
-
- <span
+class="cmssbx-10">hybrid</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is a hybrid setting that uses <a
+ id="dx1-4106"></a><span
+class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>to fetch entry information
+ from <span
class="cmtt-10">.bib </span>files, but uses <a
- id="dx1-4104"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4107"></a><a
href="#glo:makeindex"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span></a> or <a
- id="dx1-4105"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4108"></a><a
href="#glo:xindy"><span
-class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a> to create the glossary files (which
- are input with <span
+class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a> to create the glossary files
+ (which are input with <span
class="cmtt-10">\printglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-4106"></a>). Note that this requires a slower and
- more complicated build process (see below).
- </p><!--l. 843--><p class="noindent" >This hybrid approach is provided for the rare instances where an existing
+ id="dx1-4109"></a>). Note that this requires a slower
+ and more complicated build process (see below).
+ <!--l. 881--><p class="noindent" >This hybrid approach is provided for the rare instances where an existing
<a
- id="dx1-4107"></a><a
-href="#glo:xindy"><span
-class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a> rule or module is too complicated to convert to a <a
- id="dx1-4108"></a><a
-href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
-class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> rule but
+ id="dx1-4110"></a><span
+class="cmtt-10">xindy </span>rule or module is too complicated to convert to a <a
+ id="dx1-4111"></a><span
+class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>rule but
the entries need to be fetched from a <span
class="cmtt-10">bib</span><a
- id="dx1-4109"></a> file. There’s no benefit in using
+ id="dx1-4112"></a> file. There’s no benefit in using
this option with <a
- id="dx1-4110"></a><a
-href="#glo:makeindex"><span
-class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span></a>.
- </p><!--l. 848--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> Since it’s redundant to make <a
- id="dx1-4111"></a><span
+ id="dx1-4113"></a><span
+class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span>.
+
+
+
+ </p><!--l. 886--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> Since it’s redundant to make <a
+ id="dx1-4114"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>also sort, use <span
class="cmtt-10">sort=none </span>in
<span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrLoadResources </span>for a faster build. </div>
- </p><!--l. 851--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 853--><p class="noindent" >This option must be used with <span
+ </p><!--l. 889--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 891--><p class="noindent" >This option must be used with <span
class="cmtt-10">\makeglossaries</span><a
- id="dx1-4112"></a> but not with its optional
+ id="dx1-4115"></a> but not with its optional
argument. This option should not be used with <span
class="cmtt-10">\makenoidxglossaries</span>.
You may need to change the transcript file used by <a
- id="dx1-4113"></a><span
-class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>to avoid a
+ id="dx1-4116"></a><a
+href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
+class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> to avoid a
clash with the transcript file used by <a
- id="dx1-4114"></a><span
-class="cmtt-10">makeindex </span>or <a
- id="dx1-4115"></a><span
-class="cmtt-10">xindy</span>. (This can be
+ id="dx1-4117"></a><a
+href="#glo:makeindex"><span
+class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span></a> or <a
+ id="dx1-4118"></a><a
+href="#glo:xindy"><span
+class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a>. (This can be
done with <a
- id="dx1-4116"></a><span
+ id="dx1-4119"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>’s <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">--log-file</span></span></span> or <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">-t</span></span></span> option.)
- </p><!--l. 860--><p class="noindent" >Each glossary should be displayed using <span
+ </p><!--l. 898--><p class="noindent" >Each glossary should be displayed using <span
class="cmtt-10">\printglossary </span>(or
<span
class="cmtt-10">\printglossaries </span>for all of them). This option is expected to be used
with <a
- id="dx1-4117"></a><span
+ id="dx1-4120"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>’s <span
class="cmtt-10">sort=none </span>setting and so <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-4118"></a> is not
+ id="dx1-4121"></a> is not
automatically loaded.
- </p><!--l. 865--><p class="noindent" >The document build process is (assuming the file is called <span
+ </p><!--l. 903--><p class="noindent" >The document build process is (assuming the file is called <span
class="cmtt-10">myDoc.tex</span>):
@@ -1753,37 +1805,37 @@
makeglossaries myDoc
pdflatex myDoc
</pre>
- <!--l. 873--><p class="nopar" > Note that, in this case, it’s redundant to call <a
- id="dx1-4119"></a><a
+ <!--l. 911--><p class="nopar" > Note that, in this case, it’s redundant to call <a
+ id="dx1-4122"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> with the <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">--group</span></span></span>
or <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">-g</span></span></span> switch as <a
- id="dx1-4120"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4123"></a><a
href="#glo:makeindex"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span></a>/<a
- id="dx1-4121"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4124"></a><a
href="#glo:xindy"><span
class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a> will insert the group heading
information into the corresponding glossary file. (If you want
<a
- id="dx1-4122"></a><span
+ id="dx1-4125"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>to form the letter groups then this hybrid method is
inappropriate.)</p></dd></dl>
- <!--l. 881--><p class="noindent" >With the recording on (<a
+ <!--l. 919--><p class="noindent" >With the recording on (<a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=only</span><a
- id="dx1-4123"></a>, <a
+ id="dx1-4126"></a>, <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=nameref</span><a
- id="dx1-4124"></a> or <a
+ id="dx1-4127"></a> or <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=hybrid</span><a
- id="dx1-4125"></a>), any of
+ id="dx1-4128"></a>), any of
the commands that would typically index the entry (such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstext </span>or
@@ -1791,7 +1843,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsadd</span>) will add a <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtr at record </span>entry to the <span
class="cmtt-10">.aux </span>file. <a
- id="dx1-4126"></a><span
+ id="dx1-4129"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>can then
read these lines to find out which entries have been used. (Remember that
commands like <span
@@ -1798,63 +1850,58 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryname </span>don’t index, so any use of these commands
won’t add a corresponding <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtr at record </span>entry to the <span
-class="cmtt-10">.aux </span>file.) See
- <a
+class="cmtt-10">.aux </span>file.)
+ See <a
href="#sec:bib2gls"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">9</span> </a><a
-href="#sec:bib2gls"><span
-class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>: Managing Reference Databases<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:bib2gls --></a> for further
+class="cmbx-10">10</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:bib2gls">bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:bib2gls --></a> for further
details.
- </p><!--l. 891--><p class="noindent" >The hybrid method additionally performs the standard indexing action that’s
+ </p><!--l. 929--><p class="noindent" >The hybrid method additionally performs the standard indexing action that’s
required for <a
- id="dx1-4127"></a><span
+ id="dx1-4130"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex </span>or <a
- id="dx1-4128"></a><span
+ id="dx1-4131"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">xindy </span>to work.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 894--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.equations"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">equations</span><a
- id="dx1-4129"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 894--><p class="noindent" >(New to v1.37.) This option will cause the default location counter to
+ id="dx1-4132"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to v1.37.) This option will cause the default location counter to
automatically switch to <span
class="cmss-10">equation</span><a
- id="dx1-4130"></a> when inside a numbered equation
+ id="dx1-4133"></a> when inside a numbered equation
environment, such as <span
class="cmss-10">equation</span><a
- id="dx1-4131"></a><a
- id="dx1-4132"></a> or <span
+ id="dx1-4134"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4135"></a> or <span
class="cmss-10">align</span><a
- id="dx1-4133"></a><a
- id="dx1-4134"></a>. The counter can be explicitly overridden
+ id="dx1-4136"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4137"></a>. The counter can be explicitly overridden
with <span
class="cmss-10">counter</span><a
- id="dx1-4135"></a> in the optional arguments of commands like <span
+ id="dx1-4138"></a> in the optional arguments of commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslink </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>as
usual.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 901--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="styopt.floats"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">floats</span><a
- id="dx1-4136"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 901--><p class="noindent" >(New to v1.37.) This option will cause the default location counter to
+ id="dx1-4139"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to v1.37.) This option will cause the default location counter to
automatically switch to the corresponding counter when inside a floating
environment, such as <span
class="cmss-10">figure</span><a
- id="dx1-4137"></a><a
- id="dx1-4138"></a> or <span
+ id="dx1-4140"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4141"></a> or <span
class="cmss-10">table</span><a
- id="dx1-4139"></a><a
- id="dx1-4140"></a>. The counter can be explicitly overridden
+ id="dx1-4142"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4143"></a>. The counter can be explicitly overridden
with <span
class="cmss-10">counter</span><a
- id="dx1-4141"></a> in the optional arguments of commands like <span
+ id="dx1-4144"></a> in the optional arguments of commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslink </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>as
usual. Remember that within floats it’s the <span
@@ -1861,9 +1908,6 @@
class="cmtt-10">\caption </span>command that actually
uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\refstepcounter</span>, so indexing before the caption will result in the wrong
-
-
-
reference. The commands for use in captions and sections, such as
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmttext </span>and <span
@@ -1879,7 +1923,6 @@
-</p>
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-28">
\begin{figure}[htbp]
  \centering
@@ -1888,29 +1931,27 @@
  \glsadd{foobar}
\end{figure}
</pre>
- <!--l. 920--><p class="nopar" >
+ <!--l. 958--><p class="nopar" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 922--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.indexcounter"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">indexcounter</span><a
- id="dx1-4142"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 922--><p class="noindent" >(New to v1.29.) This option (which doesn’t take a value) is primarily
+ id="dx1-4145"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to v1.29.) This option (which doesn’t take a value) is primarily
intended for use with <a
- id="dx1-4143"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4146"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> (v1.4+) and <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
- id="dx1-4144"></a>. It can be used
+ id="dx1-4147"></a>. It can be used
with <a
- id="dx1-4145"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4148"></a><a
href="#glo:makeindex"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span></a> or <a
- id="dx1-4146"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4149"></a><a
href="#glo:xindy"><span
class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a> but it will interfere with the <a
- id="dx1-4147"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4150"></a><a
href="#glo:numberlist">number list</a>
collation, so you won’t have ranges and you’ll have duplicate page numbers
present (but each page number will link to the relevant part of the page
@@ -1919,26 +1960,26 @@
href="#styopt.counter"><span
class="cmss-10">counter</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=wrglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-4148"></a>.
- </p><!--l. 931--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> This option works by incrementing <span
+ id="dx1-4151"></a>.
+ <!--l. 969--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> This option works by incrementing <span
class="cmss-10">wrglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-4149"></a> and adding <span
+ id="dx1-4152"></a> and adding <span
class="cmtt-10">\label</span><a
- id="dx1-4150"></a>. This can
+ id="dx1-4153"></a>. This can
cause a problem if the indexing occurs in an <span
class="cmss-10">equation</span><a
- id="dx1-4151"></a><a
- id="dx1-4152"></a> environment as <span
+ id="dx1-4154"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4155"></a> environment as <span
class="cmss-10">amsmath</span><a
- id="dx1-4153"></a>
+ id="dx1-4156"></a>
forbids multiple occurrences of <span
class="cmtt-10">\label </span>(resulting in the “Multiple <span
class="cmtt-10">\label</span>’s”
error). It’s best to change the counter to <span
class="cmss-10">page</span><a
- id="dx1-4154"></a> or <span
+ id="dx1-4157"></a> or <span
class="cmss-10">equation</span><a
- id="dx1-4155"></a> when in maths mode
+ id="dx1-4158"></a> when in maths mode
with this option. For example:
@@ -1950,12 +1991,12 @@
\renewcommand{\glsaddpresetkeys}{%
 \ifmmode \setkeys{glossadd}{counter=equation}\fi}
</pre>
- <!--l. 944--><p class="nopar" > </div>
- </p><!--l. 945--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 947--><p class="noindent" >By default (with <span
+ <!--l. 982--><p class="nopar" > </div>
+ </p><!--l. 983--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 985--><p class="noindent" >By default (with <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
- id="dx1-4156"></a>), the page numbers in <a
- id="dx1-4157"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4159"></a>), the page numbers in <a
+ id="dx1-4160"></a><a
href="#glo:numberlist">number lists</a> link back to the
top of the relevant page (provided the format uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glshypernumber</span>). The
@@ -1962,10 +2003,10 @@
<a
href="#styopt.indexcounter"><span
class="cmss-10">indexcounter</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4158"></a> option is designed to link back to the place within the page where
+ id="dx1-4161"></a> option is designed to link back to the place within the page where
the indexing occurred. It does this by creating a new counter (called <span
class="cmss-10">wrglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-4159"></a>)
+ id="dx1-4162"></a>)
that’s incremented with <span
class="cmtt-10">\refstepcounter </span>every time an entry is indexed (but
not via cross-referencing commands, such as <span
@@ -1976,57 +2017,57 @@
class="cmtt-10">\pageref</span>. The location, as seen by the indexing application, is
the value of the <span
class="cmss-10">wrglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-4160"></a> counter but this value is substituted with the page
+ id="dx1-4163"></a> counter but this value is substituted with the page
reference when <a
- id="dx1-4161"></a>number list is typeset. Since the counter is used by all
+ id="dx1-4164"></a>number list is typeset. Since the counter is used by all
entries and is incremented every time any indexing occurs, neither
<a
- id="dx1-4162"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4165"></a><a
href="#glo:makeindex"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span></a> nor <a
- id="dx1-4163"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4166"></a><a
href="#glo:xindy"><span
class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a> can correctly collate the lists. For example, if the first
term to be referenced is indexed three times on page 5 without any
intervening terms then the actual locations obtained from <span
class="cmss-10">wrglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-4164"></a>
+ id="dx1-4167"></a>
will be 1, 2 and 3, which <a
- id="dx1-4165"></a><span
+ id="dx1-4168"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">xindy </span>and <a
- id="dx1-4166"></a><span
+ id="dx1-4169"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex </span>will try to form into
the range 1–3, but they should actually all simply appear as page 5,
whereas it can actually end up with 5–5. Conversely, a range may not be
formed where it would naturally occur if just the <span
class="cmss-10">page</span><a
- id="dx1-4167"></a> counter was
+ id="dx1-4170"></a> counter was
used.
- </p><!--l. 971--><p class="noindent" >Since <a
- id="dx1-4168"></a><a
+ </p><!--l. 1009--><p class="noindent" >Since <a
+ id="dx1-4171"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> is designed specifically to work with <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>,
<a
- id="dx1-4169"></a><span
+ id="dx1-4172"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>(v1.4+) will check for <span
class="cmss-10">wrglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-4170"></a> locations. If the default
+ id="dx1-4173"></a> locations. If the default
<span
class="cmtt-10">--merge-wrglossary-records </span>is on, then any records for the same page
for a given entry will be merged. In the above example with three
references on page 5, only a single record for page 5 for that entry will be
added to the <a
- id="dx1-4171"></a>number list and it will link back to the first instance on
+ id="dx1-4174"></a>number list and it will link back to the first instance on
that page. Whereas if you use the <span
class="cmtt-10">--no-merge-wrglossary-records</span>
switch, the <a
- id="dx1-4172"></a>number list will contain three instance of page 5, with
+ id="dx1-4175"></a>number list will contain three instance of page 5, with
each linking to the corresponding place on that page. In both cases,
consecutive pages can form ranges, but it may look strange in the second
case.
- </p><!--l. 984--><p class="noindent" >See the <a
- id="dx1-4173"></a><span
+ </p><!--l. 1022--><p class="noindent" >See the <a
+ id="dx1-4176"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>documentation for the <span
class="cmtt-10">save-index-counter </span>resource option
for more details.
@@ -2034,170 +2075,182 @@
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 987--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.docdef"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">docdef</span><a
- id="dx1-4174"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 987--><p class="noindent" >This option governs the use of <span
-class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry</span>. It was originally a boolean
- option, but as from version 1.06, it can now take one of the following values (if
- the value is omitted, <span
-class="cmss-10">true </span>is assumed): </p>
+ id="dx1-4177"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This option governs the use of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry</span>. It was originally a
+ boolean option, but as from version 1.06, it can now take one of the following
+ values (if the value is omitted, <span
+class="cmss-10">true </span>is assumed):
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 992--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ <li class="itemize"><a
+href="#styopt.docdef"><span
+class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
+class="cmss-10">=false</span><a
+ id="dx1-4178"></a>: <span
class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry</span><a
- id="dx1-4176"></a> is not permitted in the <span
+ id="dx1-4179"></a> is not permitted in the <span
class="cmss-10">document</span><a
- id="dx1-4177"></a><a
- id="dx1-4178"></a> environment
- (default).
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 995--><p class="noindent" ><span
-class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry </span>behaves as it does in the base <span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package.
- That is, where its use is permitted in the <span
-class="cmss-10">document</span><a
id="dx1-4180"></a><a
- id="dx1-4181"></a> environment, it
- uses the <span
-class="cmtt-10">.glsdefs </span>temporary file to store the entry definitions so
- that on the next LaTeX run the entries are defined at the beginning
- of the <span
+ id="dx1-4181"></a>
+ environment (default).
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
+href="#styopt.docdef"><span
+class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
+class="cmss-10">=true</span><a
+ id="dx1-4182"></a>: <span
+class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry </span>behaves as it does in the base
+ <span
+class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package. That is, where its use is permitted in the <span
class="cmss-10">document</span><a
- id="dx1-4182"></a><a
- id="dx1-4183"></a> environment. This allows the entry information
- to be referenced in the glossary, even if the glossary occurs before
+ id="dx1-4183"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4184"></a>
+ environment, it uses the <span
+class="cmtt-10">.glsdefs </span>temporary file to store the entry
+ definitions so that on the next LaTeX run the entries are defined at
+ the beginning of the <span
+class="cmss-10">document</span><a
+ id="dx1-4185"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4186"></a> environment. This allows the entry
+ information to be referenced in the glossary, even if the glossary
+ occurs before <span
+class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry</span>. (For example, when the glossary
+ is displayed in the front matter.) This method of saving the definitions
+ for the next LaTeX run has drawbacks that are detailed in the
<span
-class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry</span>. (For example, when the glossary is displayed
- in the front matter.) This method of saving the definitions for the
- next LaTeX run has drawbacks that are detailed in the <span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>
- user manual.
- </p><!--l. 1008--><p class="noindent" >Remember that if <span
+class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>user manual.
+ <!--l. 1047--><p class="noindent" >Remember that if <span
class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry </span>wouldn’t be allowed in the
<span
class="cmss-10">document</span><a
- id="dx1-4184"></a><a
- id="dx1-4185"></a> environment with the base <span
+ id="dx1-4187"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4188"></a> environment with the base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package, then it still
won’t be allowed with <a
href="#styopt.docdefs"><span
class="cmss-10">docdefs</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=true</span><a
- id="dx1-4186"></a>. If your glossaries occur at the
+ id="dx1-4189"></a>. If your glossaries occur at the
end of the document, consider using <a
href="#styopt.docdef"><span
class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=restricted</span><a
- id="dx1-4187"></a> instead.
+ id="dx1-4190"></a> instead.
</p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1015--><p class="noindent" >(new to version 1.06) <span
+ <li class="itemize"><a
+href="#styopt.docdef"><span
+class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
+class="cmss-10">=restricted</span><a
+ id="dx1-4191"></a>: (new to version 1.06) <span
class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry</span><a
- id="dx1-4189"></a> is permitted in the
- <span
+ id="dx1-4192"></a> is
+ permitted in the <span
class="cmss-10">document</span><a
- id="dx1-4190"></a><a
- id="dx1-4191"></a> environment without using the <span
-class="cmtt-10">.glsdefs </span>file. This means
- that all entries must be defined before the glossary is displayed, but
- it avoids the complications associated with saving the entry details
- in a temporary file. You will still need to take care about any changes
- made to characters that are required by the ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-4193"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4194"></a> environment without using the <span
+class="cmtt-10">.glsdefs</span>
+ file. This means that all entries must be defined before the glossary
+ is displayed, but it avoids the complications associated with saving
+ the entry details in a temporary file. You will still need to take
+ care about any changes made to characters that are required by
+ the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">key</span>⟩=⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">value</span>⟩ mechanism
- (that is, the comma and equal sign) and any <a
- id="dx1-4192"></a><a
+class="cmti-10">value</span>⟩ mechanism (that is, the comma and equal sign) and
+ any <a
+ id="dx1-4195"></a><a
href="#glo:makeindex"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span></a> or <a
- id="dx1-4193"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4196"></a><a
href="#glo:xindy"><span
-class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a>
- character that occurs in the <span
+class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a> character that occurs in the <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-4194"></a> key or label. If any of those characters
- are made active in the document, then it can cause problems with
- the entry definition. This option will allow <span
-class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry </span>to
- be used in the document with <span
-class="cmtt-10">\makenoidxglossaries</span>, but note that
+ id="dx1-4197"></a> key or
+ label. If any of those characters are made active in the document,
+ then it can cause problems with the entry definition. This option
+ will allow <span
+class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry </span>to be used in the document with
<span
-class="cmtt-10">\longnewglossaryentry </span>remains a preamble-only command.
- </p><!--l. 1031--><p class="noindent" >With this option, if an entry appears in the glossary before it has been
+class="cmtt-10">\makenoidxglossaries</span>, but note that <span
+class="cmtt-10">\longnewglossaryentry</span>
+ remains a preamble-only command.
+ <!--l. 1070--><p class="noindent" >With this option, if an entry appears in the glossary before it has been
defined, an error will occur (or a warning if the <a
href="#styopt.undefaction"><span
class="cmss-10">undefaction</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=warn</span><a
- id="dx1-4195"></a>
+ id="dx1-4198"></a>
option is used.) If you edit your document and either remove an entry
-
-
-
or change its label, you may need to delete the document’s temporary
files (such as the <span
class="cmtt-10">.aux </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">.gls </span>files).
</p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1038--><p class="noindent" >(new to version 1.34) This option behaves like <a
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#styopt.docdef"><span
class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
+class="cmss-10">=atom</span><a
+ id="dx1-4199"></a>: (new to version 1.34) This option behaves like
+
+
+
+ <a
+href="#styopt.docdef"><span
+class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=restricted</span><a
- id="dx1-4197"></a> but
- creates the <span
-class="cmtt-10">.glsdefs </span>file for <a
-href="https://atom.io/packages/autocomplete-glossaries" >atom’s autocomplete support</a>. This file
- isn’t input by <span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>and so associated problems with the
- use of this file are avoided, but it allows the autocomplete support
- to find the labels in the file. As with <a
+ id="dx1-4200"></a> but creates the <span
+class="cmtt-10">.glsdefs </span>file for <a
+href="https://atom.io/packages/autocomplete-glossaries" >atom’s
+ autocomplete support</a>. This file isn’t input by <span
+class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>and
+ so associated problems with the use of this file are avoided, but it
+ allows the autocomplete support to find the labels in the file. As
+ with <a
href="#styopt.docdef"><span
class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=restricted</span><a
- id="dx1-4198"></a>, entries may
- be defined in the preamble or anywhere in the document, but they
- may only be referenced after they have been defined. Entries must
- be defined before the associated glossary is displayed.
- </p><!--l. 1050--><p class="noindent" >If you need a list of all entry labels for the use of an editor or helper
+ id="dx1-4201"></a>, entries may be defined in the preamble or
+ anywhere in the document, but they may only be referenced after
+ they have been defined. Entries must be defined before the associated
+ glossary is displayed.
+ <!--l. 1089--><p class="noindent" >If you need a list of all entry labels for the use of an editor or helper
script you may also want to consider the package options <a
href="#styopt.writeglslabels"><span
class="cmss-10">writeglslabels</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4199"></a>
+ id="dx1-4202"></a>
and <a
href="#styopt.writeglslabelnames"><span
class="cmss-10">writeglslabelnames</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4200"></a> provided by the base <span
+ id="dx1-4203"></a> provided by the base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span><a
- id="dx1-4201"></a> package. Note
+ id="dx1-4204"></a> package. Note
that with these options and <a
href="#styopt.docdef"><span
class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=atom</span><a
- id="dx1-4202"></a>, only the entry labels visible
+ id="dx1-4205"></a>, only the entry labels visible
to LaTeX can be saved. So if you are using <a
- id="dx1-4203"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4206"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> you will only
get the labels of the entries that are selected by <a
- id="dx1-4204"></a><span
+ id="dx1-4207"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>.
</p>
</li></ul>
- <!--l. 1060--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ <!--l. 1099--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package allows <span
class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry </span>within the <span
class="cmss-10">document</span><a
- id="dx1-4205"></a><a
- id="dx1-4206"></a>
+ id="dx1-4208"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4209"></a>
environment (when used with <a
- id="dx1-4207"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4210"></a><a
href="#glo:makeindex"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span></a> or <a
- id="dx1-4208"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4211"></a><a
href="#glo:xindy"><span
class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a>) but the user manual warns
against this usage. By default the <span
@@ -2206,13 +2259,13 @@
allowing definitions within the preamble. If you are really determined to define
entries in the <span
class="cmss-10">document</span><a
- id="dx1-4209"></a><a
- id="dx1-4210"></a> environment, despite all the associated drawbacks, you
+ id="dx1-4212"></a><a
+ id="dx1-4213"></a> environment, despite all the associated drawbacks, you
can restore this with <a
href="#styopt.docdef"><span
class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=true</span><a
- id="dx1-4211"></a>. Note that this doesn’t change the
+ id="dx1-4214"></a>. Note that this doesn’t change the
prohibitions that the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package has in certain circumstances (for
example, when using “option 1”). See the <span
@@ -2222,14 +2275,14 @@
href="#styopt.docdef"><span
class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=restricted</span><a
- id="dx1-4212"></a>. Only use <a
+ id="dx1-4215"></a>. Only use <a
href="#styopt.docdef"><span
class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=true</span><a
- id="dx1-4213"></a> if document definitions
+ id="dx1-4216"></a> if document definitions
are necessary and one or more of the glossaries occurs in the front
matter.
- </p><!--l. 1077--><p class="noindent" >This option affects commands that internally use <span
+ </p><!--l. 1116--><p class="noindent" >This option affects commands that internally use <span
class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry</span>, such as
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>, but not the “on-the-fly” commands described in
@@ -2236,49 +2289,46 @@
<a
href="#sec:onthefly"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">11</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">12</span> </a><a
href="#sec:onthefly">On-the-Fly Document Definitions<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:onthefly --></a>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1082--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.nomissingglstext"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">nomissingglstext</span><a
- id="dx1-4214"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1082--><p class="noindent" >This is a boolean option. If true, this will suppress the warning written to the
- transcript and the warning text that will appear in the document if the
- external glossary files haven’t been generated due to an incomplete document
- build. However, it’s probably simpler just to fix whatever has caused the failure
- to build the external file or files.
-
-
-
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1090--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-4217"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is a boolean option. If true, this will suppress the
+ warning written to the transcript and the warning text that will appear
+ in the document if the external glossary files haven’t been generated
+ due to an incomplete document build. However, it’s probably simpler
+ just to fix whatever has caused the failure to build the external file or
+ files.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="styopt.abbreviations"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">abbreviations</span><a
- id="dx1-4215"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1090--><p class="noindent" >This option has no value and can’t be cancelled. If used, it will automatically
- create a new glossary with the label <span
-class="cmtt-10">abbreviations </span>and redefines
- <span
+ id="dx1-4218"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This option has no value and can’t be cancelled. If used, it will
+ automatically create a new glossary with the label <span
+class="cmtt-10">abbreviations </span>and
+ redefines <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrabbrvtype </span>to this label. (The file extensions are <span
class="cmtt-10">glg-abr</span><a
- id="dx1-4216"></a>,
+ id="dx1-4219"></a>,
<span
class="cmtt-10">gls-abr</span><a
- id="dx1-4217"></a> and <span
+ id="dx1-4220"></a> and <span
class="cmtt-10">glo-abr</span><a
- id="dx1-4218"></a>.) In addition, this option defines a shortcut
+ id="dx1-4221"></a>.) In addition, this option defines a shortcut
+
+
+
command
- </p><!--l. 1097--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-4219"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 1136--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-4222"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\printabbreviations[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 1099--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 1138--><p class="noindent" >
which is equivalent to </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
@@ -2288,62 +2338,62 @@
</div>
</div> If <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-4220"></a> is also loaded then this option will additionally
+ id="dx1-4223"></a> is also loaded then this option will additionally
provide:
- <!--l. 1106--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-4221"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 1145--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-4224"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtabbreviations[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 1108--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 1147--><p class="noindent" >
which uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-4222"></a>.
- </p><!--l. 1111--><p class="noindent" >The title of the new glossary is given by
- </p><!--l. 1112--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-4223"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-4225"></a>.
+ </p><!--l. 1150--><p class="noindent" >The title of the new glossary is given by
+ </p><!--l. 1151--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-4226"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\abbreviationsname </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 1114--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 1153--><p class="noindent" >
If this command is already defined, it’s left unchanged. Otherwise it’s defined to
“Abbreviations” if <span
class="cmss-10">babel</span><a
- id="dx1-4224"></a> hasn’t been loaded or <span
+ id="dx1-4227"></a> hasn’t been loaded or <span
class="cmtt-10">\acronymname </span>if <span
class="cmss-10">babel</span><a
- id="dx1-4225"></a> has
+ id="dx1-4228"></a> has
been loaded. However, if you’re using <span
class="cmss-10">babel</span><a
- id="dx1-4226"></a> it’s likely you will need
+ id="dx1-4229"></a> it’s likely you will need
to change this. (See <a
href="#sec:lang"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">14</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">15</span> </a><a
href="#sec:lang">Multi-Lingual Support<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:lang --></a> for further
details.)
- </p><!--l. 1121--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you don’t use the <a
+ </p><!--l. 1160--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you don’t use the <a
href="#styopt.abbreviations"><span
class="cmss-10">abbreviations</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4227"></a> package option, the <span
+ id="dx1-4230"></a> package option, the <span
class="cmtt-10">\abbreviationsname</span>
command won’t be defined (unless it’s defined by an included language file).
</div>
- </p><!--l. 1125--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 1127--><p class="noindent" >If the <a
+ </p><!--l. 1164--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 1166--><p class="noindent" >If the <a
href="#styopt.abbreviations"><span
class="cmss-10">abbreviations</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4228"></a> option is used and the <a
+ id="dx1-4231"></a> option is used and the <a
href="#styopt.acronym"><span
class="cmss-10">acronym</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4229"></a> option provided by the
+ id="dx1-4232"></a> option provided by the
<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package hasn’t been used, then <span
class="cmtt-10">\acronymtype</span><a
- id="dx1-4230"></a> will be set to
+ id="dx1-4233"></a> will be set to
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrabbrvtype</span><a
- id="dx1-4231"></a> so that acronyms defined with <span
+ id="dx1-4234"></a> so that acronyms defined with <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span><a
- id="dx1-4232"></a> can be added
+ id="dx1-4235"></a> can be added
to the list of abbreviations. If you want acronyms in the <span
class="cmtt-10">main </span>glossary and
other abbreviations in the <span
@@ -2358,26 +2408,24 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-30">
\renewcommand*{\acronymtype}{main}
</pre>
- <!--l. 1137--><p class="nopar" >
- </p><!--l. 1139--><p class="noindent" >Note that there are no analogous options to the <span
+ <!--l. 1176--><p class="nopar" >
+ </p><!--l. 1178--><p class="noindent" >Note that there are no analogous options to the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package’s <a
href="#styopt.acronymlists"><span
class="cmss-10">acronymlists</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4233"></a>
+ id="dx1-4236"></a>
option (or associated commands) as the abbreviation mechanism is handled
differently with <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1144--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.symbols"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">symbols</span><a
- id="dx1-4234"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1144--><p class="noindent" >This is passed to <span
+ id="dx1-4237"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is passed to <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>but will additionally define
- </p><!--l. 1146--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-4235"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 1185--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-4238"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewsymbol[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -2385,7 +2433,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">symbol</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 1148--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 1187--><p class="noindent" >
which is equivalent to </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
@@ -2405,44 +2453,39 @@
</div>
</div> Note that the <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-4236"></a> key is set to the ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-4239"></a> key is set to the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ not the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">symbol</span>⟩ as the symbol will
likely contain commands.
- <!--l. 1157--><p class="noindent" >If <span
+ <!--l. 1196--><p class="noindent" >If <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-4237"></a> is also loaded then this option will additionally
+ id="dx1-4240"></a> is also loaded then this option will additionally
provide:
- </p><!--l. 1159--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-4238"></a> <span
+ </p><!--l. 1198--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-4241"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtsymbols[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 1161--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 1200--><p class="noindent" >
which uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-4239"></a>.
+ id="dx1-4242"></a>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1164--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.numbers"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">numbers</span><a
- id="dx1-4240"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1164--><p class="noindent" >This is passed to <span
+ id="dx1-4243"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is passed to <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>but will additionally define
- </p><!--l. 1166--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-4241"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 1205--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-4244"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewnumber[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">number</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 1168--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 1207--><p class="noindent" >
which is equivalent to </p><div class="alltt">
-
-
-
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry{</span>⟨<span
@@ -2458,100 +2501,93 @@
class="cmtt-10">},type=numbers,category=number,</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmsy-10">}</span>
+
+
+
</div>
</div>
- <!--l. 1175--><p class="noindent" >If <span
+ <!--l. 1214--><p class="noindent" >If <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-4242"></a> is also loaded then this option will additionally
+ id="dx1-4245"></a> is also loaded then this option will additionally
provide:
- </p><!--l. 1177--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-4243"></a> <span
+ </p><!--l. 1216--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-4246"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtnumbers[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 1179--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 1218--><p class="noindent" >
which uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-4244"></a>.
+ id="dx1-4247"></a>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1182--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.acronyms"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">acronyms</span><a
- id="dx1-4245"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-4248"></a> <span
class="cmbx-10">(or </span><a
id="styopt.acronym"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">acronym</span><a
- id="dx1-4246"></a><span
-class="cmbx-10">)</span> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1182--><p class="noindent" >This is passed to <span
+ id="dx1-4249"></a><span
+class="cmbx-10">)</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is passed to <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>but if <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-4247"></a> is also loaded then this
- option will additionally provide:
- </p><!--l. 1186--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-4248"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-4250"></a> is
+ also loaded then this option will additionally provide:
+ <!--l. 1225--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-4251"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtacronyms[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 1188--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 1227--><p class="noindent" >
which uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-4249"></a>.
- </p><!--l. 1191--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> This option defines a new glossary with the label <span
+ id="dx1-4252"></a>.
+ </p><!--l. 1230--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> This option defines a new glossary with the label <span
class="cmtt-10">acronym </span>not <span
class="cmtt-10">acronyms</span>. You
may find it easier to reference it with the command <span
class="cmtt-10">\acronymtype</span><a
- id="dx1-4250"></a>.
+ id="dx1-4253"></a>.
</div>
- </p><!--l. 1195--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 1234--><p class="noindent" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1197--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.index"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">index</span><a
- id="dx1-4251"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1197--><p class="noindent" >This is passed to <span
+ id="dx1-4254"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is passed to <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>but if <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-4252"></a> is also loaded then this
+ id="dx1-4255"></a> is also loaded then this
option will additionally provide:
- </p><!--l. 1201--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-4253"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 1240--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-4256"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtindex[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 1203--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 1242--><p class="noindent" >
which uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-4254"></a>.
+ id="dx1-4257"></a>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1206--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="styopt.shortcuts"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">shortcuts</span><a
- id="dx1-4255"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1206--><p class="noindent" >Unlike the <span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package option of the same name, this option isn’t boolean
- but has multiple values: </p>
-
-
-
+ id="dx1-4258"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Unlike the <span
+class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package option of the same name, this option isn’t
+ boolean but has multiple values:
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1210--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=acronyms</span><a
- id="dx1-4256"></a> (or <a
+ id="dx1-4259"></a> (or <a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=acro</span><a
- id="dx1-4257"></a>): set the shortcuts provided
+ id="dx1-4260"></a>): set the shortcuts provided
by the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package for acronyms (such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\ac</span>). Note that the
@@ -2567,14 +2603,13 @@
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=ac</span><a
- id="dx1-4258"></a>.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1218--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ id="dx1-4261"></a>.
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=ac</span><a
- id="dx1-4259"></a>: set the shortcuts provided by the <span
+ id="dx1-4262"></a>: set the shortcuts provided by the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package for
acronyms (such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\ac</span>) but uses the <span
@@ -2586,17 +2621,19 @@
as <span
class="cmtt-10">\cgls </span>rather than <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1225--><p class="noindent" ><a
+
+
+
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=abbreviations</span><a
- id="dx1-4260"></a> (or <a
+ id="dx1-4263"></a> (or <a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=abbr</span><a
- id="dx1-4261"></a>): set the abbreviation
+ id="dx1-4264"></a>): set the abbreviation
shortcuts provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>. (See <a
href="#sec:abbrshortcuts"><span
@@ -2606,126 +2643,120 @@
href="#sec:abbrshortcuts">Shortcut Commands<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:abbrshortcuts --></a>.) These settings don’t switch on the acronym
shortcuts provided by the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1231--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=other</span><a
- id="dx1-4262"></a>: set the “other” shortcut commands, but not the shortcut
+ id="dx1-4265"></a>: set the “other” shortcut commands, but not the shortcut
commands for abbreviations or the acronym shortcuts provided by
<span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>. The “other” shortcuts are: </p>
+class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>. The “other” shortcuts are:
<ul class="itemize2">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1236--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmtt-10">\newentry</span><a
- id="dx1-4263"></a> equivalent to <span
+ id="dx1-4266"></a> equivalent to <span
class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry</span><a
- id="dx1-4264"></a>
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1237--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ id="dx1-4267"></a>
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmtt-10">\newsym</span><a
- id="dx1-4265"></a> equivalent to <span
+ id="dx1-4268"></a> equivalent to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewsymbol</span><a
- id="dx1-4266"></a> (see the <a
+ id="dx1-4269"></a> (see the <a
href="#styopt.symbols"><span
class="cmss-10">symbols</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4267"></a>
+ id="dx1-4270"></a>
option).
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1239--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmtt-10">\newnum</span><a
- id="dx1-4268"></a> equivalent to <span
+ id="dx1-4271"></a> equivalent to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewnumber</span><a
- id="dx1-4269"></a> (see the <a
+ id="dx1-4272"></a> (see the <a
href="#styopt.numbers"><span
class="cmss-10">numbers</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4270"></a>
- option).</p></li></ul>
+ id="dx1-4273"></a>
+ option).</li></ul>
</li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1243--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=all</span><a
- id="dx1-4271"></a> (or <a
+ id="dx1-4274"></a> (or <a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=true</span><a
- id="dx1-4272"></a>): implements <a
+ id="dx1-4275"></a>): implements <a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=ac</span><a
- id="dx1-4273"></a>,
+ id="dx1-4276"></a>,
<a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=abbreviations</span><a
- id="dx1-4274"></a> and <a
+ id="dx1-4277"></a> and <a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=other</span><a
- id="dx1-4275"></a>.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1247--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ id="dx1-4278"></a>.
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=none</span><a
- id="dx1-4276"></a> (or <a
+ id="dx1-4279"></a> (or <a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=false</span><a
- id="dx1-4277"></a>): don’t define any of the shortcut
- commands (default).</p></li></ul>
-
-
-
- <!--l. 1251--><p class="noindent" >Note that multiple invocations of the <a
+ id="dx1-4280"></a>): don’t define any of the shortcut
+ commands (default).
+ </li></ul>
+ <!--l. 1291--><p class="noindent" >Note that multiple invocations of the <a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4278"></a> option <span
+ id="dx1-4281"></a> option <span
class="cmti-10">within the same option</span>
<span
-class="cmti-10">list </span>will override each other.</p></dd></dl>
-<!--l. 1255--><p class="indent" > After the <span
+class="cmti-10">list </span>will override each other.
+</p>
+ </dd></dl>
+<!--l. 1296--><p class="indent" > After the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package has been loaded, you can set available options
using
-</p><!--l. 1257--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-4279"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 1298--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-4282"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossariesextrasetup{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1259--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1300--><p class="noindent" >
The <a
href="#styopt.abbreviations"><span
class="cmss-10">abbreviations</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4280"></a> and <a
+ id="dx1-4283"></a> and <a
href="#styopt.docdef"><span
class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4281"></a> options may only be used in the preamble. Additionally,
+ id="dx1-4284"></a> options may only be used in the preamble. Additionally,
<a
href="#styopt.docdef"><span
class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><a
- id="dx1-4282"></a> can’t be used after <span
+ id="dx1-4285"></a> can’t be used after <span
class="cmtt-10">\makenoidxglossaries</span><a
- id="dx1-4283"></a>.
+ id="dx1-4286"></a>.
</p>
-<!--l. 1264--><p class="indent" > </div>
-</p><!--l. 1264--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 1305--><p class="indent" > </div>
+</p><!--l. 1305--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">2. <a
id="sec:modifications"></a>Modifications to Existing Commands and Styles</h2>
</p>
-<!--l. 1267--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 1308--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.1 </span> <a
- id="definingentries"></a>Defining Entries</h3>
-<!--l. 1269--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ id="sec:definingentries"></a>Defining Entries</h3>
+<!--l. 1311--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package provides <span
class="cmtt-10">\nopostdesc</span><a
id="dx1-6001"></a> which may be used in the <span
@@ -2734,10 +2765,10 @@
suppress the post-description hook. The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package provides another
command
-</p><!--l. 1273--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1315--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-6003"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnopostpunc </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1275--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1317--><p class="noindent" >
which has a similar function but only suppresses the post-description punctuation. It
doesn’t suppress the use of <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostdescription </span>which allows the use of
@@ -2749,10 +2780,10 @@
post-description hook can counter-act the effect of <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnopostpunc</span>
using
-</p><!--l. 1284--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1326--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-6004"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrrestorepostpunc </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1286--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1328--><p class="noindent" >
These commands have no effect outside of the glossary (except with standalone
entries that use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtractivatenopost </span>and <span
@@ -2760,9 +2791,9 @@
<a
href="#sec:glossentry"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">10.4</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">11.4</span> </a><a
href="#sec:glossentry">Standalone Entry Items<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:glossentry --></a>).
-</p><!--l. 1291--><p class="indent" > The commands used by <span
+</p><!--l. 1333--><p class="indent" > The commands used by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>to automatically produce an error if an entry is
undefined (such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdoifexists</span><a
@@ -2771,11 +2802,10 @@
class="cmss-10">undefaction</span></a><a
id="dx1-6006"></a> option into
account.
-</p><!--l. 1295--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 1337--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry </span>command has three new keys: </p>
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1297--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmss-10">category</span><a
id="dx1-6007"></a>, which sets the category label for the given entry. By default this
is <span
@@ -2782,22 +2812,20 @@
class="cmtt-10">general</span>. See <a
href="#sec:categories"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">6</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">7</span> </a><a
href="#sec:categories">Categories<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:categories --></a> for further information about
categories.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1301--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmss-10">alias</span><a
id="dx1-6008"></a>, which allows an entry to be alias to another entry. See <a
href="#sec:alias"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">10.5</span>
+class="cmbx-10">11.5</span>
</a><a
href="#sec:alias">Entry Aliases<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:alias --></a> for further details.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 1303--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmss-10">seealso</span><a
id="dx1-6009"></a>, which performs much like <span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
@@ -2807,13 +2835,10 @@
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
class="cmbx-10">2.3</span> </a><a
href="#sec:see">Cross-References (“see” and “see
- also”)<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:see --></a> for further details.</p></li></ul>
-
-
-
-<!--l. 1307--><p class="noindent" >This apply to all entry defining commands (such as <span
+ also”)<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:see --></a> for further details.</li></ul>
+<!--l. 1349--><p class="noindent" >This apply to all entry defining commands (such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>).
-</p><!--l. 1310--><p class="indent" > The test file <span
+</p><!--l. 1352--><p class="indent" > The test file <span
class="cmtt-10">example-glossaries-xr.tex </span>contains dummy entries with a
mixture of <span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
@@ -2829,7 +2854,10 @@
id="dx1-6014"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>.
-</p><!--l. 1317--><p class="indent" > The <span
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 1359--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\longnewglossaryentry </span>command now has a starred version (as from v1.12)
that doesn’t automatically insert
@@ -2839,8 +2867,8 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-31">
\leavevmode\unskip\nopostdesc
</pre>
-<!--l. 1321--><p class="nopar" > at the end of the description field.
-</p><!--l. 1323--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 1363--><p class="nopar" > at the end of the description field.
+</p><!--l. 1365--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-6015"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\longnewglossaryentry*{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -2849,17 +2877,17 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">description</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1325--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1367--><p class="noindent" >
The <span
class="cmss-10">descriptionplural</span><a
id="dx1-6016"></a> key is left unset unless explicitly set in ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">options</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 1329--><p class="indent" > The unstarred version no longer hard-codes the above code (which removes
+</p><!--l. 1371--><p class="indent" > The unstarred version no longer hard-codes the above code (which removes
trailing space and suppresses the post-description hook) but instead uses:
-</p><!--l. 1332--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1374--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-6017"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostlongdescription </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1334--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1376--><p class="noindent" >
This can be redefined to allow the post-description hook to work but retain the
<span
class="cmtt-10">\unskip </span>part if required. For example:
@@ -2870,9 +2898,9 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-32">
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrpostlongdescription}{\leavevmode\unskip}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1340--><p class="nopar" > This will discarded unwanted trailing space at the end of the description but won’t
+<!--l. 1382--><p class="nopar" > This will discarded unwanted trailing space at the end of the description but won’t
suppress the post-description hook.
-</p><!--l. 1344--><p class="indent" > The unstarred version also alters the base <span
+</p><!--l. 1386--><p class="indent" > The unstarred version also alters the base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span><a
id="dx1-6018"></a> package’s treatment of the
<span
@@ -2891,10 +2919,10 @@
singular.<span class="footnote-mark"><a
href="#fn1x2" id="fn1x2-bk"><sup class="textsuperscript">2.1</sup></a></span><a
id="x1-6022f1"></a>
-</p><!--l. 1359--><p class="indent" > Note that this modified unstarred version doesn’t append <span
+</p><!--l. 1401--><p class="indent" > Note that this modified unstarred version doesn’t append <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostlongdescription</span>
to the description’s plural form.
-</p><!--l. 1362--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 1404--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\newterm</span><a
id="dx1-6028"></a> command (defined through the <a
href="#styopt.index"><span
@@ -2912,14 +2940,14 @@
class="cmbx-10">4</span>
</a><a
href="#sec:abbreviations">Abbreviations<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:abbreviations --></a>.)
-</p><!--l. 1368--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 1410--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\makeglossaries </span>command now has an optional argument.
-</p><!--l. 1369--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1411--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-6032"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\makeglossaries[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1371--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1413--><p class="noindent" >
If ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">list</span>⟩ is empty, <span
class="cmtt-10">\makeglossaries </span>behaves as per its original definition in the
@@ -2927,7 +2955,7 @@
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package, otherwise ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">list</span>⟩ can be a comma-separated list of glossaries that
need processing with an external indexing application.
-</p><!--l. 1377--><p class="indent" > This command is not permitted with the <a
+</p><!--l. 1419--><p class="indent" > This command is not permitted with the <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=only</span><a
@@ -2942,7 +2970,7 @@
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=off</span><a
id="dx1-6035"></a>.
-</p><!--l. 1382--><p class="indent" > It should then be possible to use <span
+</p><!--l. 1424--><p class="indent" > It should then be possible to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\printglossary </span>for those glossaries listed in ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">list</span>⟩
and <span
@@ -2949,14 +2977,14 @@
class="cmtt-10">\printnoidxglossary </span>for the other glossaries. (See the accompanying file
<span
class="cmtt-10">sample-mixedsort.tex </span>for an example.)
-</p><!--l. 1387--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you use the optional argument ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 1429--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you use the optional argument ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">list</span>⟩, you can’t define entries in the document
(even with the <a
href="#styopt.docdef"><span
class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><a
id="dx1-6036"></a> option). </div>
-</p><!--l. 1390--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 1392--><p class="indent" > You will need at least version 2.20 of <a
+</p><!--l. 1432--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1434--><p class="indent" > You will need at least version 2.20 of <a
id="dx1-6037"></a><a
href="#glo:makeglossaries"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeglossaries</span></a> or at least version 1.3 of
@@ -2974,18 +3002,18 @@
class="cmss-10">automake</span></a><a
id="dx1-6040"></a>
option.
-</p><!--l. 1398--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1440--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 1398--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 1440--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.2 </span> <a
id="sec:wrglossary"></a>Entry Indexing</h3>
-<!--l. 1401--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.31, there is a new command like <span
+<!--l. 1443--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.31, there is a new command like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsadd </span>where the mandatory
argument is a comma-separated list of labels:
-</p><!--l. 1404--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1446--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-7001"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsaddeach[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -2992,7 +3020,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1406--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1448--><p class="noindent" >
This simply iterates over ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">list</span>⟩ and does <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsadd[</span>⟨<span
@@ -3001,7 +3029,7 @@
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span>for each entry in the
list.
-</p><!--l. 1410--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.37, you can make commands like <span
+</p><!--l. 1452--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.37, you can make commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslink</span>
automatically use <span
@@ -3013,7 +3041,7 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslink </span>etc).
-</p><!--l. 1415--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1457--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-7002"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrAutoAddOnFormat[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -3023,7 +3051,7 @@
class="cmitt-10">glsadd options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1417--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1459--><p class="noindent" >
The optional argument ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslabel </span>and indicates the label to use in
@@ -3038,7 +3066,7 @@
class="cmitt-10">format</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span>prepended to the
list.
-</p><!--l. 1425--><p class="indent" > For example, with:
+</p><!--l. 1467--><p class="indent" > For example, with:
@@ -3046,7 +3074,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-33">
\GlsXtrAutoAddOnFormat{hyperbf}{counter=chapter}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1428--><p class="nopar" > then <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 1470--><p class="nopar" > then <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls[format=hyperbf]{sample}</span></span></span> will be equivalent to
@@ -3055,11 +3083,11 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-34">
\glsadd[format=hyperbf,counter=chapter]{sample}\gls[format=hyperbf]{sample}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1432--><p class="nopar" > Note that the explicit range markers will prevent a match unless you include
+<!--l. 1474--><p class="nopar" > Note that the explicit range markers will prevent a match unless you include
them in ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">format list</span>⟩ (in which case, be sure to add both the start and end
formats).
-</p><!--l. 1437--><p class="indent" > Here’s another example:
+</p><!--l. 1479--><p class="indent" > Here’s another example:
@@ -3067,7 +3095,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-35">
\GlsXtrAutoAddOnFormat[dual.\glslabel]{hyperbf}{}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1440--><p class="nopar" > In this case <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 1482--><p class="nopar" > In this case <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls[format=hyperbf]{sample}</span></span></span> will now be equivalent to:
@@ -3076,25 +3104,23 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-36">
\glsadd[format=hyperbf]{dual.sample}\gls[format=hyperbf]{sample}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1445--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 1447--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> <span
+<!--l. 1487--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 1489--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrAutoAddOnFormat </span>is not applied to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsadd </span>as it could cause an infinite
loop. </div>
-</p><!--l. 1450--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 1452--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 1492--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1494--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package provides extra keys for commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>and
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glstext</span>:
</p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1455--><p class="noindent" >
<span
class="cmssbx-10">noindex</span><a
- id="dx1-7003"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1455--><p class="noindent" >This is a boolean key. If true, this suppresses the indexing. (That is, it
- prevents <span
+ id="dx1-7003"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is a boolean key. If true, this suppresses the indexing. (That is,
+ it prevents <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>or whatever from adding a line to the external glossary
file.) This is more useful than the <a
href="#styopt.indexonlyfirst"><span
@@ -3114,7 +3140,7 @@
id="dx1-7007"></a> attribute, see <a
href="#sec:categories"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">6</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">7</span> </a><a
href="#sec:categories">Categories<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:categories --></a>
for further details.) Note that the <span
class="cmss-10">noindex</span><a
@@ -3125,34 +3151,32 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsaddall</span><a
id="dx1-7010"></a>) since the whole purpose of that command is to index
an entry.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1468--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<span
class="cmssbx-10">wrgloss</span><a
- id="dx1-7011"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1468--><p class="noindent" >(New to v1.14.) This is may only take the values <span
+ id="dx1-7011"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to v1.14.) This is may only take the values <span
class="cmss-10">before </span>or <span
-class="cmss-10">after</span>. By default,
- commands that both index and display link text (such as <span
-class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>, <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glstext</span>
- and <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glslink</span>), perform the indexing before the link text as the indexing
- creates a whatsit that can cause problems if it occurs after the link text.
- However, it may be that in some cases (such as long phrases) you may
- actually want the indexing performed after the link text. In this case you
- can use <span
-class="cmtt-10">wrgloss=after </span>for specific instances. Note that this option doesn’t
- have an effect if the indexing has been suppressed through other settings
- (such as <span
+class="cmss-10">after</span>. By
+ default, commands that both index and display link text (such as <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>,
+ <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glstext </span>and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glslink</span>), perform the indexing before the link text as the
+ indexing creates a whatsit that can cause problems if it occurs after the
+ link text. However, it may be that in some cases (such as long phrases) you
+ may actually want the indexing performed after the link text. In this case
+ you can use <span
+class="cmtt-10">wrgloss=after </span>for specific instances. Note that this option
+ doesn’t have an effect if the indexing has been suppressed through other
+ settings (such as <span
class="cmss-10">noindex</span><a
id="dx1-7012"></a>).
- </p><!--l. 1482--><p class="noindent" >The default value is set up using
- </p><!--l. 1483--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ <!--l. 1524--><p class="noindent" >The default value is set up using
+ </p><!--l. 1525--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-7013"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrinitwrgloss </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 1485--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 1527--><p class="noindent" >
which is defined as:
@@ -3169,13 +3193,13 @@
 }%
}
</pre>
- <!--l. 1497--><p class="nopar" > This sets the conditional
- </p><!--l. 1500--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span
+ <!--l. 1539--><p class="nopar" > This sets the conditional
+ </p><!--l. 1542--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span
class="cmtt-10">\ifglsxtrinitwrgloss</span><a
id="dx1-7014"></a> </div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 1501--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 1543--><p class="noindent" >
which is used to determine where to perform the indexing.
- </p><!--l. 1504--><p class="noindent" >This means you can set the <a
+ </p><!--l. 1546--><p class="noindent" >This means you can set the <a
href="#catattr.wrgloss"><span
class="cmss-10">wrgloss</span></a><a
id="dx1-7015"></a> attribute to <span
@@ -3189,17 +3213,15 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrinitwrgloss</span>.)
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1511--><p class="noindent" >
<span
class="cmssbx-10">hyperoutside</span><a
- id="dx1-7018"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1511--><p class="noindent" >(New to v1.21.) This is a boolean key. The default is <span
+ id="dx1-7018"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to v1.21.) This is a boolean key. The default is <span
class="cmtt-10">hyperoutside=true</span>,
which puts the hyperlink outside <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstextformat</span>, so that commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>
- will effectively do </p><div class="alltt">
+ will effectively do <div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
class="cmtt-10">\hyperlink{</span>⟨<span
@@ -3230,9 +3252,6 @@
class="cmitt-10"> text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span><span
class="cmsy-10">}</span>
-
-
-
</div>
</div> You can use the <a
href="#catattr.hyperoutside"><span
@@ -3251,7 +3270,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-38">
\glssetcategoryattribute{mathrelation}{hyperoutside}{false}
</pre>
- <!--l. 1531--><p class="nopar" > will set <span
+ <!--l. 1573--><p class="nopar" > will set <span
class="cmtt-10">hyperoutside=false </span>for all entries that are assigned to the category
<span
class="cmtt-10">mathrelation </span>and
@@ -3262,7 +3281,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-39">
\glssetcategoryattribute{mathrelation}{textformat}{mathrel}
</pre>
- <!--l. 1536--><p class="nopar" > will use <span
+ <!--l. 1578--><p class="nopar" > will use <span
class="cmtt-10">\mathrel </span>instead of <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstextformat </span>resulting in: </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
@@ -3282,13 +3301,11 @@
id="dx1-7021"></a> key set to <span
class="cmtt-10">mathrelation</span>.
</dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1544--><p class="noindent" >
<span
class="cmssbx-10">textformat</span><a
- id="dx1-7022"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1544--><p class="noindent" >This key must have a control sequence name as its value. The command formed
- from this name must exist and must take one argument. (Use <span
+ id="dx1-7022"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This key must have a control sequence name as its value. The command
+ formed from this name must exist and must take one argument. (Use <span
class="cmtt-10">relax </span>for
default behaviour.) If set, this overrides the <a
href="#catattr.textformat"><span
@@ -3303,43 +3320,36 @@
class="cmbx-10">2.6</span> </a><a
href="#sec:glsunset">First Use
Flag<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:glsunset --></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1551--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<span
class="cmssbx-10">prefix</span><a
- id="dx1-7025"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1551--><p class="noindent" >Locally redefines <span
+ id="dx1-7025"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Locally redefines <span
class="cmtt-10">\glolinkprefix</span><a
id="dx1-7026"></a> to the given value. It should match the
prefix for the desired glossary.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1555--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<span
class="cmssbx-10">thevalue</span><a
- id="dx1-7027"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1555--><p class="noindent" >Explicitly set the location to this value (see below).
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 1558--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-7027"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Explicitly set the location to this value (see below).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<span
class="cmssbx-10">theHvalue</span><a
- id="dx1-7028"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 1558--><p class="noindent" >Set the corresponding hyperlink location (see below).
-</p>
+ id="dx1-7028"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Set the corresponding hyperlink location (see below).
</dd></dl>
-<!--l. 1563--><p class="indent" > You can set the default options used by <span
+<!--l. 1605--><p class="indent" > You can set the default options used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslink</span><a
id="dx1-7029"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
id="dx1-7030"></a> etc with:
-</p><!--l. 1565--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1607--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-7031"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrSetDefaultGlsOpts{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1567--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1609--><p class="noindent" >
For example, if you mostly don’t want to index entries then you can do:
@@ -3348,7 +3358,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-40">
\GlsXtrSetDefaultGlsOpts{noindex}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1572--><p class="nopar" > and then use, for example, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 1614--><p class="nopar" > and then use, for example, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls[noindex=false]{sample}</span></span></span> when you actually want
the location added to the <a
id="dx1-7032"></a><a
@@ -3357,7 +3367,7 @@
argument of commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslink </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>.
-</p><!--l. 1579--><p class="indent" > Note that if you don’t want <span
+</p><!--l. 1621--><p class="indent" > Note that if you don’t want <span
class="cmti-10">any </span>indexing, just omit <span
class="cmtt-10">\makeglossaries </span>and
<span
@@ -3368,18 +3378,18 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrinitwrgloss</span><a
id="dx1-7034"></a>
instead.
-</p><!--l. 1585--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> <span
+</p><!--l. 1627--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrSetDefaultGlsOpts </span>doesn’t affect <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsadd</span>. </div>
-</p><!--l. 1587--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 1589--><p class="indent" > If you want to change the default value of <span
+</p><!--l. 1629--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1631--><p class="indent" > If you want to change the default value of <span
class="cmss-10">format</span><a
id="dx1-7035"></a>, you can instead use:
-</p><!--l. 1591--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"> <span
+</p><!--l. 1633--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrSetDefaultNumberFormat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">format</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1593--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1635--><p class="noindent" >
This has the advantage of also working for <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsadd</span>. For example, if you
want all locations in the back matter to appear in italic (unless explicitly
@@ -3392,8 +3402,8 @@
\backmatter
\GlsXtrSetDefaultNumberFormat{hyperit}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1600--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 1602--><p class="indent" > Commands like <span
+<!--l. 1642--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 1644--><p class="indent" > Commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
id="dx1-7036"></a> have star (<span
class="cmtt-10">*</span>) and plus (<span
@@ -3403,7 +3413,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">hyper=true</span>. The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package provides a way to add a
third modifier, if required, using
-</p><!--l. 1606--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1648--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-7037"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrSetAltModifier{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">char</span>⟩<span
@@ -3410,7 +3420,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1608--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1650--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">char</span>⟩ is the character used as the modifier and ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">options</span>⟩ is the default set of
@@ -3417,11 +3427,11 @@
options (which may be overridden). Note that ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">char</span>⟩ must be a single character (not a
UTF-8 character, unless you are using <span class="HoLogo-XeLaTeX"><span class="HoLogo-Xe">X<span class="HoLogo-e">Ǝ</span></span><span class="HoLogo-LaTeX">L<span class="HoLogo-a">A</span><span class="HoLogo-TeX">T<span class="HoLogo-e">E</span>X</span></span></span> or Lua<span class="HoLogo-LaTeX">L<span class="HoLogo-a">A</span><span class="HoLogo-TeX">T<span class="HoLogo-e">E</span>X</span></span>).
-</p><!--l. 1615--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> When choosing the character ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 1657--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> When choosing the character ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">char</span>⟩ take care of any changes in category code.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 1618--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 1620--><p class="indent" > Example:
+</p><!--l. 1660--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1662--><p class="indent" > Example:
@@ -3429,7 +3439,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-42">
\GlsXtrSetAltModifier{!}{noindex}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1623--><p class="nopar" > This means that <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 1665--><p class="nopar" > This means that <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls!{sample}</span></span></span> will be equivalent to <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls[noindex]{sample}</span></span></span>. It’s
not possible to mix modifiers. For example, if you want to do
@@ -3440,48 +3450,48 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-43">
\gls[noindex,hyper=false]{sample}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1629--><p class="nopar" > you can use <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 1671--><p class="nopar" > you can use <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls*[noindex]{sample}</span></span></span> or <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls![hyper=false]{sample}</span></span></span> but you
can’t combine the <span
class="cmtt-10">* </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">! </span>modifiers.
-</p><!--l. 1634--><p class="indent" > There is a new hook that’s used each time indexing information is written to the
+</p><!--l. 1676--><p class="indent" > There is a new hook that’s used each time indexing information is written to the
external glossary files:
-</p><!--l. 1636--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1678--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-7038"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdowrglossaryhook{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1638--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1680--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ is the entry’s label. This does nothing by default but may be redefined.
(See, for example, the accompanying sample file <span
class="cmtt-10">sample-indexhook.tex</span>, which uses
this hook to determine which entries haven’t been indexed.)
-</p><!--l. 1645--><p class="indent" > There’s also a new hook (from v1.26) that’s used immediately before the options
+</p><!--l. 1687--><p class="indent" > There’s also a new hook (from v1.26) that’s used immediately before the options
are set by the <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>-like and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstext</span>-like commands:
-</p><!--l. 1648--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1690--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-7039"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslinkpresetkeys </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1650--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1692--><p class="noindent" >
(The base package provides <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslinkpostsetkeys</span><a
id="dx1-7040"></a> that’s used immediately after the
options are set.)
-</p><!--l. 1654--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.30 there are also similar hooks for <span
+</p><!--l. 1696--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.30 there are also similar hooks for <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsadd</span>:
-</p><!--l. 1655--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1697--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-7041"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsaddpresetkeys </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1657--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1699--><p class="noindent" >
and
-</p><!--l. 1659--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1701--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-7042"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsaddpostsetkeys </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1661--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1703--><p class="noindent" >
For example, to default to using the <span
class="cmss-10">equation</span><a
id="dx1-7043"></a> counter in maths mode:
@@ -3495,7 +3505,7 @@
\renewcommand{\glsaddpresetkeys}{%
 \ifmmode \setkeys{glossadd}{counter=equation}\fi}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1669--><p class="nopar" > In this case, the counter can be overridden with an explicit use of <span
+<!--l. 1711--><p class="nopar" > In this case, the counter can be overridden with an explicit use of <span
class="cmss-10">counter</span><a
id="dx1-7044"></a> in the
optional argument of <span
@@ -3505,7 +3515,7 @@
href="#styopt.equations"><span
class="cmss-10">equations</span></a><a
id="dx1-7045"></a> package option.)
-</p><!--l. 1675--><p class="indent" > Alternatively, to enforce this (overriding the option argument):
+</p><!--l. 1717--><p class="indent" > Alternatively, to enforce this (overriding the option argument):
@@ -3516,8 +3526,8 @@
\renewcommand{\glsaddpostsetkeys}{%
 \ifmmode \setkeys{glossadd}{counter=equation}\fi}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1682--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 1684--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.14, there are two new keys for <span
+<!--l. 1724--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 1726--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.14, there are two new keys for <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsadd</span>: <span
class="cmss-10">thevalue</span><a
id="dx1-7046"></a> and <span
@@ -3532,7 +3542,7 @@
id="dx1-7048"></a> keys is intended
primarily for adding locations in supplementary material that can’t be obtained from
a counter.
-</p><!--l. 1693--><p class="indent" > The principle key <span
+</p><!--l. 1735--><p class="indent" > The principle key <span
class="cmss-10">thevalue</span><a
id="dx1-7049"></a> is for the location value. The other key <span
class="cmss-10">theHvalue</span><a
@@ -3545,12 +3555,12 @@
class="cmti-10">location</span>⟩. In general,
there’s little need for this key as the prefix is typically associated with a counter that
can be used to form hypertargets.
-</p><!--l. 1701--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you use <span
+</p><!--l. 1743--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you use <span
class="cmss-10">thevalue</span><a
id="dx1-7052"></a>, you must make sure that you use an indexing application
that will accept the given value. </div>
-</p><!--l. 1704--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 1706--><p class="indent" > For example, <span
+</p><!--l. 1746--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1748--><p class="indent" > For example, <span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span><a
id="dx1-7053"></a> will only accept locations in the form [⟨<span
class="cmti-10">num</span>⟩⟨<span
@@ -3574,7 +3584,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-46">
\glsadd[thevalue={Supplementary Material}]{sample}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1716--><p class="nopar" > This location value will be accepted by <a
+<!--l. 1758--><p class="nopar" > This location value will be accepted by <a
id="dx1-7055"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>, since it will allow any location and
@@ -3589,7 +3599,7 @@
id="dx1-7058"></a> key to prevent a
hyperlink if one can’t naturally be formed from the prefix, counter and location
value.
-</p><!--l. 1725--><p class="indent" > For example, suppose the file <span
+</p><!--l. 1767--><p class="indent" > For example, suppose the file <span
class="cmtt-10">suppl.tex </span>contains:
@@ -3606,7 +3616,7 @@
\gls{sample}.
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1740--><p class="nopar" > This has an entry on page S.2. Suppose another document wants to include this
+<!--l. 1782--><p class="nopar" > This has an entry on page S.2. Suppose another document wants to include this
location in the glossary. Then this can be done by setting <span
class="cmss-10">thevalue</span><a
id="dx1-7059"></a> to <span
@@ -3627,13 +3637,13 @@
\glsadd[thevalue={S.2}]{sample}
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1759--><p class="nopar" > This location value will be accepted by <span
+<!--l. 1801--><p class="nopar" > This location value will be accepted by <span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span><a
id="dx1-7060"></a> as it’s in the form ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">num</span>⟩⟨<span
class="cmti-10">sep</span>⟩⟨<span
class="cmti-10">num</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 1763--><p class="indent" > If you want hyperlinks, things are more complicated. First you need to set the
+</p><!--l. 1805--><p class="indent" > If you want hyperlinks, things are more complicated. First you need to set the
<a
href="#catattr.externallocation"><span
class="cmss-10">externallocation</span></a><a
@@ -3647,7 +3657,7 @@
\newglossaryentry{sample}{category=supplemental,
 name={sample},description={an example}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1771--><p class="nopar" > Next you need to add <span
+<!--l. 1813--><p class="nopar" > Next you need to add <span
class="cmtt-10">glsxtrsupphypernumber </span>as the format:
@@ -3656,7 +3666,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-50">
\glsadd[thevalue={S.2},format=glsxtrsupphypernumber]{sample}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1775--><p class="nopar" > Both documents will need to use the <span
+<!--l. 1817--><p class="nopar" > Both documents will need to use the <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
id="dx1-7062"></a> package. Remember that the counter
used for the location also needs to match. If <span
@@ -3672,14 +3682,14 @@
<span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
id="dx1-7064"></a>.
-</p><!--l. 1785--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> The hyperlink for the supplementary location may or <span
+</p><!--l. 1827--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> The hyperlink for the supplementary location may or <span
class="cmti-10">may not </span>take you to the
relevant place in the external PDF file <span
class="cmti-10">depending on your PDF viewer</span>. Some may not
support external links, and some may take you to the first page or last visited page.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 1790--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 1792--><p class="indent" > For example, if both <span
+</p><!--l. 1832--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1834--><p class="indent" > For example, if both <span
class="cmtt-10">sample-suppl-hyp.pdf </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">sample-suppl-main-hyp.pdf</span>
are in the same directory, then viewing <span
@@ -3687,7 +3697,7 @@
take you to the correct location in the linked document (when you click on the S.2
external link), but Okular will take you to the top of the first page of the linked
document.
-</p><!--l. 1799--><p class="indent" > This method can only be used where there is one external source for the
+</p><!--l. 1841--><p class="indent" > This method can only be used where there is one external source for the
designated category (identified by the <a
href="#catattr.externallocation"><span
class="cmss-10">externallocation</span></a><a
@@ -3701,12 +3711,12 @@
of the designated external documents without the need to explicitly use
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsadd</span>.
-</p><!--l. 1807--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1849--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 1807--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 1849--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.3 </span> <a
id="sec:see"></a>Cross-References (“see” and “see also”)</h3>
-<!--l. 1810--><p class="noindent" >The value of the <span
+<!--l. 1852--><p class="noindent" >The value of the <span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
id="dx1-8001"></a> key is now saved as a field. This isn’t the case with
<span
@@ -3720,12 +3730,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">\makeglossaries</span><a
id="dx1-8004"></a> (since the file hasn’t been opened
yet).
-</p><!--l. 1818--><p class="indent" > This modification allows <span
+</p><!--l. 1860--><p class="indent" > This modification allows <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>to provide
-</p><!--l. 1819--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1861--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8005"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtraddallcrossrefs </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1821--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1863--><p class="noindent" >
which is used at the end of the document to automatically add any unused
cross-references unless the package option <a
href="#styopt.indexcrossrefs"><span
@@ -3734,7 +3744,7 @@
-</p><!--l. 1826--><p class="indent" > Note that even though the <span
+</p><!--l. 1868--><p class="indent" > Note that even though the <span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
id="dx1-8007"></a> key will now work for entries defined in the
<span
@@ -3763,16 +3773,16 @@
id="dx1-8014"></a>
value to be stored even though it may not be possible to index it at that
point.
-</p><!--l. 1837--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.06, you can display the cross-referenced information for a given
+</p><!--l. 1879--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.06, you can display the cross-referenced information for a given
entry using
-</p><!--l. 1839--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1881--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8015"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrusesee{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1841--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1883--><p class="noindent" >
This internally uses
-</p><!--l. 1843--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1885--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8016"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtruseseeformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">tag</span>⟩<span
@@ -3779,7 +3789,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">xr list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1845--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1887--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">tag</span>⟩ and ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">xr list</span>⟩ are obtained from the value of the entry’s <span
@@ -3801,7 +3811,7 @@
id="dx1-8019"></a> field hasn’t been set for the entry given by
⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 1854--><p class="indent" > As with the base <span
+</p><!--l. 1896--><p class="indent" > As with the base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span><a
id="dx1-8020"></a> package, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsseeformat </span>is defined to do <span
@@ -3816,25 +3826,25 @@
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span><a
id="dx1-8021"></a>, which always requires a final argument to encapsulate the associated
location. The command
-</p><!--l. 1860--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
+</p><!--l. 1902--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsseelist</span><a
id="dx1-8022"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">xr list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1861--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1903--><p class="noindent" >
used to iterate over the list of cross-reference labels is also unchanged from
the base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span><a
id="dx1-8023"></a> package, with each item in the list formatted according
to:
-</p><!--l. 1866--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
+</p><!--l. 1908--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsseeitem</span><a
id="dx1-8024"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1867--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1909--><p class="noindent" >
This is defined by the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span><a
id="dx1-8025"></a> package to: </p><div class="alltt">
@@ -3876,15 +3886,15 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-51">
\renewcommand*{\glsseeitemformat}[1]{\glsxtrhiername{#1}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1885--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 1887--><p class="indent" > The <span
+<!--l. 1927--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 1929--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package provides
-</p><!--l. 1888--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1930--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8031"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsseeitemformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1890--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1932--><p class="noindent" >
to format items in a cross-reference list (identified with the <span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
id="dx1-8032"></a> key or <span
@@ -3923,7 +3933,7 @@
 \ifglshasshort{\glslabel}{\glsfmttext{#1}}{\glsfmtname{#1}}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1909--><p class="nopar" > (Note that as from <span
+<!--l. 1951--><p class="nopar" > (Note that as from <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>version 1.42, this now uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmttext </span>and
<span
@@ -3933,7 +3943,7 @@
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
id="dx1-8038"></a> fields. This helps to ensure
that any formatting is correctly applied.)
-</p><!--l. 1915--><p class="indent" > If you want to restore the <span
+</p><!--l. 1957--><p class="indent" > If you want to restore the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>v3.0+ definition just do:
@@ -3942,8 +3952,8 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-53">
\renewcommand*{\glsseeitemformat}[1]{\glsentrytext{#1}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1918--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 1920--><p class="indent" > The <span
+<!--l. 1960--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 1962--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span><a
id="dx1-8039"></a> package provides <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrhiername</span><a
@@ -3952,17 +3962,16 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsseeitemformat </span>if required.
These display the hierarchy for sub-entries rather than just the name, which may be
more helpful in cross-references.
-</p><!--l. 1925--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1967--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8041"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrhiername{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1927--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1969--><p class="noindent" >
performs a recursive action:
</p><ol class="enumerate1" >
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-8043x1">
- <!--l. 1930--><p class="noindent" >If the entry given by ⟨<span
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-8043x1">If the entry given by ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ has a parent, then <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrhiername{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">parent</span>
@@ -3970,10 +3979,9 @@
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span>is done followed by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrhiernamesep </span>then:
- </p></li>
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-8045x2">
- <!--l. 1933--><p class="noindent" >If the entry given by ⟨<span
+ </li>
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-8045x2">If the entry given by ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ is an abbreviation (that is, it has the <span
class="cmss-10">short</span><a
id="dx1-8046"></a> field
@@ -3980,59 +3988,59 @@
set) then the short form is displayed (using <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtshort</span>) otherwise the
name is displayed (using <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtname</span>).</p></li></ol>
-<!--l. 1938--><p class="noindent" >The first step above is skipped if the entry doesn’t have a parent. Each level is separated
+class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtname</span>).</li></ol>
+<!--l. 1980--><p class="noindent" >The first step above is skipped if the entry doesn’t have a parent. Each level is separated
by:
-</p><!--l. 1940--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1982--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8047"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrhiernamesep </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1942--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1984--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to “ <span
class="cmmi-9">⊳ </span>”. This can be redefined as appropriate.
-</p><!--l. 1946--><p class="indent" > There are some case-changing variants:
-</p><!--l. 1947--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1988--><p class="indent" > There are some case-changing variants:
+</p><!--l. 1989--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8048"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrhiername{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1949--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1991--><p class="noindent" >
The top-level has the first letter changed to upper case (either <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtshort </span>or
<span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtname</span>). There’s no case-change for sub-entries.
-</p><!--l. 1954--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 1996--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8049"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrhiername{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1956--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 1998--><p class="noindent" >
All levels have the first letter changed to upper case (either <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtshort </span>or
<span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtname</span>).
-</p><!--l. 1960--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2002--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8050"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSxtrhiername{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1962--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2004--><p class="noindent" >
The top-level is converted to upper case (either <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmtshort </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmtname</span>).
There’s no case-change for sub-entries.
-
-
-
-</p><!--l. 1967--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2009--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8051"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSXTRhiername{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 1969--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2011--><p class="noindent" >
All levels are converted to upper case (either <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmtshort </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmtname</span>).
-</p><!--l. 1973--><p class="indent" > Suppose you want to suppress the <a
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 2015--><p class="indent" > Suppose you want to suppress the <a
id="dx1-8052"></a>number list using <a
href="#styopt.nonumberlist"><span
class="cmss-10">nonumberlist</span></a><a
@@ -4048,7 +4056,7 @@
id="dx1-8056"></a> key set, but this will also show the rest of the <a
id="dx1-8057"></a>number
list.
-</p><!--l. 1980--><p class="indent" > Another approach in this situation is to use the post description hook
+</p><!--l. 2022--><p class="indent" > Another approach in this situation is to use the post description hook
with <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrusesee </span>to append the cross-reference after the description. For
example:
@@ -4063,11 +4071,11 @@
 {}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 1989--><p class="nopar" > Now the cross-references can appear even though the <a
+<!--l. 2031--><p class="nopar" > Now the cross-references can appear even though the <a
id="dx1-8058"></a><a
href="#glo:numberlist">number list</a> has been
suppressed.
-</p><!--l. 1993--><p class="indent" > As from v1.16, there’s a separate <span
+</p><!--l. 2035--><p class="indent" > As from v1.16, there’s a separate <span
class="cmss-10">seealso</span><a
id="dx1-8059"></a> key. Unlike <span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
@@ -4087,24 +4095,24 @@
class="cmtt-10">\seealsoname </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtruseseealsoformat</span>, described
below).
-</p><!--l. 2001--><p class="indent" > You can display the formatted list of cross-references stored in the <span
+</p><!--l. 2043--><p class="indent" > You can display the formatted list of cross-references stored in the <span
class="cmss-10">seealso</span><a
id="dx1-8062"></a> key
using:
-</p><!--l. 2003--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2045--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8063"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtruseseealso{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2005--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2047--><p class="noindent" >
This works in much the same way as <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrusesee </span>but it internally uses
-</p><!--l. 2008--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2050--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8064"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtruseseealsoformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">xr list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2010--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2052--><p class="noindent" >
For example:
@@ -4120,8 +4128,8 @@
 {}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2021--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 2023--><p class="indent" > The <span
+<!--l. 2063--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 2065--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">alias</span><a
id="dx1-8065"></a> key only contains a single label not a list, but if you want to ensure
consistent formatting with <span
@@ -4128,23 +4136,23 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrusesee </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtruseseealso </span>you can use
(from v1.42):
-</p><!--l. 2026--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2068--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8066"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrusealias{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2028--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 2030--><p class="indent" > The actual unformatted comma-separated list ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 2070--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2072--><p class="indent" > The actual unformatted comma-separated list ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">xr-list</span>⟩ stored in the <span
class="cmss-10">seealso</span><a
id="dx1-8067"></a> field
can be accessed with:
-</p><!--l. 2032--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2074--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8068"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrseealsolabels{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2034--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2076--><p class="noindent" >
This will just expand to the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">xr-labels</span>⟩ provided in the value of the <span
class="cmss-10">seealso</span><a
@@ -4159,7 +4167,7 @@
class="cmti-10">tag</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]</span>, so it can’t be automatically treated as a simple comma-separated
list.
-</p><!--l. 2042--><p class="indent" > As mentioned above, the base <span
+</p><!--l. 2084--><p class="indent" > As mentioned above, the base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package provides <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsseelist</span><a
id="dx1-8071"></a>, which
@@ -4170,15 +4178,15 @@
class="cmtt-10">} </span>as
the argument. For convenience, <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>provides
-</p><!--l. 2047--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2089--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8072"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrseelist{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">xr list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2049--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2091--><p class="noindent" >
which fully expands its argument and passes it to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsseelist</span>.
-</p><!--l. 2052--><p class="indent" > As from v1.47, <span
+</p><!--l. 2094--><p class="indent" > As from v1.47, <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>redefines <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsseelist </span>to make it more flexible.
The base package provides <span
@@ -4190,31 +4198,31 @@
(<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsseesep </span>is used between the other items). The modifications provide two
additional commands:
-</p><!--l. 2058--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2100--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8073"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsseefirstitem{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2060--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2102--><p class="noindent" >
This defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsseeitem{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span>and is used to format the first label in the
list.
-</p><!--l. 2063--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2105--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8074"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsseelastoxfordsep </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2065--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2107--><p class="noindent" >
This defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsseelastsep </span>and is used if the list consists of three or more
labels.
-</p><!--l. 2069--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 2111--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">seealso</span><a
id="dx1-8075"></a> key implements the automatic indexing using
-</p><!--l. 2070--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2112--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8076"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrindexseealso{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -4221,7 +4229,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">xr list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2072--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2114--><p class="noindent" >
which just does </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
@@ -4240,11 +4248,11 @@
id="dx1-8078"></a> v4.30+, in which case a distinct
<span
class="cmtt-10">seealso </span>cross-reference class is used instead.
-<!--l. 2081--><p class="indent" > The command that produces this “see also” text is
-</p><!--l. 2082--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 2123--><p class="indent" > The command that produces this “see also” text is
+</p><!--l. 2124--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-8079"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\seealsoname </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2084--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2126--><p class="noindent" >
If <span
class="cmtt-10">\alsoname</span><a
id="dx1-8080"></a> (provided by language packages) is defined then <span
@@ -4252,7 +4260,7 @@
simply be defined to <span
class="cmtt-10">\alsoname </span>otherwise it will be defined to <span
class="cmtt-10">see also</span>.
-</p><!--l. 2089--><p class="indent" > The language-sensitive <span
+</p><!--l. 2131--><p class="indent" > The language-sensitive <span
class="cmtt-10">\alsoname </span>is used by general indexing packages, such as
<span
class="cmss-10">makeidx</span><a
@@ -4265,12 +4273,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">\index</span>) then redefine <span
class="cmtt-10">\seealsoname</span>
instead.
-</p><!--l. 2096--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2138--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 2096--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 2138--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.4 </span> <a
id="sec:entryfmtmods"></a>Entry Display Style Modifications</h3>
-<!--l. 2099--><p class="noindent" >Recall from the <span
+<!--l. 2141--><p class="noindent" >Recall from the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package that commands such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>display text at
that point in the document (optionally with a hyperlink to the relevant
@@ -4281,7 +4289,7 @@
it’s displayed depends on the command used (such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>) and the entry
format.
-</p><!--l. 2106--><p class="indent" > The default entry format (<span
+</p><!--l. 2148--><p class="indent" > The default entry format (<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryfmt</span><a
id="dx1-9002"></a>) used in the <a
id="dx1-9003"></a>link-text by commands like
@@ -4304,11 +4312,7 @@
entries, which are determined as follows:
</p>
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">
-
-
-
- <!--l. 2114--><p class="noindent" >If an entry is assigned to a category that has the <a
+ <li class="itemize">If an entry is assigned to a category that has the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
id="dx1-9010"></a> attribute set
@@ -4315,8 +4319,11 @@
(see <a
href="#sec:categories"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">6</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">7</span> </a><a
href="#sec:categories">Categories<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:categories --></a>), the entry is considered a regular entry,
+
+
+
even if it has a value for the <span
class="cmss-10">short</span><a
id="dx1-9011"></a> key. In this case <span
@@ -4337,9 +4344,8 @@
class="cmss-10">plural</span><a
id="dx1-9017"></a>) value on subsequent
use.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 2122--><p class="noindent" >An entry that doesn’t have a value for the <span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">An entry that doesn’t have a value for the <span
class="cmss-10">short</span><a
id="dx1-9018"></a> key is assumed to
be a regular entry, even if the <a
@@ -4351,9 +4357,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryfmt </span>uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsgenentryfmt</span><a
id="dx1-9020"></a>.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 2128--><p class="noindent" >If an entry does has a value for the <span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">If an entry does has a value for the <span
class="cmss-10">short</span><a
id="dx1-9021"></a> key and hasn’t been marked
as a regular entry through the <a
@@ -4371,22 +4376,21 @@
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
class="cmbx-10">4.2</span> </a><a
href="#sec:abbrstyle">Abbreviation Styles<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:abbrstyle --></a>).
-</p>
</li></ul>
-<!--l. 2137--><p class="indent" > This means that entries with a short form can be treated as regular entries rather
+<!--l. 2179--><p class="indent" > This means that entries with a short form can be treated as regular entries rather
than abbreviations if it’s more appropriate for the desired style.
-</p><!--l. 2141--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.04, <span
+</p><!--l. 2183--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.04, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryfmt</span><a
id="dx1-9024"></a> now puts <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsgenentry</span><a
id="dx1-9025"></a> in the argument of
the new command
-</p><!--l. 2143--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2185--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-9026"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrregularfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2145--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2187--><p class="noindent" >
This just does its argument ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩ by default. This means that if you want regular
entries in a different font but don’t want that font to apply to abbreviations, then
@@ -4399,7 +4403,7 @@
href="#catattr.textformat"><span
class="cmss-10">textformat</span></a><a
id="dx1-9028"></a> attribute.
-</p><!--l. 2154--><p class="indent" > For example:
+</p><!--l. 2196--><p class="indent" > For example:
@@ -4407,7 +4411,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-56">
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrregularfont}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2157--><p class="nopar" > You can access the label through <span
+<!--l. 2199--><p class="nopar" > You can access the label through <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslabel</span>. For example, you can query the
category:
@@ -4418,7 +4422,7 @@
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrregularfont}[1]{%
 \glsifcategory{\glslabel}{general}{\textsf{#1}}{#1}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2163--><p class="nopar" > or query the category attribute, for example, provide a custom attribute called
+<!--l. 2205--><p class="nopar" > or query the category attribute, for example, provide a custom attribute called
<span
class="cmtt-10">font</span>:
@@ -4430,7 +4434,7 @@
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrregularfont}[1]{%
 \glsifattribute{\glslabel}{font}{sf}{\textsf{#1}}{#1}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2171--><p class="nopar" > As from version 1.21, it’s simpler to just do, for example:
+<!--l. 2213--><p class="nopar" > As from version 1.21, it’s simpler to just do, for example:
@@ -4438,21 +4442,21 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-59">
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{textformat}{textsf}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2175--><p class="nopar" > without redefining <span
+<!--l. 2217--><p class="nopar" > without redefining <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrregularfont</span>.
-</p><!--l. 2178--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.30, there is also a command for abbreviations that encapsulates
+</p><!--l. 2220--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.30, there is also a command for abbreviations that encapsulates
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrgenabbrvfmt</span>:
-</p><!--l. 2180--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2222--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-9029"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrabbreviationfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2182--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2224--><p class="noindent" >
This also just does its argument by default. Font changes made by abbreviation styles
are within ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 2186--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 2228--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspostlinkhook </span>provided by the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package to insert information
after the <a
@@ -4461,29 +4465,29 @@
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstext </span>is redefined
to
-</p><!--l. 2189--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2231--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-9031"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostlinkhook </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2191--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2233--><p class="noindent" >
This command will discard a following full stop (period) if the <a
href="#catattr.discardperiod"><span
class="cmss-10">discardperiod</span></a><a
id="dx1-9032"></a> attribute
is set to “true” for the current entry’s category. It will also do
-</p><!--l. 2195--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2237--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-9033"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostlink </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2197--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2239--><p class="noindent" >
if a full stop hasn’t be discarded and
-</p><!--l. 2199--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2241--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-9034"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostlinkendsentence </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2201--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2243--><p class="noindent" >
if a full stop has been discarded.
-</p><!--l. 2204--><p class="indent" > It may be that you want to check some other setting (rather than a category
+</p><!--l. 2246--><p class="indent" > It may be that you want to check some other setting (rather than a category
attribute) to determine whether or not to discard a following full stop. In which case
you can redefine:
-</p><!--l. 2207--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2249--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-9035"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrifcustomdiscardperiod{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
@@ -4490,7 +4494,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2209--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2251--><p class="noindent" >
You can access the field’s label using <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslabel</span>. This command should do ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩ if the
@@ -4504,9 +4508,9 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-60">
\newcommand*{\glsxtrifcustomdiscardperiod}[2]{#2}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2216--><p class="nopar" > which means that no additional checks are performed. (Only the recognised category
+<!--l. 2258--><p class="nopar" > which means that no additional checks are performed. (Only the recognised category
attributes will be checked.)
-</p><!--l. 2220--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Avoid the use of <span
+</p><!--l. 2262--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Avoid the use of <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>-like and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstext</span>-like commands within the
post-link hook as they will cause interference. Consider using commands like
@@ -4519,8 +4523,8 @@
class="cmbx-10">2.8</span> </a><a
href="#sec:nested">Nested Links<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:nested --></a>) instead.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 2225--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 2227--><p class="indent" > By default <span
+</p><!--l. 2267--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2269--><p class="indent" > By default <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostlink </span>just does <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostlink</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">category</span>⟩<a
@@ -4532,7 +4536,7 @@
id="dx1-9037"></a> category, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostlinkgeneral </span>if it has been
defined.)
-</p><!--l. 2232--><p class="indent" > You can define the post-link hook command using <span
+</p><!--l. 2274--><p class="indent" > You can define the post-link hook command using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newcommand</span>, for
example:
@@ -4544,8 +4548,8 @@
 \glsxtrpostlinkAddDescOnFirstUse
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2238--><p class="nopar" > or, as from v1.31, you can use
-</p><!--l. 2240--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 2280--><p class="nopar" > or, as from v1.31, you can use
+</p><!--l. 2282--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-9038"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdefpostlink{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩<span
@@ -4552,7 +4556,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">definition</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2242--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2284--><p class="noindent" >
This is simply a shortcut for: </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
@@ -4566,7 +4570,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div>
</div> Note that it doesn’t check if the command has already been defined.
-<!--l. 2250--><p class="indent" > The sentence-ending hook is slightly more complicated. If the command
+<!--l. 2292--><p class="indent" > The sentence-ending hook is slightly more complicated. If the command
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostlink</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">category</span>⟩<a
@@ -4581,18 +4585,18 @@
adjusted (in case the entry is in uppercase) unless the entry is followed by additional
material, in which case the following full stop is no longer redundant and needs to be
reinserted.
-</p><!--l. 2263--><p class="indent" > There are some convenient commands you might want to use when customizing
+</p><!--l. 2305--><p class="indent" > There are some convenient commands you might want to use when customizing
the post-<a
id="dx1-9041"></a><a
href="#glo:linktext">link-text</a> category hooks:
-</p><!--l. 2265--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2307--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-9042"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostlinkAddDescOnFirstUse </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2267--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2309--><p class="noindent" >
This will add the description in parentheses on <a
id="dx1-9043"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>.
-</p><!--l. 2270--><p class="indent" > For example, suppose you want to append the description in parentheses on <a
+</p><!--l. 2312--><p class="indent" > For example, suppose you want to append the description in parentheses on <a
id="dx1-9044"></a>first
use for entries in the <span
class="cmss-10">symbol</span><a
@@ -4606,19 +4610,19 @@
  \glsxtrpostlinkAddDescOnFirstUse
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2277--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 2279--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 2319--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 2321--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-9046"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostlinkAddSymbolOnFirstUse </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2281--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2323--><p class="noindent" >
This will append the symbol (if defined) in parentheses on <a
id="dx1-9047"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>. (Does nothing if
the symbol hasn’t been set.)
-</p><!--l. 2285--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2327--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-9048"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostlinkAddSymbolDescOnFirstUse </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2287--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2329--><p class="noindent" >
(New to v1.31.) On <a
id="dx1-9049"></a>first use, this will append <span
class="cmtt-10">\space</span>(⟨<span
@@ -4627,7 +4631,7 @@
symbol is defined otherwise it just appends <span
class="cmtt-10">\space</span>(⟨<span
class="cmti-10">description</span>⟩).
-</p><!--l. 2293--><p class="indent" > If you want to provide your own custom format be aware that you can’t use
+</p><!--l. 2335--><p class="indent" > If you want to provide your own custom format be aware that you can’t use
<span
class="cmtt-10">\ifglsused</span><a
id="dx1-9050"></a> within the post-<a
@@ -4636,7 +4640,7 @@
id="dx1-9052"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use flag</a> will have
been unset. Instead you can use
-</p><!--l. 2296--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2338--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-9053"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrifwasfirstuse{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
@@ -4643,7 +4647,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2298--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2340--><p class="noindent" >
This will do ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩ if the last used entry was the <a
id="dx1-9054"></a>first use for that entry, otherwise it
@@ -4654,7 +4658,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>, so don’t rely on it outside of the post-<a
id="dx1-9055"></a>link-text
hook.
-</p><!--l. 2306--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Note that commands like <span
+</p><!--l. 2348--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Note that commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirst</span><a
id="dx1-9056"></a> and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfull</span><a
@@ -4677,8 +4681,8 @@
id="dx1-9063"></a>first use otherwise
the inline full format would include the footnote, which is inappropriate.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 2315--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 2317--><p class="indent" > For example, if you want to place the description in a footnote after the <a
+</p><!--l. 2357--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2359--><p class="indent" > For example, if you want to place the description in a footnote after the <a
id="dx1-9064"></a>link-text
on <a
id="dx1-9065"></a>first use for the <span
@@ -4693,8 +4697,8 @@
  \glsxtrifwasfirstuse{\footnote{\glsentrydesc{\glslabel}}}{}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2323--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 2325--><p class="indent" > The <a
+<!--l. 2365--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 2367--><p class="indent" > The <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-postfootnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-postfootnote</span></a><a
id="dx1-9067"></a> abbreviation style uses the post-<a
@@ -4701,12 +4705,12 @@
id="dx1-9068"></a><a
href="#glo:linktext">link-text</a> hook to place the
footnote after trailing punctuation characters.
-</p><!--l. 2330--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2372--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 2330--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 2372--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.5 </span> <a
id="sec:entrycountmods"></a>Entry Counting Modifications</h3>
-<!--l. 2333--><p class="noindent" >If you are using <a
+<!--l. 2375--><p class="noindent" >If you are using <a
id="dx1-10001"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> you may find it more convenient to use the record count
@@ -4713,11 +4717,10 @@
commands described in <a
href="#sec:bib2gls"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">9</span> </a><a
-href="#sec:bib2gls"><span
-class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>: Managing Reference Databases<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:bib2gls --></a>
+class="cmbx-10">10</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:bib2gls">bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:bib2gls --></a>
instead.
-</p><!--l. 2337--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 2379--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsenableentrycount</span><a
id="dx1-10002"></a> command is modified to allow for the <a
href="#catattr.entrycount"><span
@@ -4729,9 +4732,9 @@
<a
href="#sec:categories"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">6</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">7</span> </a><a
href="#sec:categories">Categories<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:categories --></a>).
-</p><!--l. 2343--><p class="indent" > For example, instead of just doing:
+</p><!--l. 2385--><p class="indent" > For example, instead of just doing:
@@ -4739,7 +4742,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-64">
\glsenableentrycount
</pre>
-<!--l. 2346--><p class="nopar" > you now need to do:
+<!--l. 2388--><p class="nopar" > you now need to do:
@@ -4748,24 +4751,24 @@
\glsenableentrycount
\glssetcategoryattribute{abbreviation}{entrycount}{1}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2351--><p class="nopar" > This will enable the entry counting for entries in the <span
+<!--l. 2393--><p class="nopar" > This will enable the entry counting for entries in the <span
class="cmss-10">abbreviation</span><a
id="dx1-10004"></a> category, but any
entries assigned to other categories will be unchanged.
-</p><!--l. 2356--><p class="indent" > Further information about entry counting, including the new per-unit feature, is
+</p><!--l. 2398--><p class="indent" > Further information about entry counting, including the new per-unit feature, is
described in <a
href="#sec:entrycount"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">7.1</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">8.1</span> </a><a
href="#sec:entrycount">Entry Counting (First Use Flag)<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:entrycount --></a>.
-</p><!--l. 2359--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2401--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 2359--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 2401--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.6 </span> <a
id="sec:glsunset"></a>First Use Flag</h3>
-<!--l. 2362--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+<!--l. 2404--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package provides
-</p><!--l. 2364--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
+</p><!--l. 2406--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
class="cmtt-10">\ifglsused</span><a
id="dx1-11001"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
@@ -4775,7 +4778,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2365--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2407--><p class="noindent" >
to determine whether or not an entry has been used. This requires the entry to have
been defined. If the entry is undefined, then the underlying boolean variable doesn’t
exist and so is neither true nor false. This command will produce an error with the
@@ -4794,7 +4797,7 @@
class="cmti-10">false</span>⟩ will be performed if ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ doesn’t
exist.
-</p><!--l. 2376--><p class="indent" > The <a
+</p><!--l. 2418--><p class="indent" > The <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><a
id="dx1-11004"></a> option automatically implements <a
@@ -4807,7 +4810,7 @@
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>. In this case, you may prefer
to use:
-</p><!--l. 2380--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2422--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-11007"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrIfUnusedOrUndefined{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -4816,7 +4819,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2382--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2424--><p class="noindent" >
(new to v1.34) which does ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩ if the entry given by ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ is undefined or if
@@ -4835,20 +4838,20 @@
class="cmbx-10">2.4</span> </a><a
href="#sec:entryfmtmods">Entry Display
Style Modifications<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:entryfmtmods --></a>.)
-</p><!--l. 2391--><p class="indent" > There are two new commands provided with version 1.31+:
-</p><!--l. 2392--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2433--><p class="indent" > There are two new commands provided with version 1.31+:
+</p><!--l. 2434--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-11010"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslocalreseteach{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2394--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2436--><p class="noindent" >
and
-</p><!--l. 2396--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2438--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-11011"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslocalunseteach{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2398--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2440--><p class="noindent" >
These behave like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslocalreset </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslocalunset </span>but the argument is a
@@ -4856,7 +4859,7 @@
-</p><!--l. 2402--><p class="indent" > The internal command used by <span
+</p><!--l. 2444--><p class="indent" > The internal command used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsunset </span>is modified first to allow for the
changing in entry counting, described above, but also to allow for buffering pending
unsets when commands like <span
@@ -4872,7 +4875,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-66">
\ul{Some text about \gls{html}.}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2411--><p class="nopar" > This causes the confusing error:
+<!--l. 2453--><p class="nopar" > This causes the confusing error:
@@ -4880,7 +4883,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-67">
Glossary entry `{html}' has not been defined.
</pre>
-<!--l. 2415--><p class="nopar" > The simplest workaround is to put <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 2457--><p class="nopar" > The simplest workaround is to put <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls{html}</span></span></span> inside the argument of <span
class="cmtt-10">\mbox</span>. For
example:
@@ -4891,7 +4894,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-68">
\ul{Some text about \mbox{\gls{html}}.}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2420--><p class="nopar" > This can work provided it’s not the first use of this entry. It if is, then unsetting the
+<!--l. 2462--><p class="nopar" > This can work provided it’s not the first use of this entry. It if is, then unsetting the
first use flag causes a problem and results in the error:
@@ -4900,15 +4903,15 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-69">
! Package soul Error: Reconstruction failed.
</pre>
-<!--l. 2426--><p class="nopar" > The <span
+<!--l. 2468--><p class="nopar" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package provides a way of temporarily switching off <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsunset</span>
so that it just makes a note of the entry’s label but doesn’t actually perform the
change:
-</p><!--l. 2430--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2472--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-11013"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrStartUnsetBuffering </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2432--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2474--><p class="noindent" >
The unstarred version doesn’t check for duplicates, so the internal list may
end up with multiple occurrences of the same label. The starred version
only adds a label to the internal list if it’s not already in it. Note that this
@@ -4916,12 +4919,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsunset </span>and does not affect the local
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glslocalunset</span>.
-</p><!--l. 2440--><p class="indent" > Later you can restore <span
+</p><!--l. 2482--><p class="indent" > Later you can restore <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsunset </span>and unset all buffered labels using:
-</p><!--l. 2442--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2484--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-11014"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrStopUnsetBuffering </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2444--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2486--><p class="noindent" >
The starred form <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrStopUnsetBuffering* </span>uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslocalunset </span>instead. For
@@ -4943,37 +4946,37 @@
Next use: \gls{html}.
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2463--><p class="nopar" > Before you stop the unset buffering, you can iterate over the current buffer
+<!--l. 2505--><p class="nopar" > Before you stop the unset buffering, you can iterate over the current buffer
using
-</p><!--l. 2466--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2508--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-11015"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrForUnsetBufferedList{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">cs</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2468--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2510--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">cs</span>⟩ is a control sequence that takes a single argument (which is the entry label).
This is best used with the starred version <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrStartUnsetBuffering* </span>to avoid
duplicates.
-</p><!--l. 2473--><p class="indent" > You can discard the buffer and restore <span
+</p><!--l. 2515--><p class="indent" > You can discard the buffer and restore <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsunset </span>to its normal behaviour with
(new to v1.42):
-</p><!--l. 2475--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2517--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-11016"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrDiscardUnsetBuffering </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2477--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 2479--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Note that since the change in the first use flag now doesn’t occur until
+</p><!--l. 2519--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2521--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Note that since the change in the first use flag now doesn’t occur until
<span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrStopUnsetBuffering</span>, multiple references of the same term within the
buffering zone will always be treated as first use (if the term wasn’t used before the
buffering started). </div>
-</p><!--l. 2485--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 2487--><p class="indent" > There can still be a problem here as content within <span
+</p><!--l. 2527--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2529--><p class="indent" > There can still be a problem here as content within <span
class="cmtt-10">\mbox </span>can’t break across a
line so you may end up with an overfull line or excessive white space within the
paragraph.
-</p><!--l. 2491--><p class="indent" > An alternative is to use <span
+</p><!--l. 2533--><p class="indent" > An alternative is to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\protect</span>:
@@ -4984,7 +4987,7 @@
\ul{Some text about \protect\gls{html}.}
\GlsXtrStopUnsetBuffering
</pre>
-<!--l. 2496--><p class="nopar" > but the formatting (underlining in this example) won’t be applied. Another
+<!--l. 2538--><p class="nopar" > but the formatting (underlining in this example) won’t be applied. Another
possibility is:
@@ -5007,7 +5010,7 @@
Next use: \gls{html}.
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2519--><p class="nopar" > This moves <span
+<!--l. 2561--><p class="nopar" > This moves <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>outside of <span
class="cmtt-10">\ul </span>and uses <span
class="cmss-10">textformat</span><a
@@ -5022,7 +5025,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\gul</span>, which locally changes the regular
font and the default abbreviation font to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\ul</span>. It then uses
-</p><!--l. 2526--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2568--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-11019"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrExpandedFmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">cs</span>⟩<span
@@ -5029,7 +5032,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2528--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2570--><p class="noindent" >
which (protected) fully expands ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩ before applying ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">cs</span>⟩, which must be a control
@@ -5041,12 +5044,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">\ul </span>can’t deal with. For example, if an abbreviation style is used
that contains complex formatting or if the field value contains problematic
content.
-</p><!--l. 2538--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2580--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 2538--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 2580--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.7 </span> <a
- id="plurals"></a>Plurals</h3>
-<!--l. 2540--><p class="noindent" >Some languages, such as English, have a general rule that plurals are formed from
+ id="sec:plurals"></a>Plurals</h3>
+<!--l. 2583--><p class="noindent" >Some languages, such as English, have a general rule that plurals are formed from
the singular with a suffix appended. This isn’t an absolute rule. There are
plenty of exceptions (for example, geese, children, churches, elves, fairies,
sheep). The <span
@@ -5060,7 +5063,7 @@
the term is a symbol) and in some cases the plural may be identical to the
singular.
-</p><!--l. 2549--><p class="indent" > To make life easier for languages where the majority of plurals can simply be
+</p><!--l. 2592--><p class="indent" > To make life easier for languages where the majority of plurals can simply be
formed by appending a suffix to the singular, the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span><a
id="dx1-12003"></a> package lets the <span
@@ -5076,11 +5079,11 @@
class="cmss-10">plural</span><a
id="dx1-12007"></a> supplied as well, and you only need to use it for the
exceptions.
-</p><!--l. 2558--><p class="indent" > For languages that don’t have this general rule, the <span
+</p><!--l. 2601--><p class="indent" > For languages that don’t have this general rule, the <span
class="cmss-10">plural</span><a
id="dx1-12008"></a> field will always need to
be supplied, where needed.
-</p><!--l. 2561--><p class="indent" > There are other plural fields, such as <span
+</p><!--l. 2604--><p class="indent" > There are other plural fields, such as <span
class="cmss-10">firstplural</span><a
id="dx1-12009"></a>, <span
class="cmss-10">longplural</span><a
@@ -5090,12 +5093,11 @@
you are using a language that doesn’t have a simple suffix rule, you’ll have to
supply the plural forms if you need them (and if a plural makes sense in the
context).
-</p><!--l. 2567--><p class="indent" > If these fields are omitted, the <span
+</p><!--l. 2610--><p class="indent" > If these fields are omitted, the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span><a
id="dx1-12012"></a> package follows these rules: </p>
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 2570--><p class="noindent" >If <span
+ <li class="itemize">If <span
class="cmss-10">firstplural</span><a
id="dx1-12013"></a> is missing, then <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspluralsuffix </span>is appended to the <span
@@ -5127,9 +5129,8 @@
id="dx1-12024"></a> field) with
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glspluralsuffix </span>appended.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 2580--><p class="noindent" >If the <span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">If the <span
class="cmss-10">longplural</span><a
id="dx1-12025"></a> field is missing, then <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspluralsuffix </span>is appended to
@@ -5138,9 +5139,8 @@
id="dx1-12026"></a> field, if the <span
class="cmss-10">long</span><a
id="dx1-12027"></a> field has been supplied.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 2584--><p class="noindent" >If the <span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">If the <span
class="cmss-10">shortplural</span><a
id="dx1-12028"></a> field is missing then, <span
class="cmti-10">with the base </span><span
@@ -5153,9 +5153,8 @@
id="dx1-12030"></a> is appended to the <span
class="cmss-10">short</span><a
id="dx1-12031"></a> field.
-</p>
</li></ul>
-<!--l. 2590--><p class="indent" > This <span
+<!--l. 2633--><p class="indent" > This <span
class="cmti-10">last case is changed </span>with <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>. With this extension package, the
<span
@@ -5170,15 +5169,12 @@
implemented, <span
class="cmtt-10">\abbrvpluralsuffix </span>is redefined. In most cases its redefined to
use
-</p><!--l. 2598--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2641--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-12035"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2600--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2643--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to just <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspluralsuffix</span>. Some of the abbreviation styles have their
-
-
-
own command for the plural suffix, such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrscsuffix</span>, so if you want to
completely strip all the plural suffixes used for abbreviations then you need to
@@ -5189,7 +5185,10 @@
the style. Redefining <span
class="cmtt-10">\acrpluralsuffix </span>will have no affect, since it’s not used by the
new abbreviation mechanism.
-</p><!--l. 2610--><p class="indent" > If you require a mixture (for example, in a multilingual document), there are two
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 2653--><p class="indent" > If you require a mixture (for example, in a multilingual document), there are two
attributes that affect the short plural suffix formation. The first is <a
href="#catattr.aposplural"><span
class="cmss-10">aposplural</span></a><a
@@ -5202,7 +5201,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-73">
'\abbrvpluralsuffix
</pre>
-<!--l. 2615--><p class="nopar" > That is, an apostrophe followed by <span
+<!--l. 2658--><p class="nopar" > That is, an apostrophe followed by <span
class="cmtt-10">\abbrvpluralsuffix </span>is appended. The second
attribute is <a
href="#catattr.noshortplural"><span
@@ -5213,12 +5212,12 @@
same as <span
class="cmss-10">short</span><a
id="dx1-12039"></a>.
-</p><!--l. 2621--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2664--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 2621--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 2664--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.8 </span> <a
id="sec:nested"></a>Nested Links</h3>
-<!--l. 2624--><p class="noindent" >Complications arise when you use <span
+<!--l. 2667--><p class="noindent" >Complications arise when you use <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
id="dx1-13001"></a> in the value of the <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
@@ -5231,7 +5230,7 @@
For example, SHTML is an abbreviation for SSI enabled HTML, where SSI is an
abbreviation for Server Side Includes and HTML is an abbreviation for Hypertext
Markup Language.
-</p><!--l. 2632--><p class="indent" > Things can go wrong if we try the following with the <span
+</p><!--l. 2675--><p class="indent" > Things can go wrong if we try the following with the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package:
@@ -5242,12 +5241,11 @@
\newacronym{html}{HTML}{Hypertext Markup Language}
\newacronym{shtml}{S\gls{html}}{\gls{ssi} enabled \gls{html}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2638--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 2640--><p class="indent" > The main problems are:
+<!--l. 2681--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 2683--><p class="indent" > The main problems are:
</p><ol class="enumerate1" >
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-13006x1">
- <!--l. 2642--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-13006x1"><a
id="itm:nestedfirstucprob"></a> The first letter upper casing commands, such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\Gls</span><a
id="dx1-13007"></a>, won’t work for the
@@ -5260,11 +5258,10 @@
-</p>
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-75">
\gls{\uppercase ssi} enabled \gls{html}
</pre>
- <!--l. 2648--><p class="nopar" > which just doesn’t work. Grouping the <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+ <!--l. 2691--><p class="nopar" > which just doesn’t work. Grouping the <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls{ssi}</span></span></span> doesn’t work either as this
will effectively try to do
@@ -5274,7 +5271,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-76">
\uppercase{\gls{ssi}} enabled \gls{html}
</pre>
- <!--l. 2653--><p class="nopar" > This will upper case the label <span
+ <!--l. 2696--><p class="nopar" > This will upper case the label <span
class="cmtt-10">ssi </span>so the entry won’t be recognised.
This problem will also occur if you use the all capitals version, such as
<span
@@ -5281,9 +5278,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">\GLS</span><a
id="dx1-13009"></a>.
</p></li>
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-13011x2">
- <!--l. 2658--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-13011x2"><a
id="itm:nonexpandprob"></a> The long and abbreviated forms accessed through <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentrylong</span><a
id="dx1-13012"></a> and
@@ -5291,18 +5287,16 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryshort</span><a
id="dx1-13013"></a> are no longer expandable and so can’t be used be used in
contexts that require this, such as PDF bookmarks.
- </p></li>
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-13015x3">
- <!--l. 2663--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ </li>
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-13015x3"><a
id="itm:nestedsortprob"></a> The nested commands may end up in the <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
id="dx1-13016"></a> key, which will confuse the
indexing.
- </p></li>
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-13018x4">
- <!--l. 2666--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ </li>
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-13018x4"><a
id="itm:inconsistentfirstuseprob"></a> The <span
class="cmtt-10">shtml </span>entry produces inconsistent results depending on whether the <span
class="cmtt-10">ssi</span>
@@ -5315,19 +5309,18 @@
-</p>
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-77">
This section discusses \gls{ssi}, \gls{html} and \gls{shtml}.
</pre>
- <!--l. 2672--><p class="nopar" > This produces:
+ <!--l. 2715--><p class="nopar" > This produces:
</p><blockquote class="quote">
- <!--l. 2675--><p class="noindent" >This section discusses server side includes (SSI), hypertext
+ <!--l. 2718--><p class="noindent" >This section discusses server side includes (SSI), hypertext
markup language (HTML) and SSI enabled HTML (SHTML).</p></blockquote>
- <!--l. 2678--><p class="noindent" >So the <a
+ <!--l. 2721--><p class="noindent" >So the <a
id="dx1-13019"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> of the <span
class="cmtt-10">shtml </span>entry produces “SSI enabled HTML (SHTML)”.
- </p><!--l. 2681--><p class="noindent" >Now let’s suppose the <span
+ </p><!--l. 2724--><p class="noindent" >Now let’s suppose the <span
class="cmtt-10">html </span>entry is used before the <span
class="cmtt-10">shtml </span>but the <span
class="cmtt-10">ssi </span>entry is
@@ -5341,17 +5334,17 @@
The sample files are either \gls{html} or \gls{shtml}, but let's
first discuss \gls{ssi}.
</pre>
- <!--l. 2687--><p class="nopar" > This produces:
+ <!--l. 2730--><p class="nopar" > This produces:
</p><blockquote class="quote">
- <!--l. 2690--><p class="noindent" >The sample files are either hypertext markup language (HTML)
+ <!--l. 2733--><p class="noindent" >The sample files are either hypertext markup language (HTML)
or server side includes (SSI) enabled HTML (SHTML), but let’s
first discuss SSI.</p></blockquote>
- <!--l. 2695--><p class="noindent" >So the <a
+ <!--l. 2738--><p class="noindent" >So the <a
id="dx1-13020"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> of the <span
class="cmtt-10">shtml </span>entry now produces “server side includes (SSI)
enabled HTML (SHTML)”, which looks a bit strange.
- </p><!--l. 2699--><p class="noindent" >Now let’s suppose the <span
+ </p><!--l. 2742--><p class="noindent" >Now let’s suppose the <span
class="cmtt-10">shtml </span>entry is used before (or without) the other two
entries:
@@ -5361,17 +5354,17 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-79">
This article is an introduction to \gls{shtml}.
</pre>
- <!--l. 2703--><p class="nopar" > This produces:
+ <!--l. 2746--><p class="nopar" > This produces:
</p><blockquote class="quote">
- <!--l. 2706--><p class="noindent" >This article is an introduction to server side includes (SSI)
+ <!--l. 2749--><p class="noindent" >This article is an introduction to server side includes (SSI)
enabled hypertext markup language (HTML) (SHTML).</p></blockquote>
- <!--l. 2709--><p class="noindent" >So the <a
+ <!--l. 2752--><p class="noindent" >So the <a
id="dx1-13021"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> of the <span
class="cmtt-10">shtml </span>entry now produces “server side includes (SSI)
enabled hypertext markup language (HTML) (SHTML)”, which is even more
strange.
- </p><!--l. 2713--><p class="noindent" >This is all aggravated by setting the style using the <span
+ </p><!--l. 2756--><p class="noindent" >This is all aggravated by setting the style using the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package’s
<span
class="cmtt-10">\setacronymstyle</span>. For example:
@@ -5382,7 +5375,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-80">
\setacronymstyle{long-short}
</pre>
- <!--l. 2718--><p class="nopar" > as this references the label through the use of <span
+ <!--l. 2761--><p class="nopar" > as this references the label through the use of <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslabel </span>when displaying the
long and short forms, but this value changes with each use of <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>, so
@@ -5394,7 +5387,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">html </span>by
<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls{html}</span></span></span>.
- </p><!--l. 2726--><p class="noindent" >Another oddity occurs if you reset the <span
+ </p><!--l. 2769--><p class="noindent" >Another oddity occurs if you reset the <span
class="cmtt-10">html </span>entry between uses of the <span
class="cmtt-10">shtml</span>
entry. For example:
@@ -5405,10 +5398,10 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-81">
\gls{shtml} ... \glsreset{html}\gls{shtml}
</pre>
- <!--l. 2730--><p class="nopar" > The next use of <span
+ <!--l. 2773--><p class="nopar" > The next use of <span
class="cmtt-10">shtml </span>produces “Shypertext markup language (HTML)”,
which is downright weird.
- </p><!--l. 2734--><p class="noindent" >Even without this, the short form has nested formatting commands, which
+ </p><!--l. 2777--><p class="noindent" >Even without this, the short form has nested formatting commands, which
amount to <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\acronymfont{S\acronymfont{HTML}}</span></span></span>. This may not be a problem
for some styles, but if you use one of the “sm” styles (that use <span
@@ -5416,9 +5409,8 @@
id="dx1-13023"></a>),
this will produce an odd result.
</p></li>
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-13025x5">
- <!--l. 2740--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-13025x5"><a
id="itm:indexingprob"></a> Each time the <span
class="cmtt-10">shtml </span>entry is used, the <span
class="cmtt-10">html </span>entry will also be indexed and
@@ -5429,10 +5421,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">html</span>
entries. This kind of duplication in the location list isn’t usually particularly
helpful to the reader.
- </p></li>
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-13028x6">
- <!--l. 2746--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ </li>
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-13028x6"><a
id="itm:nestedhyplinkprob"></a> If <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
id="dx1-13029"></a> is in use, you’ll get nested hyperlinks and there’s no consistent way
@@ -5442,16 +5433,15 @@
HTML (SHTML)” link, they may be directed to the HTML entry
in the glossary or they may be directed to the SHTML entry in the
glossary.
-</p>
</li></ol>
-<!--l. 2755--><p class="indent" > For these reasons it’s better to use the simple expandable commands
-like <span
+<!--l. 2798--><p class="indent" > For these reasons it’s better to use the simple expandable commands like
+<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentrytext</span><a
id="dx1-13031"></a> or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryshort</span><a
- id="dx1-13032"></a> in the definition of other entries
-(although that doesn’t fix the first problem). Alternatively use something
-like:
+ id="dx1-13032"></a> in the definition of other entries (although that
+doesn’t fix the first problem).
+</p><!--l. 2802--><p class="indent" > Alternatively use something like:
@@ -5461,7 +5451,7 @@
 [description={\acrshort{ssi} enabled \acrshort{html}}]
 {shtml}{SHTML}{SSI enabled HTML}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2763--><p class="nopar" > with <span
+<!--l. 2807--><p class="nopar" > with <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>or:
@@ -5472,7 +5462,7 @@
 [description={\glsxtrshort{ssi} enabled \glsxtrshort{html}}]
 {shtml}{SHTML}{SSI enabled HTML}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2769--><p class="nopar" > with <span
+<!--l. 2813--><p class="nopar" > with <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>. This fixes all the above listed problems (as long as you don’t
use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdesc</span><a
@@ -5483,7 +5473,7 @@
id="dx1-13034"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> issue, but it doesn’t fix any of the other problems listed
above.
-</p><!--l. 2776--><p class="indent" > If it’s simply that you want to use the abbreviation font, you can use
+</p><!--l. 2820--><p class="indent" > If it’s simply that you want to use the abbreviation font, you can use
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont</span>:
@@ -5497,10 +5487,17 @@
\newabbreviation{shtml}{shtml}{\glsabbrvfont{ssi} enabled
\glsabbrvfont{html}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2785--><p class="nopar" > This will pick up the font style setting of the outer entry (shtml, in the above case).
+<!--l. 2829--><p class="nopar" > This will pick up the font style setting of the outer entry (shtml, in the above case).
This isn’t a problem in the above example as all the abbreviations use the same
style.
-</p><!--l. 2790--><p class="indent" > However if you’re really determined to use <span
+</p><!--l. 2834--><p class="indent" > If the term can simply be treated as a series of previously defined entries, then
+consider using multi-entries (or compound sets). See <a
+href="#sec:multientries"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:multientries">Multi (or
+Compound) Entries<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:multientries --></a> for further details.
+</p><!--l. 2838--><p class="indent" > However, if you’re really determined to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
id="dx1-13035"></a> in a field that may be included
within some <a
@@ -5524,7 +5521,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-85">
\gls{ssi} enabled \gls{html}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2801--><p class="nopar" > is treated as
+<!--l. 2849--><p class="nopar" > is treated as
@@ -5533,7 +5530,7 @@
{\glstext[hyper=false,noindex]{ssi}} enabled
{\glstext[hyper=false,noindex]{html}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2806--><p class="nopar" > This overcomes problems <a
+<!--l. 2854--><p class="nopar" > This overcomes problems <a
href="#itm:inconsistentfirstuseprob">4<!--tex4ht:ref: itm:inconsistentfirstuseprob --></a>, <a
href="#itm:indexingprob">5<!--tex4ht:ref: itm:indexingprob --></a> and <a
href="#itm:nestedhyplinkprob">6<!--tex4ht:ref: itm:nestedhyplinkprob --></a> listed above, but still doesn’t fix problems <a
@@ -5549,7 +5546,7 @@
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-13040"></a>).
-</p><!--l. 2817--><p class="indent" > Additionally, any instance of the long form commands, such as <span
+</p><!--l. 2865--><p class="indent" > Additionally, any instance of the long form commands, such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlong</span><a
id="dx1-13041"></a> or
<span
@@ -5587,7 +5584,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-87">
\newacronym{shtml}{SHTML}{\acrshort{ssi} enabled \acrshort{html}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2830--><p class="nopar" > then (using the <a
+<!--l. 2878--><p class="nopar" > then (using the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short</span></a><a
id="dx1-13047"></a> style) the <a
@@ -5601,7 +5598,7 @@
{\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{ssi}}} enabled
{\acronymfont{\glsentryshort{html}}} (SHTML)
</pre>
-<!--l. 2836--><p class="nopar" > whereas if the entry is defined as:
+<!--l. 2884--><p class="nopar" > whereas if the entry is defined as:
@@ -5610,7 +5607,7 @@
\newabbreviation{shtml}{SHTML}{\glsxtrshort{ssi} enabled
\glsxtrshort{html}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2841--><p class="nopar" > then the <a
+<!--l. 2889--><p class="nopar" > then the <a
id="dx1-13049"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> will be like:
@@ -5621,7 +5618,7 @@
{\glsabbrvfont{\glsentryshort{ssi}}} enabled
{\glsabbrvfont{\glsentryshort{html}}} (SHTML)
</pre>
-<!--l. 2846--><p class="nopar" > Note that the first optional argument of <span
+<!--l. 2894--><p class="nopar" > Note that the first optional argument of <span
class="cmtt-10">\acrshort </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort </span>is ignored in
this context. (The final optional argument will be inserted, if present.) The
@@ -5632,8 +5629,8 @@
id="dx1-13051"></a>. Note
that <span
class="cmtt-10">\acrshort </span>doesn’t set the abbreviation style.
-</p><!--l. 2854--><p class="indent" > Alternatively you can use:
-</p><!--l. 2855--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2902--><p class="indent" > Alternatively you can use:
+</p><!--l. 2903--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-13052"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrp{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">field</span>⟩<span
@@ -5640,7 +5637,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2857--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2905--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">field</span>⟩ is the field label and corresponds to a command in the form <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>⟨<span
@@ -5650,30 +5647,30 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtr</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">field</span>⟩ (e.g. <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort</span>).
-</p><!--l. 2862--><p class="indent" > There’s a shortcut command for the most common fields:
-</p><!--l. 2863--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2910--><p class="indent" > There’s a shortcut command for the most common fields:
+</p><!--l. 2911--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-13053"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsps{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2865--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2913--><p class="noindent" >
which is equivalent to <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrp{short}</span></span></span><span
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>, and
-</p><!--l. 2867--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2915--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-13054"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2869--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2917--><p class="noindent" >
which is equivalent to <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrp{text}</span></span></span><span
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>.
-</p><!--l. 2872--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 2920--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrp </span>command behaves much like the <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmt</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">field</span>⟩ commands described
@@ -5691,12 +5688,12 @@
id="dx1-13056"></a> to <span
class="cmtt-10">true</span>. If you want to change this, you can
use
-</p><!--l. 2879--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2927--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-13057"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsetpopts{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2881--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2929--><p class="noindent" >
For example:
@@ -5705,15 +5702,15 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-91">
\glsxtrsetpopts{hyper=false}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2885--><p class="nopar" > will just switch off the hyperlinks but not the indexing. Be careful using
+<!--l. 2933--><p class="nopar" > will just switch off the hyperlinks but not the indexing. Be careful using
this command or you can end up back to the original problem of nested
links.
-</p><!--l. 2890--><p class="indent" > The hyper link is re-enabled within glossaries. This is done through the
+</p><!--l. 2938--><p class="indent" > The hyper link is re-enabled within glossaries. This is done through the
command:
-</p><!--l. 2892--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2940--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-13058"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossxtrsetpopts </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2894--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2942--><p class="noindent" >
which by default just does
@@ -5722,7 +5719,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-92">
\glsxtrsetpopts{noindex}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2898--><p class="nopar" > You can redefine this if you want to adjust the setting when <span
+<!--l. 2946--><p class="nopar" > You can redefine this if you want to adjust the setting when <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrp </span>is used in the
glossary. For example:
@@ -5732,8 +5729,8 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-93">
\renewcommand{\glossxtrsetpopts}{\glsxtrsetpopts{noindex=false}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2903--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 2905--><p class="indent" > For example,
+<!--l. 2951--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 2953--><p class="indent" > For example,
@@ -5741,7 +5738,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-94">
\glsxtrp{short}{ssi}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2908--><p class="nopar" > is equivalent to
+<!--l. 2956--><p class="nopar" > is equivalent to
@@ -5751,7 +5748,7 @@
 \glsxtrshort[hyper=false,noindex]{ssi}[]%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2914--><p class="nopar" > in the main body of the document or
+<!--l. 2962--><p class="nopar" > in the main body of the document or
@@ -5761,8 +5758,8 @@
 \glsxtrshort[noindex]{ssi}[]%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2920--><p class="nopar" > inside the glossary. (Note the post-link hook is locally disabled.)
-</p><!--l. 2923--><p class="indent" > If <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 2968--><p class="nopar" > inside the glossary. (Note the post-link hook is locally disabled.)
+</p><!--l. 2971--><p class="indent" > If <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrp{short}{ssi}</span></span></span> occurs in a sectioning mark, it’s equivalent
to
@@ -5772,11 +5769,11 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-97">
{\glsxtrheadshort{ssi}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2927--><p class="nopar" > (which recognises the <a
+<!--l. 2975--><p class="nopar" > (which recognises the <a
href="#catattr.headuc"><span
class="cmss-10">headuc</span></a><a
id="dx1-13059"></a> attribute.)
-</p><!--l. 2930--><p class="indent" > If <span
+</p><!--l. 2978--><p class="indent" > If <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
id="dx1-13060"></a> has been loaded, then the bookmark will use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentry</span>⟨<span
@@ -5783,8 +5780,8 @@
class="cmti-10">field</span>⟩
(<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryshort{ssi}</span></span></span> in the above example).
-</p><!--l. 2934--><p class="indent" > There are similar commands
-</p><!--l. 2935--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2982--><p class="indent" > There are similar commands
+</p><!--l. 2983--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-13061"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrp{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">field</span>⟩<span
@@ -5791,9 +5788,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2937--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2985--><p class="noindent" >
for first letter upper case and
-</p><!--l. 2939--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 2987--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-13062"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSxtrp{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">field</span>⟩<span
@@ -5800,9 +5797,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 2941--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 2989--><p class="noindent" >
for all upper case.
-</p><!--l. 2944--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you use any of the case-changing commands, such as <span
+</p><!--l. 2992--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you use any of the case-changing commands, such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\Gls</span><a
id="dx1-13063"></a> or <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glstext</span><a
@@ -5814,8 +5811,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glstext</span><a
id="dx1-13066"></a>, in the definition of entries for any of the fields that may be used
by those case-changing commands. </div>
-</p><!--l. 2950--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 2952--><p class="indent" > You can, with care, protect against issue <a
+</p><!--l. 2998--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3000--><p class="indent" > You can, with care, protect against issue <a
href="#itm:nestedfirstucprob">1<!--tex4ht:ref: itm:nestedfirstucprob --></a> by inserting an empty group at the
start if the long form starts with a command that breaks the first letter uppercasing
commands like <span
@@ -5822,7 +5819,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\Gls</span>, but you still won’t be able to use the all caps commands, such
as <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLS</span>.
-</p><!--l. 2958--><p class="indent" > If you <span
+</p><!--l. 3006--><p class="indent" > If you <span
class="cmti-10">really need </span>nested commands, the safest method is
@@ -5832,8 +5829,8 @@
\newabbreviation{shtml}{shtml}{{}\glsxtrp{short}{ssi} enabled
\glsxtrp{short}{html}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 2962--><p class="nopar" > but be aware that it may have some unexpected results occasionally.
-</p><!--l. 2965--><p class="indent" > Example document:
+<!--l. 3010--><p class="nopar" > but be aware that it may have some unexpected results occasionally.
+</p><!--l. 3013--><p class="indent" > Example document:
@@ -5863,13 +5860,13 @@
\printglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3003--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 3005--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 3051--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 3053--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 3005--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 3053--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.9 </span> <a
id="sec:acronymmods"></a>Acronym Style Modifications</h3>
-<!--l. 3008--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+<!--l. 3056--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package provides a new way of dealing with abbreviations and
@@ -5894,7 +5891,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-100">
\setabbreviationstyle[acronym]{long-short}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3016--><p class="nopar" > before you define any entries. If you have used commands like <span
+<!--l. 3064--><p class="nopar" > before you define any entries. If you have used commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\acrshort</span><a
id="dx1-14002"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\acrlong</span><a
@@ -5928,7 +5925,7 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\acrshort</span><a
id="dx1-14013"></a> etc.
-</p><!--l. 3027--><p class="indent" > For example, the following document using just <span
+</p><!--l. 3075--><p class="indent" > For example, the following document using just <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>
@@ -5945,7 +5942,7 @@
\printglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3038--><p class="nopar" > can be easily adapted to use <span
+<!--l. 3086--><p class="nopar" > can be easily adapted to use <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>:
@@ -5962,7 +5959,7 @@
\printglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3050--><p class="nopar" > Table <a
+<!--l. 3098--><p class="nopar" > Table <a
href="#tab:acrabbrvstyles">2.1<!--tex4ht:ref: tab:acrabbrvstyles --></a> lists the nearest equivalent <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>abbreviation styles for the
predefined acronym styles provided by <span
@@ -5978,7 +5975,7 @@
-<!--l. 3057--><p class="indent" > <a
+<!--l. 3105--><p class="indent" > <a
id="tab:acrabbrvstyles"></a></p><hr class="float" /><div class="float"
>
@@ -6002,34 +5999,34 @@
id="TBL-2-1" /><col
id="TBL-2-2" /></colgroup><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-1-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-1-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3064--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3112--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmbx-10">Old Style Name</span> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-1-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3065--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td10"><!--l. 3113--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmbx-10">New Style Name</span> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-2-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-2-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3066--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3114--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">long-sc-short</span><a
id="dx1-14015"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-2-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3066--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3114--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-sc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-sc</span></a><a
id="dx1-14016"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-3-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-3-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3067--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3115--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">long-sm-short</span><a
id="dx1-14017"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-3-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3067--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3115--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-sm"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-sm</span></a><a
id="dx1-14018"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-4-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-4-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3068--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3116--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">long-sp-short</span><a
id="dx1-14019"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-4-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3068--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3116--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short</span></a><a
id="dx1-14020"></a> <br
@@ -6046,64 +6043,64 @@
class="cmsy-10">}}</span> </p> </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-5-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-5-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3070--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3118--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">short-long</span><a
id="dx1-14021"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-5-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3070--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3118--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long</span></a><a
id="dx1-14022"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-6-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-6-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3071--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3119--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">sc-short-long</span><a
id="dx1-14023"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-6-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3071--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3119--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sc-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sc-long</span></a><a
id="dx1-14024"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-7-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-7-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3072--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3120--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">sm-short-long</span><a
id="dx1-14025"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-7-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3072--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3120--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sm-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sm-long</span></a><a
id="dx1-14026"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-8-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-8-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3073--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3121--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-desc</span><a
id="dx1-14027"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-8-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3073--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3121--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-14028"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-9-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-9-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3074--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3122--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">long-sc-short-desc</span><a
id="dx1-14029"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-9-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3074--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3122--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-sc-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-sc-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-14030"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-10-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-10-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3075--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3123--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">long-sm-short-desc</span><a
id="dx1-14031"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-10-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3075--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3123--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-sm-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-sm-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-14032"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-11-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-11-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3076--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3124--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">long-sp-short-desc</span><a
id="dx1-14033"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-11-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3076--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3124--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-14034"></a> <br
@@ -6120,100 +6117,100 @@
class="cmsy-10">}}</span> </p> </td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-12-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-12-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3078--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3126--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">short-long-desc</span><a
id="dx1-14035"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-12-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3078--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3126--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-14036"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-13-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-13-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3079--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3127--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">sc-short-long-desc</span><a
id="dx1-14037"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-13-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3079--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3127--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sc-long-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sc-long-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-14038"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-14-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-14-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3080--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3128--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">sm-short-long-desc</span><a
id="dx1-14039"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-14-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3080--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3128--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sm-long-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sm-long-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-14040"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-15-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-15-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3081--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3129--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">dua</span><a
id="dx1-14041"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-15-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3081--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3129--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort</span></a><a
id="dx1-14042"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-16-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-16-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3082--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3130--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">dua-desc</span><a
id="dx1-14043"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-16-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3082--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3130--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-14044"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-17-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-17-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3083--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3131--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">footnote</span><a
id="dx1-14045"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-17-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3083--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3131--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote</span></a><a
id="dx1-14046"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-18-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-18-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3084--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3132--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">footnote-sc</span><a
id="dx1-14047"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-18-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3084--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3132--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sc-footnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sc-footnote</span></a><a
id="dx1-14048"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-19-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-19-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3085--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3133--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">footnote-sm</span><a
id="dx1-14049"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-19-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3085--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3133--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sm-footnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sm-footnote</span></a><a
id="dx1-14050"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-20-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-20-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3086--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3134--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">footnote-desc</span><a
id="dx1-14051"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-20-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3086--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3134--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-14052"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-21-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-21-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3087--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3135--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">footnote-sc-desc</span><a
id="dx1-14053"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-21-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3087--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3135--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sc-footnote-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sc-footnote-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-14054"></a> </p></td>
</tr><tr
style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-22-"><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-22-1"
-class="td01"><!--l. 3088--><p class="noindent" ><span
+class="td01"><!--l. 3136--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmss-10">footnote-sm-desc</span><a
id="dx1-14055"></a> </p></td><td style="white-space:normal; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-22-2"
-class="td10"><!--l. 3088--><p class="noindent" ><a
+class="td10"><!--l. 3136--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sm-footnote-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sm-footnote-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-14056"></a> </p></td></tr></table></div>
@@ -6222,7 +6219,7 @@
</div><hr class="endfloat" />
</div>
-<!--l. 3092--><p class="indent" > The reason for introducing the new style of abbreviation commands provided by
+<!--l. 3140--><p class="indent" > The reason for introducing the new style of abbreviation commands provided by
<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>is because the original acronym commands provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>are
@@ -6231,13 +6228,13 @@
However, if you really want to restore the generic acronym function provided by
<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>you can use
-</p><!--l. 3099--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3147--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-14057"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\RestoreAcronyms </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3101--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3149--><p class="noindent" >
(before any use of <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span>).
-</p><!--l. 3104--><p class="indent" > <span
+</p><!--l. 3152--><p class="indent" > <span
class="cmtt-10">\RestoreAcronyms </span>should not be used in combination with the newer
<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>abbreviations. Don’t combine old and new style entries with the same
@@ -6247,7 +6244,7 @@
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>acronym mechanism doesn’t work well with the newer
<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>commands.
-</p><!--l. 3110--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you use <span
+</p><!--l. 3158--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you use <span
class="cmtt-10">\RestoreAcronyms</span>, don’t use any of the commands provided by
<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>intended for abbreviations (such as <span
@@ -6259,8 +6256,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span><a
id="dx1-14061"></a> as it will cause unexpected results.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 3116--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 3118--><p class="indent" > In general, there’s rarely any need for <span
+</p><!--l. 3164--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3166--><p class="indent" > In general, there’s rarely any need for <span
class="cmtt-10">\RestoreAcronyms</span>. If you have a document
that uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronymstyle</span><a
@@ -6275,12 +6272,12 @@
class="cmbx-10">4.5</span> </a><a
href="#sec:newabbrvstyle">Defining New Abbreviation Styles<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:newabbrvstyle --></a> for further
details.)
-</p><!--l. 3125--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3173--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-14064"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsacspace{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3127--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3175--><p class="noindent" >
The space command <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsacspace </span>used by the <span
class="cmss-10">long-sp-short</span><a
@@ -6287,14 +6284,14 @@
id="dx1-14065"></a> acronym style provided
by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>is modified so that it uses
-</p><!--l. 3131--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3179--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-14066"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsacspacemax </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3133--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3181--><p class="noindent" >
instead of the hard-coded 3em. This is a command not a length and so can be
changed using <span
class="cmtt-10">\renewcommand</span>.
-</p><!--l. 3137--><p class="indent" > Any of the new abbreviation styles that use <span
+</p><!--l. 3185--><p class="indent" > Any of the new abbreviation styles that use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfullsep</span><a
id="dx1-14067"></a> (such as <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
@@ -6309,15 +6306,15 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-103">
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrfullsep}[1]{\glsacspace{#1}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3142--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 3144--><p class="indent" > The <a
+<!--l. 3190--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 3192--><p class="indent" > The <a
id="dx1-14069"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> acronym font command
-</p><!--l. 3145--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"> <span
+</p><!--l. 3193--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"> <span
class="cmtt-10">\firstacronymfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3147--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3195--><p class="noindent" >
is redefined to use the <a
id="dx1-14070"></a>first use abbreviation font command <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstabbrvfont</span><a
@@ -6324,12 +6321,12 @@
id="dx1-14071"></a>.
This will be reset if you use <span
class="cmtt-10">\RestoreAcronyms</span>.
-</p><!--l. 3152--><p class="indent" > The subsequent use acronym font command
-</p><!--l. 3153--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"> <span
+</p><!--l. 3200--><p class="indent" > The subsequent use acronym font command
+</p><!--l. 3201--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"> <span
class="cmtt-10">\acronymfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3155--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3203--><p class="noindent" >
is redefined to use the subsequent use abbreviation font command <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont</span><a
id="dx1-14072"></a>.
@@ -6336,10 +6333,10 @@
This will be reset if you use <span
class="cmtt-10">\RestoreAcronyms</span>.
</p>
-<!--l. 3160--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 3208--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.10 </span> <a
- id="glossaries"></a>Glossaries</h3>
-<!--l. 3162--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ id="sec:glossaries"></a>Glossaries</h3>
+<!--l. 3211--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmtt-10">\newignoredglossary</span><a
id="dx1-15001"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
@@ -6353,21 +6350,21 @@
<a
href="#sec:categories"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">6</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">7</span> </a><a
href="#sec:categories">Categories<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:categories --></a> for further details.) As from v1.12 both the starred and
unstarred version check that the glossary doesn’t already exist. (The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>
package omits this check.)
-</p><!--l. 3171--><p class="indent" > You can now provide an ignored glossary with:
-</p><!--l. 3172--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3220--><p class="indent" > You can now provide an ignored glossary with:
+</p><!--l. 3221--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-15003"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\provideignoredglossary{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">type</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3174--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3223--><p class="noindent" >
which will only define the glossary if it doesn’t already exist. This also has a starred
version that doesn’t automatically switch off hyperlinks.
-</p><!--l. 3179--><p class="indent" > The individual glossary displaying commands <span
+</p><!--l. 3228--><p class="indent" > The individual glossary displaying commands <span
class="cmtt-10">\printglossary</span><a
id="dx1-15004"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\printnoidxglossary</span><a
@@ -6376,8 +6373,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossary </span>have extra keys:
</p>
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 3184--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmss-10">target</span><a
id="dx1-15006"></a>. This is a boolean key which can be used to switch off the automatic
hypertarget for each entry. Unlike <span
@@ -6388,39 +6384,44 @@
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 3191--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmss-10">targetnameprefix</span><a
id="dx1-15007"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">={</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
-class="cmtt-10">}</span>. Another way of avoiding duplicate target names
- is to set a prefix used for the names. Unlike changing <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glolinkprefix</span>
- this doesn’t affect any hyperlinks (such as those created with <span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span>. Another way of avoiding duplicate target names is to
+ set a prefix used for the names. Unlike changing <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glolinkprefix </span>this doesn’t
+ affect any hyperlinks (such as those created with <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>).
+ <!--l. 3244--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> This doesn’t include the navigation hyper group targets in styles such as
+ <span
+class="cmss-10">listhypergroup</span><a
+ id="dx1-15008"></a>. The link name for these is given by <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsnavhyperlinkname</span><a
+ id="dx1-15009"></a>.
+ </div>
+ </p><!--l. 3248--><p class="noindent" >
</p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 3196--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmss-10">prefix</span><a
- id="dx1-15008"></a><span
+ id="dx1-15010"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">={</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>. If you do actually want to locally change <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glolinkprefix</span>,
- you can use the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glolinkprefix</span>, you
+ can use the <span
class="cmss-10">prefix</span><a
- id="dx1-15009"></a> key instead. You need to use the matching <span
+ id="dx1-15011"></a> key instead. You need to use the matching <span
class="cmss-10">prefix</span><a
- id="dx1-15010"></a>
- key in commands like <span
+ id="dx1-15012"></a> key in
+ commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 3202--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmss-10">label</span><a
- id="dx1-15011"></a><span
+ id="dx1-15013"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">={</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>. Labels the glossary with <span
@@ -6431,18 +6432,17 @@
class="cmtt-10">\@currentlabelname </span>to the glossary’s TOC title (to provide text for
<span
class="cmtt-10">\nameref</span>). You can also set the label before the glossary using:
- </p><!--l. 3207--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-15012"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 3262--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-15014"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsetglossarylabel{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 3209--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 3264--><p class="noindent" >
but take care of duplicate labels if it’s not scoped.
</p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 3213--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmss-10">groups</span><a
- id="dx1-15013"></a>. This is a boolean key (new to v1.44) designed for use with
+ id="dx1-15015"></a>. This is a boolean key (new to v1.44) designed for use with
<span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossary </span>(and other <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrt</span><span
@@ -6450,10 +6450,10 @@
with <span
class="cmtt-10">\printglossary </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\printnoidxglossary</span>.
- </p><!--l. 3218--><p class="noindent" >If true (default), group formation (group header and group skip) will be
+ <!--l. 3273--><p class="noindent" >If true (default), group formation (group header and group skip) will be
attempted if the <span
class="cmss-10">group</span><a
- id="dx1-15014"></a> key has been defined and set. Note that some styles
+ id="dx1-15016"></a> key has been defined and set. Note that some styles
ignore the header and group skip commands so there may not be a noticeable
difference in those cases. If this key is set to false, no group formation will
occur so there won’t be any group markup to separate letter groups so
@@ -6460,10 +6460,9 @@
there will be no visual separation regardless of style or the group skip
setting.
</p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 3227--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmss-10">leveloffset</span><a
- id="dx1-15015"></a>. This key (new to v1.44) is designed for use with <span
+ id="dx1-15017"></a>. This key (new to v1.44) is designed for use with <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossary</span>
(and other <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrt</span><span
@@ -6471,7 +6470,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\printglossary</span>
and <span
class="cmtt-10">\printnoidxglossary</span>.
- </p><!--l. 3232--><p class="noindent" >The value may either be a simple integer ⟨<span
+ <!--l. 3287--><p class="noindent" >The value may either be a simple integer ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">n</span>⟩ to indicate assignment or in the
form <span
class="cmtt-10">++</span>⟨<span
@@ -6481,26 +6480,26 @@
class="cmmi-10">N </span>more than it would normally be (where <span
class="cmmi-10">N </span>is
the level offset). For example, a top-level entry (that is, an entry without a
+ parent) would normally have a hierarchical level of 0. With a level offset of 1,
- parent) would normally have a hierarchical level of 0. With a level offset of 1,
it would be treated by the glossary style as though it was actually a
level 1 entry. (Remember that some styles don’t support hierarchical
glossaries.)
- </p><!--l. 3243--><p class="noindent" >Note that the group formation (if supported) will still occur between entries
+ </p><!--l. 3298--><p class="noindent" >Note that the group formation (if supported) will still occur between entries
that don’t have a parent, regardless of the level offset. This can cause odd
results but can be switched off with <span
class="cmss-10">groups</span><a
- id="dx1-15016"></a>. See <a
+ id="dx1-15018"></a>. See <a
href="https://dickimaw-books.com/gallery/index.php?label=bib2gls-inner" >Gallery: Inner or Nested
Glossaries</a> for an example.</p></li></ul>
-<!--l. 3250--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 3305--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 3250--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 3305--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.11 </span> <a
id="sec:glosstylemods"></a>Glossary Style Modifications</h3>
-<!--l. 3253--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+<!--l. 3308--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-stylemods</span><a
id="dx1-16001"></a> package (more conveniently loaded through the
<span
@@ -6511,12 +6510,11 @@
provided with the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package. These modifications are described in more detail
in <a
-href="#x1-190002.11.3"><span
+href="#sec:stylemods"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
class="cmbx-10">2.11.3</span> </a><a
-href="#x1-190002.11.3">The <span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-stylemods </span>Package<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:stylemods --></a>.
-</p><!--l. 3260--><p class="indent" > The <span
+href="#sec:stylemods">The glossaries-extra-stylemods Package<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:stylemods --></a>.
+</p><!--l. 3315--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span><a
id="dx1-16003"></a> package tries to determine the group title from its label by first
checking if <span
@@ -6537,7 +6535,7 @@
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩
which shouldn’t clash with another package. You can set the group title
using
-</p><!--l. 3272--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3327--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-16006"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsetgrouptitle{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -6544,7 +6542,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">title</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3274--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3329--><p class="noindent" >
For example:
@@ -6553,9 +6551,9 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-104">
\glsxtrsetgrouptitle{A}{A (a)}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3278--><p class="nopar" > This uses a global assignment. If you need to scope the change you can
+<!--l. 3333--><p class="nopar" > This uses a global assignment. If you need to scope the change you can
use
-</p><!--l. 3281--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3336--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-16007"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlocalsetgrouptitle{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -6562,13 +6560,13 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">title</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3283--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 3285--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3338--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3340--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 3285--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 3340--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.11.1 </span> <a
id="sec:stylehooks"></a>Style Hooks</h4>
-<!--l. 3288--><p class="noindent" >The commands <span
+<!--l. 3343--><p class="noindent" >The commands <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentryname</span><a
id="dx1-17001"></a> and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentrydesc</span><a
@@ -6589,11 +6587,11 @@
<a
href="#sec:categories"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">6</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">7</span> </a><a
href="#sec:categories">Categories<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:categories --></a>). This means you can make simple font or case-changing
modifications to the name and description without defining a new glossary
style.
-</p><!--l. 3295--><p class="indent" > (New to version 1.42.) The command <span
+</p><!--l. 3350--><p class="indent" > (New to version 1.42.) The command <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentrysymbol</span><a
id="dx1-17007"></a> is modified to take into
account the <a
@@ -6624,12 +6622,12 @@
class="cmti-10"> code</span>⟩ part is robust and deals with the actual typesetting of the symbol.
The ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">PDF</span>⟩ part is simply:
-<!--l. 3308--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 3363--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-17012"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentrypdfsymbol{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3310--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3365--><p class="noindent" >
which is defined to just do <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentrysymbol{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -6640,7 +6638,7 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentrypdfsymbol </span>to use a more appropriate field. (If you do redefine this
command, remember that it needs to fully expand.)
-</p><!--l. 3317--><p class="indent" > For example, if you are using <span
+</p><!--l. 3372--><p class="indent" > For example, if you are using <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp</span><a
id="dx1-17014"></a>, you could use the <span
class="cmss-10">symbolaccess</span><a
@@ -6653,7 +6651,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-105">
\renewcommand{\glsentrypdfsymbol}[1]{\glsentrysymbolaccess{#1}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3321--><p class="nopar" > Alternatively, if you are using <a
+<!--l. 3376--><p class="nopar" > Alternatively, if you are using <a
id="dx1-17016"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> you can use the TeX parser library to
@@ -6669,7 +6667,7 @@
  replicate-fields={symbol=user1},
  interpret-fields={user1}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3328--><p class="nopar" > This stores the interpreted value of the symbol in the <span
+<!--l. 3383--><p class="nopar" > This stores the interpreted value of the symbol in the <span
class="cmss-10">user1</span><a
id="dx1-17018"></a> field, so you can then
do:
@@ -6680,14 +6678,14 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-107">
\renewcommand{\glsentrypdfsymbol}[1]{\glsentryuseri{#1}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3333--><p class="nopar" > (You may need <span class="HoLogo-XeLaTeX"><span class="HoLogo-Xe">X<span class="HoLogo-e">Ǝ</span></span><span class="HoLogo-LaTeX">L<span class="HoLogo-a">A</span><span class="HoLogo-TeX">T<span class="HoLogo-e">E</span>X</span></span></span> or Lua<span class="HoLogo-LaTeX">L<span class="HoLogo-a">A</span><span class="HoLogo-TeX">T<span class="HoLogo-e">E</span>X</span></span> with this method.) This allows
+<!--l. 3388--><p class="nopar" > (You may need <span class="HoLogo-XeLaTeX"><span class="HoLogo-Xe">X<span class="HoLogo-e">Ǝ</span></span><span class="HoLogo-LaTeX">L<span class="HoLogo-a">A</span><span class="HoLogo-TeX">T<span class="HoLogo-e">E</span>X</span></span></span> or Lua<span class="HoLogo-LaTeX">L<span class="HoLogo-a">A</span><span class="HoLogo-TeX">T<span class="HoLogo-e">E</span>X</span></span> with this method.) This allows
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentrysymbol </span>to be used in a section heading with standalone definitions.
-</p><!--l. 3338--><p class="indent" > If you want to adapt a style to use another field instead of <span
+</p><!--l. 3393--><p class="indent" > If you want to adapt a style to use another field instead of <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
id="dx1-17019"></a>, you can
use
-</p><!--l. 3340--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3395--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-17020"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentrynameother{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -6694,7 +6692,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">field</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3342--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3397--><p class="noindent" >
This behaves just like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentryname </span>(that is, it obeys the <a
href="#catattr.glossname"><span
@@ -6716,17 +6714,17 @@
class="cmtt-10">description</span>). See the key to field mappings table in the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>user
manual.
-</p><!--l. 3351--><p class="indent" > There is a hook after <span
+</p><!--l. 3406--><p class="indent" > There is a hook after <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentryname</span><a
id="dx1-17024"></a> and <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glossentryname</span><a
id="dx1-17025"></a>:
-</p><!--l. 3353--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3408--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-17026"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostnamehook{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3355--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3410--><p class="noindent" >
By default this checks the <a
href="#catattr.indexname"><span
class="cmss-10">indexname</span></a><a
@@ -6733,7 +6731,7 @@
id="dx1-17027"></a> attribute. If the attribute exists for the
category to which the label belongs, then the name is automatically indexed
using
-</p><!--l. 3360--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
+</p><!--l. 3415--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdoautoindexname</span><a
id="dx1-17028"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
@@ -6742,13 +6740,13 @@
class="cmsy-10">{</span><span
class="cmtt-10">indexname</span><span
class="cmsy-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3361--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3416--><p class="noindent" >
See <a
href="#sec:autoindex"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">8</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">9</span> </a><a
href="#sec:autoindex">Auto-Indexing<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:autoindex --></a> for further details.
-</p><!--l. 3365--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.04, the post-name hook <span
+</p><!--l. 3420--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.04, the post-name hook <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostnamehook </span>will also use
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostname</span>⟨<span
@@ -6767,8 +6765,8 @@
\newcommand*{\glsxtrpostnamesymbol}{\space
 (\glsentrysymbol{\glscurrententrylabel})}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3376--><p class="nopar" > For convenience, as from v1.31, you can use
-</p><!--l. 3378--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 3431--><p class="nopar" > For convenience, as from v1.31, you can use
+</p><!--l. 3433--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-17030"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdefpostname{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩<span
@@ -6775,7 +6773,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">definition</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3380--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3435--><p class="noindent" >
This is simply a shortcut for: </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
@@ -6789,23 +6787,23 @@
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div>
</div> Note that it doesn’t check if the command has already been defined.
-<!--l. 3387--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.25, the post-name hook also does
-</p><!--l. 3388--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 3442--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.25, the post-name hook also does
+</p><!--l. 3443--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-17031"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsextrapostnamehook{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3390--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3445--><p class="noindent" >
(before <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostname</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">category</span>⟩) to allow for additional non-category related code.
This does nothing by default.
-</p><!--l. 3395--><p class="indent" > The post-description code used within the glossary is modified so that it also
+</p><!--l. 3450--><p class="indent" > The post-description code used within the glossary is modified so that it also
does
-</p><!--l. 3397--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3452--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-17032"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostdescription </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3399--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3454--><p class="noindent" >
This occurs before the original <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspostdescription</span>, so if the <a
href="#styopt.nopostdot"><span
@@ -6813,7 +6811,7 @@
class="cmss-10">=false</span><a
id="dx1-17033"></a>
option is used, it will be inserted before the terminating full stop.
-</p><!--l. 3404--><p class="indent" > This new command will do <span
+</p><!--l. 3459--><p class="indent" > This new command will do <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostdesc</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩ if it exists, where
⟨<span
@@ -6827,7 +6825,7 @@
class="cmss-10">acronym</span><a
id="dx1-17035"></a>. For
convenience, as from v1.31, you can use
-</p><!--l. 3411--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3466--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-17036"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdefpostdesc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩<span
@@ -6834,7 +6832,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">definition</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3413--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3468--><p class="noindent" >
This is simply a shortcut for: </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
@@ -6848,19 +6846,19 @@
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div>
</div> Note that it doesn’t check if the command has already been defined.
-<!--l. 3420--><p class="indent" > Since both <span
+<!--l. 3475--><p class="indent" > Since both <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentry </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\subglossentry </span>set
-</p><!--l. 3421--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3476--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-17037"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glscurrententrylabel </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3423--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3478--><p class="noindent" >
to the label for the current entry, you can use this within the definition of these
post-description hooks if you need to reference the label.
-</p><!--l. 3428--><p class="indent" > For example, suppose you want to insert the plural form in brackets after the
+</p><!--l. 3483--><p class="indent" > For example, suppose you want to insert the plural form in brackets after the
description in the glossary, but only for entries in the <span
class="cmss-10">general</span><a
id="dx1-17038"></a> category, then you could
@@ -6873,10 +6871,10 @@
\renewcommand{\glsxtrpostdescgeneral}{\space
 (plural: \glsentryplural{\glscurrententrylabel})}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3434--><p class="nopar" > This means you don’t have to define a custom glossary style, which you may find
+<!--l. 3489--><p class="nopar" > This means you don’t have to define a custom glossary style, which you may find
more complicated. (It also allows more flexibility if you decide to change the
underlying glossary style.)
-</p><!--l. 3439--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> This feature can’t be used for glossary styles that ignore <span
+</p><!--l. 3494--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> This feature can’t be used for glossary styles that ignore <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspostdescription </span>or if
you redefine <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspostdescription </span>without including <span
@@ -6887,30 +6885,29 @@
href="#styopt.nopostdot"><span
class="cmss-10">nopostdot</span></a><a
id="dx1-17039"></a> option to suppress the terminating full stop.) See <a
-href="#x1-190002.11.3"><span
+href="#sec:stylemods"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
class="cmbx-10">2.11.3</span> </a><a
-href="#x1-190002.11.3">The
+href="#sec:stylemods">The
+glossaries-extra-stylemods Package<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:stylemods --></a> to patch the predefined styles provided by
<span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-stylemods </span>Package<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:stylemods --></a> to patch the predefined styles provided by <span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>
-that are missing <span
+class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>that are missing <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspostdescription</span>. </div>
-</p><!--l. 3448--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 3450--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3503--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3505--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 3450--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 3505--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.11.2 </span> <a
id="sec:glosstylenumlist"></a>Number List</h4>
-<!--l. 3453--><p class="noindent" >The <a
+<!--l. 3508--><p class="noindent" >The <a
id="dx1-18001"></a><a
href="#glo:numberlist">number list</a> is now placed inside the argument of
-</p><!--l. 3454--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3509--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-18002"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrFormatLocationList{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">number list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3456--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3511--><p class="noindent" >
This is internally used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossaryentrynumbers</span>. The <a
href="#styopt.nonumberlist"><span
@@ -6921,7 +6918,7 @@
id="dx1-18004"></a>number list, but it
still saves the <a
id="dx1-18005"></a>number list in case it’s required.
-</p><!--l. 3462--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you want to suppress the <a
+</p><!--l. 3517--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you want to suppress the <a
id="dx1-18006"></a>number list always use the <a
href="#styopt.nonumberlist"><span
class="cmss-10">nonumberlist</span></a><a
@@ -6928,13 +6925,13 @@
id="dx1-18007"></a> option
instead of redefining <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossaryentrynumbers </span>to do nothing. </div>
-</p><!--l. 3466--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 3468--><p class="indent" > For example, to change the font for the entire <a
+</p><!--l. 3521--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3523--><p class="indent" > For example, to change the font for the entire <a
id="dx1-18008"></a>number list redefine
<span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrFormatLocationList </span>as appropriate. Don’t modify <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossaryentrynumbers</span>.
-</p><!--l. 3472--><p class="indent" > Sometimes users like to insert “page” or “pages” in front of the <a
+</p><!--l. 3527--><p class="indent" > Sometimes users like to insert “page” or “pages” in front of the <a
id="dx1-18009"></a>number list. This
is quite fiddly to do with the base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package, but <span
@@ -6941,7 +6938,7 @@
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>provides a
way of doing this. First you need to enable this option and specify the text to display
using:
-</p><!--l. 3477--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3532--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-18010"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnablePreLocationTag{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">page</span>⟩<span
@@ -6948,7 +6945,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">pages</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3479--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3534--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">page</span>⟩ is the text to display if the <a
id="dx1-18011"></a>number list only contains a single location and
@@ -6961,25 +6958,25 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-110">
\GlsXtrEnablePreLocationTag{Page: }{Pages: }
</pre>
-<!--l. 3485--><p class="nopar" > An extra run is required when using this command.
-</p><!--l. 3488--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Use <span
+<!--l. 3540--><p class="nopar" > An extra run is required when using this command.
+</p><!--l. 3543--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Use <span
class="cmtt-10">glsignore </span>not <span
class="cmtt-10">@gobble </span>as the format if you want to suppress the page
number (and only index the entry once). </div>
-</p><!--l. 3491--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 3493--><p class="indent" > See the accompanying sample file <span
+</p><!--l. 3546--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3548--><p class="indent" > See the accompanying sample file <span
class="cmtt-10">sample-pages.tex</span>.
-</p><!--l. 3495--><p class="indent" > Note that <a
+</p><!--l. 3550--><p class="indent" > Note that <a
id="dx1-18012"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> can be instructed to insert a prefix at the start of non-empty
location lists, which can be used as an alternative to <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnablePreLocationTag</span>.
-</p><!--l. 3499--><p class="indent" > <a
+</p><!--l. 3554--><p class="indent" > <a
id="dx1-18013"></a><a
href="#glo:locationlist">Location lists</a> displayed with <span
class="cmtt-10">\printnoidxglossary </span>internally use
-</p><!--l. 3501--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3556--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-18014"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsnoidxdisplayloc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
@@ -6990,7 +6987,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3503--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3558--><p class="noindent" >
This command is provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>, but is modified by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>to check
@@ -6999,8 +6996,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">)</span></span></span> which are discarded to
obtain the actual control sequence name that forms the location formatting
command.
-</p><!--l. 3510--><p class="indent" > If the range identifiers aren’t present, this just uses
-</p><!--l. 3511--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3565--><p class="indent" > If the range identifiers aren’t present, this just uses
+</p><!--l. 3566--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-18015"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdisplaysingleloc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">format</span>⟩<span
@@ -7007,9 +7004,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3513--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3568--><p class="noindent" >
otherwise it uses
-</p><!--l. 3515--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3570--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-18016"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdisplaystartloc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">format</span>⟩<span
@@ -7016,11 +7013,11 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3517--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3572--><p class="noindent" >
for the start of a range (where the identifier has been stripped from ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">format</span>⟩)
or
-</p><!--l. 3520--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3575--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-18017"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdisplayendloc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">format</span>⟩<span
@@ -7027,14 +7024,14 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3522--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3577--><p class="noindent" >
for the end of a range (where the identifier has been stripped from ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">format</span>⟩).
-</p><!--l. 3526--><p class="indent" > By default the start range command saves the format in
-</p><!--l. 3527--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3581--><p class="indent" > By default the start range command saves the format in
+</p><!--l. 3582--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-18018"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlocrangefmt </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3529--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3584--><p class="noindent" >
and does <spacer type=vertical size=10><span class="obeylines-h">
<br /><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdisplaysingleloc{</span>⟨<span
@@ -7045,9 +7042,9 @@
<br /><spacer type=vertical size=10></span>
(If the format is empty, it will be replaced with <span
class="cmtt-10">glsnumberformat</span>.)
-</p><!--l. 3537--><p class="indent" > The end command checks that the format matches the start of the range,
+</p><!--l. 3592--><p class="indent" > The end command checks that the format matches the start of the range,
does
-</p><!--l. 3539--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3594--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-18019"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdisplayendlochook{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">format</span>⟩<span
@@ -7054,7 +7051,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3541--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3596--><p class="noindent" >
(which does nothing by default), followed by <spacer type=vertical size=10><span class="obeylines-h">
<br /><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdisplaysingleloc{</span>⟨<span
@@ -7068,7 +7065,7 @@
<br /><spacer type=vertical size=10></span>
and then sets <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlocrangefmt </span>to empty.
-</p><!--l. 3548--><p class="indent" > This means that the list
+</p><!--l. 3603--><p class="indent" > This means that the list
@@ -7078,7 +7075,7 @@
\glsnoidxdisplayloc{}{page}{textbf}{1},
\glsnoidxdisplayloc{}{page}{)textbf}{1}.
</pre>
-<!--l. 3553--><p class="nopar" > doesn’t display any differently from
+<!--l. 3608--><p class="nopar" > doesn’t display any differently from
@@ -7088,15 +7085,14 @@
\glsnoidxdisplayloc{}{page}{textbf}{1},
\glsnoidxdisplayloc{}{page}{textbf}{1}.
</pre>
-<!--l. 3559--><p class="nopar" > but it does make it easier to define your own custom list handler that can
+<!--l. 3614--><p class="nopar" > but it does make it easier to define your own custom list handler that can
accommodate the ranges.
-</p><!--l. 3563--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3618--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 3563--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 3618--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2.11.3 </span> <a
- id="x1-190002.11.3"></a>The <span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-stylemods </span>Package</h4>
-<!--l. 3566--><p class="noindent" >As from v1.02, <span
+ id="sec:stylemods"></a>The glossaries-extra-stylemods Package</h4>
+<!--l. 3621--><p class="noindent" >As from v1.02, <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>now includes the package <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-stylemods</span><a
id="dx1-19001"></a> that
@@ -7113,7 +7109,7 @@
\usepackage{glossary-longragged}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra-stylemods}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3575--><p class="nopar" > Alternatively you can load <span
+<!--l. 3630--><p class="nopar" > Alternatively you can load <span
class="cmtt-10">glossary-</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">.sty </span>at the same time by passing ⟨<span
@@ -7129,7 +7125,7 @@
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
\usepackage[longragged]{glossaries-extra-stylemods}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3583--><p class="nopar" > Another option is to use the <a
+<!--l. 3638--><p class="nopar" > Another option is to use the <a
href="#styopt.stylemods"><span
class="cmss-10">stylemods</span></a><a
id="dx1-19003"></a> key when you load <span
@@ -7146,7 +7142,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-115">
\usepackage[style=long3col,stylemods]{glossaries-extra}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3590--><p class="nopar" > Or the value of <a
+<!--l. 3645--><p class="nopar" > Or the value of <a
href="#styopt.stylemods"><span
class="cmss-10">stylemods</span></a><a
id="dx1-19005"></a> may be a comma-separated list of the style package
@@ -7158,7 +7154,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-116">
\usepackage[style=mcoltree,stylemods=mcols]{glossaries-extra}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3595--><p class="nopar" > Remember to group the value if it contains any commas:
+<!--l. 3650--><p class="nopar" > Remember to group the value if it contains any commas:
@@ -7166,9 +7162,9 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-117">
\usepackage[stylemods={mcols,longbooktabs}]{glossaries-extra}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3599--><p class="nopar" >
+<!--l. 3654--><p class="nopar" >
</p>
-<!--l. 3601--><p class="noindent" ><span class="paragraphHead"><a
+<!--l. 3656--><p class="noindent" ><span class="paragraphHead"><a
id="x1-200002.11.3"></a><span
class="cmbx-10">Inline Style</span></span>
Note that the <span
@@ -7197,7 +7193,7 @@
id="dx1-20004"></a> option, but the post-description
category hook can still be used.
</p>
-<!--l. 3617--><p class="noindent" ><span class="paragraphHead"><a
+<!--l. 3672--><p class="noindent" ><span class="paragraphHead"><a
id="x1-210002.11.3"></a><span
class="cmbx-10">Tabular Styles</span></span>
The <span
@@ -7227,15 +7223,15 @@
class="cmtt-10">\printnoidxglossary </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossary</span>, you must also
reset the glossary style.
-</p><!--l. 3630--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.21, the hard-coded <span
+</p><!--l. 3685--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.21, the hard-coded <span
class="cmtt-10">\space </span>before the <a
id="dx1-21007"></a><a
href="#glo:numberlist">number list</a> in many of
the predefined styles is replaced with
-</p><!--l. 3633--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3688--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-21008"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrprelocation </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3635--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3690--><p class="noindent" >
This just defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\space </span>but may be redefined as required. For example:
@@ -7245,34 +7241,34 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-118">
\renewcommand{\glsxtrprelocation}{\dotfill}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3640--><p class="nopar" >
+<!--l. 3695--><p class="nopar" >
</p>
-<!--l. 3642--><p class="noindent" ><span class="paragraphHead"><a
+<!--l. 3697--><p class="noindent" ><span class="paragraphHead"><a
id="x1-220002.11.3"></a><span
class="cmbx-10">List Styles</span></span>
The <span
class="cmss-10">list</span><a
id="dx1-22001"></a> styles use
-</p><!--l. 3645--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3700--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22002"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslistprelocation </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3647--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3702--><p class="noindent" >
(which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrprelocation</span>) for top-level items and
-</p><!--l. 3649--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3704--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22003"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslistchildprelocation </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3651--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3706--><p class="noindent" >
(which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslistprelocation</span>) for child items.
-</p><!--l. 3654--><p class="indent" > As from v1.31, the description (including the post-description hook) is governed
+</p><!--l. 3709--><p class="indent" > As from v1.31, the description (including the post-description hook) is governed
by:
-</p><!--l. 3656--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3711--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22004"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslistdesc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3658--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3713--><p class="noindent" >
for the <span
class="cmss-10">list</span><a
id="dx1-22005"></a> and <span
@@ -7280,26 +7276,26 @@
id="dx1-22006"></a> styles (but not the <span
class="cmss-10">listdotted</span><a
id="dx1-22007"></a> variations).
-</p><!--l. 3662--><p class="indent" > As from v1.47, the item is governed by:
-</p><!--l. 3663--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3717--><p class="indent" > As from v1.47, the item is governed by:
+</p><!--l. 3718--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22008"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslistitem{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3665--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3720--><p class="noindent" >
The <span
class="cmss-10">altlist</span><a
id="dx1-22009"></a> styles use:
-</p><!--l. 3667--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3722--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22010"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsaltlistitem{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3669--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3724--><p class="noindent" >
which internally uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslistitem</span>. The header item (for the list styles that should
the group title) is governed by:
-</p><!--l. 3672--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3727--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22011"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslistgroupheaderitem{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">group-label</span>⟩<span
@@ -7306,7 +7302,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">header code</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3674--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3729--><p class="noindent" >
This ignores the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">group-label</span>⟩ by default and simply places the second argument in the
optional argument of <span
@@ -7314,11 +7310,11 @@
class="cmti-10">header code</span>⟩ is the formatted group title,
possibly including a hypertarget. The spacing after the group item is given
by:
-</p><!--l. 3679--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3734--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22012"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslistgroupafterheader </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3681--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 3683--><p class="indent" > For just the <span
+</p><!--l. 3736--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3738--><p class="indent" > For just the <span
class="cmss-10">list</span><a
id="dx1-22013"></a> style and its letter group variations (not the <span
class="cmss-10">altlist</span><a
@@ -7328,15 +7324,15 @@
variations) the <a
id="dx1-22016"></a><a
href="#glo:numberlist">number list</a> for child entries is followed by
-</p><!--l. 3686--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3741--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22017"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslistchildpostlocation </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3688--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3743--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to a full stop.
-</p><!--l. 3691--><p class="indent" > The default value of <span
+</p><!--l. 3746--><p class="indent" > The default value of <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslistdottedwidth</span><a
id="dx1-22018"></a> is changed so that it’s set at the start
of the document (if it hasn’t been changed in the preamble). This should
@@ -7343,14 +7339,14 @@
take into account situations where <span
class="cmtt-10">\hsize </span>isn’t set until the start of the
document.
-</p><!--l. 3696--><p class="indent" > The separator between groups (if not <a
+</p><!--l. 3751--><p class="indent" > The separator between groups (if not <a
href="#styopt.nogroupskip"><span
class="cmss-10">nogroupskip</span></a><a
id="dx1-22019"></a>) is now given by:
-</p><!--l. 3698--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3753--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22020"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslistgroupskip </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3700--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3755--><p class="noindent" >
This defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\indexspace </span>with penalties to deter page breaks. This command
isn’t used if <a
@@ -7357,7 +7353,7 @@
href="#styopt.nogroupskip"><span
class="cmss-10">nogroupskip</span></a><a
id="dx1-22021"></a> is set.
-</p><!--l. 3705--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 3760--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossary-tree</span><a
id="dx1-22022"></a> package introduced new commands in v4.22, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreegroupheaderfmt</span><a
@@ -7380,12 +7376,12 @@
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-stylemods</span><a
id="dx1-22026"></a>
defines:
-</p><!--l. 3718--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3773--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22027"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreedefaultnamefmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3720--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3775--><p class="noindent" >
which simply does <span
class="cmtt-10">\textbf{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩<span
@@ -7396,17 +7392,17 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glstreenavigationfmt </span>all in terms of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreedefaultnamefmt</span>.
-</p><!--l. 3726--><p class="indent" > This means that if you want to change all three to use a particular style you only
+</p><!--l. 3781--><p class="indent" > This means that if you want to change all three to use a particular style you only
need to redefine <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreedefaultnamefmt</span>, but if you only want to redefine
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreenamefmt </span>without affecting the other two commands, then you now
can.
-</p><!--l. 3732--><p class="indent" > The separator between groups without headers is given by:
-</p><!--l. 3733--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3787--><p class="indent" > The separator between groups without headers is given by:
+</p><!--l. 3788--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22028"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreegroupskip </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3735--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3790--><p class="noindent" >
This defaults to just <span
class="cmtt-10">\indexspace</span><a
id="dx1-22029"></a> without penalties. This command isn’t
@@ -7417,17 +7413,17 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreeheadergroupskip </span>in v1.42 as they are inappropriate when there’s no
header.)
-</p><!--l. 3741--><p class="indent" > The separator between groups with headers is now given by (as from
+</p><!--l. 3796--><p class="indent" > The separator between groups with headers is now given by (as from
v1.42):
-</p><!--l. 3742--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3797--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22031"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreegroupheaderskip </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3744--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3799--><p class="noindent" >
This defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreegroupskip </span>with penalties to deter page breaks after the
group heading.
-</p><!--l. 3748--><p class="indent" > The styles that display the group titles now use:
-</p><!--l. 3749--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3803--><p class="indent" > The styles that display the group titles now use:
+</p><!--l. 3804--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22032"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreePreHeader{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -7434,7 +7430,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">title</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3751--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3806--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ is the group label and ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">title</span>⟩ is the group title. This does nothing by
@@ -7454,21 +7450,21 @@
 \pdfbookmark[1]{#2}{\currentglossary.#1}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 3761--><p class="nopar" > will insert section-level bookmarks. The use of <span
+<!--l. 3816--><p class="nopar" > will insert section-level bookmarks. The use of <span
class="cmtt-10">\currentglossary </span>helps to provide
unique bookmark labels in the event of multiple glossaries.
-</p><!--l. 3766--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 3821--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossary-tree</span><a
id="dx1-22033"></a> package provides the commands
-</p><!--l. 3767--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3822--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22034"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreepredesc </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3769--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3824--><p class="noindent" >
and
-</p><!--l. 3771--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3826--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22035"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreechildpredesc </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3773--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3828--><p class="noindent" >
(which both default to a space) and uses them in the <span
class="cmss-10">tree</span><a
id="dx1-22036"></a>-like styles, but not for the
@@ -7480,17 +7476,17 @@
class="cmss-10">alttree</span><a
id="dx1-22039"></a> style so that it
has equivalent hooks:
-</p><!--l. 3778--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3833--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22040"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsalttreepredesc </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3780--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3835--><p class="noindent" >
and
-</p><!--l. 3782--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3837--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22041"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsalttreechildpredesc </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3784--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3839--><p class="noindent" >
These do nothing by default.
-</p><!--l. 3787--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 3842--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">index</span><a
id="dx1-22042"></a>-like and <span
class="cmss-10">tree</span><a
@@ -7497,51 +7493,51 @@
id="dx1-22043"></a>-like styles insert the pre-<a
id="dx1-22044"></a><a
href="#glo:numberlist">number list</a> space with
-</p><!--l. 3789--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3844--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22045"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreeprelocation </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3791--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3846--><p class="noindent" >
(which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrprelocation</span>) for top-level items and
-</p><!--l. 3793--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3848--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22046"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreechildprelocation </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3795--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3850--><p class="noindent" >
(which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreeprelocation</span>) for child items.
-</p><!--l. 3798--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.31, the <span
+</p><!--l. 3853--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.31, the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-stylemods </span>package also provides:
-</p><!--l. 3800--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3855--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22047"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreenonamedesc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3802--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3857--><p class="noindent" >
which is used by the <span
class="cmss-10">treenoname</span><a
id="dx1-22048"></a> styles to display the pre-description separator, the
description and the post-description hook. Similarly for the symbol:
-</p><!--l. 3806--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3861--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22049"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreenonamesymbol{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3808--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3863--><p class="noindent" >
The above are just used for top-level entries. Child entries don’t have the name or
symbol displayed for the <span
class="cmss-10">treenoname</span><a
id="dx1-22050"></a> styles, so there’s only a command for the child
description:
-</p><!--l. 3812--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3867--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22051"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreenonamechilddesc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3814--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3869--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 3816--><p class="indent" > For the <span
+</p><!--l. 3871--><p class="indent" > For the <span
class="cmss-10">tree</span><a
id="dx1-22052"></a> styles (but not the <span
class="cmss-10">treenoname</span><a
@@ -7549,34 +7545,34 @@
class="cmss-10">alttree</span><a
id="dx1-22054"></a> styles), the description is
displayed using:
-</p><!--l. 3818--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3873--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22055"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreedesc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3820--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3875--><p class="noindent" >
and the symbol with:
-</p><!--l. 3822--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3877--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22056"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreesymbol{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3824--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3879--><p class="noindent" >
Again the above two commands are just for top-level entries. The child entries
use:
-</p><!--l. 3827--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3882--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22057"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreechilddesc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3829--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3884--><p class="noindent" >
for the description and
-</p><!--l. 3831--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3886--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22058"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreechildsymbol{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3833--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3888--><p class="noindent" >
for the symbol. As from version 1.41, there are now wrapper commands
for <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreedesc </span>and <span
@@ -7583,7 +7579,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glstreechilddesc </span>that check for the description
and symbol to determine what separator to use before the page list. These
are:
-</p><!--l. 3839--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3894--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22059"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreeDescLoc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -7590,9 +7586,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3841--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3896--><p class="noindent" >
for top-level entries and
-</p><!--l. 3843--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3898--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22060"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreeChildDescLoc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -7599,25 +7595,25 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3845--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3900--><p class="noindent" >
for sub-entries.
-</p><!--l. 3848--><p class="indent" > If either the symbol or description is present these will use <span
+</p><!--l. 3903--><p class="indent" > If either the symbol or description is present these will use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreeprelocation</span>
or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreechildprelocation</span>, respectively. Otherwise, both will use (from
v1.42):
-</p><!--l. 3851--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3906--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22061"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreeNoDescSymbolPreLocation </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3853--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3908--><p class="noindent" >
The default is a space. This means that you could have, say, a comma followed by a
space for terms that are simply an alias, but just have a space for terms that have a
description that ends with a full stop (or that just have a symbol without a
description) where the comma would be inappropriate.
-</p><!--l. 3860--><p class="indent" > Note that version 1.42 has corrected an error that was introduced to v1.41 that
+</p><!--l. 3915--><p class="indent" > Note that version 1.42 has corrected an error that was introduced to v1.41 that
caused the name to run into the location list if there was no symbol and no
description.
-</p><!--l. 3864--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.05, the <span
+</p><!--l. 3919--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.05, the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-stylemods </span>package provides some
additional commands for use with the <span
class="cmss-10">alttree</span><a
@@ -7631,7 +7627,7 @@
id="dx1-22064"></a> option has been used when loading
<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>.
-</p><!--l. 3872--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3927--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22065"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\gglssetwidest[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -7638,13 +7634,13 @@
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3874--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3929--><p class="noindent" >
(New to version 1.21.) This is like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glssetwidest </span>(provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossary-tree</span><a
id="dx1-22066"></a>) but
performs a global assignment.
-</p><!--l. 3879--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3934--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22067"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\eglssetwidest[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -7654,12 +7650,12 @@
-</p><!--l. 3881--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3936--><p class="noindent" >
This is like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glssetwidest </span>but performs a protected expansion on ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩. This has a
localised effect. For a global setting, use
-</p><!--l. 3885--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3940--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22068"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\xglssetwidest[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -7666,11 +7662,11 @@
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3887--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3942--><p class="noindent" >
The following only set the value if ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩ is wider than the current value (new to
version 1.23). Local update:
-</p><!--l. 3890--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3945--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22069"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsupdatewidest[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -7677,9 +7673,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3892--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3947--><p class="noindent" >
Global update:
-</p><!--l. 3894--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3949--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22070"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\gglsupdatewidest[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -7686,10 +7682,10 @@
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3896--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3951--><p class="noindent" >
Locale update (expands ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩):
-</p><!--l. 3898--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3953--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22071"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\eglsupdatewidest[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -7696,10 +7692,10 @@
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3900--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3955--><p class="noindent" >
Global update (expands ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩):
-</p><!--l. 3902--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3957--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22072"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\xglsupdatewidest[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -7706,22 +7702,22 @@
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3904--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 3907--><p class="indent" > The widest entry value can later be retrieved using
-</p><!--l. 3908--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3959--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3962--><p class="indent" > The widest entry value can later be retrieved using
+</p><!--l. 3963--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22073"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsgetwidestname </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3910--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3965--><p class="noindent" >
for the top-level entries and
-</p><!--l. 3912--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3967--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22074"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsgetwidestsubname{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3914--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3969--><p class="noindent" >
for sub-entries, where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">level</span>⟩ is the level number.
-</p><!--l. 3917--><p class="indent" > Note that if you are using <a
+</p><!--l. 3972--><p class="indent" > Note that if you are using <a
id="dx1-22075"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>, you can use the resource option <span
@@ -7733,24 +7729,24 @@
can’t replicate, but it should be suitable for names that just consist of text,
and can be more efficient than iterating over all the defined entries using
TeX.
-</p><!--l. 3925--><p class="indent" > The command <span
+</p><!--l. 3980--><p class="indent" > The command <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfindwidesttoplevelname </span>provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossary-tree</span><a
id="dx1-22077"></a> has a
CamelCase synonym:
-</p><!--l. 3927--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3982--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22078"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestTopLevelName[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3929--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3984--><p class="noindent" >
Similar commands are also provided:
-</p><!--l. 3931--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3986--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22079"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestUsedTopLevelName[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3933--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3988--><p class="noindent" >
This has an additional check that the entry has been used. Naturally this is only
useful if the glossaries that use the <span
class="cmss-10">alttree</span><a
@@ -7758,7 +7754,7 @@
This command should be placed just before the start of the glossary. (Alternatively,
place it at the end of the document and save the value in the auxiliary file for the
next run.)
-</p><!--l. 3941--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 3996--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22081"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestUsedAnyName[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary list</span>⟩<span
@@ -7766,37 +7762,37 @@
-</p><!--l. 3943--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 3998--><p class="noindent" >
This is like the previous command but if doesn’t check the <span
class="cmss-10">parent</span><a
id="dx1-22082"></a> key. This is useful if
all levels should have the same width for the name.
-</p><!--l. 3948--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4003--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22083"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestAnyName[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3950--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4005--><p class="noindent" >
This is like the previous command but doesn’t check if the entry has been
used.
-</p><!--l. 3954--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4009--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22084"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestUsedLevelTwo[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3956--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4011--><p class="noindent" >
This is like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestUsedTopLevelName </span>but also sets the first two sub-levels
as well. Any entry that has a great-grandparent is ignored.
-</p><!--l. 3961--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4016--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22085"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestLevelTwo[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3963--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4018--><p class="noindent" >
This is like the previous command but doesn’t check if the entry has been
used.
-</p><!--l. 3967--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4022--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22086"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbol[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary list</span>⟩<span
@@ -7804,12 +7800,12 @@
class="cmitt-10">register</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3970--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4025--><p class="noindent" >
This is like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestUsedAnyName </span>but also measures the symbol. The length
of the widest symbol is stored in ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">register</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 3975--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4030--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22087"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestAnyNameSymbol[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary list</span>⟩<span
@@ -7816,10 +7812,10 @@
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">register</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3977--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4032--><p class="noindent" >
This is like the previous command but it doesn’t check if the entry has been
used.
-</p><!--l. 3981--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4036--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22088"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbolLocation[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary list</span>⟩<span
@@ -7830,7 +7826,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location register</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3984--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4039--><p class="noindent" >
This is like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbol </span>but also measures the <a
id="dx1-22089"></a><a
@@ -7844,7 +7840,7 @@
id="dx1-22091"></a>number
list is stored in ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">location register</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 3992--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4047--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22092"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestAnyNameSymbolLocation[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary list</span>⟩<span
@@ -7855,10 +7851,10 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location register</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 3995--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4050--><p class="noindent" >
This is like the previous command but it doesn’t check if the entry has been
used.
-</p><!--l. 3999--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4054--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22093"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameLocation[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary list</span>⟩<span
@@ -7866,13 +7862,13 @@
class="cmitt-10">register</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4002--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4057--><p class="noindent" >
This is like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestUsedAnyNameSymbolLocation </span>but doesn’t measure the
symbol. The length of the widest <a
id="dx1-22094"></a>number list is stored in ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">register</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 4007--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4062--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22095"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsFindWidestAnyNameLocation[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary list</span>⟩<span
@@ -7879,15 +7875,15 @@
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">register</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4010--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4065--><p class="noindent" >
This is like the previous command but doesn’t check if the entry has been
used.
-</p><!--l. 4014--><p class="indent" > The layout of the symbol, description and <a
+</p><!--l. 4069--><p class="indent" > The layout of the symbol, description and <a
id="dx1-22096"></a>number list is governed by
-</p><!--l. 4016--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4071--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22097"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtralttreeSymbolDescLocation{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -7894,9 +7890,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">number list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4018--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4073--><p class="noindent" >
for top-level entries and
-</p><!--l. 4020--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4075--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22098"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtralttreeSubSymbolDescLocation{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -7903,23 +7899,23 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">number list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4022--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4077--><p class="noindent" >
for sub-entries.
-</p><!--l. 4025--><p class="indent" > There is now a user level command that performs the initialisation for the <span
+</p><!--l. 4080--><p class="indent" > There is now a user level command that performs the initialisation for the <span
class="cmss-10">alttree</span><a
id="dx1-22099"></a>
style:
-</p><!--l. 4027--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4082--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22100"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtralttreeInit </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4029--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 4031--><p class="indent" > The paragraph indent for subsequent paragraphs in multi-paragraph descriptions
+</p><!--l. 4084--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4086--><p class="indent" > The paragraph indent for subsequent paragraphs in multi-paragraph descriptions
is provided by the length
-</p><!--l. 4033--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4088--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-22101"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrAltTreeIndent </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4035--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 4037--><p class="indent" > For additional commands that are available with the <span
+</p><!--l. 4090--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4092--><p class="indent" > For additional commands that are available with the <span
class="cmss-10">alttree</span><a
id="dx1-22102"></a> style,
see the documented code (<span
@@ -7933,11 +7929,11 @@
</p>
-<!--l. 4044--><p class="indent" > </div>
-</p><!--l. 4044--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 4099--><p class="indent" > </div>
+</p><!--l. 4099--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">3. <a
- id="newglossarystyles"></a>New Glossary Styles</h2>
-</p><!--l. 4046--><p class="indent" > The <span
+ id="sec:newglossarystyles"></a>New Glossary Styles</h2>
+</p><!--l. 4102--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package comes with some new styles. The associated style
package needs to be loaded. This can be done with <span
class="cmtt-10">\usepackage </span>but it’s simpler to
@@ -7946,11 +7942,10 @@
class="cmss-10">stylemods</span></a><a
id="dx1-23001"></a> option.
</p>
-<!--l. 4051--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 4107--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.1 </span> <a
- id="x1-240003.1"></a><span
-class="cmss-10">glossary-bookindex </span>package</h3>
-<!--l. 4054--><p class="noindent" >As from v1.21, <span
+ id="sec:bookindex"></a>glossary-bookindex package</h3>
+<!--l. 4110--><p class="noindent" >As from v1.21, <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>has a new supplementary package <span
class="cmss-10">glossary-bookindex</span><a
id="dx1-24001"></a>
@@ -7971,7 +7966,7 @@
\usepackage{glossary-bookindex}
\setglossarystyle{bookindex}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4064--><p class="nopar" > or use both the <a
+<!--l. 4120--><p class="nopar" > or use both the <a
href="#styopt.stylemods"><span
class="cmss-10">stylemods</span></a><a
id="dx1-24004"></a> and <span
@@ -7984,7 +7979,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-121">
\usepackage[stylemods=bookindex,style=bookindex]{glossaries-extra}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4068--><p class="nopar" > The <span
+<!--l. 4124--><p class="nopar" > The <span
class="cmss-10">bookindex</span><a
id="dx1-24006"></a> style only supports a maximum hierarchical level of 2 (top-level,
level 1 and level 2). It’s primarily designed for use with <a
@@ -8002,20 +7997,20 @@
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><a
id="dx1-24009"></a> package
option.)
-</p><!--l. 4079--><p class="indent" > The number of columns is given by
-</p><!--l. 4080--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4135--><p class="indent" > The number of columns is given by
+</p><!--l. 4136--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24010"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexcols </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4082--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4138--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to 2.
-</p><!--l. 4085--><p class="indent" > This style uses the <span
+</p><!--l. 4141--><p class="indent" > This style uses the <span
class="cmss-10">multicols</span><a
id="dx1-24011"></a><a
id="dx1-24012"></a> environment. If the command
-</p><!--l. 4087--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4143--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24013"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexcolspread </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4089--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4145--><p class="noindent" >
isn’t empty then it’s supplied as the optional argument following <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\begin{multicols}</span></span></span>
<span
@@ -8028,10 +8023,10 @@
class="cmss-10">multicols*</span><a
id="dx1-24016"></a><a
id="dx1-24017"></a> by redefining
-</p><!--l. 4093--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4149--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24018"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4095--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4151--><p class="noindent" >
For example
@@ -8040,14 +8035,14 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-122">
\renewcommand{\glsxtrbookindexmulticolsenv}{multicols*}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4099--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 4101--><p class="indent" > Each top-level entry is displayed using
-</p><!--l. 4102--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 4155--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 4157--><p class="indent" > Each top-level entry is displayed using
+</p><!--l. 4158--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24019"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexname{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4104--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4160--><p class="noindent" >
where the entry is identified by ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩. This just does <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentryname{</span>⟨<span
@@ -8064,7 +8059,7 @@
 \ifglshassymbol{#1}{\space (\glossentrysymbol{#1})}{}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4113--><p class="nopar" > or if you want the description (if set):
+<!--l. 4169--><p class="nopar" > or if you want the description (if set):
@@ -8075,30 +8070,30 @@
 \ifglshasdesc{#1}{\space \glossentrydesc{#1}\glspostdescription}{}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4120--><p class="nopar" > (which picks up the post-description hook).
-</p><!--l. 4123--><p class="indent" > Alternatively you can use the <span
+<!--l. 4176--><p class="nopar" > (which picks up the post-description hook).
+</p><!--l. 4179--><p class="indent" > Alternatively you can use the <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostname</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩ hook to append
information after the name according to the entry’s category.
-</p><!--l. 4127--><p class="indent" > Sub-entries are displayed using
-</p><!--l. 4128--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4183--><p class="indent" > Sub-entries are displayed using
+</p><!--l. 4184--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24020"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexsubname{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4130--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4186--><p class="noindent" >
which just defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexname{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>.
-</p><!--l. 4133--><p class="indent" > The separator used before the location list for top-level entries is given
+</p><!--l. 4189--><p class="indent" > The separator used before the location list for top-level entries is given
by
-</p><!--l. 4135--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4191--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24021"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexprelocation{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4137--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4193--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ is the entry’s label. This checks if the <span
class="cmtt-10">location </span>field has been set. If it
@@ -8110,7 +8105,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-125">
,\glsxtrprelocation
</pre>
-<!--l. 4143--><p class="nopar" > otherwise it just does <span
+<!--l. 4199--><p class="nopar" > otherwise it just does <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrprelocation </span>(which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\space</span>). If you’re not
using <a
@@ -8119,19 +8114,19 @@
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>, the <span
class="cmss-10">location</span><a
id="dx1-24023"></a> field won’t be set.
-</p><!--l. 4148--><p class="indent" > The separator used before the location list for sub-entries is given by
-</p><!--l. 4150--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4204--><p class="indent" > The separator used before the location list for sub-entries is given by
+</p><!--l. 4206--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24024"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexsubprelocation{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4152--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4208--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexprelocation{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>.
-</p><!--l. 4155--><p class="indent" > The actual location list is encapsulated with:
-</p><!--l. 4156--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4211--><p class="indent" > The actual location list is encapsulated with:
+</p><!--l. 4212--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24025"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexlocation{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -8138,9 +8133,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4158--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4214--><p class="noindent" >
for top-level entries and
-</p><!--l. 4160--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4216--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24026"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexsublocation{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -8147,27 +8142,27 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4162--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4218--><p class="noindent" >
for sub-entries. These both just do ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">location list</span>⟩ by default.
-</p><!--l. 4165--><p class="indent" > The separator used between a top-level parent and child entry is given
+</p><!--l. 4221--><p class="indent" > The separator used between a top-level parent and child entry is given
by
-</p><!--l. 4167--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4223--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24027"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexparentchildsep </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4169--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4225--><p class="noindent" >
This defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\nopagebreak</span>.
-</p><!--l. 4172--><p class="indent" > The separator used between a sub-level parent and child entry is given
+</p><!--l. 4228--><p class="indent" > The separator used between a sub-level parent and child entry is given
by
-</p><!--l. 4174--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4230--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24028"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexparentsubchildsep </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4176--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4232--><p class="noindent" >
This defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexparentchildsep</span>.
-</p><!--l. 4179--><p class="indent" > The separator between top-level entries is given by
-</p><!--l. 4180--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4235--><p class="indent" > The separator between top-level entries is given by
+</p><!--l. 4236--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24029"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexbetween{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label1</span>⟩<span
@@ -8174,7 +8169,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label2</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4182--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4238--><p class="noindent" >
This comes after the entry given by ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label1</span>⟩, if the entry has no children, or after the
last descendent otherwise, so it always comes immediately before the entry given by
@@ -8181,8 +8176,8 @@
⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label2</span>⟩ unless the entry occurs at the start of a group. This does nothing by
default.
-</p><!--l. 4189--><p class="indent" > The separator between two level 1 entries is given by
-</p><!--l. 4190--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4245--><p class="indent" > The separator between two level 1 entries is given by
+</p><!--l. 4246--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24030"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexsubbetween{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label1</span>⟩<span
@@ -8189,9 +8184,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label2</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4192--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 4194--><p class="indent" > The separator between two level 2 entries is given by
-</p><!--l. 4195--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4248--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4250--><p class="indent" > The separator between two level 2 entries is given by
+</p><!--l. 4251--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24031"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexsubsubbetween{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label1</span>⟩<span
@@ -8198,9 +8193,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label2</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4197--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4253--><p class="noindent" >
At the end of each letter group, the following hooks are done in order:
-</p><!--l. 4200--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4256--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24032"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexsubsubatendgroup{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">sub-sub-label</span>⟩<span
@@ -8208,25 +8203,25 @@
-</p><!--l. 4202--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 4203--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4258--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4259--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24033"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexsubatendgroup{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">sub-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4205--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 4206--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4261--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4262--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24034"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexatendgroup{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4208--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4264--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">sub-sub-label</span>⟩ is the label of the last level 2 entry, ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">sub-label</span>⟩ is the label of the
last level 1 entry and ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ is the label of the last level 0 entry.
-</p><!--l. 4214--><p class="indent" > For example, the resource option <span
+</p><!--l. 4270--><p class="indent" > For example, the resource option <span
class="cmtt-10">seealso=omit </span>instructs <a
id="dx1-24035"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
@@ -8263,7 +8258,7 @@
  \glsxtrbookindexsubsubatendgroup{#1}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4244--><p class="nopar" > This uses <span
+<!--l. 4300--><p class="nopar" > This uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreesubitem </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreesubsubitem </span>to indent the cross-reference
according to the next level down, so the cross-reference for a top-level entry is aligned
@@ -8273,7 +8268,7 @@
class="cmss-10">bookindex</span><a
id="dx1-24036"></a>
style only supports a maximum of two sub-levels).
-</p><!--l. 4255--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 4311--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">bookindex</span><a
id="dx1-24037"></a> style uses group headings. (If you use <a
id="dx1-24038"></a><a
@@ -8282,7 +8277,7 @@
it with the <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">--group</span></span></span> or <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">-g</span></span></span> switch.) The heading will use
-</p><!--l. 4258--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4314--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24039"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexbookmark{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">group title</span>⟩<span
@@ -8289,7 +8284,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4260--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4316--><p class="noindent" >
If <span
class="cmtt-10">\pdfbookmark </span>has been defined, this will use that command to bookmark the
group title. If <a
@@ -8301,13 +8296,13 @@
isn’t appropriate. If <span
class="cmtt-10">\pdfbookmark </span>hasn’t been defined, this command does
nothin.
-</p><!--l. 4268--><p class="indent" > The group heading is formatted according to
-</p><!--l. 4269--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4324--><p class="indent" > The group heading is formatted according to
+</p><!--l. 4325--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24041"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexformatheader{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">group title</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4271--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4327--><p class="noindent" >
which is defined as
@@ -8318,7 +8313,7 @@
  \par{\centering\glstreegroupheaderfmt{#1}\par}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4277--><p class="nopar" > where <span
+<!--l. 4333--><p class="nopar" > where <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreegroupheaderfmt </span>is provided by the <span
class="cmss-10">glossary-tree</span><a
id="dx1-24042"></a> package, which is
@@ -8325,7 +8320,7 @@
automatically loaded. Note that the entry names aren’t encapsulated with
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glstreenamefmt</span>.
-</p><!--l. 4283--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 4339--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossary-bookindex</span><a
id="dx1-24043"></a> package provides some supplementary commands that
aren’t used by default, but may be used when adjusting the style. These commands
@@ -8333,43 +8328,43 @@
class="cmtt-10">\print</span><span
class="cmtt-10">…glossary </span>commands. (That is, they
should only be used in glossary styles.)
-</p><!--l. 4288--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4344--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24044"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexmarkentry{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4290--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4346--><p class="noindent" >
This writes information to the <span
class="cmtt-10">.aux </span>file that can be read on the next run to obtain
the first and last entry on each page of the glossary.
-</p><!--l. 4295--><p class="indent" > You can display the first entry associated with the current page using:
-</p><!--l. 4297--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4351--><p class="indent" > You can display the first entry associated with the current page using:
+</p><!--l. 4353--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24045"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexfirstmark </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4299--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4355--><p class="noindent" >
and the last entry associated with the current page using:
-</p><!--l. 4302--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4358--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24046"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexlastmark </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4304--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4360--><p class="noindent" >
These do nothing if there are no entries marked on the current page (or if the
document build isn’t up to date).
-</p><!--l. 4308--><p class="indent" > The entry is formatted using:
-</p><!--l. 4309--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4364--><p class="indent" > The entry is formatted using:
+</p><!--l. 4365--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24047"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexfirstmarkfmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4311--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4367--><p class="noindent" >
for the first instance and
-</p><!--l. 4313--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4369--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-24048"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexlastmarkfmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4315--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4371--><p class="noindent" >
for the last.
-</p><!--l. 4318--><p class="indent" > These commands are designed for use in page headers or footers where the page
+</p><!--l. 4374--><p class="indent" > These commands are designed for use in page headers or footers where the page
number is stable. For example, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexname </span>can be redefined to mark the
current entry:
@@ -8383,7 +8378,7 @@
  \glossentryname{#1}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4326--><p class="nopar" > If you only want to mark the top-level entries, remember to redefine
+<!--l. 4382--><p class="nopar" > If you only want to mark the top-level entries, remember to redefine
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexsubname </span>as it defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbookindexname</span>:
@@ -8396,8 +8391,8 @@
  \glossentryname{#1}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4334--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 4336--><p class="indent" > Then if you’re using <span
+<!--l. 4390--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 4392--><p class="indent" > Then if you’re using <span
class="cmss-10">fancyhdr</span><a
id="dx1-24049"></a> you can set the page style to show the first and last
entry for the current page with:
@@ -8412,14 +8407,13 @@
  \cfoot{}%
  \rfoot{\glsxtrbookindexlastmark}%
</pre>
-<!--l. 4344--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 4346--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 4400--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 4402--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 4346--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 4402--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.2 </span> <a
- id="x1-250003.2"></a><span
-class="cmss-10">glossary-longextra </span>package</h3>
-<!--l. 4349--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.37, the <span
+ id="sec:longextra"></a>glossary-longextra package</h3>
+<!--l. 4405--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.37, the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package comes with the supplementary
package <span
class="cmss-10">glossary-longextra</span><a
@@ -8437,10 +8431,10 @@
id="dx1-25006"></a><a
id="dx1-25007"></a> instead. In order to do this you must
use
-</p><!--l. 4356--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4412--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25008"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsLongExtraUseTabulartrue </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4358--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4414--><p class="noindent" >
<span
class="cmti-10">before the style is set</span>. For example:
@@ -8451,7 +8445,7 @@
\GlsLongExtraUseTabulartrue
\setglossarystyle{long-name-desc}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4363--><p class="nopar" > or
+<!--l. 4419--><p class="nopar" > or
@@ -8460,52 +8454,52 @@
\GlsLongExtraUseTabulartrue
\printunsrtglossary[style={long-name-desc}]
</pre>
-<!--l. 4368--><p class="nopar" > If you use this setting, you can change the default vertical alignment with:
-</p><!--l. 4371--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 4424--><p class="nopar" > If you use this setting, you can change the default vertical alignment with:
+</p><!--l. 4427--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25009"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraTabularVAlign </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4373--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4429--><p class="noindent" >
The default definition is <span
class="cmtt-10">c</span>.
-</p><!--l. 4376--><p class="indent" > The column titles are formatted according to:
-</p><!--l. 4377--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4432--><p class="indent" > The column titles are formatted according to:
+</p><!--l. 4433--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25010"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraHeaderFmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4379--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4435--><p class="noindent" >
which simply does <span
class="cmtt-10">\textbf{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span>by default.
-</p><!--l. 4382--><p class="indent" > The name column has the title given by <span
+</p><!--l. 4438--><p class="indent" > The name column has the title given by <span
class="cmtt-10">\entryname</span><a
id="dx1-25011"></a> and the column alignment is
given by:
-</p><!--l. 4384--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4440--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25012"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameAlign </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4386--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4442--><p class="noindent" >
which expands to <span
class="cmtt-10">l </span>(left) by default.
-</p><!--l. 4389--><p class="indent" > The symbol column (where applicable) has the title given by <span
+</p><!--l. 4445--><p class="indent" > The symbol column (where applicable) has the title given by <span
class="cmtt-10">\symbolname</span><a
id="dx1-25013"></a> and
the column alignment is given by:
-</p><!--l. 4391--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4447--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25014"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSymbolAlign </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4393--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4449--><p class="noindent" >
which expands to <span
class="cmtt-10">c </span>(centred) by default.
-</p><!--l. 4396--><p class="indent" > The location list column (where applicable) has the title given by <span
+</p><!--l. 4452--><p class="indent" > The location list column (where applicable) has the title given by <span
class="cmtt-10">\pagelistname</span><a
id="dx1-25015"></a>
and the column alignment is given by:
-</p><!--l. 4398--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4454--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25016"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraLocationAlign </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4400--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4456--><p class="noindent" >
which expands to
@@ -8514,20 +8508,20 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-133">
>{\raggedright}p{\glspagelistwidth}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4404--><p class="nopar" > by default. (Ragged-right paragraph, <span
+<!--l. 4460--><p class="nopar" > by default. (Ragged-right paragraph, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspagelistwidth</span><a
id="dx1-25017"></a> is defined in <span
class="cmss-10">glossary-long</span><a
id="dx1-25018"></a>,
which is automatically loaded.)
-</p><!--l. 4408--><p class="indent" > The description column has the title given by <span
+</p><!--l. 4464--><p class="indent" > The description column has the title given by <span
class="cmtt-10">\descriptionname</span><a
id="dx1-25019"></a> and the column
alignment is given by:
-</p><!--l. 4410--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4466--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25020"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraDescAlign </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4412--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4468--><p class="noindent" >
which expands to
@@ -8536,22 +8530,22 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-134">
>{\raggedright}p{\glsdescwidth}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4416--><p class="nopar" > by default. (Ragged-right paragraph, <span
+<!--l. 4472--><p class="nopar" > by default. (Ragged-right paragraph, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdescwidth</span><a
id="dx1-25021"></a> is defined in <span
class="cmss-10">glossary-long</span><a
id="dx1-25022"></a>,
which is automatically loaded.)
-</p><!--l. 4420--><p class="indent" > Unlike the long styles provided by the base <span
+</p><!--l. 4476--><p class="indent" > Unlike the long styles provided by the base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package, these new styles try
to determine the value of <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdescwidth </span>at the start of the glossary according to the
number of columns provided by the style. The calculations are performed by the
following commands:
-</p><!--l. 4425--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4481--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25023"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSetDescWidth </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4427--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4483--><p class="noindent" >
This is used by the styles that have a name and description column. The value of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdescwidth </span>is computed as:
@@ -8560,7 +8554,7 @@
<img
src="glossaries-extra-manual0x.png" alt="\glsdescwidth = \linewidth- 4\tabcolsep- W
" class="math-display" /></div>
-<!--l. 4433--><p class="indent" > where <span
+<!--l. 4489--><p class="indent" > where <span
class="cmmi-10">W </span>is a guess at the width of the name column. This is first set to the width
of the name column header: </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
@@ -8574,19 +8568,19 @@
</div>
</div> If any names in that column are larger than this, then you need to specify the widest
name using:
-<!--l. 4440--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 4496--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25024"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSetWidest{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">widest name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4442--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4498--><p class="noindent" >
or
-</p><!--l. 4444--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4500--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25025"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraUpdateWidest{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4446--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4502--><p class="noindent" >
These work like the analogous commands <span
class="cmtt-10">\glssetwidest </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsupdatewidest</span>
@@ -8606,7 +8600,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">set-widest </span>option. If you have the entry counter enabled,
you will need to include this with the name for the extra material to be taken into
account.
-</p><!--l. 4456--><p class="indent" > The name isn’t shown for child entries by default, but if you change this and you
+</p><!--l. 4512--><p class="indent" > The name isn’t shown for child entries by default, but if you change this and you
want to use <a
id="dx1-25029"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
@@ -8615,7 +8609,7 @@
id="dx1-25030"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>v1.8+) then you need to
redefine:
-</p><!--l. 4460--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4516--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25031"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraUpdateWidestChild{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -8622,7 +8616,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4462--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4518--><p class="noindent" >
This does nothing by default, but if you are including the child names then you need
to redefine this command:
@@ -8634,8 +8628,8 @@
 \glslongextraUpdateWidest{#2}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4469--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 4471--><p class="indent" > If you prefer to set an explicit width for the description column then you need to
+<!--l. 4525--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 4527--><p class="indent" > If you prefer to set an explicit width for the description column then you need to
redefine <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSetDescWidth</span>. For example:
@@ -8647,14 +8641,14 @@
  \setlength{\glsdescwidth}{0.6\linewidth}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4478--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 4480--><p class="indent" > The styles that have a name, symbol and description, <span
+<!--l. 4534--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 4536--><p class="indent" > The styles that have a name, symbol and description, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdescwidth </span>is set
with:
-</p><!--l. 4482--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4538--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25032"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSymSetDescWidth </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4484--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4540--><p class="noindent" >
This first uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSetDescWidth </span>and then subtracts 2<span
class="cmtt-10">\tabcolsep </span>and
@@ -8672,7 +8666,7 @@
  \addtolength{\glsdescwidth}{-3cm}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4495--><p class="nopar" > or
+<!--l. 4551--><p class="nopar" > or
@@ -8682,14 +8676,14 @@
  \setlength{\glsdescwidth}{.5\linewidth}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4501--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 4503--><p class="indent" > For the styles that have a name, description and location column, <span
+<!--l. 4557--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 4559--><p class="indent" > For the styles that have a name, description and location column, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdescwidth</span>
is set using:
-</p><!--l. 4505--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4561--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25033"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraLocSetDescWidth </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4507--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4563--><p class="noindent" >
This uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSetDescWidth </span>and then subtracts 2<span
class="cmtt-10">\tabcolsep </span>and
@@ -8699,13 +8693,13 @@
both <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdescwidth </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspagelistwidth </span>if appropriate.
-</p><!--l. 4513--><p class="indent" > For the styles that have a name, description, symbol and location column,
+</p><!--l. 4569--><p class="indent" > For the styles that have a name, description, symbol and location column,
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdescwidth </span>is set using:
-</p><!--l. 4515--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4571--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25034"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSymLocSetDescWidth </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4517--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4573--><p class="noindent" >
This uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSymSetDescWidth </span>and then subtracts 2<span
class="cmtt-10">\tabcolsep </span>and
@@ -8713,13 +8707,13 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glspagelistwidth </span>from <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdescwidth</span>. Again, you can redefine this command to
explicitly set both lengths.
-</p><!--l. 4523--><p class="indent" > In all cases, the top-level name is formatted according to:
-</p><!--l. 4524--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4579--><p class="indent" > In all cases, the top-level name is formatted according to:
+</p><!--l. 4580--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25035"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameFmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4526--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4582--><p class="noindent" >
This does </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
@@ -8736,30 +8730,30 @@
</div>
</div> which includes the entry counter (if enabled), the target and the post-name
link.
-<!--l. 4533--><p class="indent" > The top-level description is formatted according to:
-</p><!--l. 4534--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 4589--><p class="indent" > The top-level description is formatted according to:
+</p><!--l. 4590--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25036"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraDescFmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4536--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4592--><p class="noindent" >
This does <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentrydesc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span>followed by the post-description hook.
-</p><!--l. 4540--><p class="indent" > The styles that have a symbol column format the symbol using:
-</p><!--l. 4541--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4596--><p class="indent" > The styles that have a symbol column format the symbol using:
+</p><!--l. 4597--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25037"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSymbolFmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4543--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4599--><p class="noindent" >
This just does <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentrysymbol{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>.
-</p><!--l. 4546--><p class="indent" > The styles that have a location list column format the list using:
-</p><!--l. 4547--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4602--><p class="indent" > The styles that have a location list column format the list using:
+</p><!--l. 4603--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25038"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraLocationFmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -8766,14 +8760,14 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">locations</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4549--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4605--><p class="noindent" >
This just does ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">locations</span>⟩ and ignores the label.
-</p><!--l. 4552--><p class="indent" > The child entries have their name formatted according to:
-</p><!--l. 4553--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4608--><p class="indent" > The child entries have their name formatted according to:
+</p><!--l. 4609--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25039"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSubNameFmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -8780,7 +8774,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4555--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4611--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">level</span>⟩ is the hierarchical level. This defaults to: </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
@@ -8796,7 +8790,7 @@
</div>
</div> This includes the sub-entry counter (if enabled) and the target but doesn’t show the
name. The child description is formatted according to:
-<!--l. 4562--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 4618--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25040"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSubDescFmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -8803,13 +8797,13 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4564--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4620--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to just <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraDescFmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
-</p><!--l. 4567--><p class="indent" > The child symbol is formatted (where appropriate) according to:
-</p><!--l. 4568--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4623--><p class="indent" > The child symbol is formatted (where appropriate) according to:
+</p><!--l. 4624--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25041"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSubSymbolFmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -8816,14 +8810,14 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4570--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4626--><p class="noindent" >
This just does <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSymbolFmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span>by default.
-</p><!--l. 4573--><p class="indent" > The styles that have a location list column format the list for child entries
+</p><!--l. 4629--><p class="indent" > The styles that have a location list column format the list for child entries
using:
-</p><!--l. 4575--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4631--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25042"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSubLocationFmt</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -8832,11 +8826,11 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">locations</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4577--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4633--><p class="noindent" >
This just does ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">locations</span>⟩ and ignores the level and label.
-</p><!--l. 4580--><p class="indent" > The letter group headings are formatted according to:
-</p><!--l. 4581--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4636--><p class="indent" > The letter group headings are formatted according to:
+</p><!--l. 4637--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25043"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraGroupHeading{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">n</span>⟩<span
@@ -8843,13 +8837,13 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4583--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4639--><p class="noindent" >
which does nothing by default. The first argument ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">n</span>⟩ is the number of columns in the
table. The second argument ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ is the group label (not the title, although they may
happen to be the same).
-</p><!--l. 4589--><p class="indent" > This can be redefined to show the group heading. For example:
+</p><!--l. 4645--><p class="indent" > This can be redefined to show the group heading. For example:
@@ -8862,11 +8856,11 @@
  \noalign{\vskip\normalbaselineskip}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4597--><p class="nopar" > This ignores the first argument and just puts the group title in the first column
+<!--l. 4653--><p class="nopar" > This ignores the first argument and just puts the group title in the first column
formatted according to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraHeaderFmt </span>(to match the column
header).
-</p><!--l. 4602--><p class="indent" > Remember that you can also adjust the styles through category attributes. The
+</p><!--l. 4658--><p class="indent" > Remember that you can also adjust the styles through category attributes. The
name column’s title is given by <span
class="cmtt-10">\entryname</span>, the description column’s title is given by
<span
@@ -8874,24 +8868,22 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\symbolname</span>, as for the other long styles that have headers.
</p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4610--><p class="noindent" >
- </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4610--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
class="cmss-10">long-name-desc</span><a
id="dx1-25044"></a> This is like the <span
class="cmss-10">longragged-booktabs</span><a
- id="dx1-25045"></a> style but doesn’t show
- the location list (regardless of the <a
+ id="dx1-25045"></a> style but doesn’t show the
+ location list (regardless of the <a
href="#styopt.nonumberlist"><span
class="cmss-10">nonumberlist</span></a><a
- id="dx1-25046"></a> option). The name is shown
- in the first column and the description in the second.
- </p><!--l. 4615--><p class="noindent" >The symbol is not displayed. The header row is produced with:
- </p><!--l. 4617--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-25046"></a> option). The name is shown in
+ the first column and the description in the second.
+ <!--l. 4671--><p class="noindent" >The symbol is not displayed. The header row is produced with:
+ </p><!--l. 4673--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25047"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameDescHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4619--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4675--><p class="noindent" >
This essentially uses the same code as for <span
class="cmss-10">longragged-booktabs</span><a
id="dx1-25048"></a> but makes it
@@ -8905,16 +8897,16 @@
\glslongextraNameDescTabularHeader\endhead
\glslongextraNameDescTabularFooter\endfoot
</pre>
- <!--l. 4626--><p class="nopar" > where:
- </p><!--l. 4628--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ <!--l. 4682--><p class="nopar" > where:
+ </p><!--l. 4684--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25049"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameDescTabularHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4630--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4686--><p class="noindent" >
sets up the header and
- </p><!--l. 4632--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4688--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25050"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameDescTabularFooter </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4634--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4690--><p class="noindent" >
sets up the footer. If you have setup the <span
class="cmss-10">tabular</span><a
id="dx1-25051"></a><a
@@ -8925,7 +8917,7 @@
id="dx1-25054"></a> environment
(and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameDescHeader </span>isn’t used).
- </p><!--l. 4640--><p class="noindent" >For example, to simply remove the header and footer (for the default <span
+ </p><!--l. 4696--><p class="noindent" >For example, to simply remove the header and footer (for the default <span
class="cmss-10">longtable</span><a
id="dx1-25055"></a><a
id="dx1-25056"></a>
@@ -8937,7 +8929,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-141">
\renewcommand{\glslongextraNameDescHeader}{}
</pre>
- <!--l. 4644--><p class="nopar" > Or to change the name alignment to centred:
+ <!--l. 4700--><p class="nopar" > Or to change the name alignment to centred:
@@ -8945,79 +8937,70 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-142">
\renewcommand{\glslongextraNameAlign}{c}
</pre>
- <!--l. 4648--><p class="nopar" >
+ <!--l. 4704--><p class="nopar" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4650--><p class="noindent" >
- </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4650--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
class="cmss-10">long-name-desc-loc</span><a
id="dx1-25057"></a> This is like the <span
class="cmss-10">long-name-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-25058"></a> style but has a third column
- for the location list. The <span
+ id="dx1-25058"></a> style but has a third column for
+ the location list. The <span
class="cmss-10">longtable</span><a
id="dx1-25059"></a><a
id="dx1-25060"></a> header is given by:
- </p><!--l. 4653--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-25061"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 4709--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-25061"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameDescLocationHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4655--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4711--><p class="noindent" >
which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the <span
class="cmss-10">tabular</span><a
id="dx1-25062"></a><a
id="dx1-25063"></a>
version:
- </p><!--l. 4658--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4714--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25064"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameDescLocationTabularHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4660--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4716--><p class="noindent" >
and
- </p><!--l. 4662--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4718--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25065"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameDescLocationTabularFooter </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4664--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4720--><p class="noindent" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4666--><p class="noindent" >
- </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4666--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
class="cmss-10">long-desc-name</span><a
id="dx1-25066"></a> This is like the <span
class="cmss-10">long-name-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-25067"></a> style but swaps the columns.
- Note that if the entry counter is displayed it will appear at the start of the
+ id="dx1-25067"></a> style but swaps the columns. Note
+ that if the entry counter is displayed it will appear at the start of the
second column by default. The <span
class="cmss-10">longtable</span><a
id="dx1-25068"></a><a
id="dx1-25069"></a> header is formatted according
to:
- </p><!--l. 4671--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-25070"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 4727--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-25070"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraDescNameHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4673--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4729--><p class="noindent" >
which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the <span
class="cmss-10">tabular</span><a
id="dx1-25071"></a><a
id="dx1-25072"></a>
version:
- </p><!--l. 4676--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4732--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25073"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraDescNameTabularHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4678--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4734--><p class="noindent" >
and
- </p><!--l. 4680--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4736--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25074"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraDescNameTabularFooter </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4682--><p class="noindent" >
-
-
-
+ </p><!--l. 4738--><p class="noindent" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4684--><p class="noindent" >
- </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4684--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
class="cmss-10">long-loc-desc-name</span><a
id="dx1-25075"></a> This has three columns containing the location list,
description and name. The <span
@@ -9025,289 +9008,271 @@
id="dx1-25076"></a><a
id="dx1-25077"></a> header is formatted according
to:
- </p><!--l. 4688--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-25078"></a> <span
+
+
+
+ <!--l. 4744--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-25078"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraLocationDescNameHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4690--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4746--><p class="noindent" >
which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the <span
class="cmss-10">tabular</span><a
id="dx1-25079"></a><a
id="dx1-25080"></a>
version:
- </p><!--l. 4693--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4749--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25081"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraLocationDescNameTabularHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4695--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4751--><p class="noindent" >
and
- </p><!--l. 4697--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4753--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25082"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraLocationDescNameTabularFooter </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4699--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4755--><p class="noindent" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4701--><p class="noindent" >
- </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4701--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
class="cmss-10">long-name-desc-sym</span><a
id="dx1-25083"></a> This is has three columns, with the name in the first, the
description in the second and the symbol in the third.
- </p><!--l. 4705--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ <!--l. 4761--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">longtable</span><a
id="dx1-25084"></a><a
id="dx1-25085"></a> header row is produced with:
- </p><!--l. 4706--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4762--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25086"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameDescSymHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4708--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4764--><p class="noindent" >
which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the <span
class="cmss-10">tabular</span><a
id="dx1-25087"></a><a
id="dx1-25088"></a>
version:
- </p><!--l. 4711--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4767--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25089"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameDescSymTabularHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4713--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4769--><p class="noindent" >
and
- </p><!--l. 4715--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4771--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25090"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameDescSymTabularFooter </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4717--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4773--><p class="noindent" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4719--><p class="noindent" >
- </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4719--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
class="cmss-10">long-name-desc-sym-loc</span><a
id="dx1-25091"></a> This is has four columns, with the name in the first, the
description in the second, the symbol in the third and the location list in the
fourth.
-
-
-
- </p><!--l. 4723--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ <!--l. 4779--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">longtable</span><a
id="dx1-25092"></a><a
id="dx1-25093"></a> header row is produced with:
- </p><!--l. 4724--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4780--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25094"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameDescSymLocationHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4726--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4782--><p class="noindent" >
which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the <span
class="cmss-10">tabular</span><a
id="dx1-25095"></a><a
id="dx1-25096"></a>
version:
- </p><!--l. 4729--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4785--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25097"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameDescSymLocationTabularHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4731--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4787--><p class="noindent" >
and
- </p><!--l. 4733--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4789--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25098"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameDescSymLocationTabularFooter </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4735--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4791--><p class="noindent" >
+
+
+
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4737--><p class="noindent" >
- </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4737--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
class="cmss-10">long-name-sym-desc</span><a
id="dx1-25099"></a> This is like the <span
class="cmss-10">long-name-desc-sym</span><a
- id="dx1-25100"></a> but the second and
- third column are swapped. The <span
+ id="dx1-25100"></a> but the second and third
+ column are swapped. The <span
class="cmss-10">longtable</span><a
id="dx1-25101"></a><a
id="dx1-25102"></a> header row is given by:
- </p><!--l. 4740--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-25103"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 4796--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-25103"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameSymDescHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4742--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4798--><p class="noindent" >
which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the <span
class="cmss-10">tabular</span><a
id="dx1-25104"></a><a
id="dx1-25105"></a>
version:
- </p><!--l. 4745--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4801--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25106"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameSymDescTabularHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4747--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4803--><p class="noindent" >
and
- </p><!--l. 4749--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4805--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25107"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameSymDescTabularFooter </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4751--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4807--><p class="noindent" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4753--><p class="noindent" >
- </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4753--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
class="cmss-10">long-name-sym-desc-loc</span><a
id="dx1-25108"></a> This is like the <span
class="cmss-10">long-name-desc-sym-loc</span><a
- id="dx1-25109"></a> but the
- second and third column are swapped. The <span
+ id="dx1-25109"></a> but the second and
+ third column are swapped. The <span
class="cmss-10">longtable</span><a
id="dx1-25110"></a><a
- id="dx1-25111"></a> header row is given
- by:
- </p><!--l. 4756--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-25112"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-25111"></a> header row is given by:
+ <!--l. 4812--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-25112"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameSymDescLocationHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4758--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4814--><p class="noindent" >
which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the <span
class="cmss-10">tabular</span><a
id="dx1-25113"></a><a
id="dx1-25114"></a>
version:
- </p><!--l. 4761--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4817--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25115"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameSymDescLocationTabularHeader </span></div><hr>
-
-
-
- </p><!--l. 4763--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4819--><p class="noindent" >
and
- </p><!--l. 4765--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4821--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25116"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraNameSymDescLocationTabularFooter </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4767--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4823--><p class="noindent" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4769--><p class="noindent" >
- </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4769--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
class="cmss-10">long-sym-desc-name</span><a
- id="dx1-25117"></a> This has the symbol in the first column, the description in
- the second and the name in the third. The <span
+ id="dx1-25117"></a> This has the symbol in the first column, the description in the
+ second and the name in the third. The <span
class="cmss-10">longtable</span><a
id="dx1-25118"></a><a
id="dx1-25119"></a> header row is given
by:
- </p><!--l. 4772--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-25120"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 4828--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-25120"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSymDescNameHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4774--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4830--><p class="noindent" >
which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the <span
class="cmss-10">tabular</span><a
id="dx1-25121"></a><a
id="dx1-25122"></a>
version:
- </p><!--l. 4777--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4833--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25123"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSymDescNameTabularHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4779--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4835--><p class="noindent" >
and
- </p><!--l. 4781--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4837--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25124"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraSymDescNameTabularFooter </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4783--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4839--><p class="noindent" >
+
+
+
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4785--><p class="noindent" >
- </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4785--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
class="cmss-10">long-loc-sym-desc-name</span><a
- id="dx1-25125"></a> This has the location list in the first column, symbol in
- the second column, the description in the third and the name in the fourth. The
+ id="dx1-25125"></a> This has the location list in the first column, symbol in the
+ second column, the description in the third and the name in the fourth. The
<span
class="cmss-10">longtable</span><a
id="dx1-25126"></a><a
id="dx1-25127"></a> header row is given by:
- </p><!--l. 4789--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-25128"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 4845--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-25128"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraLocationSymDescNameHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4791--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4847--><p class="noindent" >
which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the <span
class="cmss-10">tabular</span><a
id="dx1-25129"></a><a
id="dx1-25130"></a>
version:
- </p><!--l. 4794--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4850--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25131"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraLocationSymDescNameTabularHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4796--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4852--><p class="noindent" >
and
- </p><!--l. 4798--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4854--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25132"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraLocationSymDescNameTabularFooter </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4800--><p class="noindent" >
-
-
-
+ </p><!--l. 4856--><p class="noindent" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4802--><p class="noindent" >
- </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4802--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
class="cmss-10">long-desc-sym-name</span><a
- id="dx1-25133"></a> This has the description in the first column, the symbol in
- the second and the name in the third. The <span
+ id="dx1-25133"></a> This has the description in the first column, the symbol in the
+ second and the name in the third. The <span
class="cmss-10">longtable</span><a
id="dx1-25134"></a><a
id="dx1-25135"></a> header row is given
by:
- </p><!--l. 4805--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-25136"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 4861--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-25136"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraDescSymNameHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4807--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4863--><p class="noindent" >
which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the <span
class="cmss-10">tabular</span><a
id="dx1-25137"></a><a
id="dx1-25138"></a>
version:
- </p><!--l. 4810--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4866--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25139"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraDescSymNameTabularHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4812--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4868--><p class="noindent" >
and
- </p><!--l. 4814--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4870--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25140"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraDescSymNameTabularFooter </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4816--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4872--><p class="noindent" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4818--><p class="noindent" >
- </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4818--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
class="cmss-10">long-loc-desc-sym-name</span><a
- id="dx1-25141"></a> This has the location list in the first column, the
- description in the second column, the symbol in the third and the name in the
- fourth. The <span
+ id="dx1-25141"></a> This has the location list in the first column, the description
+ in the second column, the symbol in the third and the name in the fourth. The
+ <span
class="cmss-10">longtable</span><a
id="dx1-25142"></a><a
id="dx1-25143"></a> header row is given by:
- </p><!--l. 4822--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-25144"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 4878--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-25144"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraLocationDescSymNameHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4824--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4880--><p class="noindent" >
which similarly defined in terms of the commands used for the <span
class="cmss-10">tabular</span><a
id="dx1-25145"></a><a
id="dx1-25146"></a>
version:
- </p><!--l. 4827--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 4883--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25147"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraLocationDescSymNameTabularHeader </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4829--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4885--><p class="noindent" >
and
- </p><!--l. 4831--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+
+
+
+ </p><!--l. 4887--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-25148"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongextraLocationDescSymNameTabularFooter </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4833--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4889--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
</dd></dl>
-
-
-
-<!--l. 4837--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 4893--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 4837--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 4893--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.3 </span> <a
- id="x1-260003.3"></a><span
-class="cmss-10">glossary-topic </span>package</h3>
-<!--l. 4840--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.40, the <span
+ id="sec:topic"></a>glossary-topic package</h3>
+<!--l. 4896--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.40, the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package comes with the supplementary
package <span
class="cmss-10">glossary-topic</span><a
@@ -9327,12 +9292,10 @@
id="dx1-26005"></a>
style.
</p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4850--><p class="noindent" >
<span
class="cmssbx-10">topic</span><a
- id="dx1-26006"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4850--><p class="noindent" >This style is similar to the <span
+ id="dx1-26006"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style is similar to the <span
class="cmss-10">tree</span><a
id="dx1-26007"></a> style but the indentation doesn’t start until
the second sub-item level. The top-level entries have the name displayed
@@ -9341,24 +9304,22 @@
href="#styopt.nogroupskip"><span
class="cmss-10">nogroupskip</span></a><a
id="dx1-26008"></a> setting.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 4856--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<span
class="cmssbx-10">topicmcols</span><a
- id="dx1-26009"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 4856--><p class="noindent" >This style is like the <span
+ id="dx1-26009"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style is like the <span
class="cmss-10">topic</span><a
- id="dx1-26010"></a> style but the sub-entries are placed inside a <span
+ id="dx1-26010"></a> style but the sub-entries are placed inside a
+ <span
class="cmss-10">multicols</span><a
id="dx1-26011"></a><a
- id="dx1-26012"></a>
- environment. The environment name is supplied in the value of the
+ id="dx1-26012"></a> environment. The environment name is supplied in the value of the
command:
- </p><!--l. 4860--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-26013"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 4916--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-26013"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicColsEnv </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4862--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4918--><p class="noindent" >
You can change this to the starred form. For example:
@@ -9367,24 +9328,24 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-143">
\renewcommand{\glstopicColsEnv}{multicols*}
</pre>
- <!--l. 4866--><p class="nopar" > The number of columns is given by the command:
- </p><!--l. 4868--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ <!--l. 4922--><p class="nopar" > The number of columns is given by the command:
+ </p><!--l. 4924--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26014"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicCols </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 4870--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 4926--><p class="noindent" >
The default value is 2.</p></dd></dl>
-<!--l. 4873--><p class="noindent" >Both styles use the following commands.
-</p><!--l. 4874--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 4929--><p class="noindent" >Both styles use the following commands.
+</p><!--l. 4930--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26015"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicParIndent </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4876--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4932--><p class="noindent" >
This command is a length that’s used for the paragraph indentation in any
multi-paragraph description for top-level entries, but not for the first paragraph (at
the start of the description) which isn’t indented.
-</p><!--l. 4882--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4938--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26016"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicSubIndent </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4884--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4940--><p class="noindent" >
This command is a length that’s used to calculate the hanging indentation for
sub-entries. The level 1 sub-entries don’t indent the name. Level <span
class="cmmi-10">n </span>sub-entries have
@@ -9394,32 +9355,32 @@
class="cmsy-10">×</span><span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicSubIndent</span>. The hanging indent depends on
whether or not a widest name has been set for the level.
-</p><!--l. 4891--><p class="indent" > As from v1.46, there is also a length for additional indentation used
+</p><!--l. 4947--><p class="indent" > As from v1.46, there is also a length for additional indentation used
in the second paragraph onwards for child entries with multi-paragraph
descriptions:
-</p><!--l. 4894--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4950--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26017"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicSubItemParIndent </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4896--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4952--><p class="noindent" >
This is initialised to <span
class="cmtt-10">\parindent</span><a
id="dx1-26018"></a> when <span
class="cmss-10">glossary-topic</span><a
id="dx1-26019"></a> is loaded.
-</p><!--l. 4900--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4956--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26020"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicInit </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4902--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4958--><p class="noindent" >
Hook used at the start of the glossary. Does nothing by default.
-</p><!--l. 4905--><p class="indent" > Although the styles don’t support letter groups by default, if you have many
+</p><!--l. 4961--><p class="indent" > Although the styles don’t support letter groups by default, if you have many
topics (top-level entries) and you feel that it would help the reader to divide them up
into headed letter groups, you can redefine:
-</p><!--l. 4909--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4965--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26021"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicGroupHeading{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">group label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4911--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4967--><p class="noindent" >
This does nothing by default. If you want to redefine it, you can fetch the
title corresponding to the group label with <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrgetgrouptitle</span>. For
@@ -9434,7 +9395,7 @@
  \section*{\thisgrptitle}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 4920--><p class="nopar" > Remember that if you use <a
+<!--l. 4976--><p class="nopar" > Remember that if you use <a
id="dx1-26022"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>, you will need the <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
@@ -9441,7 +9402,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">--group</span></span></span> (or <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">-g</span></span></span>) switch to
support this.
-</p><!--l. 4924--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4980--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26023"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicItem{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -9448,67 +9409,67 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4926--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4982--><p class="noindent" >
Used to format the name, symbol, description and location list for the top-level
entries. This starts with a paragraph break followed by:
-</p><!--l. 4930--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4986--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26024"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicPreSkip </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4932--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4988--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\medskip</span>. There is then a hook:
-</p><!--l. 4934--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4990--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26025"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicMarker{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4936--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4992--><p class="noindent" >
which does nothing by default, but may be redefined. For example, to add a line to
the table of contents. The name and symbol are set in the form of a title
using:
-</p><!--l. 4941--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 4997--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26026"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicTitle{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4943--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 4999--><p class="noindent" >
This uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glossentryname </span>which converts the first letter to upper case. If there’s a
symbol, this is added in parentheses. Both name and symbol (if present) are
encapsulated by
-</p><!--l. 4947--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5003--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26027"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicTitleFont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4949--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5005--><p class="noindent" >
This uses a bold, large font by default.
-</p><!--l. 4952--><p class="indent" > If the entry has the description key set (tested with <span
+</p><!--l. 5008--><p class="indent" > If the entry has the description key set (tested with <span
class="cmtt-10">\ifglshasdesc</span>) then a
paragraph break is inserted followed by:
-</p><!--l. 4954--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5010--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26028"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicMidSkip </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4956--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5012--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\smallskip</span>. This is followed by the description which is formatted
according to:
-</p><!--l. 4959--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5015--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26029"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicDesc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4961--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5017--><p class="noindent" >
This just does <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glossentrydesc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span>followed by the post-description
hook.
-</p><!--l. 4965--><p class="indent" > A paragraph break followed by:
-</p><!--l. 4966--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5021--><p class="indent" > A paragraph break followed by:
+</p><!--l. 5022--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26030"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicPostSkip </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4968--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5024--><p class="noindent" >
comes next regardless of whether or not the description was displayed. This defaults
to <span
class="cmtt-10">\smallskip</span>. This is then followed by:
@@ -9515,7 +9476,7 @@
-</p><!--l. 4972--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5028--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26031"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicLoc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -9522,25 +9483,25 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4974--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5030--><p class="noindent" >
which may be used to display the location list, but does nothing by default.
-</p><!--l. 4978--><p class="indent" > The sub-entries first set up the paragraph and hanging indentations using:
-</p><!--l. 4980--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5034--><p class="indent" > The sub-entries first set up the paragraph and hanging indentations using:
+</p><!--l. 5036--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26032"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicAssignSubIndent{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4982--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5038--><p class="noindent" >
This uses:
-</p><!--l. 4984--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5040--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26033"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicAssignWidest{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4986--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5042--><p class="noindent" >
to determine if a widest name has been set for the given level.
-</p><!--l. 4989--><p class="indent" > The sub-entry has its information displayed using:
-</p><!--l. 4990--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5045--><p class="indent" > The sub-entry has its information displayed using:
+</p><!--l. 5046--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26034"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicSubItem{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -9549,25 +9510,25 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4992--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5048--><p class="noindent" >
This encapsulates the name with:
-</p><!--l. 4994--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5050--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26035"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicSubNameFont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 4996--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5052--><p class="noindent" >
By default this just uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\textbf</span>. This is followed by:
-</p><!--l. 4998--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5054--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26036"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicSubItemSep </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5000--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5056--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\quad</span>. The name and separator are passed in the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩ argument
of:
-</p><!--l. 5003--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5059--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26037"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicSubItemBox{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">level</span>⟩<span
@@ -9574,20 +9535,20 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5005--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5061--><p class="noindent" >
If a widest name was set for the given level, this will put ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩ inside a box of that
width otherwise it just does ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 5010--><p class="indent" > This is followed by the symbol in parentheses if set. Then, if the description is set,
+</p><!--l. 5066--><p class="indent" > This is followed by the symbol in parentheses if set. Then, if the description is set,
the description and post-description hook are displayed followed by:
-</p><!--l. 5013--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5069--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26038"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicSubPreLocSep </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5015--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5071--><p class="noindent" >
(This command isn’t used if the description isn’t set.)
-</p><!--l. 5018--><p class="indent" > Finally the location list is displayed using:
-</p><!--l. 5019--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5074--><p class="indent" > Finally the location list is displayed using:
+</p><!--l. 5075--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-26039"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstopicSubLoc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -9594,7 +9555,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5021--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5077--><p class="noindent" >
which just does ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">location</span>⟩ by default.
@@ -9601,11 +9562,11 @@
</p>
-<!--l. 5024--><p class="indent" > </div>
-</p><!--l. 5024--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 5080--><p class="indent" > </div>
+</p><!--l. 5080--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">4. <a
id="sec:abbreviations"></a>Abbreviations</h2>
-</p><!--l. 5027--><p class="indent" > The new abbreviation system provided by <span
+</p><!--l. 5083--><p class="indent" > The new abbreviation system provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>is more flexible
than the acronym handling provided by the base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package. The
@@ -9619,7 +9580,7 @@
See the file <a
href="http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/glossaries-extra/samples/sample-abbr-styles.pdf" >sample-abbr-styles.pdf</a> for samples of all provided abbreviation
styles.
-</p><!--l. 5039--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Don’t use <span
+</p><!--l. 5095--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Don’t use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirst</span><a
id="dx1-27001"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfirst</span><a
@@ -9638,8 +9599,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>. If you don’t want the full form to show on first use of <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>use one of the
“nolong” or “noshort” styles. </div>
-</p><!--l. 5048--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5050--><p class="indent" > This lack of flexibility in <span
+</p><!--l. 5104--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5106--><p class="indent" > This lack of flexibility in <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirst </span>can be demonstrated with the following
document:
@@ -9655,7 +9616,7 @@
Compare \gls{ex}['s] with \glsfirst{ex}['s].
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 5062--><p class="nopar" > The <a
+<!--l. 5118--><p class="nopar" > The <a
id="dx1-27005"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>has the footnote marker after the inserted material “EX’s<sup class="textsuperscript"><span
@@ -9670,7 +9631,7 @@
inserted material as <span
class="cmtt-10">\footnote</span><a
id="dx1-27007"></a> is in the post-link hook.
-</p><!--l. 5070--><p class="indent" > There are some instances where <span
+</p><!--l. 5126--><p class="indent" > There are some instances where <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstext </span>can be useful. It’s used internally by
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmttext</span><a
@@ -9685,7 +9646,7 @@
about inserted material as the final optional argument isn’t supported by
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmttext</span>.
-</p><!--l. 5079--><p class="indent" > Abbreviations include acronyms (words formed from initial letters, such as
+</p><!--l. 5135--><p class="indent" > Abbreviations include acronyms (words formed from initial letters, such as
“laser”), initialisms (initial letters of a phrase, such as “html”, that aren’t
pronounced as words) and contractions (where parts of words are omitted, often
replaced by an apostrophe, such as “don’t”). The “acronym” code provided by the
@@ -9698,10 +9659,10 @@
class="cmti-10">described </span>for readers unfamiliar with the term). They are therefore
more like a regular term, which may or may not require a description in the
glossary.
-</p><!--l. 5091--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 5147--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package corrects this misnomer, and provides better
abbreviation handling, with
-</p><!--l. 5093--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5149--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-27011"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -9712,8 +9673,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">long</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5095--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5097--><p class="indent" > This sets the <span
+</p><!--l. 5151--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5153--><p class="indent" > This sets the <span
class="cmss-10">category</span><a
id="dx1-27012"></a> key to <span
class="cmtt-10">abbreviation </span>by default, but that value may
@@ -9735,10 +9696,10 @@
appending the plural suffix). See <a
href="#sec:categories"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">6</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">7</span> </a><a
href="#sec:categories">Categories<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:categories --></a> for further
details.
-</p><!--l. 5107--><p class="indent" > See <a
+</p><!--l. 5163--><p class="indent" > See <a
href="#sec:nested"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
class="cmbx-10">2.8</span> </a><a
@@ -9753,10 +9714,10 @@
id="dx1-27017"></a> within ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩ or ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 5111--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Make sure that you set the category attributes before defining new abbreviations
+</p><!--l. 5167--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Make sure that you set the category attributes before defining new abbreviations
or they may not be correctly applied. </div>
-</p><!--l. 5114--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5116--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 5170--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5172--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span><a
id="dx1-27018"></a> command provided by the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package is redefined by
@@ -9771,7 +9732,7 @@
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
class="cmbx-10">2.9</span> </a><a
href="#sec:acronymmods">Acronym Style Modifications<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:acronymmods --></a>) so
-</p><!--l. 5120--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5176--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-27020"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -9782,7 +9743,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">long</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5122--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5178--><p class="noindent" >
is
now
equivalent
@@ -9805,7 +9766,7 @@
class="cmitt-10">long</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
<br /><spacer type=vertical size=10></span>
-</p><!--l. 5129--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 5185--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>command is superficially similar to the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>
package’s <span
@@ -9825,13 +9786,13 @@
styles provided by the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package, although they may produce similar
results.)
-</p><!--l. 5139--><p class="indent" > The way the abbreviations are displayed by commands like <span
+</p><!--l. 5195--><p class="indent" > The way the abbreviations are displayed by commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>varies according
to the abbreviation style. The styles are set according to the entry’s category so,
unlike the base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package, you can have different abbreviation styles within
the same glossary.
-</p><!--l. 5145--><p class="indent" > There are two types of full forms. The display full form, which is used on
+</p><!--l. 5201--><p class="indent" > There are two types of full forms. The display full form, which is used on
<a
id="dx1-27025"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> by commands like <span
@@ -9852,7 +9813,7 @@
class="cmss-10">short-footnote</span></a><a
id="dx1-27030"></a>, the display and inline full forms are
different.
-</p><!--l. 5152--><p class="indent" > These formatting commands aren’t stored in the <span
+</p><!--l. 5208--><p class="indent" > These formatting commands aren’t stored in the <span
class="cmss-10">short</span><a
id="dx1-27031"></a>, <span
class="cmss-10">shortplural</span><a
@@ -9871,12 +9832,12 @@
id="dx1-27035"></a> and the case-changing variants don’t use
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongfont</span>.
-</p><!--l. 5160--><p class="indent" > You can apply the formatting command used for the short form to some arbitrary
+</p><!--l. 5216--><p class="indent" > You can apply the formatting command used for the short form to some arbitrary
text using
-</p><!--l. 5162--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5218--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-27036"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsuseabbrvfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
@@ -9883,11 +9844,11 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5164--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5220--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">category</span>⟩ is the category label that identifies the abbreviation style. Similarly
for the formatting command use by the long form:
-</p><!--l. 5168--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5224--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-27037"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsuselongfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
@@ -9894,8 +9855,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5170--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5172--><p class="indent" > You can’t use the acronym commands provided by the base package with the new
+</p><!--l. 5226--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5228--><p class="indent" > You can’t use the acronym commands provided by the base package with the new
abbreviations provided by the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package. The style commands that
replace <span
@@ -9913,7 +9874,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\forallacronyms</span><a
id="dx1-27039"></a> command, which iterates over all acronym
lists, should be replaced with:
-</p><!--l. 5179--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5235--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-27040"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\forallabbreviationlists{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">cs</span>⟩<span
@@ -9920,15 +9881,15 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">body</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5181--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5237--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 5183--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 5239--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.1 </span> <a
id="sec:tagging"></a>Tagging Initials</h3>
-<!--l. 5186--><p class="noindent" >If you would like to tag the initial letters in the long form such that those letters are
+<!--l. 5242--><p class="noindent" >If you would like to tag the initial letters in the long form such that those letters are
underlined in the glossary but not in the main part of the document, you can
use
-</p><!--l. 5189--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5245--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-28001"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">categories</span>⟩<span
@@ -9935,9 +9896,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">cs</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5191--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5247--><p class="noindent" >
before you define your abbreviations.
-</p><!--l. 5194--><p class="indent" > This command (robustly) defines ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 5250--><p class="indent" > This command (robustly) defines ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">cs</span>⟩ (a control sequence) to accept a single
argument, which is the letter (or letters) that needs to be tagged. The normal
behaviour of this command within the document is to simply do its argument, but in
@@ -9946,12 +9907,12 @@
class="cmss-10">tagging</span></a><a
id="dx1-28002"></a> attribute set to
“true”. For those cases it will use
-</p><!--l. 5201--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5257--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-28003"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrtagfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5203--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5259--><p class="noindent" >
This command defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\underline</span><a
id="dx1-28004"></a><span
@@ -9958,7 +9919,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span>but may be redefined as required.
-</p><!--l. 5207--><p class="indent" > The control sequence ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 5263--><p class="indent" > The control sequence ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">cs</span>⟩ can’t already be defined when used with the unstarred
version of <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging </span>for safety reasons. The starred
@@ -9967,7 +9928,7 @@
commands, ensure that you don’t redefine something important. In fact, just
forget the existence of the starred version and let’s pretend I didn’t mention
it.
-</p><!--l. 5216--><p class="indent" > The first argument of <span
+</p><!--l. 5272--><p class="indent" > The first argument of <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging </span>is a comma-separated
list of category names. The <a
href="#catattr.tagging"><span
@@ -9977,10 +9938,10 @@
<a
href="#sec:categories"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">6</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">7</span> </a><a
href="#sec:categories">Categories<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:categories --></a>) but this must be done before the glossary is
displayed.
-</p><!--l. 5223--><p class="indent" > The accompanying sample file <span
+</p><!--l. 5279--><p class="indent" > The accompanying sample file <span
class="cmtt-10">sample-mixtures.tex </span>uses initial tagging for both
@@ -9997,7 +9958,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-146">
\GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging{acronym,abbreviation}{\itag}
</pre>
-<!--l. 5228--><p class="nopar" > This defines the command <span
+<!--l. 5284--><p class="nopar" > This defines the command <span
class="cmtt-10">\itag </span>which can be used in the definitions. For
example:
@@ -10016,18 +9977,18 @@
\newabbreviation{xml}{XML}
 {e\itag{x}tensible \itag{m}arkup \itag{l}anguage}
</pre>
-<!--l. 5243--><p class="nopar" > The underlining of the tagged letters only occurs in the glossary and then only for
+<!--l. 5299--><p class="nopar" > The underlining of the tagged letters only occurs in the glossary and then only for
entries with the <a
href="#catattr.tagging"><span
class="cmss-10">tagging</span></a><a
id="dx1-28008"></a> attribute set.
-</p><!--l. 5248--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5304--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 5248--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 5304--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.2 </span> <a
id="sec:abbrstyle"></a>Abbreviation Styles</h3>
-<!--l. 5251--><p class="noindent" >The abbreviation style must be set before abbreviations are defined using:
-</p><!--l. 5253--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 5307--><p class="noindent" >The abbreviation style must be set before abbreviations are defined using:
+</p><!--l. 5309--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29001"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\setabbreviationstyle[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩<span
@@ -10034,7 +9995,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">style-name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5255--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5311--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">style-name</span>⟩ is the name of the style and ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">category</span>⟩ is the category label
@@ -10056,11 +10017,11 @@
id="dx1-29004"></a> attribute to
<span
class="cmtt-10">true</span>.
-</p><!--l. 5266--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you want to apply different styles to groups of abbreviations, assign a
+</p><!--l. 5322--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you want to apply different styles to groups of abbreviations, assign a
different category to each group and set the style for the given category.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 5270--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5272--><p class="indent" > Note that <span
+</p><!--l. 5326--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5328--><p class="indent" > Note that <span
class="cmtt-10">\setacronymstyle</span><a
id="dx1-29005"></a> is disabled by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>. Use </p><div class="alltt">
@@ -10082,7 +10043,7 @@
class="cmbx-10">2.9</span> </a><a
href="#sec:acronymmods">Acronym Style Modifications<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:acronymmods --></a>). However the original acronym
interface is incompatible with all the commands described here.
-<!--l. 5282--><p class="indent" > Abbreviations can be used with the standard <span
+<!--l. 5338--><p class="indent" > Abbreviations can be used with the standard <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>commands, such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
id="dx1-29007"></a>,
@@ -10092,7 +10053,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\acronymfont</span><a
id="dx1-29009"></a>).
The short form can be produced with:
-</p><!--l. 5286--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5342--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29010"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10101,12 +10062,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5288--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5344--><p class="noindent" >
(Use this instead of <span
class="cmtt-10">\acrshort</span><a
id="dx1-29011"></a>.)
-</p><!--l. 5291--><p class="indent" > The long form can be produced with
-</p><!--l. 5292--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5347--><p class="indent" > The long form can be produced with
+</p><!--l. 5348--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29012"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlong[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10115,13 +10076,13 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5294--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5350--><p class="noindent" >
(Use this instead of <span
class="cmtt-10">\acrlong</span><a
id="dx1-29013"></a>.)
-</p><!--l. 5297--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 5353--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmti-10">inline </span>full form can be produced with
-</p><!--l. 5298--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5354--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29014"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfull[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10130,11 +10091,11 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5300--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5356--><p class="noindent" >
(This this instead of <span
class="cmtt-10">\acrfull</span><a
id="dx1-29015"></a>.)
-</p><!--l. 5303--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> In general, it’s best not to use commands like <span
+</p><!--l. 5359--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> In general, it’s best not to use commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirst</span><a
id="dx1-29016"></a> for abbreviations,
especially if you use the ⟨<span
@@ -10142,8 +10103,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>(possibly with a
reset) or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfull</span>. </div>
-</p><!--l. 5308--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5310--><p class="indent" > As mentioned earlier, the inline full form may not necessarily match the format
+</p><!--l. 5364--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5366--><p class="indent" > As mentioned earlier, the inline full form may not necessarily match the format
used on <a
id="dx1-29017"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> with <span
@@ -10154,7 +10115,7 @@
short form on <a
id="dx1-29019"></a>first use, but the full form will display the long form followed by the
short form in parentheses.
-</p><!--l. 5317--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you want to use an abbreviation in a chapter or section title, use the
+</p><!--l. 5373--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you want to use an abbreviation in a chapter or section title, use the
commands described in <a
href="#sec:headtitle"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
@@ -10161,15 +10122,15 @@
class="cmbx-10">5</span> </a><a
href="#sec:headtitle">Entries in Sectioning Titles, Headers,
Captions and Contents<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:headtitle --></a> instead. </div>
-</p><!--l. 5321--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5323--><p class="indent" > The arguments ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 5377--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5379--><p class="indent" > The arguments ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">options</span>⟩, ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ and ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩ are the same as for commands such as
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glstext</span>. There are also analogous case-changing commands:
-</p><!--l. 5327--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case short form:
-</p><!--l. 5328--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5383--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case short form:
+</p><!--l. 5384--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29020"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrshort[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10178,9 +10139,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5330--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5332--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case long form:
-</p><!--l. 5333--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5386--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5388--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case long form:
+</p><!--l. 5389--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29021"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrlong[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10189,9 +10150,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5335--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5337--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case inline full form:
-</p><!--l. 5338--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5391--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5393--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case inline full form:
+</p><!--l. 5394--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29022"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrfull[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10200,12 +10161,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5340--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5342--><p class="indent" > All upper case short form:
+</p><!--l. 5396--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5398--><p class="indent" > All upper case short form:
-</p><!--l. 5343--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5399--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29023"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSxtrshort[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10214,9 +10175,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5345--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5347--><p class="indent" > All upper case long form:
-</p><!--l. 5348--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5401--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5403--><p class="indent" > All upper case long form:
+</p><!--l. 5404--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29024"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSxtrlong[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10225,9 +10186,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5350--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5352--><p class="indent" > All upper case inline full form:
-</p><!--l. 5353--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5406--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5408--><p class="indent" > All upper case inline full form:
+</p><!--l. 5409--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29025"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSxtrfull[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10236,10 +10197,10 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5355--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5357--><p class="indent" > Plural forms are also available.
-</p><!--l. 5359--><p class="indent" > Short form plurals:
-</p><!--l. 5360--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5411--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5413--><p class="indent" > Plural forms are also available.
+</p><!--l. 5415--><p class="indent" > Short form plurals:
+</p><!--l. 5416--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29026"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortpl[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10248,8 +10209,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5362--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5363--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5418--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5419--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29027"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrshortpl[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10258,8 +10219,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5365--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5366--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5421--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5422--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29028"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSxtrshortpl[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10268,9 +10229,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5368--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5370--><p class="indent" > Long form plurals:
-</p><!--l. 5371--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5424--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5426--><p class="indent" > Long form plurals:
+</p><!--l. 5427--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29029"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongpl[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10279,8 +10240,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5373--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5374--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5429--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5430--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29030"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrlongpl[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10289,8 +10250,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5376--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5377--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5432--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5433--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29031"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSxtrlongpl[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10299,9 +10260,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5379--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5381--><p class="indent" > Full form plurals:
-</p><!--l. 5382--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5435--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5437--><p class="indent" > Full form plurals:
+</p><!--l. 5438--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29032"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfullpl[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10310,8 +10271,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5384--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5385--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5440--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5441--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29033"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrfullpl[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10320,8 +10281,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5387--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5388--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5443--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5444--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-29034"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSxtrfullpl[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
@@ -10330,8 +10291,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5390--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5392--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Be careful about using <span
+</p><!--l. 5446--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5448--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Be careful about using <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryfull</span>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsentryfull</span>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryfullpl </span>and
@@ -10346,13 +10307,13 @@
</div>
-</p><!--l. 5398--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5400--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5454--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5456--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 5400--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 5456--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.3 </span> <a
id="sec:abbrshortcuts"></a>Shortcut Commands</h3>
-<!--l. 5403--><p class="noindent" >The abbreviation shortcut commands can be enabled using the <a
+<!--l. 5459--><p class="noindent" >The abbreviation shortcut commands can be enabled using the <a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=abbreviations</span><a
@@ -10374,7 +10335,7 @@
-<!--l. 5410--><p class="indent" > <a
+<!--l. 5466--><p class="indent" > <a
id="tab:abbrshortcuts"></a></p><hr class="float" /><div class="float"
>
@@ -10692,10 +10653,10 @@
</div><hr class="endfloat" />
</div>
-<!--l. 5448--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 5504--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.4 </span> <a
id="sec:predefabbrvstyles"></a>Predefined Abbreviation Styles</h3>
-<!--l. 5451--><p class="noindent" >There are two types of abbreviation styles: those that treat the abbreviation as a
+<!--l. 5507--><p class="noindent" >There are two types of abbreviation styles: those that treat the abbreviation as a
regular entry (so that <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
id="dx1-31001"></a> uses <span
@@ -10706,7 +10667,7 @@
id="dx1-31003"></a> uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrgenabbrvfmt</span><a
id="dx1-31004"></a>).
-</p><!--l. 5456--><p class="indent" > The regular entry abbreviation styles set the <a
+</p><!--l. 5512--><p class="indent" > The regular entry abbreviation styles set the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
id="dx1-31005"></a> attribute to “true” for the
@@ -10731,7 +10692,7 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort</span><a
id="dx1-31013"></a>.
-</p><!--l. 5465--><p class="indent" > The other abbreviation styles don’t modify the <a
+</p><!--l. 5521--><p class="indent" > The other abbreviation styles don’t modify the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
id="dx1-31014"></a> attribute. The <span
@@ -10751,7 +10712,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfullformat</span><a
id="dx1-31019"></a> that are defined by the
style).
-</p><!--l. 5473--><p class="indent" > In both cases, the <a
+</p><!--l. 5529--><p class="indent" > In both cases, the <a
id="dx1-31020"></a>first use of <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
id="dx1-31021"></a> may not match the text produced by
@@ -10758,10 +10719,10 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirst</span><a
id="dx1-31022"></a> (and likewise for the plural and case-changing versions).
-</p><!--l. 5477--><p class="indent" > The sample file <span
+</p><!--l. 5533--><p class="indent" > The sample file <span
class="cmtt-10">sample-abbr-styles.tex </span>demonstrates all predefined styles
described here.
-</p><!--l. 5480--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> For the “sc” styles that use <span
+</p><!--l. 5536--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> For the “sc” styles that use <span
class="cmtt-10">\textsc</span><a
id="dx1-31023"></a>, be careful about your choice of fonts as
some only have limited support. For example, you may not be able to combine bold
@@ -10770,8 +10731,8 @@
id="dx1-31024"></a> package with the <span
class="cmss-10">T1</span>
option or something similar. </div>
-</p><!--l. 5486--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 5488--><p class="indent" > Many of the styles have helper commands in the form <span
+</p><!--l. 5542--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5544--><p class="indent" > Many of the styles have helper commands in the form <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtr...name </span>and
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtr...sort </span>that are expanded within the <span
@@ -10790,20 +10751,20 @@
class="cmti-10">register</span>⟩. It’s essential that these expand when the abbreviation is
defined so don’t hide them behind no-expandable content if you redefine these helper
commands.
-</p><!--l. 5497--><p class="indent" > The parenthetical styles, such as <a
+</p><!--l. 5553--><p class="indent" > The parenthetical styles, such as <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short</span></a><a
id="dx1-31029"></a>, use
-</p><!--l. 5499--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5555--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31030"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrparen{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5501--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5557--><p class="noindent" >
to set the parenthetical material. This just puts parentheses around the text:
(⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩).
-</p><!--l. 5505--><p class="indent" > The basic abbreviation styles, such as <a
+</p><!--l. 5561--><p class="indent" > The basic abbreviation styles, such as <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short</span></a><a
id="dx1-31031"></a> and <a
@@ -10810,7 +10771,7 @@
href="#abbrstyle.short-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long</span></a><a
id="dx1-31032"></a> use
-</p><!--l. 5507--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5563--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31033"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvdefaultfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
@@ -10818,44 +10779,44 @@
-</p><!--l. 5509--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5565--><p class="noindent" >
for the short form. This just does ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩ by default. (That is, no font change is
applied.) On first use,
-</p><!--l. 5512--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5568--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31034"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstabbrvdefaultfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5514--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5570--><p class="noindent" >
is used instead. By default, this just does <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvdefaultfont</span>. The long form is
formatted according to
-</p><!--l. 5517--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5573--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31035"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongdefaultfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5519--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5575--><p class="noindent" >
which again just does ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩ (no font change). On first use,
-</p><!--l. 5521--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5577--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31036"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5523--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5579--><p class="noindent" >
is used instead. This just does <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongdefaultfont</span>. The plural suffix used for the
short form is given by
-</p><!--l. 5526--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5582--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31037"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5528--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5584--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspluralsuffix</span><a
id="dx1-31038"></a>.
-</p><!--l. 5531--><p class="indent" > The small-cap styles, such as <a
+</p><!--l. 5587--><p class="indent" > The small-cap styles, such as <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-sc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-sc</span></a><a
id="dx1-31039"></a> and <a
@@ -10862,23 +10823,23 @@
href="#abbrstyle.short-sc-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sc-long</span></a><a
id="dx1-31040"></a>, use
-</p><!--l. 5533--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5589--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31041"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5535--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5591--><p class="noindent" >
which uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\textsc</span>.<span class="footnote-mark"><a
href="#fn1x4" id="fn1x4-bk"><sup class="textsuperscript">4.1</sup></a></span><a
id="x1-31042f1"></a>
On first use
-</p><!--l. 5541--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5597--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31043"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstabbrvscfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5543--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5599--><p class="noindent" >
is used instead. This uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont </span>by default. So redefine, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span>
@@ -10885,15 +10846,15 @@
to change first and subsequent uses or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstabbrvscfont </span>to change just the
first use.
-</p><!--l. 5548--><p class="indent" > The long form for the small-cap styles uses <span
+</p><!--l. 5604--><p class="indent" > The long form for the small-cap styles uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongdefaultfont </span>or
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongdefaultfont</span>, as with the basic style. The suffix is given
by
-</p><!--l. 5551--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5607--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31044"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrscsuffix </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5553--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5609--><p class="noindent" >
This is defined as
@@ -10902,7 +10863,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-148">
\newcommand*{\glsxtrscsuffix}{\glstextup{\glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 5557--><p class="nopar" > The <span
+<!--l. 5613--><p class="nopar" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstextup</span><a
id="dx1-31045"></a> command is provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>and is used to switch off
@@ -10921,10 +10882,10 @@
id="dx1-31048"></a> attributes. See <a
href="#sec:categories"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">6</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">7</span> </a><a
href="#sec:categories">Categories<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:categories --></a> for further
details.)
-</p><!--l. 5568--><p class="indent" > The small styles, such as <a
+</p><!--l. 5624--><p class="indent" > The small styles, such as <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-sm"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-sm</span></a><a
id="dx1-31049"></a> and <a
@@ -10931,12 +10892,12 @@
href="#abbrstyle.short-sm-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sm-long</span></a><a
id="dx1-31050"></a>, use
-</p><!--l. 5570--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5626--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31051"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5572--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5628--><p class="noindent" >
which uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\textsmaller</span>. (This requires the <span
class="cmss-10">relsizes</span><a
@@ -10943,26 +10904,26 @@
id="dx1-31052"></a> package, which isn’t loaded by
<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>, so must be loaded explicitly.) On first use
-</p><!--l. 5577--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5633--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31053"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstabbrvsmfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5579--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5635--><p class="noindent" >
is used instead. This uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont </span>by default.
-</p><!--l. 5582--><p class="indent" > The long form for the smaller styles uses <span
+</p><!--l. 5638--><p class="indent" > The long form for the smaller styles uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongdefaultfont </span>or
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongdefaultfont</span>, as with the basic style. The suffix is given
by
-</p><!--l. 5585--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5641--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31054"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsmsuffix </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5587--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5643--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to just <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix</span>.
-</p><!--l. 5590--><p class="indent" > The “short-em” (emphasize short) styles, such as <a
+</p><!--l. 5646--><p class="indent" > The “short-em” (emphasize short) styles, such as <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-em"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-em</span></a><a
id="dx1-31055"></a> or <a
@@ -10970,30 +10931,30 @@
class="cmss-10">short-em-long</span></a><a
id="dx1-31056"></a>,
use
-</p><!--l. 5592--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5648--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31057"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5594--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5650--><p class="noindent" >
On first use
-</p><!--l. 5596--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5652--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31058"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstabbrvemfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5598--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5654--><p class="noindent" >
is used instead. This uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont </span>by default. The suffix is given
by
-</p><!--l. 5601--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5657--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31059"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtremsuffix </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5603--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5659--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to just <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrabbrvpluralsuffix</span>. The long form is as for the basic
style unless the style is a “long-em” style.
-</p><!--l. 5608--><p class="indent" > The “long-em” (emphasize long) styles, such as <a
+</p><!--l. 5664--><p class="indent" > The “long-em” (emphasize long) styles, such as <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-em-short-em"><span
class="cmss-10">long-em-short-em</span></a><a
id="dx1-31060"></a> or <a
@@ -11001,12 +10962,12 @@
class="cmss-10">short-em-long-em</span></a><a
id="dx1-31061"></a>,
use
-</p><!--l. 5610--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5666--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31062"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongemfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">long-form</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5612--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5668--><p class="noindent" >
instead of <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongdefaultfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long-form</span>⟩<span
@@ -11014,12 +10975,12 @@
-</p><!--l. 5614--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5670--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31063"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongemfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">long-form</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5616--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5672--><p class="noindent" >
instead of <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongdefaultfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long-form</span>⟩<span
@@ -11027,122 +10988,183 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongemfont</span>
is initialised to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongemfont</span>.
-</p><!--l. 5620--><p class="indent" > The user styles have similar commands:
-</p><!--l. 5621--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5676--><p class="indent" > The user styles have similar commands:
+</p><!--l. 5677--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31064"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvuserfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5623--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5679--><p class="noindent" >
for the short form,
-</p><!--l. 5625--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5681--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31065"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstabbrvuserfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5627--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5683--><p class="noindent" >
for the first use short form,
-</p><!--l. 5629--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5685--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31066"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslonguserfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5631--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5687--><p class="noindent" >
for the long form,
-</p><!--l. 5633--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5689--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31067"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlonguserfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5635--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5691--><p class="noindent" >
for the first use long form, and
-</p><!--l. 5637--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5693--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31068"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrusersuffix </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5639--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5695--><p class="noindent" >
for the short plural suffix.
-</p><!--l. 5642--><p class="indent" > Similarly for the hyphen styles:
-</p><!--l. 5643--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5698--><p class="indent" > Similarly for the hyphen styles:
+</p><!--l. 5699--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31069"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvhyphenfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5645--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5701--><p class="noindent" >
for the short form,
-</p><!--l. 5647--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5703--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31070"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5649--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5705--><p class="noindent" >
for the first use short form,
-</p><!--l. 5651--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5707--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31071"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslonghyphenfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5653--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5709--><p class="noindent" >
for the long form,
-</p><!--l. 5655--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5711--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31072"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5657--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5713--><p class="noindent" >
for the first use long form, and
-</p><!--l. 5659--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5715--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31073"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrhyphensuffix </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5661--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5717--><p class="noindent" >
for the short plural suffix.
-</p><!--l. 5664--><p class="indent" > Similarly for the “only” styles, such as <a
+</p><!--l. 5720--><p class="indent" > Similarly for the “only” styles, such as <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-only-short-only"><span
class="cmss-10">long-only-short-only</span></a><a
id="dx1-31074"></a>:
-</p><!--l. 5666--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5722--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31075"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvonlyfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5668--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5724--><p class="noindent" >
for the short form,
-</p><!--l. 5670--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5726--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31076"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstabbrvonlyfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5672--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5728--><p class="noindent" >
for the first use short form,
-</p><!--l. 5674--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5730--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31077"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongonlyfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5676--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5732--><p class="noindent" >
for the long form,
-</p><!--l. 5678--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5734--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31078"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongonlyfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5680--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5736--><p class="noindent" >
for the first use long form, and
-</p><!--l. 5682--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 5738--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-31079"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtronlysuffix </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5684--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5740--><p class="noindent" >
for the short plural suffix.
-</p><!--l. 5687--><p class="indent" > Note that by default inserted material (provided in the final optional argument of
+</p><!--l. 5743--><p class="indent" > The “short-sc-only” styles, such as <a
+href="#abbrstyle.long-only-short-sc-only"><span
+class="cmss-10">long-only-short-sc-only</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-31080"></a>:
+</p><!--l. 5745--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-31081"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsconlyfont{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 5747--><p class="noindent" >
+for the short form (which uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
+ id="dx1-31082"></a>), and
+</p><!--l. 5749--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-31083"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstabbrvsconlyfont{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 5751--><p class="noindent" >
+which uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsconlyfont</span><a
+ id="dx1-31084"></a>. The short plural suffix is obtained from:
+</p><!--l. 5754--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-31085"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsconlysuffix </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 5756--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrscsuffix</span><a
+ id="dx1-31086"></a>. For other font types, use the one of “short-only” styles
+and redefine <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvonlyfont </span>as required. (The smallcaps style is a special case
+as its plural suffix is awkward.)
+</p><!--l. 5762--><p class="indent" > The “postshort-sc-user” styles, such as <a
+href="#abbrstyle.long-postshort-sc-user"><span
+class="cmss-10">long-postshort-sc-user</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-31087"></a>:
+</p><!--l. 5764--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-31088"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscuserfont{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 5766--><p class="noindent" >
+for the short form (which uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
+ id="dx1-31089"></a>), and
+</p><!--l. 5768--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-31090"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstabbrvscuserfont{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 5770--><p class="noindent" >
+which uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscuserfont</span><a
+ id="dx1-31091"></a>. The short plural suffix is obtained from:
+</p><!--l. 5773--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-31092"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrscusersuffix </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 5775--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrscsuffix</span><a
+ id="dx1-31093"></a>.
+</p><!--l. 5778--><p class="indent" > Note that by default inserted material (provided in the final optional argument of
commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>), is placed outside the font command in the predefined styles. To
move it inside, use:
-</p><!--l. 5690--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-31080"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 5781--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-31094"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrinsertinsidetrue </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5692--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5783--><p class="noindent" >
This applies to all the predefined styles. For example:
@@ -11153,17 +11175,17 @@
\renewcommand*{\glsfirstlongdefaultfont}[1]{\emph{#1}}
\glsxtrinsertinsidetrue
</pre>
-<!--l. 5698--><p class="nopar" > This will make the long form and the inserted text emphasized, whereas the default
+<!--l. 5789--><p class="nopar" > This will make the long form and the inserted text emphasized, whereas the default
(without <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrinsertinsidetrue</span>) would place the inserted text outside of the
emphasized font.
-</p><!--l. 5703--><p class="indent" > Note that for some styles, such as the <a
+</p><!--l. 5794--><p class="indent" > Note that for some styles, such as the <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31081"></a>, the inserted text would be
+ id="dx1-31095"></a>, the inserted text would be
placed inside the font command for the short form (rather than the long form in the
above example).
-</p><!--l. 5707--><p class="indent" > Remember that <span
+</p><!--l. 5798--><p class="indent" > Remember that <span
class="cmtt-10">\textsc </span>renders <span
class="cmti-10">lowercase </span>letters as small capitals. Uppercase
letters are rendered as normal uppercase letters, so if you specify the short form in
@@ -11177,8 +11199,8 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-150">
\renewcommand*{\glsabbrvscfont}[1]{\textsc{\MakeLowercase{#1}}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 5714--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 5716--><p class="indent" > If you want to easily switch between the “sc” and “sm” styles, you may find it
+<!--l. 5805--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 5807--><p class="indent" > If you want to easily switch between the “sc” and “sm” styles, you may find it
easier to redefine this command to convert case:
@@ -11188,14 +11210,14 @@
\renewcommand*{\glsabbrvscfont}[1]{\textsc{\MakeTextLowercase{#1}}}
\renewcommand*{\glsabbrvsmfont}[1]{\textsmaller{\MakeTextUppercase{#1}}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 5722--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 5724--><p class="indent" > Some of the styles use
-</p><!--l. 5725--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-31082"></a> <span
+<!--l. 5813--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 5815--><p class="indent" > Some of the styles use
+</p><!--l. 5816--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-31096"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfullsep{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5727--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5818--><p class="noindent" >
as a separator between the long and short forms. This is defined as a space by
default, but may be changed as required. For example:
@@ -11205,7 +11227,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-152">
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrfullsep}[1]{~}
</pre>
-<!--l. 5732--><p class="nopar" > or
+<!--l. 5823--><p class="nopar" > or
@@ -11213,11 +11235,10 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-153">
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrfullsep}[1]{\glsacspace{#1}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 5736--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 5738--><p class="indent" > The new naming scheme for abbreviation styles is as follows: </p>
+<!--l. 5827--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 5829--><p class="indent" > The new naming scheme for abbreviation styles is as follows: </p>
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 5741--><p class="noindent" >⟨<span
+ <li class="itemize">⟨<span
class="cmti-10">field1</span>⟩[<span
class="cmtt-10">-</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier1</span>⟩]<span
@@ -11226,7 +11247,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">-</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier2</span>⟩][<span
class="cmtt-10">-user</span>]
- </p><!--l. 5743--><p class="noindent" >This is for the parenthetical styles. The <span
+ <!--l. 5834--><p class="noindent" >This is for the parenthetical styles. The <span
class="cmtt-10">-</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩ parts may be omitted.
These styles display ⟨<span
@@ -11236,55 +11257,51 @@
⟨<span
class="cmti-10">field2</span>⟩ starts with “no” then that element is omitted from the display style
(no parenthetical part) but is included in the inline style.
- </p><!--l. 5749--><p class="noindent" >If the <span
+ </p><!--l. 5840--><p class="noindent" >If the <span
class="cmtt-10">-</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩ part is present, then the field has a font changing command
applied to it. The special modifier <span
class="cmtt-10">-only </span>indicates that field is only present
according to whether or not the entry has been used.
- </p><!--l. 5754--><p class="noindent" >If <span
+ </p><!--l. 5845--><p class="noindent" >If <span
class="cmtt-10">post </span>is present then ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">field2</span>⟩ is placed after the <a
- id="dx1-31083"></a><a
+ id="dx1-31097"></a><a
href="#glo:linktext">link-text</a> using the
post-link hook.
- </p><!--l. 5757--><p class="noindent" >If the <span
+ </p><!--l. 5848--><p class="noindent" >If the <span
class="cmtt-10">-user </span>part is present, then the <span
class="cmss-10">user1</span><a
- id="dx1-31084"></a> value, if provided, is inserted
+ id="dx1-31098"></a> value, if provided, is inserted
into the parenthetical material . (The field used for the inserted material
may be changed.)
- </p><!--l. 5761--><p class="noindent" >Examples: </p>
+ </p><!--l. 5852--><p class="noindent" >Examples: </p>
<ul class="itemize2">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 5763--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort-sc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort-sc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31085"></a>: ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-31099"></a>: ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">field1</span>⟩ is the long form, the short form is set in
smallcaps but omitted in the display style.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 5766--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-em-short-em"><span
class="cmss-10">long-em-short-em</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31086"></a>: both the long form and the short form are
+ id="dx1-31100"></a>: both the long form and the short form are
emphasized. The short form is in parentheses.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 5768--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-em"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-em</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31087"></a>: the short form is emphasized but not the long form.
+ id="dx1-31101"></a>: the short form is emphasized but not the long form.
The short form is in parentheses.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 5770--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-user"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31088"></a>: if the <span
+ id="dx1-31102"></a>: if the <span
class="cmss-10">user1</span><a
- id="dx1-31089"></a> key has been set, this produces the style
+ id="dx1-31103"></a> key has been set, this produces the style
⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩, ⟨<span
@@ -11291,15 +11308,11 @@
class="cmti-10">user1</span>⟩) otherwise it just produces ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩).
-
-
-
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 5774--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#abbrstyle.long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen"><span
class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31090"></a>: the short form and the inserted
+ id="dx1-31104"></a>: the short form and the inserted
material (provided by the final optional argument of commands like
<span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>) is moved to the post-link hook. The long form is formatted
@@ -11310,41 +11323,42 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvhyphenfont </span>(or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstabbrvhyphenfont </span>on first
- use).</p></li></ul>
+ use).</li></ul>
+
+
+
</li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 5783--><p class="noindent" >⟨<span
+ <li class="itemize">⟨<span
class="cmti-10">style</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">-noreg</span>
- </p><!--l. 5785--><p class="noindent" >Some styles set the <a
+ <!--l. 5876--><p class="noindent" >Some styles set the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31091"></a> attribute. In some cases, there’s a version of the
+ id="dx1-31105"></a> attribute. In some cases, there’s a version of the
style that doesn’t set this attribute. For example, <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-em-noshort-em"><span
class="cmss-10">long-em-noshort-em</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31092"></a> sets the
+ id="dx1-31106"></a> sets the
<a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31093"></a> attribute. The <a
+ id="dx1-31107"></a> attribute. The <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-em-noshort-em-noreg"><span
class="cmss-10">long-em-noshort-em-noreg</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31094"></a> style is a minor variation that
+ id="dx1-31108"></a> style is a minor variation that
style that doesn’t set the attribute.
- </p><!--l. 5792--><p class="noindent" >There are a few “noshort” styles, such as <a
+ </p><!--l. 5883--><p class="noindent" >There are a few “noshort” styles, such as <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-hyphen-noshort-noreg"><span
class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-noshort-noreg</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31095"></a>, that have
+ id="dx1-31109"></a>, that have
“-noreg” version without a regular version. This is because the style won’t work
properly with the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31096"></a> set, but the naming scheme is maintained for
+ id="dx1-31110"></a> set, but the naming scheme is maintained for
consistency with the other “noshort” styles.
</p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 5800--><p class="noindent" >⟨<span
+ <li class="itemize">⟨<span
class="cmti-10">field1</span>⟩[<span
class="cmtt-10">-</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier1</span>⟩]<span
@@ -11351,122 +11365,112 @@
class="cmtt-10">-</span>[<span
class="cmtt-10">post</span>]<span
class="cmtt-10">footnote</span>
- </p><!--l. 5802--><p class="noindent" >The display style uses ⟨<span
+ <!--l. 5893--><p class="noindent" >The display style uses ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">field1</span>⟩ followed by a footnote with the other field in it. If
<span
class="cmtt-10">post </span>is present then the footnote is placed after the <a
- id="dx1-31097"></a><a
+ id="dx1-31111"></a><a
href="#glo:linktext">link-text</a> using the
post-link hook. The inline style does ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">field1</span>⟩ followed by the other field in
parentheses.
- </p><!--l. 5808--><p class="noindent" >If <span
+ </p><!--l. 5899--><p class="noindent" >If <span
class="cmtt-10">-</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier1</span>⟩ is present, ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">field1</span>⟩ has a font-changing command applied to
it.
- </p><!--l. 5811--><p class="noindent" >Examples: </p>
+ </p><!--l. 5902--><p class="noindent" >Examples: </p>
<ul class="itemize2">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 5813--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31098"></a>: short form in the text with the long form in the
+ id="dx1-31112"></a>: short form in the text with the long form in the
footnote.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 5815--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sc-postfootnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sc-postfootnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31099"></a>: short form in smallcaps with the long form in
+ id="dx1-31113"></a>: short form in smallcaps with the long form in
the footnote outside of the <a
- id="dx1-31100"></a>link-text.</p></li></ul>
- <!--l. 5819--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> Take care with the footnote styles. Remember that there are some situations
+ id="dx1-31114"></a>link-text.</li></ul>
+ <!--l. 5910--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> Take care with the footnote styles. Remember that there are some situations
where <span
class="cmtt-10">\footnote</span><a
- id="dx1-31101"></a> doesn’t work. </div>
-
-
-
- </p><!--l. 5822--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-31115"></a> doesn’t work. </div>
+ </p><!--l. 5913--><p class="noindent" >
</p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 5824--><p class="noindent" >⟨<span
+ <li class="itemize">⟨<span
class="cmti-10">style</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">-desc</span>
- </p><!--l. 5826--><p class="noindent" >Like ⟨<span
+ <!--l. 5917--><p class="noindent" >Like ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">style</span>⟩ but the <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-31102"></a> key must be provided when defining abbreviations
+ id="dx1-31116"></a> key must be provided when defining abbreviations
with this style.
- </p><!--l. 5829--><p class="noindent" >Examples: </p>
+ </p><!--l. 5920--><p class="noindent" >Examples: </p>
<ul class="itemize2">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 5832--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31103"></a>: like <a
+ id="dx1-31117"></a>: like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31104"></a> but requires a description.
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 5834--><p class="noindent" ><a
+ id="dx1-31118"></a> but requires a description.
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><a
href="#abbrstyle.short-em-footnote-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-em-footnote-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31105"></a>: like <a
+ id="dx1-31119"></a>: like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-em-footnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-em-footnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-31106"></a> but requires a
- description.</p></li></ul>
+ id="dx1-31120"></a> but requires a
+ description.</li></ul>
+
+
+
</li></ul>
-<!--l. 5839--><p class="indent" > Not all combinations that fit the above syntax are provided. Pre-version 1.04
+<!--l. 5930--><p class="indent" > Not all combinations that fit the above syntax are provided. Pre-version 1.04
styles that didn’t fit this naming scheme are either provided with a synonym (where
the former name wasn’t ambiguous) or provided with a deprecated synonym (where
the former name was confusing). The deprecated style names generate a warning
using:
-</p><!--l. 5845--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-31107"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 5936--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-31121"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrWarnDeprecatedAbbrStyle{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">old-name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">new-name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 5847--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5938--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">old-name</span>⟩ is the deprecated name and ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">new-name</span>⟩ is the preferred name. You
can suppress these warnings by redefining this command to do nothing.
-</p><!--l. 5853--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 5944--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 5853--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 5944--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.4.1 </span> <a
id="sec:predefregabbrvstyles"></a>Predefined Abbreviation Styles that Set the Regular Attribute</h4>
-<!--l. 5856--><p class="noindent" >The following abbreviation styles set the <a
+<!--l. 5947--><p class="noindent" >The following abbreviation styles set the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
id="dx1-32001"></a> attribute to “true” for all categories
that have abbreviations defined with any of these styles.
</p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5861--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-nolong"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-nolong</span><a
- id="dx1-32002"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5861--><p class="noindent" >This only displays the short form on <a
+ id="dx1-32002"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This only displays the short form on <a
id="dx1-32003"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-32004"></a> is set to the short form
- through the command
- </p><!--l. 5864--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-32005"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-32004"></a> is set to the
+ short form through the command
+ <!--l. 5955--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-32005"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortnolongname </span></div><hr>
-
-
-
- </p><!--l. 5866--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 5957--><p class="noindent" >
(Similarly for the other <span
class="cmtt-10">short</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
@@ -11479,7 +11483,7 @@
take effect. Make sure to <span
class="cmtt-10">\protect </span>any formatting commands (or anything else
that shouldn’t be expanded).
- </p><!--l. 5875--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ </p><!--l. 5966--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
id="dx1-32006"></a> is set to the long form. The inline full form displays ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩
@@ -11489,176 +11493,155 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlong</span><a
id="dx1-32007"></a>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5880--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.short"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short</span><a
- id="dx1-32008"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5880--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-32008"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-nolong</span></a><a
id="dx1-32009"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5882--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.nolong-short"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">nolong-short</span><a
- id="dx1-32010"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5882--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-32010"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-nolong</span></a><a
id="dx1-32011"></a> but the inline full form displays ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩).
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5886--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sc-nolong"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sc-nolong</span><a
- id="dx1-32012"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5886--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-32012"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-nolong</span></a><a
id="dx1-32013"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
- id="dx1-32014"></a> (which
- defaults to <span
+ id="dx1-32014"></a> (which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\textsc</span>).
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5890--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sc</span><a
- id="dx1-32015"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5890--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-32015"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sc-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sc-nolong</span></a><a
id="dx1-32016"></a>
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5892--><p class="noindent" >
+
+
+
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.nolong-short-sc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">nolong-short-sc</span><a
- id="dx1-32017"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5892--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-32017"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sc-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sc-nolong</span></a><a
id="dx1-32018"></a> but the inline full form displays ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩). The name is
- still obtained from <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortnolongname </span>(similarly for the other
- styles in the form <span
+class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩).
+ The name is still obtained from <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortnolongname </span>(similarly for the
+ other styles in the form <span
class="cmtt-10">nolong</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">-short</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩ unless indicated
otherwise).
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5899--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sm-nolong"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sm-nolong</span><a
- id="dx1-32019"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5899--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-32019"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-nolong</span></a><a
id="dx1-32020"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont</span><a
- id="dx1-32021"></a> (which
- defaults to <span
+ id="dx1-32021"></a> (which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\textsmaller</span>).
-
-
-
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5903--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sm"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sm</span><a
- id="dx1-32022"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5903--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-32022"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sm-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sm-nolong</span></a><a
id="dx1-32023"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5905--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.nolong-short-sm"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">nolong-short-sm</span><a
- id="dx1-32024"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5905--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-32024"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sm-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sm-nolong</span></a><a
id="dx1-32025"></a> but the inline full form displays ⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩
+ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩).
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5909--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-em-nolong"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-em-nolong</span><a
- id="dx1-32026"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5909--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-32026"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-nolong</span></a><a
id="dx1-32027"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
id="dx1-32028"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5913--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-em"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-em</span><a
- id="dx1-32029"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5913--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-32029"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-em-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-em-nolong</span></a><a
id="dx1-32030"></a>
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5915--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.nolong-short-em"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">nolong-short-em</span><a
- id="dx1-32031"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5915--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-32031"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-em-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-em-nolong</span></a><a
id="dx1-32032"></a> but the inline full form displays ⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩
+ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩).
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5919--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-nolong-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-nolong-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32033"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5919--><p class="noindent" >Like the <a
+ id="dx1-32033"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like the <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-nolong</span></a><a
id="dx1-32034"></a> style, but the <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-32035"></a> is set to the full form obtained by
- expanding
- </p><!--l. 5922--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-32036"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-32035"></a> is set to the full form
+ obtained by expanding
+ <!--l. 6013--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-32036"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortdescname </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 5924--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6015--><p class="noindent" >
(Similarly for the other <span
class="cmtt-10">short</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
@@ -11671,7 +11654,7 @@
before <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span>).
- </p><!--l. 5931--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ </p><!--l. 6022--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
id="dx1-32037"></a> must be supplied by the user. You may prefer to use
the <a
@@ -11683,128 +11666,111 @@
id="dx1-32039"></a> key. (See the sample file
<span
class="cmtt-10">sample-acronym-desc.tex</span>.)
-
-
-
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5937--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32040"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5937--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-32040"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-nolong-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-nolong-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-32041"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5940--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sc-nolong-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sc-nolong-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32042"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5940--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-32042"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-nolong</span></a><a
id="dx1-32043"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
- id="dx1-32044"></a> (which
- defaults to <span
+ id="dx1-32044"></a> (which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\textsc</span>).
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5944--><p class="noindent" >
+
+
+
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sc-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sc-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32045"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5944--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-32045"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sc-nolong-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sc-nolong-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-32046"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5947--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sm-nolong-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sm-nolong-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32047"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5947--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-32047"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-nolong-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-nolong-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-32048"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont</span><a
- id="dx1-32049"></a>
- (which defaults to <span
+ id="dx1-32049"></a> (which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\textsmaller</span>).
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5951--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sm-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sm-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32050"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5951--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-32050"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sm-nolong-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sm-nolong-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-32051"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5954--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-em-nolong-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-em-nolong-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32052"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5954--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-32052"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-nolong-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-nolong-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-32053"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
id="dx1-32054"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5958--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-em-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-em-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32055"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5958--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-32055"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-em-nolong-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-em-nolong-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-32056"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5961--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-noshort-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-noshort-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32057"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5961--><p class="noindent" >This style only displays the long form, regardless of first or subsequent use of
- commands <span
+ id="dx1-32057"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style only displays the long form, regardless of first or
+ subsequent use of commands <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
- id="dx1-32058"></a>. The short form may be accessed through commands like
- <span
+ id="dx1-32058"></a>. The short form may be accessed
+ through commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort</span><a
id="dx1-32059"></a>. The inline full form displays ⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩
+ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩).
-
-
-
- </p><!--l. 5967--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ <!--l. 6058--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
id="dx1-32060"></a> key are set to the long form. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
id="dx1-32061"></a> key is also set to the long form,
but this is done by expanding
- </p><!--l. 5970--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ </p><!--l. 6061--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-32062"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongnoshortdescname </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 5972--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6063--><p class="noindent" >
(Similarly for the other <span
class="cmtt-10">long</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
@@ -11814,7 +11780,7 @@
indicated otherwise.) This command should only be redefined before
abbreviations are defined, and any fragile or formatting commands within it
need protecting.
- </p><!--l. 5978--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ </p><!--l. 6069--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
id="dx1-32063"></a> must be provided by the user. The predefined glossary styles
won’t display the short form. You can use the post-description hook to
@@ -11823,104 +11789,93 @@
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩).
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5984--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32064"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5984--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-32064"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-32065"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5987--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-noshort-sc-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-noshort-sc-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32066"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5987--><p class="noindent" >Like the <a
+ id="dx1-32066"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-32067"></a> style but the short form (accessed through commands
- like <span
+ id="dx1-32067"></a> style but the short form (accessed
+ through commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort</span><a
id="dx1-32068"></a>) use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
- id="dx1-32069"></a>. (This style was originally called
- <span
+ id="dx1-32069"></a>. (This style was
+ originally called <span
class="cmss-10">long-desc-sc</span><a
- id="dx1-32070"></a>. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a
- deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 5994--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-32070"></a>. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name
+ retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-noshort-sm-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-noshort-sm-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32071"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 5994--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-32071"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-32072"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont</span><a
- id="dx1-32073"></a>.
- (This style was originally called <span
+ id="dx1-32073"></a>. (This style was originally called <span
class="cmss-10">long-desc-sm</span><a
- id="dx1-32074"></a>. Renamed in version 1.04, but
- original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6001--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-32074"></a>. Renamed in
+ version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for
+ backward-compatibility.)
+
+
+
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-noshort-em-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-noshort-em-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32075"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6001--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-32075"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort-desc</span></a><a
id="dx1-32076"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
- id="dx1-32077"></a>.
- The long form isn’t emphasized. (This style was originally called <span
+ id="dx1-32077"></a>. The long form isn’t emphasized. (This style was originally
+ called <span
class="cmss-10">long-desc-em</span><a
- id="dx1-32078"></a>.
- Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym
- for backward-compatibility.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6008--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-32078"></a>. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a
+ deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-em-noshort-em-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-em-noshort-em-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-32079"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
-
-
-
- <!--l. 6008--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.04, like <a
+ id="dx1-32079"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.04, like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-32080"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ id="dx1-32080"></a> but
+ redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
+ id="dx1-32081"></a>. The long form uses
<span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
- id="dx1-32081"></a>. The long form uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongemfont</span><a
- id="dx1-32082"></a> and
- <span
+ id="dx1-32082"></a> and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongemfont</span><a
id="dx1-32083"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6013--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-noshort"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-noshort</span><a
- id="dx1-32084"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6013--><p class="noindent" >This style doesn’t really make sense if you don’t use the short form
+ id="dx1-32084"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style doesn’t really make sense if you don’t use the short form
anywhere in the document, but is provided for completeness. This is
like the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort-desc"><span
@@ -11932,10 +11887,10 @@
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
id="dx1-32087"></a> key is also set to the short form, but this is done by
expanding
- </p><!--l. 6019--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-32088"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 6110--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-32088"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongnoshortname </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6021--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6112--><p class="noindent" >
(Similarly for other <span
class="cmtt-10">long</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
@@ -11943,69 +11898,59 @@
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩ styles, unless indicated
otherwise.) This command should only be redefined before abbreviations are
defined, and fragile or formatting commands should be protected.
- </p><!--l. 6028--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ </p><!--l. 6119--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
id="dx1-32089"></a> is set to the long form.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6030--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.long"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long</span><a
- id="dx1-32090"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6030--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-32090"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort</span></a><a
id="dx1-32091"></a>
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6032--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-noshort-sc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-noshort-sc</span><a
- id="dx1-32092"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6032--><p class="noindent" >Like the <a
+ id="dx1-32092"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort</span></a><a
- id="dx1-32093"></a> style but the short form (accessed through commands like
- <span
+ id="dx1-32093"></a> style but the short form (accessed through
+ commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort</span><a
id="dx1-32094"></a>) use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
- id="dx1-32095"></a>. (This style was originally called <span
+ id="dx1-32095"></a>. (This style was originally
+ called <span
class="cmss-10">long-sc</span><a
- id="dx1-32096"></a>.
- Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym
- for backward-compatibility.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6039--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-32096"></a>. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a
+ deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-noshort-sm"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-noshort-sm</span><a
- id="dx1-32097"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6039--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-32097"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort</span></a><a
id="dx1-32098"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont</span><a
- id="dx1-32099"></a>. (This
- style was originally called <span
+ id="dx1-32099"></a>. (This style was originally called <span
class="cmss-10">long-sm</span><a
- id="dx1-32100"></a>. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name
- retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6046--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-32100"></a>. Renamed in
+ version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for
+ backward-compatibility.)
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-noshort-em"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-noshort-em</span><a
- id="dx1-32101"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
-
-
-
- <!--l. 6046--><p class="noindent" >This style is like <a
+ id="dx1-32101"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort</span></a><a
id="dx1-32102"></a> but redefines <span
@@ -12017,46 +11962,47 @@
class="cmss-10">long-em</span><a
id="dx1-32104"></a>. Renamed in version 1.04, but original name retained as a
deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6053--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-em-noshort-em"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-em-noshort-em</span><a
- id="dx1-32105"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6053--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.04, this style is like <a
+ id="dx1-32105"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.04, this style is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort</span></a><a
- id="dx1-32106"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont</span>
- to use <span
+ id="dx1-32106"></a> but redefines
+
+
+
+ <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
id="dx1-32107"></a>, <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongfont </span>to use <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongemfont</span>
- and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongfont </span>to use
+ <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongemfont </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongfont </span>to use <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glslongemfont</span>. The short form isn’t used by
- commands like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glslongemfont</span>. The short
+ form isn’t used by commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
- id="dx1-32108"></a>, but can be obtained using <span
+ id="dx1-32108"></a>, but can be obtained using
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort</span><a
- id="dx1-32109"></a>. The related
- style <a
+ id="dx1-32109"></a>. The related style <a
id="abbrstyle.long-em-noshort-em-noreg"></a><span
class="cmss-10">long-em-noshort-em-noreg</span><a
- id="dx1-32110"></a> doesn’t set the <a
+ id="dx1-32110"></a> doesn’t set the
+ <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
id="dx1-32111"></a> attribute.
-</p>
</dd></dl>
-<!--l. 6065--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 6156--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 6065--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 6156--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.4.2 </span> <a
id="sec:predefnonregabbrvstyles"></a>Predefined Abbreviation Styles that Don’t Set the Regular Attribute</h4>
-<!--l. 6068--><p class="noindent" >The following abbreviation styles will set the <a
+<!--l. 6159--><p class="noindent" >The following abbreviation styles will set the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
id="dx1-33001"></a> attribute to “false” if it has
@@ -12063,27 +12009,25 @@
previously been set. If it hasn’t already been set, it’s left unset. Other attributes may
also be set, depending on the style.
</p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6074--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-short"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-short</span><a
- id="dx1-33002"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6074--><p class="noindent" >On <a
+ id="dx1-33002"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">On <a
id="dx1-33003"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>, this style uses the format ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩). The inline and display full
- forms are the same. The <span
+class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩). The inline and
+ display full forms are the same. The <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
id="dx1-33004"></a> key is set to the short form. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33005"></a> is also set
- to the short form through
- </p><!--l. 6079--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33006"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33005"></a>
+ is also set to the short form through
+ <!--l. 6170--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33006"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongshortname </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6081--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6172--><p class="noindent" >
(Similarly for other <span
class="cmtt-10">long</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
@@ -12096,7 +12040,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\the\glslongtok </span>and the short form can be referenced with
<span
class="cmtt-10">\the\glsshorttok</span>.
- </p><!--l. 6091--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ </p><!--l. 6182--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
id="dx1-33007"></a> is set to the long form. The long and short forms are separated
by <span
@@ -12105,17 +12049,12 @@
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-user"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-user</span></a><a
id="dx1-33008"></a> style.
-
-
-
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6096--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-short-sc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-short-sc</span><a
- id="dx1-33009"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6096--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33009"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short</span></a><a
id="dx1-33010"></a> but redefines <span
@@ -12122,14 +12061,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
id="dx1-33011"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6100--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-short-sm"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-short-sm</span><a
- id="dx1-33012"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6100--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33012"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short</span></a><a
id="dx1-33013"></a> but redefines <span
@@ -12136,14 +12073,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont</span><a
id="dx1-33014"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6104--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-short-em"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-short-em</span><a
- id="dx1-33015"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6104--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33015"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short</span></a><a
id="dx1-33016"></a> but redefines <span
@@ -12150,14 +12085,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
id="dx1-33017"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6108--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-em-short-em"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-em-short-em</span><a
- id="dx1-33018"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6108--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.04, this style is like <a
+ id="dx1-33018"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.04, this style is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-em"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-em</span></a><a
id="dx1-33019"></a> but redefines
@@ -12165,24 +12098,25 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongfont </span>to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongemfont</span><a
id="dx1-33020"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6112--><p class="noindent" >
+
+
+
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-only-short-only"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-only-short-only</span><a
- id="dx1-33021"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6112--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17, this style only shows the long form on first use and only
- shows the short form on subsequent use. The inline full form <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfull</span>
- shows the long form followed by the short form in parentheses. The <span
+ id="dx1-33021"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.17, this style only shows the long form on first
+ use and only shows the short form on subsequent use. The inline full form
+ <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfull </span>shows the long form followed by the short form in parentheses.
+ The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33022"></a> field
- is obtained from
- </p><!--l. 6118--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33023"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33022"></a> field is obtained from
+ <!--l. 6209--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33023"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtronlyname </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6120--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6211--><p class="noindent" >
Any redefinition of this command must come before the abbreviations
are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect any
commands that shouldn’t be expanded. The long form can be referenced
@@ -12191,27 +12125,43 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\the\glsshorttok</span>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6127--><p class="noindent" >
<a
+ id="abbrstyle.long-only-short-sc-only"></a><span
+class="cmssbx-10">long-only-short-sc-only</span><a
+ id="dx1-33024"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">
+ <!--l. 6220--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.48, this is like <a
+href="#abbrstyle.long-only-short-only"><span
+class="cmss-10">long-only-short-only</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-33025"></a> but uses smallcaps for the
+ short form. The name is obtained from:
+ </p><!--l. 6222--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33026"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsconlyname </span></div><hr>
+ </p><!--l. 6224--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p></dd><dt class="description">
+<a
id="abbrstyle.long-only-short-only-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-only-short-only-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33024"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6127--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17, this style is like <a
+ id="dx1-33027"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.17, this style is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-only-short-only"><span
class="cmss-10">long-only-short-only</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33025"></a> but the user must
- supply the description. The <span
+ id="dx1-33028"></a>
+ but the user must supply the description. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33026"></a> field is obtained from
- </p><!--l. 6132--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33027"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33029"></a> field is obtained
+ from
+ <!--l. 6230--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33030"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtronlydescname </span></div><hr>
-
-
-
- </p><!--l. 6134--><p class="noindent" >
- Any redefinition of this command must come before the abbreviations
+ </p><!--l. 6232--><p class="noindent" >
+ The sort value is obtained from:
+ </p><!--l. 6234--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33031"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtronlydescsort </span></div><hr>
+ </p><!--l. 6236--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6238--><p class="noindent" >Any redefinition of these commands must come before the abbreviations
are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect any
commands that shouldn’t be expanded. The long form can be referenced
with <span
@@ -12219,46 +12169,69 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\the\glsshorttok</span>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6141--><p class="noindent" >
<a
+ id="abbrstyle.long-only-short-sc-only-desc"></a><span
+class="cmssbx-10">long-only-short-sc-only-desc</span><a
+ id="dx1-33032"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.48, this style is like
+ <a
+href="#abbrstyle.long-only-short-only-desc"><span
+class="cmss-10">long-only-short-only-desc</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-33033"></a> but it uses smallcaps for the short form. The name is
+ obtained from:
+ <!--l. 6249--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33034"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsconlydescname </span></div><hr>
+
+
+
+ </p><!--l. 6251--><p class="noindent" >
+ This defaults to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtronlydescname</span>.
+ </p><!--l. 6254--><p class="noindent" >The sort value is obtained from:
+ </p><!--l. 6255--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33035"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsconlydescsort </span></div><hr>
+ </p><!--l. 6257--><p class="noindent" >
+ This defaults to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtronlydescsort</span>.
+ </p></dd><dt class="description">
+<a
id="abbrstyle.long-em-noshort-em-noreg"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-em-noshort-em-noreg</span><a
- id="dx1-33028"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6141--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17, this style is like <a
+ id="dx1-33036"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.17, this style is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-em-noshort-em"><span
class="cmss-10">long-em-noshort-em</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33029"></a> but doesn’t set the
- <a
+ id="dx1-33037"></a>
+ but doesn’t set the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33030"></a> attribute.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6146--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33038"></a> attribute.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-short-user"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-short-user</span><a
- id="dx1-33031"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6146--><p class="noindent" >This style was introduced in version 1.04. It’s like the <a
+ id="dx1-33039"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style was introduced in version 1.04. It’s like the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33032"></a> style but
- additional information can be inserted into the parenthetical material. This
+ id="dx1-33040"></a> style
+ but additional information can be inserted into the parenthetical material. This
checks the value of the field given by
- </p><!--l. 6151--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33033"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 6270--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33041"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtruserfield </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6153--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6272--><p class="noindent" >
(which defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">useri</span>) using <span
class="cmtt-10">\ifglshasfield</span><a
- id="dx1-33034"></a> (provided by <span
+ id="dx1-33042"></a> (provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>). If the
field hasn’t been set, the style behaves like the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33035"></a> style and produces
+ id="dx1-33043"></a> style and produces
⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩) but if the field has been set, the contents of that field are inserted
@@ -12267,46 +12240,46 @@
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩, ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">field-value</span>⟩). The format is
governed by
- </p><!--l. 6161--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33036"></a> <span
+ </p><!--l. 6280--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33044"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtruserparen{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6163--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6282--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩ is the short form (for the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-user"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33037"></a> style) or the long form (for
+ id="dx1-33045"></a> style) or the long form (for
the <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long-user"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33038"></a> style). This command first inserts a space using
+ id="dx1-33046"></a> style). This command first inserts a space using
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfullsep </span>and then the parenthetical content (using <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrparen</span><a
- id="dx1-33039"></a>).
+ id="dx1-33047"></a>).
The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-33040"></a> is set to
- </p><!--l. 6170--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33041"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33048"></a> is set to
+ </p><!--l. 6289--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33049"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsuserdescription{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">long</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6172--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6291--><p class="noindent" >
The default definition ignores the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ and encapsulates ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ with
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glslonguserfont</span>.
- </p><!--l. 6176--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ </p><!--l. 6295--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33042"></a> is obtained by expanding <span
+ id="dx1-33050"></a> is obtained by expanding <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongshortname </span>(see above). The
⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩ argument includes the font formatting command, <span
@@ -12317,7 +12290,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">} </span>in the case of the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-user"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33043"></a> style and <span
+ id="dx1-33051"></a> style and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
@@ -12324,8 +12297,8 @@
in the case of the <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long-user"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33044"></a> style.
- </p><!--l. 6184--><p class="noindent" >For example:
+ id="dx1-33052"></a> style.
+ </p><!--l. 6303--><p class="noindent" >For example:
@@ -12337,32 +12310,32 @@
 [user1={German Speaking \TeX\ User Group}]
 {dante}{DANTE}{Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX\ e.V}
</pre>
- <!--l. 6194--><p class="nopar" > On first use, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+ <!--l. 6313--><p class="nopar" > On first use, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls{tug}</span></span></span> will appear as:
</p><blockquote class="quote">
- <!--l. 6197--><p class="noindent" >TeX User Group (TUG)</p></blockquote>
- <!--l. 6199--><p class="noindent" >whereas <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+ <!--l. 6316--><p class="noindent" >TeX User Group (TUG)</p></blockquote>
+ <!--l. 6318--><p class="noindent" >whereas <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls{dante}</span></span></span> will appear as:
</p><blockquote class="quote">
- <!--l. 6201--><p class="noindent" >Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V (DANTE,
+ <!--l. 6320--><p class="noindent" >Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V (DANTE,
German Speaking TeX User Group)</p></blockquote>
- <!--l. 6204--><p class="noindent" >The short form is formatted according to
- </p><!--l. 6205--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33045"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 6323--><p class="noindent" >The short form is formatted according to
+ </p><!--l. 6324--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33053"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvuserfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6207--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6326--><p class="noindent" >
and the plural suffix is given by
- </p><!--l. 6209--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33046"></a> <span
+ </p><!--l. 6328--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33054"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrusersuffix </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6211--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 6213--><p class="noindent" >These may be redefined as appropriate. For example, if you want a smallcaps
+ </p><!--l. 6330--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6332--><p class="noindent" >These may be redefined as appropriate. For example, if you want a smallcaps
style, you can just set these commands to those used by the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-sc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-sc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33047"></a>
+ id="dx1-33055"></a>
style:
@@ -12372,60 +12345,57 @@
\renewcommand{\glsabbruserfont}[1]{\glsabbrvscfont{#1}}
\renewcommand{\glsxtrusersuffix}{\glsxtrscsuffix}
</pre>
- <!--l. 6219--><p class="nopar" >
+ <!--l. 6338--><p class="nopar" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6221--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-noshort-noreg"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-noshort-noreg</span><a
- id="dx1-33048"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6221--><p class="noindent" >This style is like <a
+ id="dx1-33056"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33049"></a> but it doesn’t set the <a
+ id="dx1-33057"></a> but it doesn’t set the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33050"></a> attribute.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6225--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33058"></a>
+ attribute.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-noshort-desc-noreg"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-noshort-desc-noreg</span><a
- id="dx1-33051"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6225--><p class="noindent" >This style is like <a
+ id="dx1-33059"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-noshort-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33052"></a> but it doesn’t set the <a
+ id="dx1-33060"></a> but it doesn’t set the
+ <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33053"></a> attribute.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6229--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33061"></a> attribute.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-short-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-short-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33054"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6229--><p class="noindent" >On <a
- id="dx1-33055"></a><a
+ id="dx1-33062"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">On <a
+ id="dx1-33063"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>, this style uses the format ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩). The inline and display full
- forms are the same. The <span
+class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩). The
+ inline and display full forms are the same. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33056"></a> is set to the full form. The <span
+ id="dx1-33064"></a> is set to the full
+ form. The <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-33057"></a> key is set to ⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩
- (⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩). Before version 1.04, this was incorrectly set to the short form. If you
- want to revert back to this you can redefine
- </p><!--l. 6236--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33058"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33065"></a> key is set to ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩). Before version 1.04, this was
+ incorrectly set to the short form. If you want to revert back to this you can
+ redefine
+ <!--l. 6355--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33066"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongshortdescsort </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6238--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6357--><p class="noindent" >
For example:
@@ -12434,18 +12404,18 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-156">
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrlongshortdescsort}{\the\glsshorttok}
</pre>
- <!--l. 6242--><p class="nopar" > The <span
+ <!--l. 6361--><p class="nopar" > The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-33059"></a> must be supplied by the user. The long and short
+ id="dx1-33067"></a> must be supplied by the user. The long and short
forms are separated by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfullsep</span>. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33060"></a> field is obtained
+ id="dx1-33068"></a> field is obtained
from
- </p><!--l. 6246--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33061"></a> <span
+ </p><!--l. 6365--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33069"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongshortdescname </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6248--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6367--><p class="noindent" >
(Similarly for other <span
class="cmtt-10">long</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
@@ -12460,185 +12430,171 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\the\glsshorttok</span>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6258--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-short-sc-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-short-sc-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33062"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6258--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33070"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33063"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33071"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33064"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6262--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33072"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-short-sm-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-short-sm-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33065"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6262--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33073"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33066"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33074"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33067"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6266--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33075"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-short-em-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-short-em-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33068"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6266--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33076"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33069"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33077"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33070"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6270--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33078"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-em-short-em-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-em-short-em-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33071"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6270--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.04, this style is like <a
+ id="dx1-33079"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.04, this style is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-em-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-em-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33072"></a> but redefines
- <span
+ id="dx1-33080"></a> but
+ redefines <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongfont </span>to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongemfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33073"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6274--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33081"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-em-noshort-em-desc-noreg"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-em-noshort-em-desc-noreg</span><a
- id="dx1-33074"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6274--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17, this style is like <a
+ id="dx1-33082"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.17, this style is like
+ <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-em-noshort-em-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-em-noshort-em-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33075"></a> but doesn’t set
- the <a
+ id="dx1-33083"></a> but doesn’t set the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33076"></a> attribute.
-
-
-
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6280--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33084"></a> attribute.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-short-user-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-short-user-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33077"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6280--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.04, this style is like a cross between the <a
+ id="dx1-33085"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.04, this style is like a cross between the
+ <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33078"></a> style
- and the <a
+ id="dx1-33086"></a> style and the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-user"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33079"></a> style. The display and inline forms are as for
- <a
+ id="dx1-33087"></a> style. The display and
+ inline forms are as for <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-user"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33080"></a> and the <span
+ id="dx1-33088"></a> and the <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33081"></a> key is obtained from
- </p><!--l. 6286--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33082"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33089"></a> key is obtained
+ from
+ <!--l. 6405--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33090"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongshortuserdescname </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6288--><p class="noindent" >
+
+
+
+ </p><!--l. 6407--><p class="noindent" >
Again, this should only be redefined before <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span>), and fragile and formatting commands need protecting.
- </p><!--l. 6292--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ </p><!--l. 6411--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-33083"></a> key must be supplied in the optional argument of
+ id="dx1-33091"></a> key must be supplied in the optional argument of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span>). The <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-33084"></a> key is set to ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-33092"></a> key is set to ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩) as per
the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33085"></a> style.
+ id="dx1-33093"></a> style.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6297--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-nolong-noreg"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-nolong-noreg</span><a
- id="dx1-33086"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6297--><p class="noindent" >This is like <a
+ id="dx1-33094"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-nolong"><span
class="cmss-10">short-nolong</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33087"></a> but doesn’t set the <a
+ id="dx1-33095"></a> but doesn’t set the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33088"></a> attribute.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6301--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33096"></a> attribute.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.nolong-short-noreg"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">nolong-short-noreg</span><a
- id="dx1-33089"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6301--><p class="noindent" >This is like <a
+ id="dx1-33097"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.nolong-short"><span
class="cmss-10">nolong-short</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33090"></a> but doesn’t set the <a
+ id="dx1-33098"></a> but doesn’t set the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33091"></a> attribute.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6305--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33099"></a> attribute.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-long"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-long</span><a
- id="dx1-33092"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6305--><p class="noindent" >On <a
- id="dx1-33093"></a><a
+ id="dx1-33100"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">On <a
+ id="dx1-33101"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>, this style uses the format ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩). The inline and
display full forms are the same. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33094"></a> and <span
+ id="dx1-33102"></a> and <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-33095"></a> keys are set to the
+ id="dx1-33103"></a> keys are set to the
short form. The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-33096"></a> is set to the long form. The short and long
+ id="dx1-33104"></a> is set to the long form. The short and long
forms are separated by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfullsep</span>. If you want to insert material
within the parentheses (such as a translation), try the <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long-user"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33097"></a>
+ id="dx1-33105"></a>
style.
- </p><!--l. 6315--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ <!--l. 6434--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33098"></a> field is obtained from
- </p><!--l. 6316--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33099"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33106"></a> field is obtained from
+ </p><!--l. 6435--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33107"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortlongname </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6318--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6437--><p class="noindent" >
(Similarly for other <span
class="cmtt-10">short</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
@@ -12651,89 +12607,79 @@
class="cmtt-10">\the\glslongtok </span>and the short form can be referenced with
<span
class="cmtt-10">\the\glsshorttok</span>.
-
-
-
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6329--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sc-long"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sc-long</span><a
- id="dx1-33100"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6329--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33108"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33101"></a> but redefines <span
+ id="dx1-33109"></a> but redefines <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33102"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6333--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33110"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sm-long"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sm-long</span><a
- id="dx1-33103"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6333--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33111"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33104"></a> but redefines <span
+ id="dx1-33112"></a> but redefines <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33105"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6337--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33113"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-em-long"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-em-long</span><a
- id="dx1-33106"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6337--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33114"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33107"></a> but redefines <span
+ id="dx1-33115"></a> but redefines <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33108"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6341--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33116"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-em-long-em"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-em-long-em</span><a
- id="dx1-33109"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6341--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.04, this style is like <a
+ id="dx1-33117"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.04, this style is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-em-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-em-long</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33110"></a> but redefines
+ id="dx1-33118"></a> but redefines
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongfont </span>to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongemfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33111"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6345--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33119"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-long-user"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-long-user</span><a
- id="dx1-33112"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6345--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.04. This style is like the <a
+ id="dx1-33120"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.04. This style is like the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-user"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33113"></a> style but with the long
- and short forms switched. The parenthetical material is governed by the same
- command <span
+ id="dx1-33121"></a> style but
+ with the long and short forms switched. The parenthetical material is governed
+ by the same command <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtruserparen</span><a
- id="dx1-33114"></a>, but the first argument supplied to it is the
- long form instead of the short form. The <span
+ id="dx1-33122"></a>, but the first argument supplied to it
+
+
+
+ is the long form instead of the short form. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33115"></a> field is obtained by
+ id="dx1-33123"></a> field is obtained by
expanding
- </p><!--l. 6352--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33116"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 6471--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33124"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortlongname </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6354--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6473--><p class="noindent" >
Again, this should only be redefined before <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or
<span
@@ -12740,7 +12686,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span>) and commands that should be expanded need to be protected.
The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-33117"></a> is set to <span
+ id="dx1-33125"></a> is set to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsuserdescription{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -12747,48 +12693,43 @@
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6360--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-nolong-desc-noreg"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-nolong-desc-noreg</span><a
- id="dx1-33118"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6360--><p class="noindent" >This style is like <a
+ id="dx1-33126"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-nolong-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-nolong-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33119"></a> but it doesn’t set the <a
+ id="dx1-33127"></a> but it doesn’t set the
+ <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33120"></a> attribute.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6364--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33128"></a> attribute.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-long-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-long-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33121"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
-
-
-
- <!--l. 6364--><p class="noindent" >On <a
- id="dx1-33122"></a><a
+ id="dx1-33129"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">On <a
+ id="dx1-33130"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>, this style uses the format ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩ (⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩). The inline and display full
- forms are the same. The <span
+class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩). The
+ inline and display full forms are the same. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33123"></a> is set to the full form. The <span
+ id="dx1-33131"></a> is set to the full
+ form. The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-33124"></a> must
- be supplied by the user. The short and long forms are separated by
- <span
+ id="dx1-33132"></a> must be supplied by the user. The short and long
+ forms are separated by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfullsep</span>. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33125"></a> field is obtained from
- </p><!--l. 6371--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33126"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33133"></a> field is obtained
+ from
+ <!--l. 6490--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33134"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortlongdescname </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6373--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6492--><p class="noindent" >
(Similarly for other <span
class="cmtt-10">short</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
@@ -12803,134 +12744,126 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\the\glsshorttok</span>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6383--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sc-long-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sc-long-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33127"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6383--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33135"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33128"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33136"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33129"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6387--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33137"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sm-long-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sm-long-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33130"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6387--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33138"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33131"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33139"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33132"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6391--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33140"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-em-long-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-em-long-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33133"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6391--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33141"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33134"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33142"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33135"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6395--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33143"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-em-long-em-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-em-long-em-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33136"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6395--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.04, this style is like <a
+ id="dx1-33144"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.04, this style is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-em-long-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-em-long-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33137"></a> but redefines
- <span
+ id="dx1-33145"></a> but
+ redefines <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongfont </span>to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongemfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33138"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6399--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33146"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-long-user-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-long-user-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33139"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6399--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.04, this style is like a cross between the <a
+ id="dx1-33147"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.04, this style is like a cross between the
+ <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33140"></a> style
- and the <a
+ id="dx1-33148"></a> style and the <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long-user"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33141"></a> style. The display and inline forms are as for
- <a
+ id="dx1-33149"></a> style. The display and
+ inline forms are as for <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long-user"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33142"></a>, but the <span
+ id="dx1-33150"></a>, but the <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33143"></a> key is obtained from
- </p><!--l. 6405--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33144"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33151"></a> key is obtained
+ from
+
+
+
+ <!--l. 6524--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33152"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortlonguserdescname </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6407--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6526--><p class="noindent" >
Again, this should only be redefined before <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span>), and fragile and formatting commands need protecting.
-
-
-
- </p><!--l. 6411--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ </p><!--l. 6530--><p class="noindent" >The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-33145"></a> key must be supplied in the optional argument of
+ id="dx1-33153"></a> key must be supplied in the optional argument of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span>).
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6415--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-footnote"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-footnote</span><a
- id="dx1-33146"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6415--><p class="noindent" >On <a
- id="dx1-33147"></a><a
-href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>, this style displays the short form with the long form as a footnote.
- This style automatically sets the <a
+ id="dx1-33154"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">On <a
+ id="dx1-33155"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>, this style displays the short form with the long form as
+ a footnote. This style automatically sets the <a
href="#catattr.nohyperfirst"><span
class="cmss-10">nohyperfirst</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33148"></a> attribute to “true” for the
- supplied category, so the <a
- id="dx1-33149"></a>first use won’t be hyperlinked (but the footnote
+ id="dx1-33156"></a> attribute to “true” for
+ the supplied category, so the <a
+ id="dx1-33157"></a>first use won’t be hyperlinked (but the footnote
marker may be, if the <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
- id="dx1-33150"></a> package is used).
- </p><!--l. 6422--><p class="noindent" >The inline full form uses the ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-33158"></a> package is used).
+ <!--l. 6541--><p class="noindent" >The inline full form uses the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩) style. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33151"></a> is set to the short
+ id="dx1-33159"></a> is set to the short
form. The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-33152"></a> is set to the long form. The <span
+ id="dx1-33160"></a> is set to the long form. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33153"></a> key is obtained by
+ id="dx1-33161"></a> key is obtained by
expanding:
- </p><!--l. 6426--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33154"></a> <span
+ </p><!--l. 6545--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33162"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfootnotename </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6428--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6547--><p class="noindent" >
(Similarly for other <span
class="cmtt-10">short</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
@@ -12942,35 +12875,35 @@
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span>), and fragile or formatting commands
should be protected from expansion.
- </p><!--l. 6435--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.05, all the footnote styles use:
- </p><!--l. 6436--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33155"></a> <span
+ </p><!--l. 6554--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.05, all the footnote styles use:
+ </p><!--l. 6555--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33163"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongfootnotefont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6438--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6557--><p class="noindent" >
to format the long form on <a
- id="dx1-33156"></a>first use or for the full form and
- </p><!--l. 6440--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33157"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33164"></a>first use or for the full form and
+ </p><!--l. 6559--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33165"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongfootnotefont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6442--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6561--><p class="noindent" >
to format the long form elsewhere (for example, when used with <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlong</span>).
- </p><!--l. 6446--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.07, all the footnote styles use:
- </p><!--l. 6447--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33158"></a> <span
+ </p><!--l. 6565--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.07, all the footnote styles use:
+ </p><!--l. 6566--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33166"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrabbrvfootnote{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">long</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6449--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6568--><p class="noindent" >
By default, this just does <span
class="cmtt-10">\footnote</span><a
- id="dx1-33159"></a><span
+ id="dx1-33167"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span>(the first argument is ignored). For
@@ -12985,7 +12918,7 @@
  \footnote{\glshyperlink[#2]{#1}}%
}
</pre>
- <!--l. 6457--><p class="nopar" > or to include the short form with a hyperlink:
+ <!--l. 6576--><p class="nopar" > or to include the short form with a hyperlink:
@@ -12995,7 +12928,7 @@
  \footnote{\glshyperlink[\glsfmtshort{#1}]{#1}: #2}%
}
</pre>
- <!--l. 6463--><p class="nopar" > Note that I haven’t used commands like <span
+ <!--l. 6582--><p class="nopar" > Note that I haven’t used commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort </span>to avoid interference
(see <a
href="#sec:entryfmtmods"><span
@@ -13008,109 +12941,103 @@
</a><a
href="#sec:nested">Nested Links<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:nested --></a>).
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6468--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.footnote"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">footnote</span><a
- id="dx1-33160"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6468--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-33168"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33161"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6471--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33169"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sc-footnote"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sc-footnote</span><a
- id="dx1-33162"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6471--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33170"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33163"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33171"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33164"></a>.
- (This style was originally called <span
+ id="dx1-33172"></a>. (This style was originally called <span
class="cmss-10">footnote-sc</span><a
- id="dx1-33165"></a>. Renamed in version 1.04, but
- original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6478--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33173"></a>. Renamed in
+ version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for
+ backward-compatibility.)
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sc-footnote"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sc-footnote</span><a
- id="dx1-33166"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6478--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33174"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33167"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33175"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33168"></a>.
- (This style was originally called <span
+ id="dx1-33176"></a>. (This style was originally called <span
class="cmss-10">footnote-sm</span><a
- id="dx1-33169"></a>. Renamed in version 1.04, but
- original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6485--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33177"></a>. Renamed in
+ version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for
+ backward-compatibility.)
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-em-footnote"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-em-footnote</span><a
- id="dx1-33170"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6485--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33178"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33171"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33179"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33172"></a>.
- (This style was originally called <span
+ id="dx1-33180"></a>. (This style was originally called <span
class="cmss-10">footnote-em</span><a
- id="dx1-33173"></a>. Renamed in version 1.04, but
- original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6492--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33181"></a>. Renamed in
+ version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for
+ backward-compatibility.)
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-footnote-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-footnote-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33174"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6492--><p class="noindent" >(New to v1.42.) This is similar to <a
+ id="dx1-33182"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to v1.42.) This is similar to <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33175"></a>, but the <span
+ id="dx1-33183"></a>, but the
+ <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-33176"></a> must be
- supplied by the user. The <span
+ id="dx1-33184"></a> must be supplied by the user. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33177"></a> field is obtained from:
-
-
-
- </p><!--l. 6497--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33178"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33185"></a> field is obtained
+ from:
+ <!--l. 6616--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33186"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfootnotedescname </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6499--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6618--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩ followed by ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ in parentheses, and the <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-33179"></a> field is
+ id="dx1-33187"></a> field is
obtained from:
- </p><!--l. 6502--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33180"></a> <span
+ </p><!--l. 6621--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33188"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfootnotedescsort </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6504--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6623--><p class="noindent" >
which defaults to just the short form. (Similarly for other
<span
class="cmtt-10">short</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">-[post]footnote-desc </span>styles, unless indicated otherwise.)
- </p><!--l. 6509--><p class="noindent" >Any redefinition of these commands must come before the abbreviations
+
+
+
+ </p><!--l. 6628--><p class="noindent" >Any redefinition of these commands must come before the abbreviations
are defined as it expands on definition. Make sure you protect any
commands that shouldn’t be expanded. The long form can be referenced
with <span
@@ -13118,330 +13045,318 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\the\glsshorttok</span>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6515--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.footnote-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">footnote-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33181"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6515--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-33189"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33182"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6518--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33190"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sc-footnote-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sc-footnote-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33183"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6518--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33191"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33184"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33192"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33185"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6522--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33193"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sm-footnote-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sm-footnote-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33186"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6522--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33194"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33187"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33195"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33188"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6526--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33196"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-em-footnote-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-em-footnote-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33189"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6526--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33197"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33190"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33198"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33191"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6530--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33199"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-postfootnote"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-postfootnote</span><a
- id="dx1-33192"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6530--><p class="noindent" >This is similar to the <a
+ id="dx1-33200"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is similar to the <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33193"></a> style but doesn’t modify the category
- attribute. Instead it changes <span
+ id="dx1-33201"></a> style but doesn’t modify the
+ category attribute. Instead it changes <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostlink</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">category</span>⟩<a
- id="dx1-33194"></a> to insert the
+ id="dx1-33202"></a> to insert the
footnote after the <a
- id="dx1-33195"></a><a
+ id="dx1-33203"></a><a
href="#glo:linktext">link-text</a> on <a
- id="dx1-33196"></a><a
+ id="dx1-33204"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>. This will also defer the footnote
until after any following punctuation character that’s recognised by
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrifnextpunc</span><a
- id="dx1-33197"></a>.
-
-
-
- </p><!--l. 6538--><p class="noindent" >The inline full form uses the ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-33205"></a>.
+ <!--l. 6657--><p class="noindent" >The inline full form uses the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩) style. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33198"></a> is set to the short
+ id="dx1-33206"></a> is set to the short
form. The <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-33199"></a> is set to the long form. Note that this style will change
+ id="dx1-33207"></a> is set to the long form. Note that this style will change
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfull </span>(and its variants) so that it fakes non-<a
- id="dx1-33200"></a>first use. (Otherwise the
+ id="dx1-33208"></a>first use. (Otherwise the
footnote would appear after the inline form.)
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6545--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.postfootnote"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">postfootnote</span><a
- id="dx1-33201"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6545--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-33209"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-postfootnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-postfootnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33202"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6548--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33210"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sc-postfootnote"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sc-postfootnote</span><a
- id="dx1-33203"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6548--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33211"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-postfootnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-postfootnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33204"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33212"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33205"></a>.
- (This style was originally called <span
+ id="dx1-33213"></a>. (This style was originally called <span
class="cmss-10">postfootnote-sc</span><a
- id="dx1-33206"></a>. Renamed in version 1.04, but
- original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6555--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33214"></a>. Renamed in
+ version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for
+ backward-compatibility.)
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sm-postfootnote"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sm-postfootnote</span><a
- id="dx1-33207"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6555--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33215"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-postfootnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-postfootnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33208"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33216"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33209"></a>.
- (This style was originally called <span
+ id="dx1-33217"></a>. (This style was originally called <span
class="cmss-10">postfootnote-sm</span><a
- id="dx1-33210"></a>. Renamed in version 1.04, but
- original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6562--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33218"></a>. Renamed
+ in version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for
+ backward-compatibility.)
+
+
+
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-em-postfootnote"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-em-postfootnote</span><a
- id="dx1-33211"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6562--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33219"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-postfootnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-postfootnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33212"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use <span
+ id="dx1-33220"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33213"></a>.
- (This style was originally called <span
+ id="dx1-33221"></a>. (This style was originally called <span
class="cmss-10">postfootnote-em</span><a
- id="dx1-33214"></a>. Renamed in version 1.04, but
- original name retained as a deprecated synonym for backward-compatibility.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6569--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33222"></a>. Renamed
+ in version 1.04, but original name retained as a deprecated synonym for
+ backward-compatibility.)
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-postfootnote-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-postfootnote-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33215"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6569--><p class="noindent" >(New to v1.42.) This is similar to <a
+ id="dx1-33223"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to v1.42.) This is similar to <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-postfootnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-postfootnote</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33216"></a>, but the <span
+ id="dx1-33224"></a>, but
+ the <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-33217"></a> must be
- supplied by the user. The <span
+ id="dx1-33225"></a> must be supplied by the user. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33218"></a> and <span
+ id="dx1-33226"></a> and <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-33219"></a> are set as for <a
+ id="dx1-33227"></a> are set as for
+ <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33220"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6576--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33228"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.postfootnote-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">postfootnote-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33221"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6576--><p class="noindent" >A synonym for <a
+ id="dx1-33229"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">A synonym for <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-postfootnote-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-postfootnote-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33222"></a>.
-
-
-
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6579--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33230"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sc-postfootnote-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sc-postfootnote-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33223"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6579--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33231"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-postfootnote-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-postfootnote-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33224"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
- <span
+ id="dx1-33232"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont</span>
+ to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvscfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33225"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6583--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33233"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-sm-postfootnote-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-sm-postfootnote-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33226"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6583--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33234"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-postfootnote-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-postfootnote-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33227"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
- <span
+ id="dx1-33235"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont</span>
+ to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvsmfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33228"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6587--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33236"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-em-postfootnote-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-em-postfootnote-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33229"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6587--><p class="noindent" >Like <a
+ id="dx1-33237"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-postfootnote-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">short-postfootnote-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33230"></a> but redefines <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>to use
- <span
+ id="dx1-33238"></a> but redefines <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont</span>
+ to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvemfont</span><a
- id="dx1-33231"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6591--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33239"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-postlong-user"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-postlong-user</span><a
- id="dx1-33232"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6591--><p class="noindent" >This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s like the <a
+ id="dx1-33240"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s like the
+ <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long-user"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33233"></a> style but
- defers the parenthetical material to after the link-text. This means that you
- don’t have such a long hyperlink (which can cause problems for the DVI
- LaTeX format) and it also means that the user supplied material can
- include a hyperlink to another location. The <span
+ id="dx1-33241"></a> style but defers the parenthetical material to after the link-text.
+ This means that you don’t have such a long hyperlink (which can cause
+ problems for the DVI LaTeX format) and it also means that the user supplied
+ material can include a hyperlink to another location. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33234"></a> key is obtained from
- <span
+ id="dx1-33242"></a> key is obtained
+ from <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortlongname</span>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6600--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-postlong-user-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-postlong-user-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33235"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6600--><p class="noindent" >This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s like the above <a
+ id="dx1-33243"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s like the
+ above <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-postlong-user"><span
class="cmss-10">short-postlong-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33236"></a>
- style but the <span
+ id="dx1-33244"></a> style but the <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-33237"></a> must be specified. The <span
+ id="dx1-33245"></a> must be specified. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33238"></a> is obtained from
- <span
+ id="dx1-33246"></a>
+ is obtained from <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortlonguserdescname</span>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6606--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-postshort-user"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-postshort-user</span><a
- id="dx1-33239"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6606--><p class="noindent" >This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s like the above <a
+ id="dx1-33247"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s like the
+ above <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-postlong-user"><span
class="cmss-10">short-postlong-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33240"></a>
- style but the long form is shown first and the short form is in the parenthetical
- material (as for <a
+ id="dx1-33248"></a> style but the long form is shown first and
+ the short form is in the parenthetical material (as for <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short-user"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33241"></a>) style.
-
-
-
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6612--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33249"></a>)
+ style.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-postshort-user-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-postshort-user-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33242"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6612--><p class="noindent" >This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s like the above <a
+ id="dx1-33250"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style was introduced in version 1.12. It’s like the
+ above <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-postshort-user"><span
class="cmss-10">long-postshort-user</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33243"></a>
- style but the <span
+ id="dx1-33251"></a> style but the <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-33244"></a> must be specified. The <span
+ id="dx1-33252"></a> must be specified. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33245"></a> is obtained from
- <span
+ id="dx1-33253"></a>
+ is obtained from <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongshortuserdescname</span>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6618--><p class="noindent" >
+
+
+
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
+ id="abbrstyle.long-postshort-sc-user"></a><span
+class="cmssbx-10">long-postshort-sc-user</span><a
+ id="dx1-33254"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style (new to v1.48) is like <a
+href="#abbrstyle.long-postshort-user"><span
+class="cmss-10">long-postshort-user</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-33255"></a> but uses
+ smallcaps for the short form.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<a
+ id="abbrstyle.long-postshort-sc-user-desc"></a><span
+class="cmssbx-10">long-postshort-sc-user-desc</span><a
+ id="dx1-33256"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style (new to v1.48) is like <a
+href="#abbrstyle.long-postshort-user-desc"><span
+class="cmss-10">long-postshort-user-desc</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-33257"></a>
+ but uses smallcaps for the short form.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<a
id="abbrstyle.long-hyphen-short-hyphen"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-hyphen-short-hyphen</span><a
- id="dx1-33246"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6618--><p class="noindent" >This style (new to v1.17) is designed to work with the <a
+ id="dx1-33258"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style (new to v1.17) is designed to work
+ with the <a
href="#catattr.markwords"><span
class="cmss-10">markwords</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33247"></a> category
- attribute. The full form is formatted using
- </p><!--l. 6621--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33248"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33259"></a> category attribute. The full form is formatted
+ using
+ <!--l. 6748--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33260"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlonghyphenshort{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -13451,7 +13366,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6623--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6750--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩ is the inserted material provided in the final optional argument of
commands like <span
@@ -13459,26 +13374,26 @@
class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩ start with a hyphen, then this locally
redefines <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrwordsep</span><a
- id="dx1-33249"></a> to a hyphen, which means that if the <a
+ id="dx1-33261"></a> to a hyphen, which means that if the <a
href="#catattr.markwords"><span
class="cmss-10">markwords</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33250"></a>
+ id="dx1-33262"></a>
attribute is set then the long form will become hyphenated. (If this attribute
isn’t set, there’s no alteration to the way the long form is displayed.) The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33251"></a>
+ id="dx1-33263"></a>
key is obtained from <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongshortname</span>.
- </p><!--l. 6633--><p class="noindent" >Unlike the other ⟨<span
+ </p><!--l. 6760--><p class="noindent" >Unlike the other ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩) type of styles, such as <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33252"></a>, this style also
+ id="dx1-33264"></a>, this style also
repeats the insertion in the parenthetical part, so that the first use form
is:
</p><blockquote class="quote">
- <!--l. 6638--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ <!--l. 6765--><p class="noindent" ><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlonghyphenfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>⟨<span
@@ -13488,7 +13403,7 @@
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩)</p></blockquote>
- <!--l. 6641--><p class="noindent" >The space before the parenthetical material is actually given by
+ <!--l. 6768--><p class="noindent" >The space before the parenthetical material is actually given by
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfullsep{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -13497,7 +13412,7 @@
moved into the formatting commands according to the conditional
<span
class="cmtt-10">\ifglsxtrinsertinside</span>.
- </p><!--l. 6646--><p class="noindent" >For example, if <span
+ </p><!--l. 6773--><p class="noindent" >For example, if <span
class="cmtt-10">ip </span>is defined using:
@@ -13508,7 +13423,7 @@
\setabbreviationstyle[english]{long-hyphen-short-hyphen}
\newabbreviation[category=english]{ip}{IP}{Internet Protocol}
</pre>
- <!--l. 6651--><p class="nopar" > then
+ <!--l. 6778--><p class="nopar" > then
@@ -13516,10 +13431,10 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-160">
\gls{ip}[-Adressen]
</pre>
- <!--l. 6655--><p class="nopar" > will do
+ <!--l. 6782--><p class="nopar" > will do
</p><blockquote class="quote">
- <!--l. 6658--><p class="noindent" >Internet-Protocol-Adressen (IP-Adressen)</p></blockquote>
- <!--l. 6660--><p class="noindent" >on first use, whereas
+ <!--l. 6785--><p class="noindent" >Internet-Protocol-Adressen (IP-Adressen)</p></blockquote>
+ <!--l. 6787--><p class="noindent" >on first use, whereas
@@ -13527,11 +13442,11 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-161">
\gls{ip}[ Address]
</pre>
- <!--l. 6663--><p class="nopar" > will do
+ <!--l. 6790--><p class="nopar" > will do
</p><blockquote class="quote">
- <!--l. 6666--><p class="noindent" >Internet Protocol Address (IP Address)</p></blockquote>
- <!--l. 6668--><p class="noindent" >on first use.
- </p><!--l. 6670--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> Note that the hyphenation isn’t applied when using commands like
+ <!--l. 6793--><p class="noindent" >Internet Protocol Address (IP Address)</p></blockquote>
+ <!--l. 6795--><p class="noindent" >on first use.
+ </p><!--l. 6797--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> Note that the hyphenation isn’t applied when using commands like
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlong</span>. This means that
@@ -13541,15 +13456,15 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-162">
\glsxtrlong{ip}[-Adressen]
</pre>
- <!--l. 6675--><p class="nopar" > will do
+ <!--l. 6802--><p class="nopar" > will do
</p><blockquote class="quote">
- <!--l. 6678--><p class="noindent" >Internet Protocol-Adressen</p></blockquote>
+ <!--l. 6805--><p class="noindent" >Internet Protocol-Adressen</p></blockquote>
</div>
- <!--l. 6680--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 6682--><p class="noindent" >If the <a
+ <!--l. 6807--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6809--><p class="noindent" >If the <a
href="#catattr.markwords"><span
class="cmss-10">markwords</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33253"></a> attribute hadn’t been set, then the first use of
+ id="dx1-33265"></a> attribute hadn’t been set, then the first use of
@@ -13557,20 +13472,20 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-163">
\gls{ip}[-Adressen]
</pre>
- <!--l. 6686--><p class="nopar" > would do
+ <!--l. 6813--><p class="nopar" > would do
</p><blockquote class="quote">
- <!--l. 6689--><p class="noindent" >Internet Protocol-Adressen (IP-Adressen)</p></blockquote>
- <!--l. 6691--><p class="noindent" >instead.
- </p><!--l. 6693--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> If the inserted material ⟨<span
+ <!--l. 6816--><p class="noindent" >Internet Protocol-Adressen (IP-Adressen)</p></blockquote>
+ <!--l. 6818--><p class="noindent" >instead.
+ </p><!--l. 6820--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> If the inserted material ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩ is likely to contain commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>,
then use <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen"><span
class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33254"></a> instead to avoid nested links.
+ id="dx1-33266"></a> instead to avoid nested links.
</div>
- </p><!--l. 6697--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 6699--><p class="noindent" >If you want the short version in small-caps, you can just redefine
+ </p><!--l. 6824--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6826--><p class="noindent" >If you want the short version in small-caps, you can just redefine
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvhyphenfont </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrhyphensuffix </span>to use the small-caps
@@ -13583,69 +13498,61 @@
\renewcommand{\glsabbrvhyphenfont}{\glsabbrvscfont}
\renewcommand{\glsxtrhyphensuffix}{\glsxtrscsuffix}
</pre>
- <!--l. 6705--><p class="nopar" > Similarly for other font-changing variations.
+ <!--l. 6832--><p class="nopar" > Similarly for other font-changing variations.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6708--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-hyphen-noshort-desc-noreg"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-hyphen-noshort-desc-noreg</span><a
- id="dx1-33255"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6708--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17, this style is like <a
+ id="dx1-33267"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.17, this style is like
+ <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-hyphen-short-hyphen-desc"><span
class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-short-hyphen-desc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33256"></a>
- except that the parenthetical part is omitted and the long form is
- displayed on subsequent use. The short form can be accessed with
- <span
+ id="dx1-33268"></a> except that the parenthetical part is omitted and
+ the long form is displayed on subsequent use. The short form can be accessed
+ with <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort </span>but just uses the default abbreviation font. There’s
no regular version of this style as the regular form doesn’t have the
flexibility to deal with the hyphen switch. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33257"></a> is obtained from
+ id="dx1-33269"></a> is obtained from
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongnoshortdescname</span>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6718--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-hyphen-noshort-noreg"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-hyphen-noshort-noreg</span><a
- id="dx1-33258"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6718--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17, this style is like <a
+ id="dx1-33270"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">New to version 1.17, this style is like
+ <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-hyphen-noshort-desc-noreg"><span
class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-noshort-desc-noreg</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33259"></a> but the
- name is set to the short form and the description is set to the long
- form.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6724--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-33271"></a> but the name is set to the short form and the
+ description is set to the long form.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-hyphen-short-hyphen-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-hyphen-short-hyphen-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33260"></a> </p></dt><dd
+ id="dx1-33272"></a> </dt><dd
class="description">
- <!--l. 6724--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 6726--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17. This is similar to <a
+ <!--l. 6853--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17. This is similar to <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-hyphen-short-hyphen"><span
class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-short-hyphen</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33261"></a> but the user
+ id="dx1-33273"></a> but the user
supplies the description. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33262"></a> is obtained from <span
+ id="dx1-33274"></a> is obtained from <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongshortdescname</span>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6731--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen</span><a
- id="dx1-33263"></a> </p></dt><dd
+ id="dx1-33275"></a> </dt><dd
class="description">
- <!--l. 6731--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 6733--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17. This is similar to <a
+ <!--l. 6860--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17. This is similar to <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-hyphen-short-hyphen"><span
class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-short-hyphen</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33264"></a> but the
+ id="dx1-33276"></a> but the
inserted and parenthetical material are moved to the post-link hook. On first
use, <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls{</span>⟨<span
@@ -13666,18 +13573,15 @@
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩
-
-
-
<br /><spacer type=vertical size=10></span>
where
- </p><!--l. 6741--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33265"></a> <span
+ </p><!--l. 6868--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33277"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrposthyphenshort{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩ </div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6743--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6870--><p class="noindent" >
is in the post-link hook. This uses the format: <spacer type=vertical size=10><span class="obeylines-h">
<br />⟨<span
class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩ (<span
@@ -13686,16 +13590,19 @@
class="cmtt-10">}</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">isnert</span>⟩)
<br /><spacer type=vertical size=10></span>
- </p><!--l. 6749--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> The singular short form is always used here, even with <span
+
+
+
+ </p><!--l. 6876--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> The singular short form is always used here, even with <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspl</span>. (Unlike
<a
href="#abbrstyle.long-hyphen-long-hyphen"><span
class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-long-hyphen</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33266"></a>.) </div>
- </p><!--l. 6752--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 6754--><p class="noindent" >The part in the link-text on first use:
- </p><!--l. 6755--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33267"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33278"></a>.) </div>
+ </p><!--l. 6879--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6881--><p class="noindent" >The part in the link-text on first use:
+ </p><!--l. 6882--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33279"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlonghyphen{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">long</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -13703,7 +13610,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6757--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6884--><p class="noindent" >
checks if ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩ starts with a hyphen. If it does, then <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrwordsep </span>is locally
@@ -13716,7 +13623,7 @@
this style without causing nested hyperlinks, but only for commands like
<span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>.
- </p><!--l. 6766--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> Don’t use <span
+ </p><!--l. 6893--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> Don’t use <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>in the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩ part for commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfull</span>,
@@ -13723,8 +13630,8 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlong</span>. </div>
- </p><!--l. 6769--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 6771--><p class="noindent" >The inline full display format used by commands like <span
+ </p><!--l. 6896--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6898--><p class="noindent" >The inline full display format used by commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfull</span>
behaves differently to the first use of <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>with this style. It’s better
@@ -13736,40 +13643,33 @@
class="cmtt-10">} </span>if you want to ensure the full
format.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6776--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33268"></a> </p></dt><dd
+ id="dx1-33280"></a> </dt><dd
class="description">
- <!--l. 6776--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 6778--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17. This is similar to <a
+ <!--l. 6905--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17. This is similar to <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen"><span
class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33269"></a>
+ id="dx1-33281"></a>
but the user supplies the description. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33270"></a> is obtained from
+ id="dx1-33282"></a> is obtained from
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlongshortdescname</span>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6784--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-hyphen-long-hyphen"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-hyphen-long-hyphen</span><a
- id="dx1-33271"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
-
-
-
- <!--l. 6784--><p class="noindent" >This style (new to v1.17) is like <a
+ id="dx1-33283"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style (new to v1.17) is like <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-hyphen-short-hyphen"><span
class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-short-hyphen</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33272"></a>, except that the short
- form is displayed first followed by the long form in parentheses. The full form is
- formatted using
- </p><!--l. 6788--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33273"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-33284"></a>,
+ except that the short form is displayed first followed by the long form in
+ parentheses. The full form is formatted using
+ <!--l. 6915--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33285"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshorthyphenlong{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -13779,47 +13679,47 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6790--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6917--><p class="noindent" >
which behaves in an analogous way to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlonghyphenshort</span>. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33274"></a> is
+ id="dx1-33286"></a> is
obtained from <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortlongname</span>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6794--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-hyphen-long-hyphen-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-hyphen-long-hyphen-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33275"></a> </p></dt><dd
+ id="dx1-33287"></a> </dt><dd
class="description">
- <!--l. 6794--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 6796--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17. This is similar to <a
+ <!--l. 6923--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17. This is similar to <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-hyphen-long-hyphen"><span
class="cmss-10">short-hyphen-long-hyphen</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33276"></a> but the user
+ id="dx1-33288"></a> but the user
supplies the description. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33277"></a> is obtained from <span
+ id="dx1-33289"></a> is obtained from <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortlongdescname</span>.
+
+
+
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6801--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen</span><a
- id="dx1-33278"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 6801--><p class="noindent" >This style (new to v1.17) is like <a
+ id="dx1-33290"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This style (new to v1.17) is like
+ <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen"><span
class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33279"></a>, but the short
- form is displayed first followed by the long form in parentheses. On first use,
- <span
+ id="dx1-33291"></a>, but the short form is displayed first followed by
+ the long form in parentheses. On first use, <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩<span
-class="cmtt-10">] </span>will do <spacer type=vertical size=10><span class="obeylines-h">
+class="cmtt-10">] </span>will do
+ <spacer type=vertical size=10><span class="obeylines-h">
<br /><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshorthyphen{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩<span
@@ -13835,23 +13735,23 @@
class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩
<br /><spacer type=vertical size=10></span>
where
- </p><!--l. 6811--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-33280"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 6938--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-33292"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrposthyphenlong{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩ </div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 6813--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6940--><p class="noindent" >
is in the post-link hook. These commands behave in an analogous manner to
those used with <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen"><span
class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-postshort-hyphen</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33281"></a>. The <span
+ id="dx1-33293"></a>. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33282"></a> is obtained from
+ id="dx1-33294"></a> is obtained from
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortlongname</span>.
- </p><!--l. 6818--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> Don’t use <span
+ </p><!--l. 6945--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> Don’t use <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>in the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩ part for commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfull</span>,
@@ -13858,8 +13758,8 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlong</span>. </div>
- </p><!--l. 6821--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 6823--><p class="noindent" >The inline full display format used by commands like <span
+ </p><!--l. 6948--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 6950--><p class="noindent" >The inline full display format used by commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfull</span>
behaves differently to the first use of <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>with this style. It’s better
@@ -13871,34 +13771,29 @@
class="cmtt-10">} </span>if you want to ensure the full
format.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 6828--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="abbrstyle.short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen-desc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen-desc</span><a
- id="dx1-33283"></a> </p></dt><dd
+ id="dx1-33295"></a> </dt><dd
class="description">
-
-
-
- <!--l. 6828--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 6830--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17. This is similar to <a
+ <!--l. 6957--><p class="noindent" >New to version 1.17. This is similar to <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen"><span
class="cmss-10">short-hyphen-postlong-hyphen</span></a><a
- id="dx1-33284"></a>
+ id="dx1-33296"></a>
but the user supplies the description. The <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-33285"></a> is obtained from
+ id="dx1-33297"></a> is obtained from
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshortlongdescname</span>.
</p>
</dd></dl>
-<!--l. 6837--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 6964--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 6837--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 6964--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.5 </span> <a
id="sec:newabbrvstyle"></a>Defining New Abbreviation Styles</h3>
-<!--l. 6840--><p class="noindent" >New abbreviation styles may be defined using:
-</p><!--l. 6841--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+<!--l. 6967--><p class="noindent" >New abbreviation styles may be defined using:
+</p><!--l. 6968--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34001"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviationstyle{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
@@ -13907,8 +13802,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">fmts</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 6843--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 6844--><p class="noindent" >where ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 6970--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 6971--><p class="noindent" >where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩ is the name of the new style (as used in the mandatory argument of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\setabbreviationstyle</span><a
@@ -13917,7 +13812,10 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronymstyle</span><a
id="dx1-34003"></a> command.
-</p><!--l. 6851--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> You can’t use styles defined by <span
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 6978--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> You can’t use styles defined by <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronymstyle </span>with <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>
unless you have reverted <span
@@ -13931,15 +13829,15 @@
package can’t be used with abbreviations defined with <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 6858--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 6860--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 6985--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 6987--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">setup</span>⟩ argument deals with the way the entry is defined and may
set attributes for the given abbreviation category. This argument should
redefine
-</p><!--l. 6863--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 6990--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34006"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\CustomAbbreviationFields </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 6865--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 6992--><p class="noindent" >
to set the entry fields including the <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
id="dx1-34007"></a> (defaults to the short form if omitted),
@@ -13957,12 +13855,12 @@
<span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
id="dx1-34013"></a>.
-</p><!--l. 6872--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> <span
+</p><!--l. 6999--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> <span
class="cmtt-10">\CustomAbbreviationFields </span>is expanded by <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>so take care to
protect commands that shouldn’t be expanded. </div>
-</p><!--l. 6875--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 6877--><p class="indent" > For example, the <a
+</p><!--l. 7002--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7004--><p class="indent" > For example, the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short</span></a><a
id="dx1-34014"></a> style has the following in ⟨<span
@@ -13984,7 +13882,7 @@
    plural={\protect\glsabbrvfont{\the\glsshortpltok}},%
    description={\the\glslongtok}}%
</pre>
-<!--l. 6891--><p class="nopar" > Note that the <span
+<!--l. 7018--><p class="nopar" > Note that the <span
class="cmss-10">first</span><a
id="dx1-34015"></a> and <span
class="cmss-10">firstplural</span><a
@@ -13991,7 +13889,7 @@
id="dx1-34016"></a> are set even though they’re not used by
<span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>.
-</p><!--l. 6895--><p class="indent" > The basic styles, such as <a
+</p><!--l. 7022--><p class="indent" > The basic styles, such as <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short</span></a><a
id="dx1-34017"></a>, use commands like <span
@@ -14009,15 +13907,15 @@
class="cmti-10">fmts</span>⟩ argument even if they’re not used within
<span
class="cmtt-10">\CustomAbbreviationFields</span>.
-</p><!--l. 6904--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 7031--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">setup</span>⟩ argument may also redefine
-</p><!--l. 6905--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7032--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34019"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrPostNewAbbreviation </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 6907--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7034--><p class="noindent" >
which can be used to assign attributes. (This will automatically be initialised to do
nothing.)
-</p><!--l. 6911--><p class="indent" > For example, the <a
+</p><!--l. 7038--><p class="indent" > For example, the <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-footnote"><span
class="cmss-10">short-footnote</span></a><a
id="dx1-34020"></a> includes the following in ⟨<span
@@ -14036,7 +13934,7 @@
    {}%
  }%
</pre>
-<!--l. 6922--><p class="nopar" > This sets the <a
+<!--l. 7049--><p class="nopar" > This sets the <a
href="#catattr.nohyperfirst"><span
class="cmss-10">nohyperfirst</span></a><a
id="dx1-34021"></a> attribute to “true”. It also unsets the <a
@@ -14048,20 +13946,20 @@
class="cmss-10">nohyperfirst</span></a><a
id="dx1-34023"></a> attribute doesn’t get unset by
other styles, so take care not to switch styles for the same category.
-</p><!--l. 6929--><p class="indent" > You can access the short, long, short plural and long plural values through the
+</p><!--l. 7056--><p class="indent" > You can access the short, long, short plural and long plural values through the
following token registers.
-</p><!--l. 6932--><p class="indent" > Short value (defined by <span
+</p><!--l. 7059--><p class="indent" > Short value (defined by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>):
-</p><!--l. 6933--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7060--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34024"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsshorttok </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 6935--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 6937--><p class="indent" > Short plural value (defined by <span
+</p><!--l. 7062--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7064--><p class="indent" > Short plural value (defined by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>):
-</p><!--l. 6938--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7065--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34025"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsshortpltok </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 6940--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7067--><p class="noindent" >
(This may be the default value or, if provided, the value provided by the user
through the <span
class="cmss-10">shortplural</span><a
@@ -14068,18 +13966,18 @@
id="dx1-34026"></a> key in the optional argument of <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span><a
id="dx1-34027"></a>.)
-</p><!--l. 6945--><p class="indent" > Long value (defined by <span
+</p><!--l. 7072--><p class="indent" > Long value (defined by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>):
-</p><!--l. 6946--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7073--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34028"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongtok </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 6948--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 6950--><p class="indent" > Long plural value (defined by <span
+</p><!--l. 7075--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7077--><p class="indent" > Long plural value (defined by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>):
-</p><!--l. 6951--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7078--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34029"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongpltok </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 6953--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7080--><p class="noindent" >
(This may be the default value or, if provided, the value provided by the user
through the <span
class="cmss-10">longplural</span><a
@@ -14086,7 +13984,7 @@
id="dx1-34030"></a> key in the optional argument of <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span><a
id="dx1-34031"></a>.)
-</p><!--l. 6958--><p class="indent" > The short or long values may be modified by attributes (such as <a
+</p><!--l. 7085--><p class="indent" > The short or long values may be modified by attributes (such as <a
href="#catattr.markwords"><span
class="cmss-10">markwords</span></a><a
id="dx1-34032"></a>). The
@@ -14094,15 +13992,15 @@
(unmodified) short or long form (as provided in the final two arguments of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>), then use the commands:
-</p><!--l. 6963--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7090--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34033"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrorgshort </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 6965--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7092--><p class="noindent" >
for the short form and
-</p><!--l. 6967--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7094--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34034"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrorglong </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 6969--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7096--><p class="noindent" >
for the long form. (These may be useful for the <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
id="dx1-34035"></a> key to avoid any formatting that
@@ -14110,36 +14008,36 @@
may be added by the attribute setting.)
-</p><!--l. 6973--><p class="indent" > There are two other registers available that are defined by <span
+</p><!--l. 7100--><p class="indent" > There are two other registers available that are defined by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>:
-</p><!--l. 6976--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7103--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34036"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslabeltok </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 6978--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7105--><p class="noindent" >
which contains the entry’s label and
-</p><!--l. 6980--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7107--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34037"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glskeylisttok </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 6982--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7109--><p class="noindent" >
which contains the values provided in the optional argument of <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span><a
id="dx1-34038"></a>.
-</p><!--l. 6986--><p class="indent" > Remember put <span
+</p><!--l. 7113--><p class="indent" > Remember put <span
class="cmtt-10">\the </span>in front of the register command as in the examples above.
The category label can be access through the command (not a register):
-</p><!--l. 6989--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7116--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34039"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glscategorylabel </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 6991--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7118--><p class="noindent" >
This may be used inside the definition of <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrPostNewAbbreviation</span>.
-</p><!--l. 6995--><p class="indent" > If you want to base a style on an existing style, you can use
-</p><!--l. 6996--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7122--><p class="indent" > If you want to base a style on an existing style, you can use
+</p><!--l. 7123--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34040"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleSetup{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 6998--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7125--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩ is the name of the existing style. For example, the <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-noshort-sc-desc"><span
@@ -14153,58 +14051,58 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-167">
\GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleSetup{long-noshort-desc}
</pre>
-<!--l. 7003--><p class="nopar" > within ⟨<span
+<!--l. 7130--><p class="nopar" > within ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">setup</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 7006--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 7133--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">fmts</span>⟩ argument deals with the way the entry is displayed in the document.
This argument should redefine the following commands.
-</p><!--l. 7010--><p class="indent" > The default suffix for the plural short form (if not overridden by the <span
+</p><!--l. 7137--><p class="indent" > The default suffix for the plural short form (if not overridden by the <span
class="cmss-10">shortplural</span><a
id="dx1-34042"></a>
key):
-</p><!--l. 7012--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7139--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34043"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\abbrvpluralsuffix </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7014--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7141--><p class="noindent" >
(Note that this isn’t used for the plural long form, which just uses the regular
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glspluralsuffix</span>.)
-</p><!--l. 7018--><p class="indent" > The font used for the short form on <a
+</p><!--l. 7145--><p class="indent" > The font used for the short form on <a
id="dx1-34044"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> or in the full forms:
-</p><!--l. 7019--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7146--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34045"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstabbrvfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7021--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7023--><p class="indent" > The font used for the short form on subsequent use or through commands like
+</p><!--l. 7148--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7150--><p class="indent" > The font used for the short form on subsequent use or through commands like
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort</span><a
id="dx1-34046"></a>:
-</p><!--l. 7025--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7152--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34047"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7027--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7029--><p class="indent" > The font used for the long form on <a
+</p><!--l. 7154--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7156--><p class="indent" > The font used for the long form on <a
id="dx1-34048"></a>first use or in the full forms:
-</p><!--l. 7030--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7157--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34049"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirstlongfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7032--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7034--><p class="indent" > The font used for the long form in commands like <span
+</p><!--l. 7159--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7161--><p class="indent" > The font used for the long form in commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlong </span>use:
-</p><!--l. 7036--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7163--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34050"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslongfont{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7038--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7040--><p class="indent" > Display full form singular no case-change (used by <span
+</p><!--l. 7165--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7167--><p class="indent" > Display full form singular no case-change (used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
id="dx1-34051"></a> on <a
id="dx1-34052"></a>first use for
@@ -14212,7 +14110,7 @@
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
id="dx1-34053"></a> attribute set):
-</p><!--l. 7043--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7170--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34054"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfullformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14219,8 +14117,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7045--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7047--><p class="indent" > Display full form singular first letter converted to upper case (used by <span
+</p><!--l. 7172--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7174--><p class="indent" > Display full form singular first letter converted to upper case (used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\Gls</span><a
id="dx1-34055"></a> on
<a
@@ -14228,7 +14126,7 @@
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
id="dx1-34057"></a> attribute set):
-</p><!--l. 7050--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7177--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34058"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrfullformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14235,8 +14133,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7052--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7054--><p class="indent" > Display full form plural no case-change (used by <span
+</p><!--l. 7179--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7181--><p class="indent" > Display full form plural no case-change (used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspl</span><a
id="dx1-34059"></a> on <a
id="dx1-34060"></a>first use for
@@ -14244,7 +14142,7 @@
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
id="dx1-34061"></a> attribute set):
-</p><!--l. 7057--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7184--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34062"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfullplformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14254,8 +14152,8 @@
-</p><!--l. 7059--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7061--><p class="indent" > Display full form plural first letter converted to upper case (used by <span
+</p><!--l. 7186--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7188--><p class="indent" > Display full form plural first letter converted to upper case (used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glspl</span><a
id="dx1-34063"></a> on
<a
@@ -14264,7 +14162,7 @@
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
id="dx1-34065"></a> attribute set):
-</p><!--l. 7064--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7191--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34066"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrfullplformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14271,12 +14169,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7066--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7068--><p class="indent" > In addition ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 7193--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7195--><p class="indent" > In addition ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">fmts</span>⟩ may also redefine the following commands that govern the inline
full formats. If the style doesn’t redefine them, they will default to the same as the
display full forms.
-</p><!--l. 7072--><p class="indent" > Inline singular no case-change (used by <span
+</p><!--l. 7199--><p class="indent" > Inline singular no case-change (used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryfull</span><a
id="dx1-34067"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfull</span><a
@@ -14284,7 +14182,7 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSxtrfull</span><a
id="dx1-34069"></a>):
-</p><!--l. 7074--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7201--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34070"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrinlinefullformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14291,14 +14189,14 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7076--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7078--><p class="indent" > Inline singular first letter converted to upper case (used by <span
+</p><!--l. 7203--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7205--><p class="indent" > Inline singular first letter converted to upper case (used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsentryfull</span><a
id="dx1-34071"></a> and
<span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrfull</span><a
id="dx1-34072"></a>):
-</p><!--l. 7080--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7207--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34073"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrinlinefullformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14305,8 +14203,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7082--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7084--><p class="indent" > Inline plural no case-change (used by <span
+</p><!--l. 7209--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7211--><p class="indent" > Inline plural no case-change (used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryfullpl</span><a
id="dx1-34074"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfullpl</span><a
@@ -14314,7 +14212,7 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSxtrfullpl</span><a
id="dx1-34076"></a>):
-</p><!--l. 7086--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7213--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34077"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrinlinefullplformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14321,14 +14219,14 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7088--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7090--><p class="indent" > Inline plural first letter converted to upper case (used by <span
+</p><!--l. 7215--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7217--><p class="indent" > Inline plural first letter converted to upper case (used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsentryfullpl</span><a
id="dx1-34078"></a> and
<span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrfullpl</span><a
id="dx1-34079"></a>):
-</p><!--l. 7092--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7219--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34080"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrinlinefullplformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14335,8 +14233,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7094--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7096--><p class="indent" > (New to version 1.17.) You can also modify the way the subsequent use is
+</p><!--l. 7221--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7223--><p class="indent" > (New to version 1.17.) You can also modify the way the subsequent use is
formatted by redefining the following four commands, but these won’t be used for
abbreviations with the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
@@ -14343,8 +14241,8 @@
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
id="dx1-34081"></a> attribute set. If the style doesn’t redefine these
commands, the default values are used.
-</p><!--l. 7102--><p class="indent" > Singular with no case-change:
-</p><!--l. 7103--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7229--><p class="indent" > Singular with no case-change:
+</p><!--l. 7230--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34082"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsubsequentfmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14351,9 +14249,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7105--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7107--><p class="indent" > Singular with first letter upper case:
-</p><!--l. 7108--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7232--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7234--><p class="indent" > Singular with first letter upper case:
+</p><!--l. 7235--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34083"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrsubsequentfmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14360,9 +14258,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7110--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7112--><p class="indent" > Plural with no case-change:
-</p><!--l. 7113--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7237--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7239--><p class="indent" > Plural with no case-change:
+</p><!--l. 7240--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34084"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsubsequentplfmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14369,12 +14267,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7115--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7242--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7117--><p class="indent" > Plural with first letter upper case:
-</p><!--l. 7118--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7244--><p class="indent" > Plural with first letter upper case:
+</p><!--l. 7245--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34085"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrsubsequentplfmt{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14381,8 +14279,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7120--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7122--><p class="indent" > If you want to provide support for <span
+</p><!--l. 7247--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7249--><p class="indent" > If you want to provide support for <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp</span><a
id="dx1-34086"></a> use the following
<span
@@ -14390,7 +14288,7 @@
class="cmitt-10">xxx</span>⟩ commands (<a
href="#sec:accsupp"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">12.2</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">13.2</span> </a><a
href="#sec:accsupp">Accessibility Support<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:accsupp --></a>) within the
definitions of <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfullformat </span>etc instead of the analogous <span
@@ -14402,7 +14300,7 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentry</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">xxx</span>⟩ command.)
-</p><!--l. 7130--><p class="indent" > For example, the <a
+</p><!--l. 7257--><p class="indent" > For example, the <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-long</span></a><a
id="dx1-34088"></a> style has the following in ⟨<span
@@ -14440,15 +14338,15 @@
    \glsxtrparen{\glsfirstlongfont{\glsaccesslongpl{##1}}}%
  }%
</pre>
-<!--l. 7160--><p class="nopar" > Since the inline full commands aren’t redefined, they default to the same as the
+<!--l. 7287--><p class="nopar" > Since the inline full commands aren’t redefined, they default to the same as the
display versions.
-</p><!--l. 7164--><p class="indent" > If you want to base a style on an existing style, you can use
-</p><!--l. 7165--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7291--><p class="indent" > If you want to base a style on an existing style, you can use
+</p><!--l. 7292--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-34089"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7167--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7294--><p class="noindent" >
within ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">fmts</span>⟩, where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩ is the name of the existing style. For example, the
@@ -14464,8 +14362,8 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-169">
  \GlsXtrUseAbbrStyleFmts{long-short}%
</pre>
-<!--l. 7173--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 7175--><p class="indent" > Here’s an example of an abbreviation style that’s based on <a
+<!--l. 7300--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 7302--><p class="indent" > Here’s an example of an abbreviation style that’s based on <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-short"><span
class="cmss-10">long-short</span></a><a
id="dx1-34091"></a> that displays
@@ -14486,7 +14384,7 @@
  \renewcommand*{\glsabbrvfont}[1]{\textsf{##1}}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 7188--><p class="nopar" > Note that this wouldn’t work if it was instead based on one of the modified versions
+<!--l. 7315--><p class="nopar" > Note that this wouldn’t work if it was instead based on one of the modified versions
such as <a
href="#abbrstyle.short-sc-long"><span
class="cmss-10">short-sc-long</span></a><a
@@ -14499,7 +14397,7 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsabbrvfont </span>etc which makes them easier to adapt than the modified
styles.
-</p><!--l. 7196--><p class="indent" > For further details, see the “Abbreviations” section in the documented code
+</p><!--l. 7323--><p class="indent" > For further details, see the “Abbreviations” section in the documented code
(<span
class="cmtt-10">glossaries-extra-code.pdf</span>).
@@ -14506,36 +14404,32 @@
</p>
-<!--l. 7199--><p class="indent" > </div>
-</p><!--l. 7199--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 7326--><p class="indent" > </div>
+</p><!--l. 7326--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">5. <a
id="sec:headtitle"></a>Entries in Sectioning Titles, Headers, Captions and Contents</h2>
-</p><!--l. 7202--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 7329--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>user manual cautions against using commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>in chapter
or section titles. The principle problems are: </p>
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 7206--><p class="noindent" >if you have a table of contents, the <a
+ <li class="itemize">if you have a table of contents, the <a
id="dx1-35001"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use flag</a> will be unset in the contents
rather than later in the document;
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 7208--><p class="noindent" >if you have the location lists displayed in the glossary, unwanted locations
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">if you have the location lists displayed in the glossary, unwanted locations
will be added to it corresponding to the table of contents (if present) and
every page that contains the entry in the page header (if the page style in
use adds the chapter or section title to the header);
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 7213--><p class="noindent" >if the page style in use adds the chapter or section title to the header and
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">if the page style in use adds the chapter or section title to the header and
attempts to convert it to upper case, the entry label (in the argument
of <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>etc) will be converted to upper case and the entry won’t be
recognised;
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 7217--><p class="noindent" >if you use <span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">if you use <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
id="dx1-35002"></a>, commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>can’t be expanded to a simple
@@ -14543,19 +14437,18 @@
from <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
id="dx1-35003"></a>);
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 7220--><p class="noindent" >if you use <span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">if you use <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
id="dx1-35004"></a>, you will end up with nested hyperlinks in the table of
- contents.</p></li></ul>
-<!--l. 7223--><p class="noindent" >Similar problems can also occur with captions (except for the page header and bookmark
+ contents.</li></ul>
+<!--l. 7350--><p class="noindent" >Similar problems can also occur with captions (except for the page header and bookmark
issues).
</p>
-<!--l. 7226--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 7353--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">5.1 </span> <a
- id="simplisticapproach"></a>Simplistic Approach</h3>
-<!--l. 7228--><p class="noindent" >To get around all these problems, the <span
+ id="sec:simplisticapproach"></a>Simplistic Approach</h3>
+<!--l. 7356--><p class="noindent" >To get around all these problems, the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>user manual recommends
using the expandable non-hyperlink commands, such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentrytext</span><a
@@ -14567,9 +14460,6 @@
the entry through commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstext </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort</span>. This means
-
-
-
that if, for example, you are using one of the abbreviation styles that uses
<span
class="cmtt-10">\textsc</span><a
@@ -14589,7 +14479,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-171">
\chapter{A Chapter about \glsabbrvfont{\glsentryshort{html}}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 7241--><p class="nopar" > Or, if you are using <span
+<!--l. 7369--><p class="nopar" > Or, if you are using <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
id="dx1-36004"></a>:
@@ -14600,8 +14490,8 @@
\chapter{A Chapter about
\texorpdfstring{\glsabbrvfont{\glsentryshort{html}}}{\glsentryshort{html}}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 7246--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 7248--><p class="indent" > Since this is a bit cumbersome, you might want to define a new command to do
+<!--l. 7374--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 7376--><p class="indent" > Since this is a bit cumbersome, you might want to define a new command to do
this for you. However, if you have mixed styles this won’t work as commands like
<span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>and <span
@@ -14615,7 +14505,7 @@
header using <span
class="cmtt-10">\MakeUppercase</span><a
id="dx1-36005"></a>.
-</p><!--l. 7259--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 7387--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>package tries to resolve this by modifying <span
class="cmtt-10">\markright</span><a
id="dx1-36006"></a> and
@@ -14624,16 +14514,16 @@
id="dx1-36007"></a> and <span
class="cmtt-10">\@starttoc</span>. If you don’t like this change, you can restore their
former definitions using
-</p><!--l. 7262--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7390--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-36008"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrRevertMarks </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7264--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7392--><p class="noindent" >
If you only want to restore <span
class="cmtt-10">\@starttoc </span>you can use:
-</p><!--l. 7266--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7394--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-36009"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrRevertTocMarks </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7268--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7396--><p class="noindent" >
If you restore the header or table of contents commands, you’ll have to use the
<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>manual’s recommendations of either simply using <span
@@ -14647,7 +14537,7 @@
<pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-173">
\chapter[A Chapter about \glsentryshort{html}]{A Chapter about \gls{html}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 7275--><p class="nopar" > Alternatively, you need to find a way to insert <span
+<!--l. 7403--><p class="nopar" > Alternatively, you need to find a way to insert <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmarkhook </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\@glsxtrinmark</span>
at the start of the header or table of contents either scoped or afterwards cancelled
@@ -14654,17 +14544,17 @@
with <span
class="cmtt-10">\@glsxtrnotinmark </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrrestoremarkhook</span>.
-</p><!--l. 7281--><p class="indent" > If you don’t revert the mark commands back with <span
+</p><!--l. 7409--><p class="indent" > If you don’t revert the mark commands back with <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrRevertMarks</span>, you can
use the commands described below in the argument of sectioning commands. You can
still use them even if the mark commands have been reverted, but only where they
don’t conflict with the page style.
-</p><!--l. 7287--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7415--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 7287--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 7415--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">5.2 </span> <a
- id="newcommandsdesignedforchaptersectionheadings"></a>New Commands Designed for Chapter/Section Headings</h3>
-<!--l. 7289--><p class="noindent" >The commands listed below are designed for use in chapter or section headings.
+ id="sec:headingcommands"></a>New Commands Designed for Chapter/Section Headings</h3>
+<!--l. 7418--><p class="noindent" >The commands listed below are designed for use in chapter or section headings.
There are still limitations, but they provide a better solution. They all use
<span
class="cmtt-10">\texorpdfstring</span><a
@@ -14679,7 +14569,7 @@
id="dx1-37003"></a> will be
needed as appropriate in that field. (Take care if the field has its value expanded
before being assigned.)
-</p><!--l. 7301--><p class="indent" > These commands essentially behave as though you have used <span
+</p><!--l. 7430--><p class="indent" > These commands essentially behave as though you have used <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort</span>,
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glstext </span>etc with the options <span
@@ -14693,7 +14583,7 @@
class="cmss-10">headuc</span></a><a
id="dx1-37006"></a> attribute to “true” for the
appropriate category.
-</p><!--l. 7309--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you use one of the <span
+</p><!--l. 7438--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you use one of the <span
class="cmtt-10">\textsc</span><a
id="dx1-37007"></a> styles, be aware that the default fonts don’t
provide bold small-caps or italic small-caps. This means that if the chapter
@@ -14711,9 +14601,9 @@
class="cmss-10">slantsc</span><a
id="dx1-37009"></a> package in this case.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 7320--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7322--><p class="indent" > Display the short form:
-</p><!--l. 7323--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7449--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7451--><p class="indent" > Display the short form:
+</p><!--l. 7452--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37010"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtshort{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14721,181 +14611,181 @@
-</p><!--l. 7325--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7327--><p class="indent" > Display the plural short form:
-</p><!--l. 7328--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7454--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7456--><p class="indent" > Display the plural short form:
+</p><!--l. 7457--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37011"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtshortpl{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7330--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7332--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case singular short form:
-</p><!--l. 7333--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7459--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7461--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case singular short form:
+</p><!--l. 7462--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37012"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtshort{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7335--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7464--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7338--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case plural short form:
-</p><!--l. 7339--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7467--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case plural short form:
+</p><!--l. 7468--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37013"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtshortpl{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7341--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7470--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7344--><p class="indent" > All caps singular short form:
-</p><!--l. 7345--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7473--><p class="indent" > All caps singular short form:
+</p><!--l. 7474--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37014"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmtshort{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7347--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7476--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7350--><p class="indent" > All caps plural short form:
-</p><!--l. 7351--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7479--><p class="indent" > All caps plural short form:
+</p><!--l. 7480--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37015"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtshortpl{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7353--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7482--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7356--><p class="indent" > Display the long form:
-</p><!--l. 7357--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7485--><p class="indent" > Display the long form:
+</p><!--l. 7486--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37016"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtlong{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7359--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7361--><p class="indent" > Display the plural long form:
-</p><!--l. 7362--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7488--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7490--><p class="indent" > Display the plural long form:
+</p><!--l. 7491--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37017"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtlongpl{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7364--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7366--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case singular long form:
-</p><!--l. 7367--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7493--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7495--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case singular long form:
+</p><!--l. 7496--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37018"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtlong{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7369--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7498--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7372--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case plural long form:
-</p><!--l. 7373--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7501--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case plural long form:
+</p><!--l. 7502--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37019"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtlongpl{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7375--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7504--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7378--><p class="indent" > All caps singular long form:
-</p><!--l. 7379--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7507--><p class="indent" > All caps singular long form:
+</p><!--l. 7508--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37020"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmtlong{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7381--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7510--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7384--><p class="indent" > All caps plural long form:
-</p><!--l. 7385--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7513--><p class="indent" > All caps plural long form:
+</p><!--l. 7514--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37021"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmtlongpl{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7387--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7516--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7390--><p class="indent" > There are similar commands for the full form, but note that these use the <span
+</p><!--l. 7519--><p class="indent" > There are similar commands for the full form, but note that these use the <span
class="cmti-10">inline</span>
full form, which may be different from the full form used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>. The PDF version
has to be a simple fully expandable command, so one of two commands that are
unrelated to the style is used instead:
-</p><!--l. 7395--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7524--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37022"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspdffmtfull{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7397--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7526--><p class="noindent" >
for the singular form or:
-</p><!--l. 7399--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7528--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37023"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspdffmtfullpl{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7401--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7530--><p class="noindent" >
for the full form. These simply do the long form followed by the short form in
parentheses.
-</p><!--l. 7405--><p class="indent" > Display the full form:
-</p><!--l. 7406--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7534--><p class="indent" > Display the full form:
+</p><!--l. 7535--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37024"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtfull{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7408--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7410--><p class="indent" > Display the plural full form:
-</p><!--l. 7411--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7537--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7539--><p class="indent" > Display the plural full form:
+</p><!--l. 7540--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37025"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtfullpl{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7413--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7415--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case singular full form:
-</p><!--l. 7416--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7542--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7544--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case singular full form:
+</p><!--l. 7545--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37026"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtfull{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7418--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7547--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7421--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case plural full form:
-</p><!--l. 7422--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7550--><p class="indent" > First letter upper case plural full form:
+</p><!--l. 7551--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37027"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtfullpl{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7424--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7553--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7427--><p class="indent" > All caps singular full form:
-</p><!--l. 7428--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7556--><p class="indent" > All caps singular full form:
+</p><!--l. 7557--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37028"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmtfull{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7430--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7559--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7433--><p class="indent" > All caps plural full form:
-</p><!--l. 7434--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7562--><p class="indent" > All caps plural full form:
+</p><!--l. 7563--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37029"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmtfullpl{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7436--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7565--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7439--><p class="indent" > There are also equivalent commands for the value of the <span
+</p><!--l. 7568--><p class="indent" > There are also equivalent commands for the value of the <span
class="cmss-10">text</span><a
id="dx1-37030"></a> field:
-</p><!--l. 7441--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7570--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37031"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmttext{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7443--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7445--><p class="indent" > First letter converted to upper case:
-</p><!--l. 7446--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7572--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7574--><p class="indent" > First letter converted to upper case:
+</p><!--l. 7575--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37032"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmttext{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7448--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7577--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7451--><p class="indent" > All caps:
-</p><!--l. 7452--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7580--><p class="indent" > All caps:
+</p><!--l. 7581--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37033"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmttext{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
@@ -14903,100 +14793,100 @@
-</p><!--l. 7454--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7583--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7457--><p class="indent" > The plural equivalents:
-</p><!--l. 7458--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7586--><p class="indent" > The plural equivalents:
+</p><!--l. 7587--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37034"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtplural{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7460--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7589--><p class="noindent" >
First letter upper case:
-</p><!--l. 7462--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7591--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37035"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtplural{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7464--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7593--><p class="noindent" >
and all caps:
-</p><!--l. 7466--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7595--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37036"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmtplural{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7468--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7470--><p class="indent" > Likewise for the value of the <span
+</p><!--l. 7597--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7599--><p class="indent" > Likewise for the value of the <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
id="dx1-37037"></a> field:
-</p><!--l. 7472--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7601--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37038"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtname{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7474--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7476--><p class="indent" > First letter converted to upper case:
-</p><!--l. 7477--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7603--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7605--><p class="indent" > First letter converted to upper case:
+</p><!--l. 7606--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37039"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtname{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7479--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7608--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7482--><p class="indent" > All caps:
-</p><!--l. 7483--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7611--><p class="indent" > All caps:
+</p><!--l. 7612--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37040"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmtname{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7485--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7614--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7488--><p class="indent" > Similarly for the value of the <span
+</p><!--l. 7617--><p class="indent" > Similarly for the value of the <span
class="cmss-10">first</span><a
id="dx1-37041"></a> field:
-</p><!--l. 7490--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7619--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37042"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtfirst{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7492--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 7494--><p class="indent" > First letter converted to upper case:
-</p><!--l. 7495--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7621--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7623--><p class="indent" > First letter converted to upper case:
+</p><!--l. 7624--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37043"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtfirst{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7497--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7626--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7500--><p class="indent" > All caps:
-</p><!--l. 7501--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7629--><p class="indent" > All caps:
+</p><!--l. 7630--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37044"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmtfirst{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7503--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7632--><p class="noindent" >
(No case-change applied to PDF bookmarks.)
-</p><!--l. 7506--><p class="indent" > The plural equivalents:
-</p><!--l. 7507--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7635--><p class="indent" > The plural equivalents:
+</p><!--l. 7636--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37045"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtfirstpl{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7509--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7638--><p class="noindent" >
First letter upper case:
-</p><!--l. 7511--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7640--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37046"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfmtfirstpl{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7513--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7642--><p class="noindent" >
and all caps:
-</p><!--l. 7515--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+</p><!--l. 7644--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
id="dx1-37047"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfmtfirstpl{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7517--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7646--><p class="noindent" >
@@ -15004,83 +14894,4143 @@
</p>
-<!--l. 7519--><p class="indent" > </div>
-</p><!--l. 7519--><p class="noindent" ><a
+<!--l. 7648--><p class="indent" > </div>
+</p><!--l. 7648--><p class="noindent" ><a
href="#top">Top</a><div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">6. <a
+ id="sec:multientries"></a>Multi (or Compound) Entries</h2>
+</p><!--l. 7651--><p class="indent" > Nested entries (where the entry definition references other entries) are discussed
+in <a
+href="#sec:nested"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">2.8</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:nested">Nested Links<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:nested --></a>. This chapter deals with occasions where a term or
+phrase may consist of multiple sub-terms that are independently defined. (Examples
+in <a
+href="#sec:exskipfirstsuffix"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.1.5</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:exskipfirstsuffix">Example: Skipping Elements (Fragment Element)<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:exskipfirstsuffix --></a> and
+<a
+href="#sec:exskippostlink"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.1.6</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:exskippostlink">Example: Skipping Elements (Prefix and Post-Link Hooks)<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:exskippostlink --></a>
+provide workarounds for nested entries.)
+</p><!--l. 7659--><p class="indent" > For example, the names of bacteria, such as <span
+class="cmti-10">Clostridium botulinum </span>and
+<span
+class="cmti-10">Clostridium perfringens</span>, are made up of the genus (for example, <span
+class="cmti-10">Clostridium</span>) and
+the species (for example, <span
+class="cmti-10">botulinum </span>or <span
+class="cmti-10">perfringens</span>). The genus is often abbreviated
+after <a
+ id="dx1-38001"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>. For example, <span
+class="cmti-10">C. botulinum</span>. However, if the name is defined as a
+single term consisting of both the genus and species then it’s not possible
+to apply the abbreviation when a different species with the same genus is
+used.
+</p><!--l. 7669--><p class="indent" > Consider the following document:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-174">
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
+\setabbreviationstyle{long-only-short-only}
+\newabbreviation{cbot}{C. botulinum}{Clostridium botulinum}
+\newabbreviation{cperf}{C. perfringens}{Clostridium perfringens}
+\begin{document}
+\gls{cbot}, \gls{cbot}, \gls{cperf}.
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 7679--><p class="nopar" > The result is: <spacer type=vertical size=10><span class="obeylines-h">
+ <br />Clostridium botulinum, C. botulinum, Clostridium perfringens.
+ <br /><spacer type=vertical size=10></span>
+However, it should more typically be: <spacer type=vertical size=10><span class="obeylines-h">
+ <br />Clostridium botulinum, C. botulinum, C. perfringens.
+ <br /><spacer type=vertical size=10></span>
+In this case, the genus should actually be a separate definition:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-175">
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
+\setabbreviationstyle{long-only-short-only}
+\newabbreviation{clostridium}{C.}{Clostridium}
+\newglossaryentry{botulinum}{name={botulinum},description={}}
+\newglossaryentry{perfringens}{name=perfringens,description={}}
+\begin{document}
+\gls{clostridium} \gls{botulinum},
+\gls{clostridium} \gls{botulinum},
+\gls{clostridium} \gls{perfringens}.
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 7701--><p class="nopar" > This is quite awkward to write. This chapter describes how to provide a shortcut
+for this kind of construct. Each term should be defined as normal (as in
+the above example), and a “multi-entry” label is then defined with the list
+of labels of the entries that need to be referenced. This is done with the
+command:
+</p><!--l. 7707--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-38002"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">main label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label list</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 7710--><p class="noindent" >
+where ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">multi-label</span>⟩ is the new label and ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">label list</span>⟩ is the list of labels (corresponding to
+entries that have already been defined).
+</p><!--l. 7715--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">main label</span>⟩ may be omitted, in which case the main label will be assumed to
+be the final element in ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">label list</span>⟩. If ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">main label</span>⟩ is present, it must also be listed in ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">label</span>
+<span
+class="cmti-10">list</span>⟩. This is described in more detail in <a
+href="#sec:mglsmain"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.2</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglsmain">Main and Other
+Elements<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglsmain --></a>.
+</p><!--l. 7721--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">options</span>⟩ are a comma-separated list of options to override the current settings
+and are described in <a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptions"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.9</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptions">Multi-Entry Settings<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:multiglsoptions --></a>.
+</p><!--l. 7724--><p class="indent" > The earlier example can now be modified to include the following:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-176">
+\multiglossaryentry{cbot}{clostridium,botulinum}
+\multiglossaryentry{cperf}{clostridium,perfringens}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 7728--><p class="nopar" > These commands must come after the definitions of <span
+class="cmtt-10">clostridium</span>, <span
+class="cmtt-10">botulinum </span>and
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">perfringens</span>.
+</p><!--l. 7732--><p class="indent" > Once defined, a multi-entry set can be referenced using commands like:
+</p><!--l. 7733--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-38003"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 7735--><p class="noindent" >
+This command essentially does <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span>for each item in the ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">label list</span>⟩ (with
+separators, see <a
+href="#sec:mglssep"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.4</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglssep">Separators<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglssep --></a>). If the final optional argument ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩ is
+provided, it will be applied to the final (non-skipped) element in the list. So the
+document body in the above example, can be rewritten as:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-177">
+\mgls{cbot}, \mgls{cbot}, \mgls{cperf}.
+</pre>
+<!--l. 7744--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 7746--><p class="indent" > There are some variants of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls </span>listed in <a
+href="#sec:mglslike"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.11</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglslike">Variants of mgls<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglslike --></a>. The
+available ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">options</span>⟩ are listed in <a
+href="#sec:mglsopts"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.10</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglsopts">mgls Options<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglsopts --></a>. They are applied after
+the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry </span>options and will override settings for the individual
+entries.
+</p><!--l. 7751--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> You can’t use ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">multi-label</span>⟩ in commands like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>as this label represents a set of
+entry labels not a single entry. </div>
+</p><!--l. 7754--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7756--><p class="indent" > The <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry </span>command will generate an error if the label has
+already been defined as a multi-entry. To do nothing if a multi-entry already exists,
+use:
+</p><!--l. 7759--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-38004"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\providemultiglossaryentry[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">main label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>
+<span
+class="cmitt-10">list</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 7762--><p class="noindent" >
+Notes and associated commands applying to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry </span>also apply to
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\providemultiglossaryentry </span>unless otherwise stated.
+</p><!--l. 7767--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry </span>may be placed anywhere after the ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">label list</span>⟩ entries have
+been defined. A multi-entry label can’t be referenced (with commands like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>)
+before it has been defined. </div>
+</p><!--l. 7771--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7773--><p class="indent" > There is limited support for <a
+href="#styopt.docdef"><span
+class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
+class="cmss-10">=true</span><a
+ id="dx1-38005"></a>. The multi-entry definition can be picked
+up from the <span
+class="cmtt-10">aux</span><a
+ id="dx1-38006"></a> file on the next run to allow cross-references in any glossaries that
+occur at the start of the document. Any changes made with commands like
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsSetMain </span>won’t be carried over to the next run.
+</p><!--l. 7779--><p class="indent" > By default <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry </span>will be localised to the current scope. If you
+want to globally define a multi-entry you need to first switch on global definitions
+with:
+</p><!--l. 7782--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-38007"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentryglobaltrue </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 7784--><p class="noindent" >
+To switch back to local definitions use:
+</p><!--l. 7786--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-38008"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentryglobalfalse </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 7788--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7790--><p class="indent" > If you want to change the multi-entry options (locally) you can use:
+</p><!--l. 7791--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-38009"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsSetOptions{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">new-options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 7793--><p class="noindent" >
+This removes the original options. If you want to (locally) append to the existing
+options, use:
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 7796--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-38010"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsAddOptions{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">new-options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 7798--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 7800--><p class="indent" > Note that <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry </span>doesn’t make any adjustments to the
+component entries. You will need to use the <span
+class="cmss-10">parent</span><a
+ id="dx1-38011"></a> key when you define the entries
+if you want a hierarchical structure in your glossary. (See the example in
+<a
+href="#sec:mglsexhier"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.1.1</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglsexhier">Example: Hierarchical<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglsexhier --></a>.)
+</p><!--l. 7805--><p class="indent" > If you don’t want the other elements in the glossary, you can suppress the
+indexing with <span
+class="cmss-10">indexothers=false </span>(<a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptionsindexing"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.9.1</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptionsindexing">Indexing<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:multiglsoptionsindexing --></a>) or put
+them in an ignored glossary. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-178">
+\newignoredglossary{common}
+\newabbreviation[type=common]{clostridium}{C.}{Clostridium}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 7812--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 7814--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">multi-label</span>⟩ can’t be used in commands like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>since the label refers to a set
+of entry labels not to an individual entry. Similarly, an individual entry label can’t be
+used in commands like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>. It is possible (although potentially confusing) to use
+the same label for a multi-entry as for an individual entry (see the example in
+<a
+href="#sec:exskippostlink"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.1.6</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:exskippostlink">Example: Skipping Elements (Prefix and Post-Link Hooks)<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:exskippostlink --></a>).
+Context will determine which is meant, except in the case of the cross-referencing
+fields (<span
+class="cmss-10">see</span><a
+ id="dx1-38012"></a>, <span
+class="cmss-10">seealso</span><a
+ id="dx1-38013"></a> and <span
+class="cmss-10">alias</span><a
+ id="dx1-38014"></a>) where the cross-referenced label will first be tested if it’s
+a known multi-entry label.
+</p><!--l. 7826--><p class="indent" > If you don’t want to have to keep track of which labels refer to multi-entries and
+which refer to individual entries you can use:
+</p><!--l. 7828--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-38015"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrMglsOrGls{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">mgls cs</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">gls cs</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 7831--><p class="noindent" >
+where ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">mgls cs</span>⟩ is the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>-like command to use if ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ has been defined as a
+multi-entry and ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">gls cs</span>⟩ is the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>-like command to use otherwise. The ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">modifier</span>⟩ may
+be omitted, otherwise it is the modifier that may be used with <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls </span>or <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>(<span
+class="cmtt-10">*</span>, <span
+class="cmtt-10">+</span>
+or the character identified with <span
+class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrSetAltModifier</span><a
+ id="dx1-38016"></a>). The modifier
+and remaining options are passed to the relevant command (⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">mgls cs</span>⟩ or ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">gls</span>
+<span
+class="cmti-10">cs</span>⟩).
+</p><!--l. 7841--><p class="indent" > You may prefer to define your own shortcut commands for common combinations.
+For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-179">
+\newcommand{\ac}{\GlsXtrMglsOrGls{\mgls}{\gls}}
+\newcommand{\acpl}{\GlsXtrMglsOrGls{\mglsmainpl}{\glspl}}
+\newcommand{\Ac}{\GlsXtrMglsOrGls{\Mgls}{\Gls}}
+\newcommand{\Acpl}{\GlsXtrMglsOrGls{\Mglsmainpl}{\Glspl}}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 7848--><p class="nopar" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 7850--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.1 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglsexamples"></a>Examples</h3>
+<!--l. 7853--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 7853--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.1.1 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglsexhier"></a>Example: Hierarchical</h4>
+<!--l. 7856--><p class="noindent" >Bacteria names are represented by the genus (for example, Clostridium) followed by
+the species (for example, botulinum). This example has the genus as a parent of the
+species.
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-180">
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[stylemods=bookindex,style=bookindex]{glossaries-extra}
+\makeglossaries
+\newcommand{\latinname}[1]{\emph{#1}}
+\glssetcategoriesattributes
+ {genus,species}{textformat,glossnamefont}{latinname}
+\setabbreviationstyle[genus]{long-only-short-only-desc}
+\newabbreviation
+ [category=genus,description={}]
+ {clostridium}{C.}{Clostridium}
+\newglossaryentry{botulinum}{name=botulinum,category=species,
+  description={},parent=clostridium}
+\newglossaryentry{perfringens}{name=perfringens,category=species,
+  description={},parent=clostridium}
+\newglossaryentry{tetani}{name=tetani,category=species,
+  description={},parent=clostridium}
+\multiglossaryentry{cbot}{clostridium,botulinum}
+\multiglossaryentry{cperf}{clostridium,perfringens}
+\multiglossaryentry{ctet}{clostridium,tetani}
+\multiglossaryentrysetup{indexothers=false,hyper=allmain}
+\begin{document}
+First use:
+\mgls{cbot}, \mgls{cperf}, \mgls{ctet}.
+Next use:
+\mgls{cbot}, \mgls{cperf}, \mgls{ctet}.
+\printglossaries
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 7897--><p class="nopar" > This suppresses the indexing of the non-main elements (in this case, the genus).
+However the genus is included in the glossary (without a <a
+ id="dx1-40001"></a><a
+href="#glo:numberlist">number list</a>) because it’s the
+parent of the species (which are indexed).
+</p><!--l. 7903--><p class="indent" > The <span
+class="cmss-10">hyper=allmain </span>option makes the entire content of each <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls </span>a hyperlink to
+the main entry in the glossary. The resulting document text (before the glossary)
+is:
+
+
+
+ </p><blockquote class="quote">
+ <!--l. 7907--><p class="noindent" >First use: <span
+class="cmti-10">Clostridium botulinum</span>, <span
+class="cmti-10">C. perfringens</span>, <span
+class="cmti-10">C. tetani</span>.
+ </p><!--l. 7910--><p class="noindent" >Next use: <span
+class="cmti-10">C. botulinum</span>, <span
+class="cmti-10">C. perfringens</span>, <span
+class="cmti-10">C. tetani</span>.</p></blockquote>
+<!--l. 7914--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 7914--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.1.2 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglsexsuffix"></a>Example: Suffix</h4>
+<!--l. 7917--><p class="noindent" >This example has a minor modification to the previous one. In this case the
+multi-entries are defined with a suffix:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-181">
+\multiglossaryentry[firstsuffix=botulism]{cbot}{clostridium,botulinum}
+\multiglossaryentry[firstsuffix={gas gangrene}]{cperf}{clostridium,perfringens}
+\multiglossaryentry[firstsuffix=tetanus]{ctet}{clostridium,tetani}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 7923--><p class="nopar" > The rest of the document is as in <a
+href="#sec:mglsexhier"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.1.1</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglsexhier">Example: Hierarchical<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglsexhier --></a>. The
+document text is now:
+ </p><blockquote class="quote">
+ <!--l. 7927--><p class="noindent" >First use: <span
+class="cmti-10">Clostridium botulinum </span>(botulism), <span
+class="cmti-10">C. perfringens </span>(gas
+ gangrene), <span
+class="cmti-10">C. tetani </span>(tetanus).
+ </p><!--l. 7931--><p class="noindent" >Next use: <span
+class="cmti-10">C. botulinum</span>, <span
+class="cmti-10">C. perfringens</span>, <span
+class="cmti-10">C. tetani</span>.</p></blockquote>
+<!--l. 7935--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 7935--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.1.3 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglsexcatsuffix"></a>Example: Category Suffix</h4>
+<!--l. 7938--><p class="noindent" >This is an alternative to the previous example. Instead of storing the extra
+information in the <span
+class="cmss-10">firstsuffix </span>key, the information is stored in the <span
+class="cmss-10">user1</span><a
+ id="dx1-42001"></a> key of the last
+element (the species). A category suffix is used to look up the field and append
+it.
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-182">
+\newglossaryentry{botulinum}{name=botulinum,category=species,
+  user1={botulism},
+  description={},parent=clostridium}
+\newglossaryentry{perfringens}{name=perfringens,category=species,
+  user1={gas gangrene},
+  description={},parent=clostridium}
+\newglossaryentry{tetani}{name=tetani,category=species,
+  user1={tetanus},
+  description={},parent=clostridium}
+\mglsdefcategorysuffix{bacteria}{%
+ \mglsisfirstuse
+ {\glsxtrifhasfield{useri}{\mglslastelementlabel}{ (\glscurrentfieldvalue)}{}}%
+ {}%
+}
+\multiglossaryentry[category=bacteria]{cbot}{clostridium,botulinum}
+\multiglossaryentry[category=bacteria]{cperf}{clostridium,perfringens}
+\multiglossaryentry[category=bacteria]{ctet}{clostridium,tetani}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 7963--><p class="nopar" > The result is the same as the previous example.
+</p><!--l. 7966--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 7966--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.1.4 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglsexsep"></a>Example: Separators</h4>
+<!--l. 7969--><p class="noindent" >The first example (<a
+href="#sec:mglsexhier"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.1.1</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglsexhier">Example: Hierarchical<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglsexhier --></a>) can be modified so that
+the species are also abbreviations. In this case, the separators are modified to
+suppress the space (<span
+class="cmtt-10">\relax</span>) if both the genus and species are abbreviated, or to use
+a non-breaking space <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="cmtt-10">~</span></span></span> between the genus short form (shown on subsequent use) and
+the species long form (shown on first use). If the genus is showing the long form (first
+use) then a normal space is used.
+</p><!--l. 7977--><p class="indent" > Note that the separator attributes apply to the category of the element before the
+separator (not to the multi-entry category).
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-183">
+\glssetcategoryattribute{genus}{combinedfirstsepfirst}{\space}
+\glssetcategoryattribute{genus}{combinedfirstsep}{\space}
+\glssetcategoryattribute{genus}{combinedsepfirst}{~}
+\glssetcategoryattribute{genus}{combinedsep}{\relax}
+\setabbreviationstyle[species]{long-only-short-only-desc}
+\newabbreviation[category=species,
+  description={},parent=clostridium]{botulinum}{bot.}{botulinum}
+\newabbreviation[category=species,
+  description={},parent=clostridium]{perfringens}{per.}{perfringens}
+\newabbreviation[,category=species,
+  description={},parent=clostridium]{tetani}{tet.}{tetani}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 7993--><p class="nopar" > This will cause a double dot at the end of the second sentence, which can be
+suppressed using the <a
+href="#catattr.discardperiod"><span
+class="cmss-10">discardperiod</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-43001"></a> and <a
+href="#catattr.retainfirstuseperiod"><span
+class="cmss-10">retainfirstuseperiod</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-43002"></a> attributes.
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-184">
+\glssetcategoriesattributes{species}{discardperiod,retainfirstuseperiod}{true}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 7999--><p class="nopar" > This works because the final element’s post-link hook is transferred to the
+multi-entry post-link hook, which can detect the sentence terminating period. If the
+post-link hook settings are changed, for example, to <span
+class="cmss-10">postlinks=all,mpostlink=false</span>
+then the feature won’t work as the final element’s post-link hook can’t detect the
+period (because <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>is embedded too deeply inside the internal workings of
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>).
+</p><!--l. 8008--><p class="indent" > The result is:
+ </p><blockquote class="quote">
+ <!--l. 8010--><p class="noindent" >First use: Clostridium botulinum, C. perfringens, C. tetani.
+ </p><!--l. 8012--><p class="noindent" >Next use: C.bot., C.per., C.tet.</p></blockquote>
+<!--l. 8015--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 8015--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.1.5 </span> <a
+ id="sec:exskipfirstsuffix"></a>Example: Skipping Elements (Fragment Element)</h4>
+<!--l. 8018--><p class="noindent" >This example is an alternative way of dealing with nested links (see <a
+href="#sec:nested"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">2.8</span>
+</a><a
+href="#sec:nested">Nested Links<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:nested --></a>).
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-185">
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[stylemods,style=long]{glossaries-extra}
+\makeglossaries
+\setabbreviationstyle{long-short-sc}
+\newabbreviation{ssi}{ssi}{server-side includes}
+\newabbreviation{html}{html}{hypertext markup language}
+\setabbreviationstyle[combinedabbrv]{long-only-short-sc-only}
+\newabbreviation
+ [category=combinedabbrv,
+  description={\glsxtrshort{ssi} enabled \glsxtrshort{html}}]
+ {shtml-frag}{shtml}{enabled}
+\glssetcategoryattribute{combinedabbrv}{multioptions}
+ {usedskipothers,firstsuffix={\glsxtrshort{\mglslastmainlabel}}}
+\multiglossaryentry
+ [category={combinedabbrv}]
+ {shtml}[shtml-frag]{ssi,shtml-frag,html}
+\begin{document}
+Individual elements first use: \gls{ssi} and \gls{html}.
+Individual elements next use: \gls{ssi} and \gls{html}.
+Multi-entry first use: \mgls{shtml}.
+Multi-entry next use: \mgls{shtml}.
+Resetting all\glsresetall\mglsreset{shtml}:
+Multi-entry first use: \mgls{shtml}.
+Multi-entry next use: \mgls{shtml}.
+Individual elements: \gls{ssi} and \gls{html}.
+\printglossaries
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8063--><p class="nopar" > This uses the <a
+href="#catattr.multioptions"><span
+class="cmss-10">multioptions</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-44001"></a> attribute to skip “other” elements on subsequent use. The
+problematic abbreviation (SHTML) is defined as a fragment that simply expands to
+
+
+
+“enabled” on first use. Note that the description has to be supplied for the
+glossary.
+</p><!--l. 8069--><p class="indent" > The above produces (underlining added to mark the hyperlinks):
+ </p><blockquote class="quote">
+ <!--l. 8071--><p class="noindent" >Individual elements first use: server-side includes (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span>) and hypertext
+ markup language (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).
+ </p><!--l. 8074--><p class="noindent" >Individual elements next use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span> and <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.
+ </p><!--l. 8077--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry first use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span> enabled <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span> (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).
+ </p><!--l. 8080--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry next use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.
+ </p><!--l. 8082--><p class="noindent" >Resetting all:
+ </p><!--l. 8084--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry first use: server-side includes (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span>) enabled hypertext
+ markup language (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>) (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).
+ </p><!--l. 8088--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry next use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.
+ </p><!--l. 8090--><p class="noindent" >Individual elements: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span> and <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.</p></blockquote>
+<!--l. 8092--><p class="noindent" >The key difference here from the example using <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsps </span>at the end of <a
+href="#sec:nested"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">2.8</span>
+</a><a
+href="#sec:nested">Nested Links<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:nested --></a> is that the individual elements hyperlink to their respective entries in
+the glossary on first use of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>.
+</p><!--l. 8096--><p class="indent" > The problem is that with the <a
+href="#styopt.colorlinks"><span
+class="cmss-10">colorlinks</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-44002"></a> package option, it’s not obvious where the
+hyperlinks start and end. The suffix (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>) will hyperlink to the “shtml” entry in
+the glossary, so the “enabled” hyperlink is redundant. The simplest fix for this is to
+add <span
+class="cmss-10">hyper=notmainfirst </span>to the option list, which will prevent “enabled” from being a
+hyperlink.
+</p><!--l. 8103--><p class="indent" > Another problem occurs where <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls </span>is used before the individual elements
+are used, which leads to their full expansion with a confusing amount of
+parentheses. A simple solution is to use the option <span
+class="cmss-10">mglsopts=unsetothers</span>,
+which will unset the other (not-main) elements first. This can be localised
+with <span
+class="cmss-10">presetlocal </span>but <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>will then unset the <a
+ id="dx1-44003"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use flag</a> globally, which
+means that the other elements won’t show the full form when they are first
+used on their on after <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>. This can be switched to a local unset with
+<span
+class="cmss-10">others=local</span>.
+</p><!--l. 8113--><p class="indent" > The complete set of options are now:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-186">
+\glssetcategoryattribute{combinedabbrv}{multioptions}
+ {%
+  hyper=notmainfirst,
+  mglsopts={presetlocal,unsetothers,others={local}},
+  usedskipothers,
+  firstsuffix={\glsxtrshort{\mglslastmainlabel}}
+ }
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8122--><p class="nopar" > This now produces (underlining added to mark the hyperlinks):
+ </p><blockquote class="quote">
+ <!--l. 8125--><p class="noindent" >Individual elements first use: server-side includes (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span>) and hypertext
+ markup language (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).
+ </p><!--l. 8128--><p class="noindent" >Individual elements next use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span> and <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.
+ </p><!--l. 8131--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry first use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span> enabled <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span> (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).
+ </p><!--l. 8134--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry next use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.
+ </p><!--l. 8136--><p class="noindent" >Resetting all:
+ </p><!--l. 8138--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry first use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span> enabled <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span> (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).
+ </p><!--l. 8142--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry next use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.
+ </p><!--l. 8144--><p class="noindent" >Individual elements: server-side includes (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span>) and hypertext markup
+ language (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).</p></blockquote>
+<!--l. 8147--><p class="noindent" >This method still has two main drawbacks: the description must be added manually and
+the long form can’t be accessed with <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlong</span>. The next example provides an
+alternative approach.
+</p><!--l. 8151--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 8151--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.1.6 </span> <a
+ id="sec:exskippostlink"></a>Example: Skipping Elements (Prefix and Post-Link Hooks)</h4>
+<!--l. 8154--><p class="noindent" >This is a modified version of the previous example. In this case, the main element
+isn’t a fragment and also happens to have the same label as the multi-entry set.
+(<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls{shtml}</span></span></span> references the multi-entry label and <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls{shtml}</span></span></span> references the
+individual entry.)
+</p><!--l. 8160--><p class="indent" > In this case, the nested parts are marked up with custom commands:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-187">
+\newrobustcmd{\combinedpre}[1]{\glsps{#1}}
+\newrobustcmd{\combinedpost}[1]{\glsps{#1}}
+\newabbreviation{shtml}{shtml}
+{{}\combinedpre{ssi} enabled \combinedpost{html}}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8167--><p class="nopar" > This means that it’s no longer necessary to manually insert the description and the
+long form can be accessed as usual with <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort</span><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="cmtt-10">{shtml}</span></span></span>. Note that it is
+necessary to define the custom commands robustly otherwise they will need to be
+protected against premature expansion:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-188">
+\newcommand{\combinedpre}[1]{\glsps{#1}}
+\newcommand{\combinedpost}[1]{\glsps{#1}}
+\newabbreviation{shtml}{shtml}
+{{}\protect\combinedpre{ssi} enabled \protect\combinedpost{html}}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8179--><p class="nopar" > In both cases, an initial empty group is added to guard against any first letter
+uppercase commands, such as <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrlong</span>.
+</p><!--l. 8183--><p class="indent" > The abbreviations all use the <a
+href="#abbrstyle.long-postshort-sc-user"><span
+class="cmss-10">long-postshort-sc-user</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-45001"></a> style, which places the short
+form in the post-link hook on <a
+ id="dx1-45002"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>. The <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>post-link hook for the main element
+can be transferred to the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls </span>post-link using:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-189">
+mpostlinkelement=main
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8189--><p class="nopar" > All elements have their individual post-link hooks suppressed by default. As in
+the previous example, the other elements can be skipped on subsequent
+use:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-190">
+usedskipothers
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8195--><p class="nopar" > Within <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>, the nested content needs to be suppressed, which can be done by
+redefining the custom commands. This can be done in the multi-entry prefix. Since
+the entire content of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls </span>(except for the final multi-entry post-link hook) occurs
+inside a group, this redefinition will be localised.
+</p><!--l. 8202--><p class="indent" > The complete document is as follows:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-191">
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
+\usepackage[stylemods,style=long]{glossaries-extra}
+\makeglossaries
+\setabbreviationstyle{long-postshort-sc-user}
+\newabbreviation{ssi}{ssi}{server-side includes}
+\newabbreviation{html}{html}{hypertext markup language}
+\newrobustcmd{\combinedpre}[1]{\glsps{#1}}
+\newrobustcmd{\combinedpost}[1]{\glsps{#1}}
+\newabbreviation{shtml}{shtml}
+{{}\combinedpre{ssi} enabled \combinedpost{html}}
+\glssetcategoryattribute{combinedabbrv}{multioptions}
+ {%
+  mpostlinkelement=main,
+  usedskipothers
+ }
+\multiglossaryentry
+ [category={combinedabbrv}]
+ {shtml}[shtml]{ssi,shtml,html}
+\mglsdefcategoryprefix{combinedabbrv}{%
+ \renewcommand{\combinedpre}[1]{\ignorespaces}%
+ \renewcommand{\combinedpost}[1]{\unskip}%
+}
+\begin{document}
+Individual elements first use: \gls{ssi} and \gls{html}.
+Individual elements next use: \gls{ssi} and \gls{html}.
+Multi-entry first use: \mgls{shtml}.
+Multi-entry next use: \mgls{shtml}.
+Individual entry first use: \gls{shtml}.
+Resetting all\glsresetall\mglsresetall:
+
+
+
+Multi-entry first use: \mgls{shtml}.
+Multi-entry next use: \mgls{shtml}.
+Individual elements: \gls{ssi} and \gls{html}.
+Resetting all\glsresetall\mglsresetall:
+Individual entry first use: \gls{shtml}.
+Multi-entry first use: \mgls{shtml}. (Wrong!)
+\printglossaries
+\end{document}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8264--><p class="nopar" > This now produces (underlining added to mark the hyperlinks):
+ </p><blockquote class="quote">
+ <!--l. 8267--><p class="noindent" >Individual elements first use: server-side includes (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span>) and hypertext
+ markup language (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).
+ </p><!--l. 8270--><p class="noindent" >Individual elements next use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span> and <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.
+ </p><!--l. 8273--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry first use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span> enabled <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span> (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).
+ </p><!--l. 8276--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry next use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.
+ </p><!--l. 8278--><p class="noindent" >Individual entry first use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.
+ </p><!--l. 8280--><p class="noindent" >Resetting all:
+ </p><!--l. 8282--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry first use: server-side includes enabled hypertext markup
+ language (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).
+ </p><!--l. 8285--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry next use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.
+ </p><!--l. 8287--><p class="noindent" >Individual elements: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span> and <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.
+ </p><!--l. 8289--><p class="noindent" >Resetting all:
+ </p><!--l. 8291--><p class="noindent" >Individual entry first use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span> enabled <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span> (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).
+ </p><!--l. 8294--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry first use: server-side includes <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span> hypertext markup
+ language. (Wrong!)</p></blockquote>
+<!--l. 8297--><p class="noindent" >Note the last two paragraphs, which highlights what happens if <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls{shtml}</span></span></span> is used
+before <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls{shtml}</span></span></span> when neither of the other elements (<span
+class="cmtt-10">ssi </span>and <span
+class="cmtt-10">html</span>) have been
+used. The final instance of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls </span>has produced the wrong result. This is because it’s
+the first use of the multi-entry <span
+class="cmtt-10">shtml </span>but not the first use of the individual entry
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">shtml</span>.
+</p><!--l. 8304--><p class="indent" > One way around this is to modify the prefix to ensure that the main element’s
+<a
+ id="dx1-45003"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use flag</a> matches the multi-entry’s first use flag:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-192">
+\mglsdefcategoryprefix{combinedabbrv}{%
+ \renewcommand{\combinedpre}[1]{\ignorespaces}%
+ \renewcommand{\combinedpost}[1]{\unskip}%
+ \mglsisfirstuse
+ {\glslocalreset{\mglscurrentmainlabel}}%
+ {\glslocalunset{\mglscurrentmainlabel}}%
+}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8315--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 8317--><p class="indent" > The <a
+href="#styopt.showtargets"><span
+class="cmss-10">showtargets</span></a><span
+class="cmss-10">=annoteleft</span><a
+ id="dx1-45004"></a> option can be used to mark up the links
+with the targets. For example, the first instance of <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls{shtml}</span></span></span> will show
+as:
+ </p><blockquote class="quote">
+ <!--l. 8324--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry first use: <span
+class="cmtt-8">[glo:ssi]</span><span
+class="cmmi-5">⊳</span><span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span><span
+class="cmmi-5">⊲ </span><span
+class="cmtt-8">[glo:shtml]</span><span
+class="cmmi-5">⊳</span>enabled<span
+class="cmmi-5">⊲</span>
+ <span
+class="cmtt-8">[glo:html]</span><span
+class="cmmi-5">⊳</span><span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span><span
+class="cmmi-5">⊲ </span>(<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).</p></blockquote>
+<!--l. 8328--><p class="noindent" >Each entry has an individual hyperlink to its own glossary item, which may be
+confusing. This can be made clearer by suppressing the main element link on first use
+with:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-193">
+hyper=notmainfirst
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8333--><p class="nopar" > (as in the previous example), and adjusting the abbreviation style so that the
+parenthetical content in the post-link hook has a hyperlink:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-194">
+\renewcommand*{\glsxtruserparen}[2]{%
+  \glsxtrfullsep{#2}%
+  \glsxtrparen
+   {\glshyperlink[#1]{#2}%
+    \ifglshasfield{\glsxtruserfield}{#2}{, \glscurrentfieldvalue}{}%
+   }%
+}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8345--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 8347--><p class="indent" > The remaining problem is how to deal with the possibility that <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls{shtml}</span></span></span>
+may come before the <a
+ id="dx1-45005"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> of the other elements. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-195">
+Multi-entry first use: \mgls{shtml}.
+Individual elements: \gls{ssi} and \gls{html}.
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8354--><p class="nopar" > This leads to:
+ </p><blockquote class="quote">
+ <!--l. 8357--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry first use: server-side includes enabled hypertext markup
+ language (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).
+ </p><!--l. 8360--><p class="noindent" >Individual elements: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span> </span>and <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.</p></blockquote>
+<!--l. 8362--><p class="noindent" >This means that the abbreviations <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span> </span>and <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span> </span>aren’t explained in the document text.
+One way around this is to only locally unset the other element <a
+ id="dx1-45006"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use
+flags</a>:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-196">
+\glssetcategoryattribute{combinedabbrv}{multioptions}
+ {%
+  hyper=notmainfirst,
+  mpostlinkelement=main,
+  usedskipothers,
+  mglsopts={others={local}}
+ }
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8373--><p class="nopar" > With the above setting, the following:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-197">
+\glsresetall\mglsresetall
+Multi-entry first use: \mgls{shtml}.
+Multi-entry next use: \mgls{shtml}.
+Individual elements: \gls{ssi} and \gls{html}.
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8383--><p class="nopar" > will now produce:
+ </p><blockquote class="quote">
+ <!--l. 8386--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry first use: server-side includes enabled hypertext markup
+ language (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).
+ </p><!--l. 8389--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry next use: <span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>.
+ </p><!--l. 8391--><p class="noindent" >Individual elements: server-side includes (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">s</span><span
+class="small-caps">i</span></span>) and hypertext markup
+ language (<span
+class="cmcsc-10"><span
+class="small-caps">h</span><span
+class="small-caps">t</span><span
+class="small-caps">m</span><span
+class="small-caps">l</span></span>).</p></blockquote>
+<!--l. 8395--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 8395--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.2 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglsmain"></a>Main and Other Elements</h3>
+<!--l. 8398--><p class="noindent" >The list of labels provided in the final argument of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry</span>
+consists of a main element and all the other elements. If the main element isn’t
+identified in the optional argument, it’s assumed to be the final element in the
+list.
+</p><!--l. 8403--><p class="indent" > The main element allows you to determine which target to use if you want the
+entire content of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls </span>to be a single hyperlink. You can also use the settings
+described in <a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptions"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.9</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptions">Multi-Entry Settings<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:multiglsoptions --></a> to only index the main
+element.
+</p><!--l. 8408--><p class="indent" > You can change the main element using:
+</p><!--l. 8409--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-46001"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsSetMain{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">new-main-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8411--><p class="noindent" >
+The new main label provided in the second argument must be in the list
+corresponding to ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">multi-label</span>⟩. This change is locally applied to the current scope.
+Note that if you are using <a
+ id="dx1-46002"></a><a
+href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
+class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>, this change in the document can’t be
+detected.
+</p><!--l. 8417--><p class="indent" > The main element can also be used to identify which element should be displayed
+in the plural with <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsmainpl</span>. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-198">
+\newglossaryentry{great}{name={great},description={}}
+\newglossaryentry{little}{name={little},description={}}
+\newglossaryentry{grebe}{name={grebe},description={}}
+\multiglossaryentry{greatgrebe}{great,grebe}
+\multiglossaryentry{littlegrebe}{little,grebe}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8426--><p class="nopar" > In the above, two multi-entries are defined: <span
+class="cmtt-10">greatgrebe </span>and <span
+class="cmtt-10">littlegrebe</span>. In both
+cases the main element is <span
+class="cmtt-10">grebe </span>(the last element). Using <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglspl </span>will show the
+plural for all elements, but using <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsmainpl </span>will only use the plural for the main
+element (grebe). For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-199">
+Plural all: \mglspl{greatgrebe}, \mglspl{littlegrebe}.
+Plural main: \mglsmainpl{greatgrebe}, \mglsmainpl{littlegrebe}.
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8435--><p class="nopar" > produces: <spacer type=vertical size=10><span class="obeylines-h">
+ <br />Plural all: greats grebes, littles grebes.
+ <br />Plural main: great grebes, little grebes.
+ <br /><spacer type=vertical size=10></span>
+</p><!--l. 8442--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 8442--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.3 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglsfixes"></a>Prefixes and Suffixes</h3>
+<!--l. 8445--><p class="noindent" >A multi-entry may have associated prefixes and suffixes. These are scoped and are
+placed outside of the hyperlinks and encapsulating commands. They are not affected
+by case-changing commands, such as <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mgls</span>. If you want a prefix to obey
+case-changing, use the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mpgls</span>-like commands instead (<a
+href="#sec:mpgls"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.11.4</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mpgls">Support for
+glossaries-prefix (pgls)<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mpgls --></a>).
+</p><!--l. 8452--><p class="indent" > The prefix is inserted with:
+</p><!--l. 8453--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-47001"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsprefix </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8455--><p class="noindent" >
+The default definition is:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-200">
+\newcommand*{\mglsprefix}{%
+ \ifdefempty\mglscurrentcategory
+ {\mglscurrentprefix}%
+ {%
+   \mglshascategoryprefix{\mglscurrentcategory}%
+   {\mglsusecategoryprefix{\mglscurrentcategory}}%
+   {\mglscurrentprefix}%
+ }%
+}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8467--><p class="nopar" > This will insert the current prefix unless there is prefix command associated with the
+current category.
+</p><!--l. 8471--><p class="indent" > The suffix is inserted with:
+</p><!--l. 8472--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-47002"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglssuffix </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8474--><p class="noindent" >
+The command is defined as follows:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-201">
+\newcommand*{\mglssuffix}{%
+ \ifdefempty\mglscurrentcategory
+ {\ifdefempty{\mglscurrentsuffix}{}{\space(\mglscurrentsuffix)}}%
+ {%
+   \mglshascategorysuffix{\mglscurrentcategory}%
+   {\mglsusecategorysuffix{\mglscurrentcategory}}%
+   {\ifdefempty{\mglscurrentsuffix}{}{\space(\mglscurrentsuffix)}}%
+ }%
+}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8486--><p class="nopar" > If there is a suffix associated with the current category, that will be used, otherwise
+if the current suffix isn’t empty this inserts a space followed by the current suffix in
+parentheses. You can access the label of the last (non-skipped) element with
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslastelementlabel</span><a
+ id="dx1-47003"></a>.
+</p><!--l. 8493--><p class="indent" > Note that in both cases the category corresponds to the multi-entry category (see
+<a
+href="#sec:multiglscategory"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.8</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:multiglscategory">Multi-Entry Category<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:multiglscategory --></a>).
+</p><!--l. 8496--><p class="indent" > To define a category-dependent prefix, use:
+</p><!--l. 8497--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-47004"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsdefcategoryprefix{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">definition</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8499--><p class="noindent" >
+You can reference the current prefix with <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentprefix</span>.
+</p><!--l. 8502--><p class="indent" > To define a category-dependent suffix, use:
+</p><!--l. 8503--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-47005"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsdefcategorysuffix{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">definition</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8505--><p class="noindent" >
+You can reference the current suffix with <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentsuffix</span>.
+</p><!--l. 8508--><p class="indent" > The default definition of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsprefix </span>tests if there is a category prefix
+using:
+</p><!--l. 8510--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-47006"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glshascategoryprefix{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8512--><p class="noindent" >
+The category prefix is used with:
+</p><!--l. 8514--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-47007"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsusecategoryprefix{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8516--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 8518--><p class="indent" > The default definition of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglssuffix </span>tests if there is a category suffix
+using:
+</p><!--l. 8520--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-47008"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glshascategorysuffix{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8522--><p class="noindent" >
+The category suffix is used with:
+</p><!--l. 8524--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-47009"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsusecategorysuffix{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">category</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8526--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 8528--><p class="indent" > The current prefix <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentprefix </span>and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentsuffix </span>are obtained
+as follows: </p>
+
+
+
+ <ul class="itemize1">
+ <li class="itemize">if this is the first use of the multi-entry (<a
+href="#sec:mglsfirstuse"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.7</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglsfirstuse">Multi-Entry
+ First Use<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglsfirstuse --></a>) then the ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">prefix</span>⟩ is set to the value of the <span
+class="cmss-10">firstprefix </span>option and
+ the ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">suffix</span>⟩ is set to the value of the <span
+class="cmss-10">firstsuffix </span>option;
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">otherwise the ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">prefix</span>⟩ is set to the value of the <span
+class="cmss-10">usedprefix </span>option and the
+ ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">suffix</span>⟩ is set to the value of the <span
+class="cmss-10">usedsuffix </span>option.</li></ul>
+<!--l. 8540--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> The prefix and suffix (if set) are placed outside of the hyperlink and text
+formatting encapsulator. They are not affected by case-changing commands such as
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mgls </span>or <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MGLS</span>. </div>
+</p><!--l. 8544--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 8546--><p class="indent" > For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-202">
+\setabbreviationstyle{long-only-short-only}
+\newabbreviation{clostridium}{C.}{Clostridium}
+\newglossaryentry{botulinum}{name=botulinum,description={}}
+\multiglossaryentry[firstsuffix=botulism]
+ {cbot}{clostridium,botulinum}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8554--><p class="nopar" > On first use, this produces (assuming the “clostridum” element hasn’t been used
+previously):
+ </p><blockquote class="quote">
+ <!--l. 8558--><p class="noindent" >Clostridium botulinum (botulism).</p></blockquote>
+<!--l. 8560--><p class="noindent" >On subsequent use, this produces:
+ </p><blockquote class="quote">
+ <!--l. 8562--><p class="noindent" >C. botulinum.</p></blockquote>
+<!--l. 8565--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 8565--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.4 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglssep"></a>Separators</h3>
+<!--l. 8568--><p class="noindent" >The separators between each instance of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>are given by the following
+commands, which all take two arguments. The first argument is the label of
+the previous element. The second argument is the label of the following
+element.
+</p><!--l. 8572--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-48001"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscombinedsep{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">prev label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">next label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8574--><p class="noindent" >
+This is inserted between two entries that have both been marked as used. The default
+definition is:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-203">
+\newcommand*{\glscombinedsep}[2]{%
+  \glshasattribute{#1}{combinedsep}%
+  {\glsgetattribute{#1}{combinedsep}}%
+  { }%
+}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8583--><p class="nopar" > This will use the <a
+href="#catattr.combinedsep"><span
+class="cmss-10">combinedsep</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-48002"></a> attribute for the ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">prev label</span>⟩’s category, if set. Otherwise
+this just does a space. Note that this ignores the second argument.
+</p><!--l. 8588--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-48003"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscombinedfirstsep{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">prev label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">next label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8590--><p class="noindent" >
+This is inserted between two entries where only the next entry has been marked as
+used. The default definition is:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-204">
+\newcommand*{\glscombinedfirstsep}[2]{%
+ \glshasattribute{#1}{combinedfirstsep}%
+ {\glsgetattribute{#1}{combinedfirstsep}}%
+ {\glscombinedsep{#1}{#2}}%
+}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8599--><p class="nopar" > This will use the <a
+href="#catattr.combinedfirstsep"><span
+class="cmss-10">combinedfirstsep</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-48004"></a> attribute for ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">prev label</span>⟩’s category, if set. If that
+attribute isn’t set, <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscombinedsep </span>is used.
+</p><!--l. 8604--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-48005"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscombinedsepfirst{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">prev label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">next label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8606--><p class="noindent" >
+This is inserted between two entries where only the previous entry has been marked
+as used. The default definition is:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-205">
+\newcommand*{\glscombinedsepfirst}[2]{%
+ \glshasattribute{#1}{combinedsepfirst}%
+ {\glsgetattribute{#1}{combinedsepfirst}}%
+ {\glscombinedsep{#1}{#2}}%
+}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8615--><p class="nopar" > This will use the <a
+href="#catattr.combinedsepfirst"><span
+class="cmss-10">combinedsepfirst</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-48006"></a> attribute for ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">prev label</span>⟩’s category, if set. If that
+attribute isn’t set, <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscombinedsep </span>is used.
+</p><!--l. 8620--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-48007"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscombinedfirstsepfirst{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">prev label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">next label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8622--><p class="noindent" >
+This is inserted between two entries where both have been marked as used. The
+default definition is:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-206">
+\newcommand*{\glscombinedfirstsepfirst}[2]{%
+ \glshasattribute{#1}{combinedfirstsepfirst}%
+ {\glsgetattribute{#1}{combinedfirstsepfirst}}%
+ {\glscombinedsep{#1}{#2}}%
+}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8631--><p class="nopar" > This will use the <a
+href="#catattr.combinedfirstsepfirst"><span
+class="cmss-10">combinedfirstsepfirst</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-48008"></a> attribute for ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">prev label</span>⟩’s category, if set. If that
+attribute isn’t set, <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscombinedsep </span>is used.
+</p><!--l. 8636--><p class="indent" > These commands may be redefined as required. For example, to have no space
+between two elements that have both been marked as used and are both
+abbreviations (disregarding category attributes):
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-207">
+\renewcommand*{\glscombinedfirstsepfirst}[2]{%
+ \ifglshasshort{#1}{\ifglshasshort{#2}{}{\space}}{\space}%
+}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8644--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 8646--><p class="indent" > There are some commands for redefining the above separators to common
+combinations.
+</p><!--l. 8649--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-48009"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glssetcombinedsepabbrvnbsp </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8651--><p class="noindent" >
+This does the following:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-208">
+\renewcommand*{\glscombinedsep}[2]{%
+ \glshasattribute{#1}{combinedsep}%
+ {\glsgetattribute{#1}{combinedsep}}%
+ {\ifhasshort{#1}{~}{ }}%
+}%
+\renewcommand*{\glscombinedsepfirst}[2]{%
+ \glshasattribute{##1}{combinedsepfirst}%
+ {\glsgetattribute{##1}{combinedsepfirst}}%
+ {\ifhasshort{#1}{~}{ }}%
+}%
+\renewcommand*{\glscombinedfirstsep}[2]{%
+ \glshasattribute{#1}{combinedfirstsep}%
+ {\glsgetattribute{#1}{combinedfirstsep}}%
+ { }%
+}%
+\renewcommand*{\glscombinedfirstsepfirst}[2]{%
+  \glshasattribute{##1}{combinedfirstsepfirst}%
+  {\glsgetattribute{##1}{combinedfirstsepfirst}}%
+  { }%
+}%
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8674--><p class="nopar" > This uses a non-breakable space <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="cmtt-10">~</span></span></span> following an abbreviation (that has already been
+marked as used). Note that if the associated attributes are set the commands will
+behave according to the attribute.
+</p><!--l. 8680--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-48010"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glssetcombinedsepabbrvnone </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8682--><p class="noindent" >
+This does the following:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-209">
+\renewcommand*{\glscombinedsep}[2]{%
+ \glshasattribute{#1}{combinedsep}%
+ {\glsgetattribute{#1}{combinedsep}}%
+ {\ifhasshort{#1}{}{\ifhasshort{#2}{}{ }}}%
+}%
+\renewcommand*{\glscombinedsepfirst}[2]{%
+ \glshasattribute{#1}{combinedsepfirst}%
+ {\glsgetattribute{#1}{combinedsepfirst}}%
+ {\ifhasshort{#1}{}{ }}%
+}%
+\renewcommand*{\glscombinedfirstsep}[2]{%
+ \glshasattribute{##1}{combinedfirstsep}%
+ {\glsgetattribute{##1}{combinedfirstsep}}%
+ {\ifhasshort{##2}{}{ }}%
+}%
+\renewcommand*{\glscombinedfirstsepfirst}[2]{%
+ \glshasattribute{##1}{combinedfirstsepfirst}%
+ {\glsgetattribute{##1}{combinedfirstsepfirst}}%
+ { }%
+}%
+</pre>
+<!--l. 8705--><p class="nopar" > This does nothing if either element are abbreviations that have already been used.
+Note that if the associated attributes are set the commands will behave according to
+the attribute.
+</p><!--l. 8710--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-48011"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glssetcombinedsepnarrow{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">width</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">narrow sep</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8712--><p class="noindent" >
+This is rather more complicated as it measures a field value and uses ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">narrow</span>
+<span
+class="cmti-10">sep</span>⟩ if the width is less than ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">width</span>⟩. The field value is determined as follows:
+</p>
+ <ul class="itemize1">
+ <li class="itemize">on <a
+ id="dx1-48012"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> the <span
+class="cmss-10">long</span><a
+ id="dx1-48013"></a> field is used if it is set otherwise the <span
+class="cmss-10">first</span><a
+ id="dx1-48014"></a> field is used;
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize">otherwise the <span
+class="cmss-10">short</span><a
+ id="dx1-48015"></a> field is used if it is set otherwise the <span
+class="cmss-10">text</span><a
+ id="dx1-48016"></a> field is used;</li></ul>
+<!--l. 8726--><p class="indent" > Note that this doesn’t take into account fonts, hooks, abbreviation styles or
+plural forms (e.g. <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglspl</span>) or other field references (e.g. <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsname</span>). If the
+associated attributes are set the commands will behave according to the
+attribute.
+</p><!--l. 8731--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+
+
+
+<!--l. 8731--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.5 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglselementhooks"></a>mgls Element Hooks</h3>
+<!--l. 8734--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>-like commands use the following hooks:
+</p><!--l. 8735--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49001"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglselementprehook </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8737--><p class="noindent" >
+This is done before each (non-skipped) element. (Default does nothing.)
+</p><!--l. 8739--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49002"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglselementposthook </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8741--><p class="noindent" >
+This is done after each (non-skipped) element. (Default does nothing.) Note that this is
+different from the normal entry post-link hook <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glspostlinkhook</span><a
+ id="dx1-49003"></a>. If the individual
+entry post-link hook is enabled (see the <span
+class="cmss-10">postlinks </span>key in <a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptions"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.9</span>
+</a><a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptions">Multi-Entry Settings<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:multiglsoptions --></a>), this will go before <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglselementposthook</span>.
+</p><!--l. 8748--><p class="indent" > The definitions of the following commands are scoped within the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>-like
+commands so they can’t be accessed elsewhere (including in the post-link hook, see
+<a
+href="#sec:mglspostlinkhook"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.6</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglspostlinkhook">Post-Link Hook<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglspostlinkhook --></a>). They may be used in the above hooks
+or in the separator commands (described in <a
+href="#sec:mglssep"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.4</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglssep">Separators<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglssep --></a>) or
+in the command used to encapsulate the entire content. They can also be
+used in the post-link hook (see <a
+href="#sec:entryfmtmods"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">2.4</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:entryfmtmods">Entry Display Style
+Modifications<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:entryfmtmods --></a>) to determine if an entry is being used within a <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>-like
+command.
+</p><!--l. 8758--><p class="indent" > The multi-entry label is stored in:
+</p><!--l. 8759--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49004"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentmultilabel </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8761--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 8763--><p class="indent" > The label of the main element:
+</p><!--l. 8764--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49005"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentmainlabel </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8766--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 8768--><p class="indent" > The complete comma-separated list of elements:
+</p><!--l. 8769--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49006"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentlist </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8771--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 8773--><p class="indent" > Multi-entry options:
+</p><!--l. 8774--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49007"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentoptions </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8776--><p class="noindent" >
+These are the options that were used when defining the multi-entry. This doesn’t
+include options set with <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentrysetup </span>or those passed to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls </span>(or
+whichever variant is being used).
+</p><!--l. 8781--><p class="indent" > The current multi-entry category in effect is stored in:
+</p><!--l. 8782--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49008"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentcategory </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8784--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 8786--><p class="indent" > The calling command control sequence name (e.g. “mgls” or “mglspl”) can be
+obtained with:
+</p><!--l. 8788--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49009"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrcurrentmglscsname </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8790--><p class="noindent" >
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 8792--><p class="indent" > To test if the current multi-entry is the first use:
+</p><!--l. 8793--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49010"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsisfirstuse{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8795--><p class="noindent" >
+This does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩ if this is the first use otherwise it does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">false</span>⟩. Note that this
+applies to the multi-entry first use flag not the <a
+ id="dx1-49011"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use flags</a> of the individual
+elements.
+</p><!--l. 8801--><p class="indent" > At each iteration of the loop over the element list, the following commands are
+set, which can be accessed in hooks such as <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglselementprehook </span>or in hooks used
+by the underlying <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>etc commands. For example, if <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentlabel </span>is
+defined then <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>is being used inside <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>.
+</p><!--l. 8807--><p class="indent" > The current element label:
+</p><!--l. 8808--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49012"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentlabel </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8810--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 8812--><p class="indent" > This is a count register that is set to the element index:
+</p><!--l. 8813--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49013"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglselementindex </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8815--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 8817--><p class="indent" > The current multi-entry prefix:
+</p><!--l. 8818--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49014"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentprefix </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8820--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 8822--><p class="indent" > The current multi-entry suffix:
+</p><!--l. 8823--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49015"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentsuffix </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8825--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 8827--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-49016"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsiflast{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8829--><p class="noindent" >
+If this is the last iteration, does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩ otherwise does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">false</span>⟩. This takes the skip options
+into account, so the last iteration may not necessarily be when the element index is
+equal to the total number of elements.
+</p><!--l. 8835--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 8835--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.6 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglspostlinkhook"></a>Post-Link Hook</h3>
+<!--l. 8838--><p class="noindent" >There is a hook that occurs at the end the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>-like commands according to the
+<span
+class="cmss-10">mpostlink </span>setting (see <a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptions"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.9</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptions">Multi-Entry Settings<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:multiglsoptions --></a>). The hook used
+depends on the <span
+class="cmss-10">mpostlinkelement </span>option. These hooks can’t access the commands
+described in <a
+href="#sec:mglselementhooks"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.5</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglselementhooks">mgls Element Hooks<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglselementhooks --></a> as the hook occurs
+outside of the scope in which they are defined.
+</p><!--l. 8845--><p class="indent" > The <span
+class="cmss-10">mpostlinkelement=custom </span>option uses:
+</p><!--l. 8846--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-50001"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscustompostlinkhook </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8848--><p class="noindent" >
+This does nothing by default.
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 8851--><p class="indent" > The <span
+class="cmss-10">mpostlinkelement=last </span>option uses:
+</p><!--l. 8852--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-50002"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslastelementpostlinkhook </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8854--><p class="noindent" >
+which emulates the post-link hook of the last element.
+</p><!--l. 8857--><p class="indent" > The <span
+class="cmss-10">mpostlinkelement=main </span>option uses:
+</p><!--l. 8858--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-50003"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslastmainpostlinkhook </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8860--><p class="noindent" >
+which emulates the post-link hook of the main element.
+</p><!--l. 8863--><p class="indent" > The default settings <span
+class="cmss-10">postlinks=none,mpostlink=true,mpostlinkelementlast </span>will
+suppress the individual element post-link hooks (<span
+class="cmtt-10">\glspostlinkhook</span><a
+ id="dx1-50004"></a>) and do the
+multi-entry post-link hook for the last element (<span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslastelementpostlinkhook</span>).
+</p><!--l. 8869--><p class="indent" > If you have the final element’s post-link hook enabled and the multi-entry post-link
+hook enabled (for example, <span
+class="cmss-10">postlinks=all, mpostlink=true, mpostlinkelement=last</span>), the
+final element’s post-link hook will be done twice. Similarly for the main element with
+<span
+class="cmss-10">postlinks=all, mpostlink=true, mpostlinkelement=main</span>.
+</p><!--l. 8876--><p class="indent" > The following commands are available for use in these hooks and may also be
+used in <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglssuffix</span><a
+ id="dx1-50005"></a>.
+</p><!--l. 8879--><p class="indent" > The multi-entry label:
+</p><!--l. 8880--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-50006"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslastmultilabel </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8882--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 8884--><p class="indent" > The multi-entry category (<a
+href="#sec:multiglscategory"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.8</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:multiglscategory">Multi-Entry Category<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:multiglscategory --></a>):
+</p><!--l. 8885--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-50007"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslastcategory </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8887--><p class="noindent" >
+This will be empty if no category was assigned.
+</p><!--l. 8890--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-50008"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglswasfirstuse{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8892--><p class="noindent" >
+If that was the first use of the multi-entry (<a
+href="#sec:mglsfirstuse"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.7</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglsfirstuse">Multi-Entry First Use<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglsfirstuse --></a>)
+this does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩ otherwise it does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">false</span>⟩.
+</p><!--l. 8896--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 8896--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.6.1 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglspostlinkhooklastelement"></a>Last Element</h4>
+<!--l. 8898--><p class="noindent" >The following commands relate to the last element.
+</p><!--l. 8900--><p class="indent" > The label of the last non-skipped element:
+</p><!--l. 8901--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-51001"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslastelementlabel </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8903--><p class="noindent" >
+If all elements were skipped or if the multi-entry wasn’t defined, this will be
+empty.
+</p><!--l. 8907--><p class="indent" > Test if the last element was skipped:
+</p><!--l. 8908--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-51002"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsiflastelementskipped{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8910--><p class="noindent" >
+If the last element was skipped this does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩ otherwise it does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">false</span>⟩. If
+all elements were skipped or if the multi-entry wasn’t defined, this will do
+
+
+
+⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩.
+</p><!--l. 8916--><p class="indent" > Test if the last element was its first use:
+</p><!--l. 8917--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-51003"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsiflastelementwasfirstuse{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8919--><p class="noindent" >
+If the last non-skipped element was used for the first time this does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩ otherwise it
+does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">false</span>⟩. (Corresponds to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrifwasfirstuse</span>.) If all elements were skipped or
+if the multi-entry wasn’t defined, this will do ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩.
+</p><!--l. 8926--><p class="indent" > Test if the last element was plural:
+</p><!--l. 8927--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-51004"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsiflastelementwasplural{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8929--><p class="noindent" >
+If the last non-skipped element had the plural form displayed, this does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩
+otherwise it does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">false</span>⟩. (Corresponds to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsifplural</span>.) If all elements were skipped
+or if the multi-entry wasn’t defined, this will do ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">false</span>⟩.
+</p><!--l. 8936--><p class="indent" > Test if the last element was had any case-changing applied:
+</p><!--l. 8937--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-51005"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsiflastelementcapscase{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">no-change</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">firstuc</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">all caps</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8939--><p class="noindent" >
+Corresponds to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscapscase </span>of the last non-skipped element. If all elements were
+skipped or if the multi-entry wasn’t defined, this will do ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">no-change</span>⟩.
+</p><!--l. 8944--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 8944--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.6.2 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglspostlinkhookmainelement"></a>Main Element</h4>
+<!--l. 8946--><p class="noindent" >The following commands relate to the main element.
+</p><!--l. 8948--><p class="indent" > The label of the main element from the multi-entry that was just referenced:
+</p><!--l. 8950--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-52001"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslastmainlabel </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8952--><p class="noindent" >
+If the main element was skipped or if the multi-entry wasn’t defined, this will be
+empty. If this is the same as <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslastelementlabel </span>then the main element was the
+last element.
+</p><!--l. 8958--><p class="indent" > Test if the main element was skipped:
+</p><!--l. 8959--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-52002"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsiflastmainskipped{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8961--><p class="noindent" >
+If the main element from the multi-entry that was just referenced was skipped this
+does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩ otherwise it does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">false</span>⟩. If the multi-entry wasn’t defined, this will do
+⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩.
+</p><!--l. 8966--><p class="indent" > Test if the main element was its first use:
+</p><!--l. 8967--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-52003"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsiflastmainwasfirstuse{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8969--><p class="noindent" >
+If the main element was used for the first time this does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩ otherwise it does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">false</span>⟩.
+(Corresponds to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrifwasfirstuse</span>.) If the main element was skipped or if the
+multi-entry wasn’t defined, this will do ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩.
+</p><!--l. 8976--><p class="indent" > Test if the main element was plural:
+</p><!--l. 8977--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-52004"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsiflastmainwasplural{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 8979--><p class="noindent" >
+If the main element from the multi-entry that was just referenced had its plural form
+displayed this does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">true</span>⟩ otherwise it does ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">false</span>⟩. (Corresponds to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsifplural</span>.) If
+the main element was skipped or if the multi-entry wasn’t defined, this will do
+⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">false</span>⟩.
+</p><!--l. 8986--><p class="indent" > Test if the main element was had any case-changing applied:
+</p><!--l. 8987--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-52005"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsiflastmaincapscase{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">no-change</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">firstuc</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">all caps</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 8989--><p class="noindent" >
+Corresponds to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscapscase </span>of the main element from the multi-entry that was
+just referenced. If the main element was skipped or if the multi-entry wasn’t defined,
+this will do ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">no-change</span>⟩.
+</p><!--l. 8995--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 8995--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.7 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglsfirstuse"></a>Multi-Entry First Use</h3>
+<!--l. 8998--><p class="noindent" >Each multi-entry set has an associated first use flag. This is independent of
+the <a
+ id="dx1-53001"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use flag</a> associated with the individual entries that make up the
+set. As with the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>-like commands, <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls </span>unsets this flag. Unlike the
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\glstext</span>-like commands, all the commands described in <a
+href="#sec:mglslike"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.11</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglslike">Variants
+of mgls<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglslike --></a> (including commands like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsname</span>) unset this flag, even if the
+elements use commands like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsname </span>that don’t unset the entry’s <a
+ id="dx1-53002"></a>first use
+flag.
+</p><!--l. 9007--><p class="indent" > You can determine whether or not a multi-entry set has been marked as used
+with:
+</p><!--l. 9009--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-53003"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\ifmglsused{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9011--><p class="noindent" >
+You can (globally) unset the flag (mark the set as having been referenced)
+with:
+</p><!--l. 9014--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-53004"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsunset{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9016--><p class="noindent" >
+or reset it with:
+</p><!--l. 9018--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-53005"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsreset{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9020--><p class="noindent" >
+There are also local versions of these commands:
+</p><!--l. 9022--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-53006"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslocalunset{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9024--><p class="noindent" >
+and
+</p><!--l. 9026--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-53007"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslocalreset{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9028--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 9030--><p class="indent" > To unset all multi-entries:
+</p><!--l. 9031--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-53008"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsunsetall </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9033--><p class="noindent" >
+To reset all multi-entries:
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 9035--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-53009"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsresetall </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9037--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 9039--><p class="indent" > Note that unsetting or resetting any of the individual element <a
+ id="dx1-53010"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use flags</a>
+doesn’t affect the multi-entry flag. Similarly, unsetting or resetting the multi-entry
+flag doesn’t affect the <a
+ id="dx1-53011"></a>first use flags of the individual elements.
+</p><!--l. 9044--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9044--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.8 </span> <a
+ id="sec:multiglscategory"></a>Multi-Entry Category</h3>
+<!--l. 9047--><p class="noindent" >A multi-entry set may have an associated category set using the <span
+class="cmss-10">category </span>key
+described in <a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptions"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.9</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:multiglsoptions">Multi-Entry Settings<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:multiglsoptions --></a>. This isn’t set by default,
+but if it is set the category may have attributes set in the usual way. The multi-entry
+category is independent of the individual entry categories. The following attribute is
+recognised by commands like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>:
+ </p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+<a
+ id="catattr.multioptions"></a><span
+class="cmssbx-10">multioptions</span><a
+ id="dx1-54001"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">default options to apply to any multi-entry set with the given
+ category. These can be overridden by the first optional argument of
+ <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry </span>or by the <span
+class="cmss-10">setup </span>key in the first optional argument
+ of commands like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>.
+ </dd></dl>
+<!--l. 9064--><p class="indent" > Note that you can’t access the category or its attributes via the multi-entry label
+(for example, with <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glshasattribute</span>). If you need to access the current
+multi-entry’s category within any of the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>-like hooks (<a
+href="#sec:mglselementhooks"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.5</span>
+</a><a
+href="#sec:mglselementhooks">mgls Element Hooks<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglselementhooks --></a>), you can obtain the category with <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentcategory </span>and
+use commands like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glshascategoryattribute</span>.
+</p><!--l. 9071--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9071--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.9 </span> <a
+ id="sec:multiglsoptions"></a>Multi-Entry Settings</h3>
+<!--l. 9074--><p class="noindent" >The settings that govern all multi-entries can be set using:
+</p><!--l. 9075--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-55001"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentrysetup{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9077--><p class="noindent" >
+The ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">options</span>⟩ are the same as for <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry</span>. Options may also be set
+according to the multi-entry category attribute <a
+href="#catattr.multioptions"><span
+class="cmss-10">multioptions</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-55002"></a>.
+</p><!--l. 9082--><p class="indent" > Whenever the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>-like commands are used, options are applied in the following
+order:
+ </p><ol class="enumerate1" >
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-55004x1">general options identified by <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentrysetup</span>;
+
+
+
+ </li>
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-55006x2">the category key is assigned if it’s in the general options,
+ <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry </span>or <span
+class="cmss-10">setup </span>key;
+ </li>
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-55008x3"><a
+href="#catattr.multioptions"><span
+class="cmss-10">multioptions</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-55009"></a> category attribute (if set);
+ </li>
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-55011x4">any options provided in the first optional argument of
+ <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry</span>;
+ </li>
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-55013x5">any options provided in the <span
+class="cmss-10">setup </span>key in the first optional argument of the
+ <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>-like command.</li></ol>
+<!--l. 9099--><p class="indent" > These options are described below.
+</p><!--l. 9101--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9101--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.9.1 </span> <a
+ id="sec:multiglsoptionsindexing"></a>Indexing</h4>
+ <dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">indexmain</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This setting may take one of the following values:
+ <dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">false</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">don’t index the main entry;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">true</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">index the main entry;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">first</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">only index the main entry if it’s the first use (of the main entry).</dd></dl>
+ <!--l. 9113--><p class="noindent" >The default is <span
+class="cmss-10">true</span>.
+ </p></dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">indexothers</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This setting may take one of the following values:
+ <dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">false</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">don’t index the other entries;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">true</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">index the other entries;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">first</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">only index the other entries if it’s the first use (of the non-main
+ entry).</dd></dl>
+ <!--l. 9123--><p class="noindent" >The default is <span
+class="cmss-10">first</span>.</p></dd></dl>
+
+
+
+<!--l. 9126--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9126--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.9.2 </span> <a
+ id="sec:multiglsoptionsencap"></a>Location Formats (Encaps)</h4>
+ <dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">encapmain</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This setting value should be the value to pass to <span
+class="cmss-10">format</span><a
+ id="dx1-57001"></a> for the main
+ entry. (The location encapsulator.) The default is <span
+class="cmtt-10">glsnumberformat</span>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">encapothers</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This setting value should be the value to pass to <span
+class="cmss-10">format</span><a
+ id="dx1-57002"></a> for the
+ other (not main) entries. (The location encapsulator.) The default is
+ <span
+class="cmtt-10">glsnumberformat</span>.</dd></dl>
+<!--l. 9139--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9139--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.9.3 </span> <a
+ id="sec:multiglsoptionspostlink"></a>Post-Link Hooks</h4>
+ <dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">postlinks</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This setting determines whether or not to enable the individual
+ element’s post-link hook (<span
+class="cmtt-10">\glspostlinkhook</span><a
+ id="dx1-58001"></a>). The value may be one
+ of:
+ <dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">none</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">suppress the post-link hook for all elements;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">all</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">don’t suppress the post-link hook for all elements;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">notlast</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">only suppress the post-link hook for the last element;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">mainnotlast</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">suppress the post-link hook for all “other” (not main)
+ elements and for the last element (so only the main element will have
+ its post-link hook as long as it’s not the last element);
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">mainonly</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">suppress the post-link hook for all “other” (not main) elements;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">othernotlast</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">suppress the post-link hook for the main element and for
+ the last element (so only the other elements will have their post-link
+ hook as long as the element isn’t the last one);
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">otheronly</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">suppress the post-link hook for the main element.</dd></dl>
+ <!--l. 9163--><p class="noindent" >The default is <span
+class="cmss-10">postlinks=none</span>.
+
+
+
+ </p></dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">mpostlink</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This setting determines whether or not to enable the multi-entry post-link
+ hook (<a
+href="#sec:mglspostlinkhook"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.6</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglspostlinkhook">Post-Link Hook<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglspostlinkhook --></a>). The value may be one
+ of:
+ <dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">false</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">suppress the multi-entry post-link hook;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">true</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">enable the multi-entry post-link hook;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">firstonly</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">enable the multi-entry post-link hook only for the first use of the
+ multi-entry;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">usedonly</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">enable the multi-entry post-link hook only for the subsequent
+ (not first) use of the multi-entry.</dd></dl>
+ <!--l. 9176--><p class="noindent" >The default is <span
+class="cmss-10">mpostlink=true</span>. If the value is omitted, <span
+class="cmss-10">true </span>is assumed.
+ </p></dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">mpostlinkelement</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This setting indicates which post-link hook should be used if the
+ multi-entry post-link hook has been enabled. Allowed values:
+ <dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">last</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslastelementpostlinkhook</span><a
+ id="dx1-58002"></a> (that is, use the post-link hook
+ for the last element);
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">main</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslastmainpostlinkhook</span><a
+ id="dx1-58003"></a> (that is, use the post-link hook
+ for the main element);
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">custom</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslastcustompostlinkhook</span><a
+ id="dx1-58004"></a>.</dd></dl>
+ </dd></dl>
+<!--l. 9190--><p class="noindent" >Note that some combinations may cause a repeated hook.
+</p><!--l. 9192--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9192--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.9.4 </span> <a
+ id="sec:multiglsoptionsfixes"></a>Prefixes and Suffixes</h4>
+<!--l. 9195--><p class="noindent" >See <a
+href="#sec:mglsfixes"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.3</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglsfixes">Prefixes and Suffixes<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglsfixes --></a> for more information on prefixes and
+suffixes. Note that the prefixes and suffixes are not affected by case-changing
+commands such as <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mgls </span>or <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MGLS</span>. If you want a prefix to obey case-changing, use
+the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mpgls</span>-like commands instead (<a
+href="#sec:mpgls"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.11.4</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mpgls">Support for glossaries-prefix
+(pgls)<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mpgls --></a>).
+
+
+
+ </p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmbx-10">firstprefix</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">The prefix to use on first use of the multi-entry.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmbx-10">usedprefix</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">The prefix to use on subsequent use of the multi-entry.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmbx-10">firstsuffix</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">The suffix to use on first use of the multi-entry.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmbx-10">usedsuffix</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">The suffix to use on subsequent use of the multi-entry.</dd></dl>
+<!--l. 9216--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9216--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.9.5 </span> <a
+ id="sec:multiglsoptionsskip"></a>Skipping Elements</h4>
+ <dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">firstskipmain</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is a boolean setting. If <span
+class="cmss-10">true</span>, the main element will be omitted
+ on (multi-entry) first use.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">firstskipothers</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is a boolean setting. If <span
+class="cmss-10">true</span>, the other (non-main) elements
+ will be omitted on (multi-entry) first use.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">usedskipmain</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is a boolean setting. If <span
+class="cmss-10">true</span>, the main element will be
+ omitted on (multi-entry) subsequent use.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">usedskipothers</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is a boolean setting. If <span
+class="cmss-10">true</span>, the other (non-main) elements
+ will be omitted on (multi-entry) subsequent use.
+ </dd></dl>
+<!--l. 9236--><p class="noindent" >The skip options apply to the multi-entry first use flag not the individual element first
+use. See <a
+href="#sec:mglsfirstuse"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.7</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglsfirstuse">Multi-Entry First Use<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglsfirstuse --></a>.
+</p><!--l. 9239--><p class="indent" > Note that it is technically possible to set the skip options so that both the main
+and the other elements are skipped. However, by default, this will generate a warning
+and only the final optional argument (the ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩) will be displayed. There won’t
+be a loop over all elements so the commands set at each iteration, such as
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglscurrentlabel</span>, won’t be defined.
+</p><!--l. 9246--><p class="indent" > The warning and the insertion of the ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">insert</span>⟩ is done by:
+</p><!--l. 9248--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-60001"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmglsWarnAllSkipped{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">message</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">cs</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9250--><p class="noindent" >
+where ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">message</span>⟩ is the warning message and ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">cs</span>⟩ is the control sequence that
+encapsulates the entire content (including hyperlink and the <span
+class="cmss-10">textformat </span>setting, if
+enabled).
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 9255--><p class="indent" > If, for some particular reason, you want this scenario, you can redefine this
+command to omit the warning.
+</p><!--l. 9258--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9258--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.9.6 </span> <a
+ id="sec:multiglsoptionsgeneral"></a>General</h4>
+ <dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">hyper</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This setting may take one of the following values:
+ <dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">none</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">no hyperlinks;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">allmain</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">encapsulate the entire content with a single hyperlink to the main
+ entry’s target;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">mainonly</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">only hyperlink the main entry;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">individual</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">hyperlink each entry individually;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">otheronly</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">only hyperlink the other entries;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">notmainfirst</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">don’t hyperlink the main entry on multi-entry first use;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">nototherfirst</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">don’t hyperlink the other entries on multi-entry first use;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ <span
+class="cmssbx-10">notfirst</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">don’t hyperlink any entries on multi-entry first use.</dd></dl>
+ <!--l. 9278--><p class="noindent" >The default is <span
+class="cmss-10">individual</span>.
+ </p></dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">textformat</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This setting value should be the control sequence name (without the
+ leading backslash) of the command used to encapsulate the entire content. The
+ default is <span
+class="cmtt-10">@firstofone</span>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">category</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">The category to apply to the multi-entry. This is independent of
+ the categories of each of the elements. The default is no category. See
+ <a
+href="#sec:multiglscategory"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.8</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:multiglscategory">Multi-Entry Category<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:multiglscategory --></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">mglsopts</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">Default options to pass to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>. Note that <span
+class="cmss-10">setup </span>can’t be used within this
+ value.
+ </dd></dl>
+
+
+
+<!--l. 9293--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9293--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.10 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglsopts"></a>mgls Options</h3>
+<!--l. 9296--><p class="noindent" >The ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">options</span>⟩ for <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls </span>(and similar commands) are listed below. Any additional
+options provided will be appended to the <span
+class="cmss-10">all </span>value. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-210">
+\mgls[counter=chapter]{cbot}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 9301--><p class="nopar" > is equivalent to:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-211">
+\mgls[all={counter=chapter}]{cbot}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 9305--><p class="nopar" > Whereas:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-212">
+\mgls[counter=chapter,all={counter=section}]{cbot}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 9309--><p class="nopar" > is treated as:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-213">
+\mgls[all={counter=section,counter=chapter}]{cbot}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 9313--><p class="nopar" > which has the same effect as:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-214">
+\mgls[all={counter=chapter}]{cbot}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 9317--><p class="nopar" > (The descriptions below reference <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>which is used internally by <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>. Replace
+this with <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glspl </span>etc as applicable for the variants, such as <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglspl</span>.)
+ </p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">setup</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">The value should be a list of any options that can be passed
+ to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentrysetup</span>. These options will override any
+ conflicting options that were supplied to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry </span>or
+ <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentrysetup</span>. Note that <span
+class="cmss-10">mgls </span>can’t be used within this
+ value.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">all</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">The value should be a list of any options that can be passed to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>. These
+ options will be passed to each instance of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>and will override any
+ conflicting setting in <span
+class="cmss-10">setup</span>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">main</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">The value should be a list of any options that can be passed to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>.
+ These options will be passed to the instance of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>used for the main
+ label and will override any conflicting setting in <span
+class="cmss-10">all</span>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">others</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">The value should be a list of any options that can be passed to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>.
+ These options will be passed to each instance of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>used for the other
+ (not main) labels and will override any conflicting setting in <span
+class="cmss-10">all</span>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">hyper</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">a boolean option to determine whether or not to use hyperlinks (if
+ supported). This may cause a conflict with other options, but is essentially
+ provided to allow the starred version of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls </span>to switch off all hyperlinks.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">multiunset</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">This only applies to the multi-entry first use flag, described in
+ <a
+href="#sec:mglsfirstuse"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.7</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglsfirstuse">Multi-Entry First Use<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglsfirstuse --></a>, not the <a
+ id="dx1-62001"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use flags</a> of the
+ elements. The value may be one of:
+ <dl class="description"><dt class="description">
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
+class="cmss-10">global </span>globally unset the flag (default);
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
+class="cmss-10">local </span>locally unset the flag;
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+ </dt><dd
+class="description"><span
+class="cmss-10">none </span>don’t unset the flag.</dd></dl>
+
+
+
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">presetlocal</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">a boolean option that governs whether or not the following options
+ should have a local or global effect. The default is <span
+class="cmss-10">presetlocal=false</span>
+ (global).
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">resetall</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">a boolean option to determine whether or not to reset all entries in ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">label list</span>⟩
+ <span
+class="cmti-10">before </span>using <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>. This option refers to the individual entry’s <a
+ id="dx1-62002"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use flag</a> not
+ the multi-set flag.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">resetmain</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">a boolean option to determine whether or not to reset the main entry
+ <span
+class="cmti-10">before </span>using <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>. This option refers to the individual entry’s <a
+ id="dx1-62003"></a>first use flag not
+ the multi-set flag.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">resetothers</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">a boolean option to determine whether or not to reset the other (not
+ main) entries <span
+class="cmti-10">before </span>using <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>. This option refers to the individual entry’s <a
+ id="dx1-62004"></a>first
+ use flag not the multi-set flag.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">unsetall</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">a boolean option to determine whether or not to unset all entries in ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">label list</span>⟩
+ <span
+class="cmti-10">before </span>using <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>. This option refers to the individual entry’s <a
+ id="dx1-62005"></a>first use flag not
+ the multi-set flag.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">unsetmain</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">a boolean option to determine whether or not to unset the main entry
+ <span
+class="cmti-10">before </span>using <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>. This option refers to the individual entry’s <a
+ id="dx1-62006"></a>first use flag not
+ the multi-set flag.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<span
+class="cmssbx-10">unsetothers</span> </dt><dd
+class="description">a boolean option to determine whether or not to unset the other (not
+ main) entries <span
+class="cmti-10">before </span>using <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>. This option refers to the individual entry’s <a
+ id="dx1-62007"></a>first
+ use flag not the multi-set flag.</dd></dl>
+<!--l. 9392--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+class="cmss-10">reset</span><span
+class="cmss-10">… </span>options all use:
+</p><!--l. 9393--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-62008"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglselementreset{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9395--><p class="noindent" >
+The <span
+class="cmss-10">unset</span><span
+class="cmss-10">… </span>options all use:
+</p><!--l. 9397--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-62009"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglselementunset{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9399--><p class="noindent" >
+These take the <span
+class="cmss-10">presetlocal </span>into account.
+</p><!--l. 9402--><p class="indent" > An alternative way of resetting the other elements is to use:
+</p><!--l. 9403--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-62010"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsunsetothers{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9405--><p class="noindent" >
+or for a local reset:
+</p><!--l. 9407--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-62011"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslocalunsetothers{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 9409--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 9411--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9411--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.11 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglslike"></a>Variants of mgls</h3>
+<!--l. 9414--><p class="noindent" >The commands listed in this section all behave like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>. These (including <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>
+itself) are collectively referred to as the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>-like commands. All commands unset
+the multi-entry first use flag (unless the <span
+class="cmss-10">multiunset=none </span>option is applied). Only
+those commands that use the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>-like commands (such as <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>or <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glspl</span>) will
+unset the individual entry <a
+ id="dx1-63001"></a><a
+href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use flag</a>.
+</p><!--l. 9421--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9421--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.11.1 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglsbasic"></a>gls-like</h4>
+<!--l. 9424--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-64001"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglspl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9426--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glspl </span>instead of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>for each entry.
+</p><!--l. 9429--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-64002"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsmainpl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9431--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glspl </span>instead of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>for the main entry and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>for all the other
+entries.
+</p><!--l. 9435--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-64003"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mgls[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9437--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Gls </span>for the first entry and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>for the other entries.
+</p><!--l. 9441--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-64004"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MGls[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9443--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Gls </span>for all entries.
+</p><!--l. 9446--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-64005"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mglspl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9448--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Glspl </span>for the first entry and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glspl </span>for the other entries.
+</p><!--l. 9452--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-64006"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mglsmainpl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9454--><p class="noindent" >
+The first entry starts with an upper case. The plural form is used for the main
+entry.
+</p><!--l. 9458--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-64007"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MGlspl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9460--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Glspl </span>for all entries.
+</p><!--l. 9463--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-64008"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MGlsmainpl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9465--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Glspl </span>for the main entry and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Gls </span>for all other entries.
+</p><!--l. 9468--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-64009"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MGLS[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 9470--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\GLS </span>instead of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>for each entry.
+</p><!--l. 9473--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-64010"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MGLSpl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9475--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\GLSpl </span>instead of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>for each entry.
+</p><!--l. 9478--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-64011"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MGLSmainpl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9480--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses all caps for all entries and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\GLSpl </span>for the main entry.
+</p><!--l. 9484--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9484--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.11.2 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglsabbrv"></a>Abbreviations</h4>
+<!--l. 9487--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-65001"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsshort[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9489--><p class="noindent" >
+This will use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrshort </span>for any entries that have the <span
+class="cmss-10">short</span><a
+ id="dx1-65002"></a> key set and will use
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\glstext </span>otherwise.
+</p><!--l. 9493--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-65003"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslong[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9495--><p class="noindent" >
+This will use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrlong </span>for any entries that have the <span
+class="cmss-10">long</span><a
+ id="dx1-65004"></a> key set and will use
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\glstext </span>otherwise.
+</p><!--l. 9499--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-65005"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsfull[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9501--><p class="noindent" >
+This will use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfull </span>for any entries that have the <span
+class="cmss-10">short</span><a
+ id="dx1-65006"></a> key set and will use
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsfirst </span>otherwise.
+</p><!--l. 9505--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-65007"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mglsshort[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9507--><p class="noindent" >
+As <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsshort </span>but with an initial capital on the first entry.
+</p><!--l. 9510--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-65008"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mglslong[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9512--><p class="noindent" >
+As <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglslong </span>but with an initial capital on the first entry.
+</p><!--l. 9515--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-65009"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mglsfull[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9517--><p class="noindent" >
+As <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsfull </span>but with an initial capital on the first entry.
+</p><!--l. 9520--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9520--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.11.3 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mglsotherfields"></a>Other Fields</h4>
+<!--l. 9523--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-66001"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsname[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9525--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsname </span>instead of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>for each entry.
+</p><!--l. 9528--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-66002"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MGlsname[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9530--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Glsname </span>instead of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>for each entry.
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 9533--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-66003"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mglsname[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9535--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Glsname </span>instead of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>for the first entry and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsname </span>for all the other
+entries.
+</p><!--l. 9539--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-66004"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglssymbol[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9541--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glssymbol </span>if the <span
+class="cmss-10">symbol</span><a
+ id="dx1-66005"></a> key has been set otherwise it uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>for each
+element.
+</p><!--l. 9545--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-66006"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MGlssymbol[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9547--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glssymbol </span>if the <span
+class="cmss-10">symbol</span><a
+ id="dx1-66007"></a> key has been set otherwise it uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Gls </span>for each
+element. (Note that no case change is applied to the symbol as this usually isn’t
+appropriate.)
+</p><!--l. 9552--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-66008"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mglssymbol[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9554--><p class="noindent" >
+As above, but <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Gls </span>is only used for the first element (if it doesn’t have the <span
+class="cmss-10">symbol</span><a
+ id="dx1-66009"></a>
+key set).
+</p><!--l. 9558--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-66010"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsusefield[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9560--><p class="noindent" >
+Use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsdisp{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">field value</span>⟩⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span>if the field given by:
+</p><!--l. 9563--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-66011"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsfield </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9565--><p class="noindent" >
+exists, otherwise use <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>. By default, this is <span
+class="cmtt-10">useri </span>(corresponding to the
+<span
+class="cmss-10">user1</span><a
+ id="dx1-66012"></a> key). If you redefine <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsfield</span>, you will need to use the internal
+name.
+</p><!--l. 9570--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-66013"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mglsusefield[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9572--><p class="noindent" >
+As <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsusefield </span>but the first element starts with an initial uppercase.
+</p><!--l. 9576--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-66014"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MGlsusefield[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9578--><p class="noindent" >
+As <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsusefield </span>but each element starts with an initial uppercase.
+</p><!--l. 9582--><p class="noindent" >You can use the pre-element hook <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglselementprehook </span>to locally redefine
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsfirst</span>. Examples:
+ </p><ol class="enumerate1" >
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-66016x1">if the multi-category is “sample” then use the <span
+class="cmss-10">user2</span><a
+ id="dx1-66017"></a> field otherwise use the <span
+class="cmss-10">user1</span><a
+ id="dx1-66018"></a>
+ field:
+
+
+
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-215">
+ \renewcommand{\mglselementprehook}{%
+   \ifdefstring{\mglscurrentcategory}{sample}%
+   {\renewcommand{\mglsfield}{userii}}%
+   {\renewcommand{\mglsfield}{useri}}%
+ }
+</pre>
+ <!--l. 9593--><p class="nopar" >
+ </p></li>
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-66020x2">if the element’s category is “sample” then use the <span
+class="cmss-10">user2</span><a
+ id="dx1-66021"></a> field otherwise use the
+ <span
+class="cmss-10">user1</span><a
+ id="dx1-66022"></a> field:
+
+
+
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-216">
+ \renewcommand{\mglselementprehook}{%
+   \glsifcategory{\mglscurrentlabel}{sample}%
+   {\renewcommand{\mglsfield}{userii}}%
+   {\renewcommand{\mglsfield}{useri}}%
+ }
+</pre>
+ <!--l. 9603--><p class="nopar" >
+ </p></li>
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-66024x3">if either the multi-entry’s category or the element’s category has the
+ custom attribute “mglsfield” set then use it otherwise use the <span
+class="cmss-10">user1</span><a
+ id="dx1-66025"></a>
+ field:
+
+
+
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-217">
+ \renewcommand{\mglselementprehook}{%
+  \glshascategoryattribute{\mglscurrentcategory}{mglsfield}%
+  {\renewcommand{\mglsfield}{\glsgetcategoryattribute{\mglscurrentcategory}{mglsfield}}}%
+  {%
+    \glshasattribute{\mglscurrentlabel}{mglsfield}%
+    {\renewcommand{\mglsfield}{\glsgetattribute{\mglscurrentlabel}{mglsfield}}}%
+    {\renewcommand{\mglsfield}{useri}}%
+  }%
+ }
+</pre>
+ <!--l. 9618--><p class="nopar" ></p></li></ol>
+<!--l. 9621--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9621--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.11.4 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mpgls"></a>Support for glossaries-prefix (pgls)</h4>
+<!--l. 9624--><p class="noindent" >If you load the <span
+class="cmss-10">glossaries-prefix</span><a
+ id="dx1-67001"></a> package (either after <span
+class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>) or with the <a
+href="#styopt.prefix"><span
+class="cmss-10">prefix</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-67002"></a>
+package option, then the following commands will use one of the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\pgls</span>-like
+commands provided by that package. (See the <span
+class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>user manual for further
+details.)
+</p><!--l. 9630--><p class="indent" > If the <span
+class="cmss-10">glossaries-prefix </span>package hasn’t been loaded then <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>(or analogous
+case-changing variant) will be used instead and a warning is issued. The warning can
+be removed by redefining the following to do nothing:
+</p><!--l. 9634--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-67003"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mpglsWarning </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9636--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 9638--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-67004"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mpgls[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9640--><p class="noindent" >
+Uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\pgls </span>for the first element and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>for the remaining elements.
+</p><!--l. 9644--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-67005"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mpglspl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9646--><p class="noindent" >
+Uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\pglspl </span>for the first element and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glspl </span>for the remaining elements.
+</p><!--l. 9650--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-67006"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mpglsmainpl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9652--><p class="noindent" >
+Only uses the plural form for the main element. The first element uses the prefixing
+command (<span
+class="cmtt-10">\pgls </span>or <span
+class="cmtt-10">\pglspl</span>, depending on whether the first element is the main
+element).
+</p><!--l. 9657--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-67007"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mpgls[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9659--><p class="noindent" >
+Uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Pgls </span>for the first element and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>for the remaining elements.
+</p><!--l. 9663--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-67008"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Mpglsmainpl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 9665--><p class="noindent" >
+Only uses the plural form for the main element. The first element uses the first-letter
+uppercase prefixing command (<span
+class="cmtt-10">\Pgls </span>or <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Pglspl</span>, depending on whether the first
+element is the main element).
+</p><!--l. 9671--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-67009"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MPGls[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9673--><p class="noindent" >
+Uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Pgls </span>for the first element and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Gls </span>for the remaining elements.
+</p><!--l. 9677--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-67010"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MPGlspl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9679--><p class="noindent" >
+Uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Pglspl </span>for the first element and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Glspl </span>for the remaining elements.
+</p><!--l. 9683--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-67011"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MPGlsmainpl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9685--><p class="noindent" >
+Only uses the plural form for the main element. The first element uses the prefixing
+command (<span
+class="cmtt-10">\Pgls </span>or <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Pglspl</span>, depending on whether the first element is the main
+element). All elements are converted to first letter uppercase.
+</p><!--l. 9691--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-67012"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MPGLS[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9693--><p class="noindent" >
+Uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\PGLS </span>for the first element and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\GLS </span>for the remaining elements.
+</p><!--l. 9697--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-67013"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MPGLSpl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9699--><p class="noindent" >
+Uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\PGLSpl </span>for the first element and <span
+class="cmtt-10">\GLSpl </span>for the remaining elements.
+</p><!--l. 9703--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-67014"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\MPGLSmainpl[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9705--><p class="noindent" >
+Only uses the plural form for the main element. All elements are converted to
+uppercase. The first element uses the prefixing command (<span
+class="cmtt-10">\PGLS </span>or <span
+class="cmtt-10">\PGLSpl</span>,
+depending on whether the first element is the main element).
+</p><!--l. 9711--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9711--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.12 </span> <a
+ id="sec:msee"></a>Cross-References</h3>
+<!--l. 9714--><p class="noindent" >Multi-entry labels may be used in the cross-referencing keys <span
+class="cmss-10">see</span><a
+ id="dx1-68001"></a> and <span
+class="cmss-10">seealso</span><a
+ id="dx1-68002"></a>. The
+formatting command will use:
+</p><!--l. 9717--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-68003"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsseefirstitem{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9719--><p class="noindent" >
+for the first item in the list (if it’s a multi-entry) and
+</p><!--l. 9721--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-68004"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsseeitem{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9723--><p class="noindent" >
+for any subsequent items that are multi-entries. The default definition of
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsseeitem </span>is:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-218">
+\newcommand*{\mglsseeitem}[1]{%
+ \mglsname[all={noindex},setup={hyper=allmain}]{#1}%
+}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 9730--><p class="nopar" > This switches off indexing, sets the hyperlink to encompass the entire multi-entry
+content and uses the <span
+class="cmss-10">name</span><a
+ id="dx1-68005"></a> field. The default definition of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsseefirstitem </span>is
+simply <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsseeitem</span>.
+</p><!--l. 9736--><p class="indent" > For example, to use the <span
+class="cmss-10">short</span><a
+ id="dx1-68006"></a> or <span
+class="cmss-10">text</span><a
+ id="dx1-68007"></a> fields:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-219">
+\renewcommand*{\mglsseeitem}[1]{%
+ \mglsshort[all={noindex},setup={hyper=allmain}]{#1}%
+}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 9741--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 9743--><p class="indent" > A multi-entry label may also be used in the <span
+class="cmss-10">alias</span><a
+ id="dx1-68008"></a> key. The hyperlink target will be
+the target for the main entry. For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-220">
+\multiglossaryentry{cbot}{clostridium,botulinum}
+\newglossaryentry{botox}{name=botox,description={},alias={cbot}}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 9748--><p class="nopar" > In this case <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls{botox}</span></span></span> will hyperlink to the <span
+class="cmtt-10">botulinum </span>target.
+</p><!--l. 9752--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Any multi-entries used in the cross-referencing keys must be defined before the
+glossary is displayed. There is some support for <a
+href="#styopt.docdef"><span
+class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
+class="cmss-10">=true</span><a
+ id="dx1-68009"></a> but not for the other
+<a
+href="#styopt.docdef"><span
+class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><a
+ id="dx1-68010"></a> settings. </div>
+</p><!--l. 9756--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 9758--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9758--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.13 </span> <a
+ id="sec:multiextras"></a>Additional Commands</h3>
+<!--l. 9761--><p class="noindent" >You can test if a label represents a multi-entry using:
+</p><!--l. 9762--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-69001"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrifmulti{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">true</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9764--><p class="noindent" >
+The following command will expand to the main entry label for the given multi-entry
+label:
+</p><!--l. 9767--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-69002"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmultimain{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9769--><p class="noindent" >
+This will expand to nothing if the supplied ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">multi-label</span>⟩ hasn’t been defined as a
+multi-entry. Similarly, for the complete label list:
+</p><!--l. 9773--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-69003"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmultilist{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9775--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 9777--><p class="indent" > To iterate over all the list of all elements:
+</p><!--l. 9778--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-69004"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsforelements{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">cs</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">body</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9780--><p class="noindent" >
+This defines ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">cs</span>⟩ to the current element label on each iteration of the loop, which can
+be used to reference the label in ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">body</span>⟩. This internally uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\@for </span>(patched by the <span
+class="cmss-10">xfor</span><a
+ id="dx1-69005"></a>
+package).
+</p><!--l. 9786--><p class="indent" > There is a similar command that skips the main element:
+</p><!--l. 9787--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-69006"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mglsforotherelements{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">cs</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">body</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9789--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 9791--><p class="indent" > The total number of elements can be obtained with:
+</p><!--l. 9792--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-69007"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmultitotalelements{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9794--><p class="noindent" >
+This expands to the number, if ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">multi-label</span>⟩ is defined, otherwise expands to
+nothing.
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 9798--><p class="indent" > The index of the main element can be obtained with:
+</p><!--l. 9799--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-69008"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmultimainindex{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9801--><p class="noindent" >
+This expands to the index, if ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">multi-label</span>⟩ is defined, otherwise expands to nothing.
+Indexing starts from 1 for the first element. The index of the final non-main element
+can be obtained with:
+</p><!--l. 9806--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-69009"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmultilastotherindex{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9808--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 9810--><p class="indent" > The <span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry </span>command will write the label information to the <span
+class="cmtt-10">aux</span><a
+ id="dx1-69010"></a>
+file using:
+</p><!--l. 9812--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-69011"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\writemultiglossentry{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">main-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">list</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9814--><p class="noindent" >
+This is will write the following line to the <span
+class="cmtt-10">aux</span><a
+ id="dx1-69012"></a> file:
+</p><!--l. 9817--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
+class="cmtt-10">\@glsxtr at multientry{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">multi-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">main-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">list</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9818--><p class="noindent" >
+This is provided to support <a
+href="#styopt.docdef"><span
+class="cmss-10">docdef</span></a><span
+class="cmss-10">=true</span><a
+ id="dx1-69013"></a> and also for the benefit of any tools that
+require the information (such as <a
+ id="dx1-69014"></a><a
+href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
+class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> or autocompletion tools). If it’s
+not required and causes too much clutter, it can be disabled by redefining
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\writemultiglossentry </span>to do nothing.
+</p><!--l. 9825--><p class="noindent" >
+</p>
+<!--l. 9825--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">6.14 </span> <a
+ id="sec:mbib2gls"></a>bib2gls</h3>
+<!--l. 9828--><p class="noindent" >In the <a
+ id="dx1-70001"></a><span
+class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>v2.9+ user manual, these multi-entry sets are referred to as
+“compound entries” or “compound sets” to differentiate them from <a
+ id="dx1-70002"></a><span
+class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>’s
+multi-entry types (such as <span
+class="cmtt-10">@dualentry</span>).
+</p><!--l. 9833--><p class="indent" > Each instance of one of the <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mgls</span>-like commands is written to the <span
+class="cmtt-10">aux</span><a
+ id="dx1-70003"></a> file and so
+can be picked up by <a
+ id="dx1-70004"></a><span
+class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>(at least version 2.9). The resource options can be used
+to determine whether or not to consider the other (non-main) elements to be
+dependent on the main element.
+</p><!--l. 9839--><p class="indent" > With <a
+ id="dx1-70005"></a><span
+class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>, you can either define the compound entries in the document with
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\multiglossaryentry </span>(or <span
+class="cmtt-10">\providemultiglossaryentry</span>) or you can use the
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">@compoundset </span>entry type in a <span
+class="cmtt-10">bib</span><a
+ id="dx1-70006"></a> file. Whichever method you use, remember that
+the entries that form the elements of the set must be defined first. See the <a
+ id="dx1-70007"></a><span
+class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>
+manual (v2.9+) for further details.
+</p><!--l. 9846--><p class="indent" > You can use the resource option <span
+class="cmss-10">compound-adjust-name </span>to replace the <span
+class="cmss-10">name</span><a
+ id="dx1-70008"></a> field
+of the main entry to:
+</p><!--l. 9848--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70009"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmultientryadjustedname{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">sublist1</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">sublist2</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9850--><p class="noindent" >
+where ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ is the label identifying the compound set, ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩ was the value of the
+
+
+
+<span
+class="cmss-10">name</span><a
+ id="dx1-70010"></a> before adjustment, ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">sublist1</span>⟩ is the sub-list of other element labels before the
+main element (empty if the main element is the first element in the list), and ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">sublist2</span>⟩
+is the sub-list of other elements after the main element (empty if the main label is the
+final element).
+</p><!--l. 9859--><p class="indent" > This command is defined in <span
+class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
+ id="dx1-70011"></a>, which is automatically loaded
+with <a
+href="#styopt.record"><span
+class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
+class="cmss-10">=only</span><a
+ id="dx1-70012"></a> and <a
+href="#styopt.record"><span
+class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
+class="cmss-10">=nameref</span><a
+ id="dx1-70013"></a>. Case-changing versions of this command are
+also available. First letter uppercase:
+</p><!--l. 9863--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70014"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrmultientryadjustedname{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">sublist1</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">sublist2</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9865--><p class="noindent" >
+Title case:
+</p><!--l. 9867--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70015"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrmultientryadjustedname{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">sublist1</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">sublist2</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9869--><p class="noindent" >
+All uppercase:
+</p><!--l. 9871--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70016"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\GLSxtrmultientryadjustedname{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">sublist1</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">name</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">sublist2</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9873--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 9875--><p class="indent" > Note that this command doesn’t take the prefix or suffix into account (see
+<a
+href="#sec:mglsfixes"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.3</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:mglsfixes">Prefixes and Suffixes<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:mglsfixes --></a>).
+</p><!--l. 9878--><p class="indent" > The separator between each element in the sub-lists is produced with:
+</p><!--l. 9880--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70017"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmultientryadjustednamesep{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">pre label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">post label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9882--><p class="noindent" >
+The default definition just uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscombinedfirstsepfirst</span>.
+</p><!--l. 9885--><p class="indent" > The separator between the last element of ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">sublist1</span>⟩ and the main element is
+produced with:
+</p><!--l. 9887--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70018"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmultientryadjustednamepresep{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">pre label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">post label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9889--><p class="noindent" >
+Similarly for the separator between the main element and the first element of
+⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">sublist2</span>⟩:
+</p><!--l. 9892--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70019"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmultientryadjustednamepostsep{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">pre label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">post label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span>
+</div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9894--><p class="noindent" >
+These both default to <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmultientryadjustednamesep</span>.
+</p><!--l. 9897--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩ is encapsulated with:
+</p><!--l. 9898--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70020"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmultientryadjustednamefmt{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9900--><p class="noindent" >
+This just does its argument by default. If ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">sublist1</span>⟩ is empty for the first letter upper
+case version, then ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩ is encapsulated with:
+</p><!--l. 9904--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70021"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrmultientryadjustednamefmt{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9906--><p class="noindent" >
+This does <span
+class="cmtt-10">\makefirstuc</span><a
+ id="dx1-70022"></a><span
+class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span>by default. For the title case version, the name is
+encapsulated with:
+</p><!--l. 9909--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70023"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrmultientryadjustednamefmt{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 9911--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscapitalisewords </span>(provided by <span
+class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>v4.48+) if defined or
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">\capitalisewords </span>otherwise. The all uppercase version uses:
+</p><!--l. 9915--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70024"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\GLSxtrmultientryadjustednamefmt{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9917--><p class="noindent" >
+This uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\mfirstucMakeUppercase </span>by default.
+</p><!--l. 9920--><p class="indent" > Each element label in the sub-lists is encapsulated with:
+</p><!--l. 9921--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70025"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmultientryadjustednameother{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9923--><p class="noindent" >
+This does <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsentryname{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span>by default. For the first letter uppercase
+version (where ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">sublist1</span>⟩ isn’t empty), then the element label is encapsulated
+with:
+</p><!--l. 9928--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70026"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Glsxtrmultientryadjustednameother{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9930--><p class="noindent" >
+This does <span
+class="cmtt-10">\Glsentryname{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span>by default. The title case version uses:
+</p><!--l. 9933--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70027"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrmultientryadjustednameother{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9935--><p class="noindent" >
+This does <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsentrytitlecase</span><a
+ id="dx1-70028"></a><span
+class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+class="cmtt-10">{name}</span></span></span> by default. The all uppercase version
+uses:
+</p><!--l. 9939--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-70029"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\GLSxtrmultientryadjustednameother{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 9941--><p class="noindent" >
+This is defined as:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-221">
+\newcommand*{\GLSxtrmultientryadjustednameother}[1]{%
+ \mfirstucMakeUppercase{\glsentryname{#1}}}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 9946--><p class="nopar" >
+
+
+
+</p>
+<!--l. 9948--><p class="indent" > </div>
+</p><!--l. 9948--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">7. <a
id="sec:categories"></a>Categories</h2>
-</p><!--l. 7522--><p class="indent" > Each entry defined by <span
+</p><!--l. 9951--><p class="indent" > Each entry defined by <span
class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry</span><a
- id="dx1-38001"></a> (or commands that internally use it
+ id="dx1-71001"></a> (or commands that internally use it
such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span><a
- id="dx1-38002"></a>) is assigned a category through the <span
+ id="dx1-71002"></a>) is assigned a category through the <span
class="cmss-10">category</span><a
- id="dx1-38003"></a> key. You may
+ id="dx1-71003"></a> key. You may
add any category that you like, but since the category is a label used in the creation
of some control sequences, avoid problematic characters within the category label.
(So take care if you have <span
class="cmss-10">babel</span><a
- id="dx1-38004"></a> shorthands on that make some characters
+ id="dx1-71004"></a> shorthands on that make some characters
active.)
-</p><!--l. 7531--><p class="indent" > The use of categories can give you more control over the way entries are displayed
+</p><!--l. 9960--><p class="indent" > The use of categories can give you more control over the way entries are displayed
in the text or glossary. Note that an entry’s category is independent of the glossary
type. Be careful not to confuse <span
class="cmss-10">category</span><a
- id="dx1-38005"></a> with <span
+ id="dx1-71005"></a> with <span
class="cmss-10">type</span><a
- id="dx1-38006"></a>.
-</p><!--l. 7536--><p class="indent" > The default category assumed by <span
+ id="dx1-71006"></a>.
+</p><!--l. 9965--><p class="indent" > For multi-entry categories, see <a
+href="#sec:multiglscategory"><span
+class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
+class="cmbx-10">6.8</span> </a><a
+href="#sec:multiglscategory">Multi-Entry Category<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:multiglscategory --></a>.
+</p><!--l. 9967--><p class="indent" > The default category assumed by <span
class="cmtt-10">\newglossaryentry </span>is labelled <span
class="cmss-10">general</span><a
- id="dx1-38007"></a>.
+ id="dx1-71007"></a>.
Abbreviations defined with <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>have the category set to <span
class="cmss-10">abbreviation</span><a
- id="dx1-38008"></a>
+ id="dx1-71008"></a>
by default. Abbreviations defined with <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym </span>have the category set to
<span
class="cmss-10">acronym</span><a
- id="dx1-38009"></a> by default.
-</p><!--l. 7543--><p class="indent" > Additionally, if you have enabled <span
+ id="dx1-71009"></a> by default.
+</p><!--l. 9974--><p class="indent" > Additionally, if you have enabled <span
class="cmtt-10">\newterm</span><a
- id="dx1-38010"></a> with the <a
+ id="dx1-71010"></a> with the <a
href="#styopt.index"><span
class="cmss-10">index</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38011"></a> package option
+ id="dx1-71011"></a> package option
that command will set the category to <span
class="cmss-10">index</span><a
- id="dx1-38012"></a> by default. If you have enabled
+ id="dx1-71012"></a> by default. If you have enabled
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewsymbol</span><a
- id="dx1-38013"></a> with the <a
+ id="dx1-71013"></a> with the <a
href="#styopt.symbols"><span
class="cmss-10">symbols</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38014"></a> package option, that command will set the
+ id="dx1-71014"></a> package option, that command will set the
category to <span
class="cmss-10">symbol</span><a
- id="dx1-38015"></a>. If you have enabled <span
+ id="dx1-71015"></a>. If you have enabled <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewnumber</span><a
- id="dx1-38016"></a> with the <a
+ id="dx1-71016"></a> with the <a
href="#styopt.numbers"><span
class="cmss-10">numbers</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38017"></a> package
+ id="dx1-71017"></a> package
option, that command will set the category to <span
class="cmss-10">number</span><a
- id="dx1-38018"></a>.
-</p><!--l. 7551--><p class="indent" > You can obtain the category label for a given entry using
-</p><!--l. 7552--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38019"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-71018"></a>.
+</p><!--l. 9982--><p class="indent" > You can obtain the category label for a given entry using
+</p><!--l. 9983--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71019"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glscategory{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7554--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 9985--><p class="noindent" >
This is equivalent to commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryname </span>and so may be used in an
expandable context. No error is generated if the entry doesn’t exist.
-</p><!--l. 7559--><p class="indent" > You can test the category for a given entry using
-</p><!--l. 7560--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38020"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 9990--><p class="indent" > You can test the category for a given entry using
+</p><!--l. 9991--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71020"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsifcategory{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">entry-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -15091,12 +19041,12 @@
class="cmitt-10">false part</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7563--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 9994--><p class="noindent" >
This is equivalent to </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
class="cmtt-10">\ifglsfieldeq</span><a
- id="dx1-38021"></a><span
+ id="dx1-71021"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">entry-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span><span
@@ -15117,15 +19067,15 @@
</div> so any restrictions that apply to <span
class="cmtt-10">\ifglsfieldeq </span>also apply to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsifcategory</span>.
-<!--l. 7572--><p class="indent" > Each category may have a set of attributes. For example, the <span
+<!--l. 10003--><p class="indent" > Each category may have a set of attributes. For example, the <span
class="cmss-10">general</span><a
- id="dx1-38022"></a> and <span
+ id="dx1-71022"></a> and <span
class="cmss-10">acronym</span><a
- id="dx1-38023"></a>
+ id="dx1-71023"></a>
categories have the attribute <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38024"></a> set to “true” to indicate that all entries with
+ id="dx1-71024"></a> set to “true” to indicate that all entries with
either of those categories are regular entries (as opposed to abbreviations).
This attribute is accessed by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryfmt </span>to determine whether to use
@@ -15132,10 +19082,9 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsgenentryfmt </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrgenabbrvfmt</span>.
-</p><!--l. 7580--><p class="indent" > Other attributes recognised by <span
+</p><!--l. 10011--><p class="indent" > Other attributes recognised by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>are:
</p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7584--><p class="noindent" >
@@ -15142,17 +19091,16 @@
<a
id="catattr.nohyperfirst"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">nohyperfirst</span><a
- id="dx1-38025"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7584--><p class="noindent" >When using commands like <span
+ id="dx1-71025"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">When using commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
- id="dx1-38026"></a> this will automatically suppress the hyperlink
- on <a
- id="dx1-38027"></a><a
+ id="dx1-71026"></a> this will automatically suppress the
+ hyperlink on <a
+ id="dx1-71027"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> for entries with a category that has this attribute set to
“true”. (This settings can be overridden by explicitly setting the <span
class="cmss-10">hyper</span><a
- id="dx1-38028"></a>
+ id="dx1-71028"></a>
key on or off in the optional argument of commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>.) As
from version 1.07, <span
@@ -15160,7 +19108,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\Glsfirst</span>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSfirst </span>and their plural
versions (which should ideally behave in a similar way to the <a
- id="dx1-38029"></a>first use of
+ id="dx1-71029"></a>first use of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspl</span>) now honour this attribute (but not the package-wide
@@ -15168,107 +19116,96 @@
href="#styopt.hyperfirst"><span
class="cmss-10">hyperfirst</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=false</span><a
- id="dx1-38030"></a> option, which matches the behaviour of <span
+ id="dx1-71030"></a> option, which matches the behaviour of <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span><a
- id="dx1-38031"></a>). If you want
+ id="dx1-71031"></a>). If you want
commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfirst </span>to ignore the <a
href="#catattr.nohyperfirst"><span
class="cmss-10">nohyperfirst</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38032"></a> attribute then just
+ id="dx1-71032"></a> attribute then just
redefine
- </p><!--l. 7597--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38033"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 10028--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71033"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrchecknohyperfirst{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 7599--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 10030--><p class="noindent" >
to do nothing.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7602--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="catattr.nohyper"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">nohyper</span><a
- id="dx1-38034"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7602--><p class="noindent" >When using commands like <span
+ id="dx1-71034"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">When using commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
- id="dx1-38035"></a> this will automatically suppress the hyperlink
- for entries with a category that has this attribute set to “true”. (This settings
- can be overridden by explicitly setting the <span
+ id="dx1-71035"></a> this will automatically suppress the
+ hyperlink for entries with a category that has this attribute set to “true”. (This
+ settings can be overridden by explicitly setting the <span
class="cmss-10">hyper</span><a
- id="dx1-38036"></a> key on or off in the optional
- argument of commands like <span
+ id="dx1-71036"></a> key on or off in the
+ optional argument of commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7609--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.indexonlyfirst"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">indexonlyfirst</span><a
- id="dx1-38037"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7609--><p class="noindent" >This is similar to the <a
+ id="dx1-71037"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is similar to the <a
href="#styopt.indexonlyfirst"><span
class="cmss-10">indexonlyfirst</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38038"></a> package option but only for entries that have
- a category with this attribute set to “true”.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7613--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-71038"></a> package option but only for entries
+ that have a category with this attribute set to “true”.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.wrgloss"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">wrgloss</span><a
- id="dx1-38039"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7613--><p class="noindent" >When using commands like <span
+ id="dx1-71039"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">When using commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
- id="dx1-38040"></a>, if this attribute is set to “after”, it will
+ id="dx1-71040"></a>, if this attribute is set to “after”, it will
automatically implement <span
class="cmss-10">wrgloss</span><a
- id="dx1-38041"></a><span
+ id="dx1-71041"></a><span
class="cmss-10">=after</span>. (New to v1.14.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7617--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.discardperiod"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">discardperiod</span><a
- id="dx1-38042"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7617--><p class="noindent" >If set to “true”, the post-<a
- id="dx1-38043"></a><a
-href="#glo:linktext">link-text</a> hook will discard a full stop (period) that
- follows <span
+ id="dx1-71042"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If set to “true”, the post-<a
+ id="dx1-71043"></a><a
+href="#glo:linktext">link-text</a> hook will discard a full stop
+ (period) that follows <span
class="cmti-10">non-plural </span>commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>or <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glstext</span>. (Provided for entries such
- as abbreviations that end with a full stop.) This attribute is only applicable to
- entries defined using <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glstext</span>. (Provided
+ for entries such as abbreviations that end with a full stop.) This attribute is
+ only applicable to entries defined using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
-class="cmtt-10">\newacronym </span>if it’s using
- <span
+class="cmtt-10">\newacronym </span>if
+ it’s using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>.) This attribute doesn’t apply to the accessibility
fields.
-
-
-
- </p><!--l. 7626--><p class="noindent" >Note that this can cause a problem if you access a field that doesn’t end with a
+ <!--l. 10057--><p class="noindent" >Note that this can cause a problem if you access a field that doesn’t end with a
full stop. For example:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-174">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-222">
\newabbreviation
 [user1={German Speaking \TeX\ User Group}]
 {dante}{DANTE e.V.}{Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX\
e.V.}
</pre>
- <!--l. 7633--><p class="nopar" > Here the <span
+ <!--l. 10064--><p class="nopar" > Here the <span
class="cmss-10">short</span><a
- id="dx1-38044"></a> and <span
+ id="dx1-71044"></a> and <span
class="cmss-10">long</span><a
- id="dx1-38045"></a> fields end with a full stop, but the <span
+ id="dx1-71045"></a> fields end with a full stop, but the <span
class="cmss-10">user1</span><a
- id="dx1-38046"></a> field doesn’t.
+ id="dx1-71046"></a> field doesn’t.
The simplest solution in this situation is to put the sentence terminator in the
final optional argument. For example:
@@ -15275,50 +19212,46 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-175">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-223">
\glsuseri{dante}[.]
</pre>
- <!--l. 7640--><p class="nopar" > This will bring the punctuation character inside the <a
- id="dx1-38047"></a><a
+ <!--l. 10071--><p class="nopar" > This will bring the punctuation character inside the <a
+ id="dx1-71047"></a><a
href="#glo:linktext">link-text</a> and it won’t be
discarded.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7644--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="catattr.pluraldiscardperiod"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">pluraldiscardperiod</span><a
- id="dx1-38048"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7644--><p class="noindent" >If this attribute is set to “true” <span
+ id="dx1-71048"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If this attribute is set to “true” <span
class="cmti-10">and </span>the <a
href="#catattr.discardperiod"><span
class="cmss-10">discardperiod</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38049"></a> attribute is set to “true”,
- this will behave as above for the plural commands like <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glspl </span>or <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glsplural</span>.
- This attribute is only applicable to entries defined using <span
-class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or
+ id="dx1-71049"></a> attribute is
+ set to “true”, this will behave as above for the plural commands like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glspl </span>or
<span
+class="cmtt-10">\glsplural</span>. This attribute is only applicable to entries defined using
+ <span
+class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym </span>if it’s using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7651--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.retainfirstuseperiod"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">retainfirstuseperiod</span><a
- id="dx1-38050"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7651--><p class="noindent" >If this attribute is set to “true” then the full stop won’t be discarded
- for <a
- id="dx1-38051"></a><a
+ id="dx1-71050"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If this attribute is set to “true” then the full stop won’t be
+ discarded for <a
+ id="dx1-71051"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a> instances, even if <a
href="#catattr.discardperiod"><span
class="cmss-10">discardperiod</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38052"></a> or <a
+ id="dx1-71052"></a> or <a
href="#catattr.pluraldiscardperiod"><span
class="cmss-10">pluraldiscardperiod</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38053"></a> are
+ id="dx1-71053"></a> are
set. This is useful for ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩) abbreviation styles where only the
@@ -15329,54 +19262,52 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>.) This attribute doesn’t apply to the accessibility
fields.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7661--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.markwords"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">markwords</span><a
- id="dx1-38054"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7661--><p class="noindent" >If this attribute is set to “true” any entry defined using <span
+ id="dx1-71054"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If this attribute is set to “true” any entry defined using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span><a
- id="dx1-38055"></a> will
- automatically have spaces in the long form replaced with
- </p><!--l. 7664--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38056"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-71055"></a>
+ will automatically have spaces in the long form replaced with
+ <!--l. 10095--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71056"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrwordsep </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 7666--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 10097--><p class="noindent" >
and each word is encapsulated with
- </p><!--l. 7668--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38057"></a> <span
+ </p><!--l. 10099--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71057"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrword{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">word</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 7670--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 10101--><p class="noindent" >
For example:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-176">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-224">
\glssetcategoryattribute{abbreviation}{markwords}{true}
\newabbreviation{ip}{IP}{Internet Protocol}
</pre>
- <!--l. 7675--><p class="nopar" > is essentially the same as
+ <!--l. 10106--><p class="nopar" > is essentially the same as
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-177">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-225">
\newabbreviation{ip}{IP}
{\glsxtrword{Internet}\glsxtrwordsep\glsxtrword{Protocol}}
</pre>
- <!--l. 7680--><p class="nopar" > The “hyphen” styles, such as <a
+ <!--l. 10111--><p class="nopar" > The “hyphen” styles, such as <a
href="#abbrstyle.long-hyphen-short-hyphen"><span
class="cmss-10">long-hyphen-short-hyphen</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38058"></a>, take advantage of this
+ id="dx1-71058"></a>, take advantage of this
markup. If the inserted material (provided in the final argument of commands
like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
- id="dx1-38059"></a>) starts with a hyphen then <span
+ id="dx1-71059"></a>) starts with a hyphen then <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrwordsep </span>is locally redefined to a
hyphen. (The default value is a space). Note that this only applies to
commands like <span
@@ -15387,72 +19318,68 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-178">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-226">
\newcommand{\hyplong}[2][]{%
 {\def\glsxtrwordsep{-}\glsxtrlong[#1]{#2}}}
</pre>
- <!--l. 7692--><p class="nopar" >
- </p><!--l. 7694--><p class="noindent" >This setting will also adjust the long plural. This attribute is only applicable to
+ <!--l. 10123--><p class="nopar" >
+ </p><!--l. 10125--><p class="noindent" >This setting will also adjust the long plural. This attribute is only applicable to
entries defined using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym </span>if it’s using
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>.)
- </p><!--l. 7698--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> This setting may result in the <span
+ </p><!--l. 10129--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> This setting may result in the <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrword </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrwordsep </span>markup
ending up in the <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-38060"></a> field, depending on the style in use. </div>
- </p><!--l. 7702--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-71060"></a> field, depending on the style in use. </div>
+ </p><!--l. 10133--><p class="noindent" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7704--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="catattr.markshortwords"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">markshortwords</span><a
- id="dx1-38061"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7704--><p class="noindent" >This is similar to <a
+ id="dx1-71061"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This is similar to <a
href="#catattr.markwords"><span
class="cmss-10">markwords</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38062"></a> but applies to the short form. (Only useful for
- abbreviations that contain spaces.) This attribute is only applicable to
- entries defined using <span
+ id="dx1-71062"></a> but applies to the short form. (Only
+ useful for abbreviations that contain spaces.) This attribute is only applicable
+ to entries defined using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym </span>if it’s using
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>.)
- </p><!--l. 7710--><p class="noindent" >This setting will only adjust the short plural if the <span
+ <!--l. 10141--><p class="noindent" >This setting will only adjust the short plural if the <span
class="cmss-10">shortplural</span><a
- id="dx1-38063"></a> key isn’t used.
+ id="dx1-71063"></a> key isn’t used.
This setting will take precedence over <a
href="#catattr.insertdots"><span
class="cmss-10">insertdots</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38064"></a>.
- </p><!--l. 7714--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> This setting may result in the <span
+ id="dx1-71064"></a>.
+ </p><!--l. 10145--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> This setting may result in the <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrword </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrwordsep </span>markup
ending up in the <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-38065"></a> field, depending on the style in use. </div>
- </p><!--l. 7718--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-71065"></a> field, depending on the style in use. </div>
+ </p><!--l. 10149--><p class="noindent" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7720--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="catattr.insertdots"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">insertdots</span><a
- id="dx1-38066"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7720--><p class="noindent" >If this attribute is set to “true” any entry defined using <span
+ id="dx1-71066"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If this attribute is set to “true” any entry defined using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span><a
- id="dx1-38067"></a> will
- automatically have full stops (periods) inserted after each letter. The entry will
- be defined with those dots present as though they had been present in the ⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩
- argument of <span
-class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(rather than inserting them every time the
- entry is used). The short plural form defaults to the new dotted version of the
- original ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-71067"></a>
+ will automatically have full stops (periods) inserted after each letter. The entry
+ will be defined with those dots present as though they had been present in the
+ ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩ argument of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(rather than inserting them every time
+ the entry is used). The short plural form defaults to the new dotted version of
+ the original ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩ form with the plural suffix appended. <span
class="cmti-10">This setting is</span>
<span
@@ -15459,7 +19386,7 @@
class="cmti-10">incompatible with </span><a
href="#catattr.markshortwords"><span
class="cmssi-10">markshortwords</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38068"></a><span
+ id="dx1-71068"></a><span
class="cmti-10">. </span>This attribute is only applicable to
entries defined using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
@@ -15466,39 +19393,37 @@
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym </span>if it’s using
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>.)
-
-
-
- </p><!--l. 7732--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you explicitly override the short plural using the <span
+ <!--l. 10163--><p class="noindent" ><div class="important" title="Important Note"> If you explicitly override the short plural using the <span
class="cmss-10">shortplural</span><a
- id="dx1-38069"></a> key, you must
+ id="dx1-71069"></a> key, you must
explicitly insert the dots yourself (since there’s no way for the code to
determine if the plural has a suffix that shouldn’t be followed by a dot).
</div>
- </p><!--l. 7738--><p class="noindent" >
- </p><!--l. 7740--><p class="noindent" >This attribute is best used with the <a
+ </p><!--l. 10169--><p class="noindent" >
+
+
+
+ </p><!--l. 10171--><p class="noindent" >This attribute is best used with the <a
href="#catattr.discardperiod"><span
class="cmss-10">discardperiod</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38070"></a> attribute set to “true”.
+ id="dx1-71070"></a> attribute set to “true”.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7743--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="catattr.aposplural"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">aposplural</span><a
- id="dx1-38071"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7743--><p class="noindent" >If this attribute is set to “true”, <span
+ id="dx1-71071"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If this attribute is set to “true”, <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span><a
- id="dx1-38072"></a> will insert an
+ id="dx1-71072"></a> will insert an
apostrophe (’) before the plural suffix for the <span
class="cmti-10">short </span>plural form (unless
explicitly overridden with the <span
class="cmss-10">shortplural</span><a
- id="dx1-38073"></a> key). The long plural form is
+ id="dx1-71073"></a> key). The long plural form is
unaffected by this setting. This setting overrides <a
href="#catattr.noshortplural"><span
class="cmss-10">noshortplural</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38074"></a>. This
+ id="dx1-71074"></a>. This
attribute is only applicable to entries defined using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or
<span
@@ -15506,28 +19431,26 @@
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>.) Check with your supervisor,
publisher or editor if you want to use this attribute as this usage is
controversial.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7755--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.noshortplural"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">noshortplural</span><a
- id="dx1-38075"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7755--><p class="noindent" >If this attribute is set to “true”, <span
+ id="dx1-71075"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If this attribute is set to “true”, <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span><a
- id="dx1-38076"></a> won’t append
+ id="dx1-71076"></a> won’t append
the plural suffix for the short plural form. This means the <span
class="cmss-10">short</span><a
- id="dx1-38077"></a> and
+ id="dx1-71077"></a> and
<span
class="cmss-10">shortplural</span><a
- id="dx1-38078"></a> values will be the same unless explicitly overridden. <span
+ id="dx1-71078"></a> values will be the same unless explicitly overridden. <span
class="cmti-10">This setting</span>
<span
class="cmti-10">is incompatible with </span><a
href="#catattr.aposplural"><span
class="cmssi-10">aposplural</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38079"></a><span
+ id="dx1-71079"></a><span
class="cmti-10">. </span>This attribute is only applicable to
entries defined using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
@@ -15534,50 +19457,41 @@
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym </span>if it’s using
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7763--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.headuc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">headuc</span><a
- id="dx1-38080"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7763--><p class="noindent" >If this attribute is set to “true”, commands like <span
+ id="dx1-71080"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If this attribute is set to “true”, commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfmtshort</span><a
- id="dx1-38081"></a> will use the
+ id="dx1-71081"></a> will use the
upper case version in the page headers.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7767--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.tagging"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">tagging</span><a
- id="dx1-38082"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7767--><p class="noindent" >If this attribute is set to “true”, the tagging command defined by
+ id="dx1-71082"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If this attribute is set to “true”, the tagging command defined by
<span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableInitialTagging</span><a
- id="dx1-38083"></a> will be activated to use <span
+ id="dx1-71083"></a> will be activated to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrtagfont</span><a
- id="dx1-38084"></a> in
+ id="dx1-71084"></a> in
the glossary (see <a
href="#sec:tagging"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
class="cmbx-10">4.1</span> </a><a
href="#sec:tagging">Tagging Initials<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:tagging --></a>).
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
-
-
-
- <!--l. 7772--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.entrycount"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">entrycount</span><a
- id="dx1-38085"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7772--><p class="noindent" >Unlike the above attributes, this attribute isn’t boolean but instead must be an
- integer value and is used in combination with <span
+ id="dx1-71085"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Unlike the above attributes, this attribute isn’t boolean but instead must
+ be an integer value and is used in combination with <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsenableentrycount</span><a
- id="dx1-38086"></a> (see
- <a
+ id="dx1-71086"></a>
+ (see <a
href="#sec:entrycountmods"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
class="cmbx-10">2.5</span> </a><a
@@ -15585,11 +19499,11 @@
undefined for categories that shouldn’t have this facility enabled. The value of
this attribute is used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrifcounttrigger</span><a
- id="dx1-38087"></a> to determine how commands
+ id="dx1-71087"></a> to determine how commands
such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\cgls</span><a
- id="dx1-38088"></a> should behave.
- </p><!--l. 7780--><p class="noindent" >With <span
+ id="dx1-71088"></a> should behave.
+ <!--l. 10211--><p class="noindent" >With <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>, commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\cgls </span>use <span
class="cmtt-10">\cglsformat </span>only if the previous
@@ -15598,64 +19512,59 @@
for entries that have the <a
href="#catattr.entrycount"><span
class="cmss-10">entrycount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38089"></a> attribute set and where the previous
+ id="dx1-71089"></a> attribute set and where the previous
usage count for that entry is less than or equal to the value of that
attribute.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7787--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="catattr.linkcount"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">linkcount</span><a
- id="dx1-38090"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7787--><p class="noindent" >This attribute is set to <span
+ id="dx1-71090"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This attribute is set to <span
class="cmtt-10">true </span>by <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableLinkCounting</span><a
- id="dx1-38091"></a> (see
+ id="dx1-71091"></a> (see
<a
href="#sec:linkcount"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">7.2</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">8.2</span> </a><a
href="#sec:linkcount">Link Counting<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:linkcount --></a>).
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7791--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.linkcountmaster"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">linkcountmaster</span><a
- id="dx1-38092"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7791--><p class="noindent" >This attribute is set to the name of the master counter by
+ id="dx1-71092"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This attribute is set to the name of the master counter by
+
+
+
<span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableLinkCounting</span><a
- id="dx1-38093"></a> if the optional argument is provided (see
+ id="dx1-71093"></a> if the optional argument is provided (see
<a
href="#sec:linkcount"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">7.2</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">8.2</span> </a><a
href="#sec:linkcount">Link Counting<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:linkcount --></a>).
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7796--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.glossdesc"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">glossdesc</span><a
- id="dx1-38094"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7796--><p class="noindent" >The <span
+ id="dx1-71094"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">The <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentrydesc</span><a
- id="dx1-38095"></a> command (used in the predefined glossary styles) is
+ id="dx1-71095"></a> command (used in the predefined glossary styles) is
modified by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>to check for this attribute. The attribute may have
- one of the following values: </p>
+ one of the following values:
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 7801--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmtt-10">firstuc</span>: the first letter of the description will be converted to upper
case (using <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glsentrydesc</span><a
- id="dx1-38096"></a>).
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 7804--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ id="dx1-71096"></a>).
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmtt-10">title</span>: the description will be used in the argument of the title
casing command. If you have at least <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>v4.48, the title
@@ -15663,33 +19572,30 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glscapitalisewords</span>, which
defaults to <span
class="cmtt-10">\capitalisewords</span><a
- id="dx1-38097"></a> (provided by <span
+ id="dx1-71097"></a> (provided by <span
class="cmss-10">mfirstuc</span><a
- id="dx1-38098"></a>). You can either
-
-
-
+ id="dx1-71098"></a>). You can either
redefine <span
class="cmtt-10">\glscapitalisewords </span>if you want the change to also affect
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentrytitlecase</span><a
- id="dx1-38099"></a> or if you only want the change to apply to the
+ id="dx1-71099"></a> or if you only want the change to apply to the
attribute case-changing then redefine:
- </p><!--l. 7812--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38100"></a> <span
+ <!--l. 10243--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71100"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfieldtitlecasecs{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">phrase cs</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
- </p><!--l. 7814--><p class="noindent" >
+ </p><!--l. 10245--><p class="noindent" >
For example:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-179">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-227">
\newcommand*{\glsxtrfieldtitlecasecs}[1]{\xcapitalisefmtwords*{#1}}
</pre>
- <!--l. 7818--><p class="nopar" > (Note that the argument to <span
+ <!--l. 10249--><p class="nopar" > (Note that the argument to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfieldtitlecasecs </span>will be a control
sequence whose replacement text is the entry’s description, which is why
<span
@@ -15697,187 +19603,165 @@
class="cmtt-10">\capitalisefmtwords</span>.)
</p>
</li></ul>
- <!--l. 7825--><p class="noindent" >Any other values of this attribute are ignored. Remember that there are design
+ <!--l. 10256--><p class="noindent" >Any other values of this attribute are ignored. Remember that there are design
limitations for both the first letter uppercasing and the title casing commands.
See the <span
class="cmss-10">mfirstuc</span><a
- id="dx1-38101"></a> user manual for further details.
+ id="dx1-71101"></a> user manual for further details.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7830--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="catattr.glossdescfont"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">glossdescfont</span><a
- id="dx1-38102"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7830--><p class="noindent" >(New to version 1.04) In addition to the above, the modified <span
+ id="dx1-71102"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to version 1.04) In addition to the above, the modified
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentrydesc</span><a
- id="dx1-38103"></a>
- command also checks this attribute. If set, it should be the name of a control
- sequence (without the leading backslash) that takes one argument. This control
- sequence will be applied to the description text. For example:
+ id="dx1-71103"></a> command also checks this attribute. If set, it should be the
+ name of a control sequence (without the leading backslash) that takes one
+ argument. This control sequence will be applied to the description text. For
+ example:
-</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-180">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-228">
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{glossdescfont}{emph}
</pre>
- <!--l. 7838--><p class="nopar" >
+ <!--l. 10269--><p class="nopar" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7841--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="catattr.glossname"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">glossname</span><a
- id="dx1-38104"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7841--><p class="noindent" >As <a
+ id="dx1-71104"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">As <a
href="#catattr.glossdesc"><span
class="cmss-10">glossdesc</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38105"></a> but applies to <span
+ id="dx1-71105"></a> but applies to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentryname</span><a
- id="dx1-38106"></a>. Additionally, if this attribute is
- set to “uc” the name is converted to all capitals.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7845--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-71106"></a>. Additionally, if this
+ attribute is set to “uc” the name is converted to all capitals.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.indexname"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">indexname</span><a
- id="dx1-38107"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7845--><p class="noindent" >If set, the <span
+ id="dx1-71107"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If set, the <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostnamehook </span>hook used at the end of <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentryname</span><a
- id="dx1-38108"></a>
+ id="dx1-71108"></a>
will index the entry using <span
class="cmtt-10">\index</span><a
- id="dx1-38109"></a>. See <a
+ id="dx1-71109"></a>. See <a
href="#sec:autoindex"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">8</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">9</span> </a><a
href="#sec:autoindex">Auto-Indexing<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:autoindex --></a> for
further details.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7850--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.glossnamefont"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">glossnamefont</span><a
- id="dx1-38110"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7850--><p class="noindent" >(New to version 1.04) In addition to the above, the modified <span
+ id="dx1-71110"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to version 1.04) In addition to the above, the modified
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentryname</span><a
- id="dx1-38111"></a>
- command also checks this attribute. If set, it should be the name of a control
- sequence (without the leading backslash) that takes one argument. This control
- sequence will be applied to the name text. For example:
+ id="dx1-71111"></a> command also checks this attribute. If set, it should be the
+ name of a control sequence (without the leading backslash) that takes one
+ argument. This control sequence will be applied to the name text. For
+ example:
-</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-181">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-229">
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{glossnamefont}{emph}
</pre>
- <!--l. 7858--><p class="nopar" > Note that this overrides <span
+ <!--l. 10289--><p class="nopar" > Note that this overrides <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsnamefont </span>which will only be used if this attribute
hasn’t been set.
- </p><!--l. 7862--><p class="noindent" >Remember that glossary styles may additionally apply a font change,
+ </p><!--l. 10293--><p class="noindent" >Remember that glossary styles may additionally apply a font change,
such as the list styles which put the name in the optional argument of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\item</span>.
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7866--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="catattr.glosssymbolfont"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">glosssymbolfont</span><a
- id="dx1-38112"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7866--><p class="noindent" >(New to version 1.42.) This is similar to <a
+ id="dx1-71112"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to version 1.42.) This is similar to <a
href="#catattr.glossnamefont"><span
class="cmss-10">glossnamefont</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38113"></a> and <a
+ id="dx1-71113"></a> and
+ <a
href="#catattr.glossdescfont"><span
class="cmss-10">glossdescfont</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38114"></a> but is
- used by <span
+ id="dx1-71114"></a> but is used by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentrysymbol</span><a
- id="dx1-38115"></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7870--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-71115"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.textformat"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">textformat</span><a
- id="dx1-38116"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7870--><p class="noindent" >(New to version 1.21.) Commands like <span
+ id="dx1-71116"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to version 1.21.) Commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>and <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glstext </span>have the link text
- encapsulated in the argument of <span
-class="cmtt-10">\glstextformat </span>by default. If this attribute is
- set, the control sequence given by the attribute value will be used instead. As
- with the above, the attribute value should be the name (without the leading
- backslash) of a command that takes a single argument (the link text).
- Remember that the abbreviation styles may apply an additional font
+class="cmtt-10">\glstext </span>have the link
+ text encapsulated in the argument of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glstextformat </span>by default. If this
+ attribute is set, the control sequence given by the attribute value will be used
+ instead. As with the above, the attribute value should be the name (without
+ the leading backslash) of a command that takes a single argument (the link
+ text). Remember that the abbreviation styles may apply an additional font
change.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7879--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.hyperoutside"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">hyperoutside</span><a
- id="dx1-38117"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7879--><p class="noindent" >(New to v1.21.) The attribute value may be <span
+ id="dx1-71117"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">(New to v1.21.) The attribute value may be <span
class="cmtt-10">false</span>, <span
-class="cmtt-10">true </span>or unset. If unset,
- <span
+class="cmtt-10">true </span>or unset. If
+ unset, <span
class="cmtt-10">true </span>is assumed. This indicates the default setting of the <span
class="cmss-10">hyperoutside</span><a
- id="dx1-38118"></a> key,
- described in <a
+ id="dx1-71118"></a>
+ key, described in <a
href="#sec:wrglossary"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
class="cmbx-10">2.2</span> </a><a
href="#sec:wrglossary">Entry Indexing<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:wrglossary --></a>.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7885--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.dualindex"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">dualindex</span><a
- id="dx1-38119"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7885--><p class="noindent" >If set, whenever a glossary entry has information written to the external
+ id="dx1-71119"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If set, whenever a glossary entry has information written to the external
glossary file through commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
- id="dx1-38120"></a> and <span
+ id="dx1-71120"></a> and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsadd</span><a
- id="dx1-38121"></a>, a corresponding line
+ id="dx1-71121"></a>, a corresponding line
will be written to the indexing file using <span
class="cmtt-10">\index</span><a
- id="dx1-38122"></a>. See <a
+ id="dx1-71122"></a>. See <a
href="#sec:autoindex"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">8</span>
+class="cmbx-10">9</span>
</a><a
href="#sec:autoindex">Auto-Indexing<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:autoindex --></a> for further details.
-
-
-
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7891--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.targeturl"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">targeturl</span><a
- id="dx1-38123"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7891--><p class="noindent" >If set, the hyperlink generated by commands like <span
-class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>will be set to the URL
- provided by this attributes value. For example:
+ id="dx1-71123"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If set, the hyperlink generated by commands like <span
+class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>will be set to the
+ URL provided by this attributes value. For example:
-</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-182">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-230">
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targeturl}{master-doc.pdf}
</pre>
- <!--l. 7896--><p class="nopar" > (See also the accompanying sample file <span
+ <!--l. 10327--><p class="nopar" > (See also the accompanying sample file <span
class="cmtt-10">sample-external.tex</span>.) If the URL
contains awkward characters (such as <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">%</span></span></span> or <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
@@ -15885,16 +19769,16 @@
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>
package provides commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspercentchar</span><a
- id="dx1-38124"></a> and <span
+ id="dx1-71124"></a> and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstildechar </span>that
expand to literal characters.
- </p><!--l. 7904--><p class="noindent" >If you want to a named anchor within the target URL (notionally adding
+ </p><!--l. 10335--><p class="noindent" >If you want to a named anchor within the target URL (notionally adding
<span
class="cmtt-10">#</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩ to the URL), then you also need to set <a
href="#catattr.targetname"><span
class="cmss-10">targetname</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38125"></a> to the anchor ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-71125"></a> to the anchor ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩.
You may use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslabel </span>within ⟨<span
@@ -15901,7 +19785,7 @@
class="cmti-10">name</span>⟩ which is set by commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>to
the entry’s label.
- </p><!--l. 7910--><p class="noindent" >All the predefined glossary styles start each entry listing with <span
+ </p><!--l. 10341--><p class="noindent" >All the predefined glossary styles start each entry listing with <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstarget</span>
which sets the anchor to <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\glolinkprefix\glslabel</span></span></span>, so if you want
@@ -15908,56 +19792,56 @@
entries to link to glossaries in the URL given by <a
href="#catattr.targeturl"><span
class="cmss-10">targeturl</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38126"></a>, you can just
+ id="dx1-71126"></a>, you can just
do:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-183">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-231">
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targetname}{\glolinkprefix\glslabel}
</pre>
- <!--l. 7917--><p class="nopar" > (If the target document changed <span
+ <!--l. 10348--><p class="nopar" > (If the target document changed <span
class="cmtt-10">\glolinkprefix </span>then you will need to adjust
the above as appropriate.)
- </p><!--l. 7921--><p class="noindent" >If the anchor is in the form ⟨<span
+ </p><!--l. 10352--><p class="noindent" >If the anchor is in the form ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name1</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">.</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name2</span>⟩ then use <a
href="#catattr.targetname"><span
class="cmss-10">targetname</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38127"></a> for the ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-71127"></a> for the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name2</span>⟩
part and <a
href="#catattr.targetcategory"><span
class="cmss-10">targetcategory</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38128"></a> for the ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-71128"></a> for the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">name1</span>⟩ part.
- </p><!--l. 7925--><p class="noindent" >For example:
+ </p><!--l. 10356--><p class="noindent" >For example:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-184">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-232">
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targeturl}{master-doc.pdf}
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targetcategory}{page}
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targetname}{7}
</pre>
- <!--l. 7930--><p class="nopar" > will cause all link text for <span
+ <!--l. 10361--><p class="nopar" > will cause all link text for <span
class="cmtt-10">general </span>entries to link to <span
class="cmtt-10">master-doc.pdf#page.7</span>
(page 7 of that PDF).
- </p><!--l. 7934--><p class="noindent" >If you want a mixture in your document of entries that link to an internal
+ </p><!--l. 10365--><p class="noindent" >If you want a mixture in your document of entries that link to an internal
glossary and entries that link to an external URL then you can use
the starred form of <span
class="cmtt-10">\newignoredglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-38129"></a> for the external list. For
+ id="dx1-71129"></a> for the external list. For
example:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-185">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-233">
\newignoredglossary*{external}
\glssetcategoryattribute{external}{targeturl}{master-doc.pdf}
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{targetname}{\glolinkprefix\glslabel}
@@ -15967,66 +19851,63 @@
  category=external,
  description={external example}}
</pre>
- <!--l. 7950--><p class="nopar" >
+ <!--l. 10381--><p class="nopar" >
</p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7952--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="catattr.externallocation"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">externallocation</span><a
- id="dx1-38130"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7952--><p class="noindent" >The value should be the file name of the target document when manually
- indexing an external location (see <a
+ id="dx1-71130"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">The value should be the file name of the target document when
+ manually indexing an external location (see <a
href="#sec:wrglossary"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
class="cmbx-10">2.2</span> </a><a
-href="#sec:wrglossary">Entry Indexing<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:wrglossary --></a>). In
- general, it’s better to use <a
- id="dx1-38131"></a><a
+href="#sec:wrglossary">Entry Indexing<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:wrglossary --></a>).
+ In general, it’s better to use <a
+ id="dx1-71131"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> v1.7+ which can handle multiple external
sources and doesn’t require this attribute.
-</p>
</dd></dl>
-<!--l. 7960--><p class="indent" > If a term is defined using <span
+<!--l. 10391--><p class="indent" > If a term is defined using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span><a
- id="dx1-38132"></a> and accessibility support has been
+ id="dx1-71132"></a> and accessibility support has been
supplied via the <a
href="#styopt.accsupp"><span
class="cmss-10">accsupp</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38133"></a> package option then the following attributes are also
+ id="dx1-71133"></a> package option then the following attributes are also
available. If <span
class="cmss-10">shortaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38134"></a> isn’t set its value will be obtained from:
-</p><!--l. 7964--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38135"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-71134"></a> isn’t set its value will be obtained from:
+</p><!--l. 10395--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71135"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdefaultshortaccess{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">short</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">long</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 7966--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10397--><p class="noindent" >
This is defined by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp</span><a
- id="dx1-38136"></a> to just do ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-71136"></a> to just do ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ but <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span><a
- id="dx1-38137"></a> redefines it to
+ id="dx1-71137"></a> redefines it to
do ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">long</span>⟩ (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩). The <a
href="#catattr.accessinsertdots"><span
class="cmss-10">accessinsertdots</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38138"></a>, <a
+ id="dx1-71138"></a>, <a
href="#catattr.accessaposplural"><span
class="cmss-10">accessaposplural</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38139"></a> and <a
+ id="dx1-71139"></a> and <a
href="#catattr.accessnoshortplural"><span
class="cmss-10">accessnoshortplural</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38140"></a>
+ id="dx1-71140"></a>
attributes below refer to the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩ form that’s passed to this command.
-</p><!--l. 7974--><p class="indent" > The following attributes are only applicable to entries defined using
+</p><!--l. 10405--><p class="indent" > The following attributes are only applicable to entries defined using
<span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym </span>if it’s using <span
@@ -16034,152 +19915,171 @@
effect if the <a
href="#styopt.accsupp"><span
class="cmss-10">accsupp</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38141"></a> package option hasn’t been used.
+ id="dx1-71141"></a> package option hasn’t been used.
</p><dl class="description"><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7980--><p class="noindent" >
<a
id="catattr.accessinsertdots"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">accessinsertdots</span><a
- id="dx1-38142"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7980--><p class="noindent" >If this attribute is set to “true” and the <span
+ id="dx1-71142"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If this attribute is set to “true” and the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-accsupp</span><a
- id="dx1-38143"></a> package has
- been loaded (with the <a
+ id="dx1-71143"></a>
+ package has been loaded (with the <a
href="#styopt.accsupp"><span
class="cmss-10">accsupp</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38144"></a> option), then this behaves like <a
+ id="dx1-71144"></a> option), then this behaves
+ like <a
href="#catattr.insertdots"><span
class="cmss-10">insertdots</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38145"></a>
- but for the ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-71145"></a> but for the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">short</span>⟩ part used in the <span
class="cmss-10">shortaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38146"></a> field instead of the <span
+ id="dx1-71146"></a> field instead
+ of the <span
class="cmss-10">short</span><a
- id="dx1-38147"></a>
-
-
-
- field. This setting will be overridden by an explicit use of the <span
+ id="dx1-71147"></a> field. This setting will be overridden by an explicit use of
+ the <span
class="cmss-10">shortaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38148"></a>
- key in the optional argument of <span
-class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
+ id="dx1-71148"></a> key in the optional argument of <span
+class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or
+ <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym</span>).
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 7989--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.accessaposplural"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">accessaposplural</span><a
- id="dx1-38149"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 7989--><p class="noindent" >This boolean attribute overrides <a
+ id="dx1-71149"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">This boolean attribute overrides <a
href="#catattr.aposplural"><span
class="cmss-10">aposplural</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38150"></a> for the <span
+ id="dx1-71150"></a> for
+
+
+
+ the <span
class="cmss-10">shortpluralaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38151"></a> key.
- Has no effect if there’s no accessibility support or if the <span
+ id="dx1-71151"></a> key. Has no effect if there’s no accessibility support
+ or if the <span
class="cmss-10">shortaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38152"></a> key
- hasn’t been set or if the <span
+ id="dx1-71152"></a> key hasn’t been set or if the <span
class="cmss-10">shortpluralaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38153"></a> key is explicitly set. If the
- <a
+ id="dx1-71153"></a> key
+ is explicitly set. If the <a
href="#catattr.aposplural"><span
class="cmss-10">aposplural</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38154"></a> is set and this attribute isn’t set and the <span
+ id="dx1-71154"></a> is set and this attribute isn’t set and
+ the <span
class="cmss-10">shortaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38155"></a> key is set,
- then the <a
+ id="dx1-71155"></a> key is set, then the <a
href="#catattr.aposplural"><span
class="cmss-10">aposplural</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38156"></a> setting governs the default <span
+ id="dx1-71156"></a> setting governs the default
+ <span
class="cmss-10">shortpluralaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38157"></a> setting.
- If you want <a
+ id="dx1-71157"></a> setting. If you want <a
href="#catattr.aposplural"><span
class="cmss-10">aposplural</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38158"></a> but don’t want it applied to the accessibility
- support, set the <a
+ id="dx1-71158"></a> but don’t want it applied to
+ the accessibility support, set the <a
href="#catattr.accessaposplural"><span
class="cmss-10">accessaposplural</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38159"></a> attribute to “false”. This attribute is only
- applicable to entries defined using <span
-class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
-class="cmtt-10">\newacronym </span>if
- it’s using <span
+ id="dx1-71159"></a> attribute to “false”. This
+ attribute is only applicable to entries defined using <span
+class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or
+ <span
+class="cmtt-10">\newacronym </span>if it’s using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 8003--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.accessnoshortplural"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">accessnoshortplural</span><a
- id="dx1-38160"></a> </p></dt><dd
+ id="dx1-71160"></a> </dt><dd
class="description">
- <!--l. 8003--><p class="noindent" >This boolean attribute overrides <a
+ This boolean attribute overrides <a
href="#catattr.noshortplural"><span
class="cmss-10">noshortplural</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38161"></a> for the <span
+ id="dx1-71161"></a> for the <span
class="cmss-10">shortpluralaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38162"></a> key.
+ id="dx1-71162"></a> key.
The same conditions apply as for <a
href="#catattr.accessaposplural"><span
class="cmss-10">accessaposplural</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38163"></a>. This attribute is only
+ id="dx1-71163"></a>. This attribute is only
applicable to entries defined using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation </span>(or <span
class="cmtt-10">\newacronym </span>if
it’s using <span
class="cmtt-10">\newabbreviation</span>.)
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 8009--><p class="noindent" >
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.nameshortaccess"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">nameshortaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38164"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 8009--><p class="noindent" >If this attribute is set to “true”, the <span
+ id="dx1-71164"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">If this attribute is set to “true”, the <span
class="cmss-10">access</span><a
- id="dx1-38165"></a> field (used for the <span
+ id="dx1-71165"></a> field (used for
+ the <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-38166"></a> field’s
- accessibility support) automatically assigned if it’s not provided.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 8014--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-71166"></a> field’s accessibility support) automatically assigned if it’s not
+ provided.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.textshortaccess"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">textshortaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38167"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 8014--><p class="noindent" >Like <span
+ id="dx1-71167"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <span
class="cmss-10">nameshortaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38168"></a> but applies to the <span
+ id="dx1-71168"></a> but applies to the <span
class="cmss-10">textaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38169"></a> field automatically
- assigned if it’s not provided.
- </p></dd><dt class="description">
- <!--l. 8018--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-71169"></a> field
+ automatically assigned if it’s not provided.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
<a
id="catattr.firstshortaccess"></a><span
class="cmssbx-10">firstshortaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38170"></a> </p></dt><dd
-class="description">
- <!--l. 8018--><p class="noindent" >Like <span
+ id="dx1-71170"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">Like <span
class="cmss-10">nameshortaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38171"></a> but applies to the <span
+ id="dx1-71171"></a> but applies to the <span
class="cmss-10">firstaccess</span><a
- id="dx1-38172"></a> field automatically
- assigned if it’s not provided.
-</p>
+ id="dx1-71172"></a> field
+ automatically assigned if it’s not provided.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<a
+ id="catattr.combinedfirstsep"></a><span
+class="cmssbx-10">combinedfirstsep</span><a
+ id="dx1-71173"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">The separator to use for <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscombinefirstsep</span><a
+ id="dx1-71174"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<a
+ id="catattr.combinedfirstsepfirst"></a><span
+class="cmssbx-10">combinedfirstsepfirst</span><a
+ id="dx1-71175"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">The separator to use for <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscombinedfirstsepfirst</span><a
+ id="dx1-71176"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<a
+ id="catattr.combinedsepfirst"></a><span
+class="cmssbx-10">combinedsepfirst</span><a
+ id="dx1-71177"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">The separator to use for <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscombinesepfirst</span><a
+ id="dx1-71178"></a>.
+ </dd><dt class="description">
+<a
+ id="catattr.combinedsep"></a><span
+class="cmssbx-10">combinedsep</span><a
+ id="dx1-71179"></a> </dt><dd
+class="description">The separator to use for <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glscombinedsep</span><a
+ id="dx1-71180"></a>.
</dd></dl>
-
-
-
-<!--l. 8024--><p class="indent" > An attribute can be set using:
-</p><!--l. 8025--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38173"></a> <span
+<!--l. 10467--><p class="indent" > An attribute can be set using:
+</p><!--l. 10468--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71181"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glssetcategoryattribute{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16188,26 +20088,76 @@
class="cmitt-10">value</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8027--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10470--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">category-label</span>⟩ is the category label, ⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">attribute-label</span>⟩ is the attribute label and
-⟨<span
-class="cmti-10">value</span>⟩ is the new value for the attribute.
-</p><!--l. 8032--><p class="indent" > There is a shortcut version to set the <a
+class="cmti-10">attribute-label</span>⟩ is the attribute label
+and ⟨<span
+class="cmti-10">value</span>⟩ is the new value for the attribute. <span
+class="cmti-10">This will be localised to the</span>
+
+
+
+<span
+class="cmti-10">current scope. </span>If you want a global definition use the following command
+instead.
+</p><!--l. 10477--><p class="indent" > If you want to apply the same attribute to multiple categories then use:
+</p><!--l. 10479--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71182"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glssetcategoriesattribute{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">category-label list</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">attribute-label</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}</span>
+<span
+class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">value</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 10481--><p class="noindent" >
+<span
+class="cmti-10">This has a global effect.</span>
+</p><!--l. 10484--><p class="indent" > If you also want to set multiple attributes to the same value, then you can
+use:
+</p><!--l. 10486--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71183"></a> <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glssetcategoriesattributes{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">category-label list</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">attribute-label</span>
+<span
+class="cmitt-10">list</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
+class="cmitt-10">value</span>⟩<span
+class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
+</p><!--l. 10488--><p class="noindent" >
+<span
+class="cmti-10">This has a global effect.</span>
+</p><!--l. 10491--><p class="indent" > For example:
+
+
+
+</p>
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-234">
+\newcommand{\latinname}[1]{\emph{#1}}
+\glssetcategoriesattributes{genus,species}{textformat,glossnamefont}{latinname}
+</pre>
+<!--l. 10495--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 10497--><p class="indent" > There is a shortcut version to set the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38174"></a> attribute to “true”:
-</p><!--l. 8034--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38175"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-71184"></a> attribute to “true”:
+</p><!--l. 10499--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71185"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glssetregularcategory{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8036--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 8038--><p class="indent" > If you need to lookup the category label for a particular entry, you can use the
+</p><!--l. 10501--><p class="noindent" >
+This internally uses <span
+class="cmtt-10">\glssetcategoryattribute </span>so it has a local effect.
+</p><!--l. 10505--><p class="indent" > If you need to lookup the category label for a particular entry, you can use the
shortcut command:
-</p><!--l. 8040--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38176"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10507--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71186"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glssetattribute{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">entry-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16215,15 +20165,15 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">value</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8042--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10509--><p class="noindent" >
This uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glssetcategoryattribute </span>with <span
class="cmtt-10">\glscategory </span>to set the attribute. Note
that this will affect all other entries that share this entry’s category.
-</p><!--l. 8047--><p class="indent" > The above use local assignments so they can be placed inside a group to limit
+</p><!--l. 10514--><p class="indent" > The above use local assignments so they can be placed inside a group to limit
their definition. As from v1.47, the value can be unset using:
-</p><!--l. 8049--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38177"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10516--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71187"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsunsetcategoryattribute{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16230,10 +20180,10 @@
class="cmitt-10">attribute-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8051--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 8053--><p class="indent" > You can fetch the value of an attribute for a particular category using:
-</p><!--l. 8055--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38178"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10518--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10520--><p class="indent" > You can fetch the value of an attribute for a particular category using:
+</p><!--l. 10522--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71188"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsgetcategoryattribute{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16240,20 +20190,20 @@
class="cmitt-10">attribute-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8057--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10524--><p class="noindent" >
Again there is a shortcut if you need to lookup the category label for a given
entry:
-</p><!--l. 8060--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38179"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10527--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71189"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsgetattribute{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">entry-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">attribute-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8062--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 8064--><p class="indent" > You can test if an attribute has been assigned to a given category using:
-</p><!--l. 8066--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38180"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10529--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10531--><p class="indent" > You can test if an attribute has been assigned to a given category using:
+</p><!--l. 10533--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71190"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glshascategoryattribute{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16265,17 +20215,17 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">false code</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8069--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10536--><p class="noindent" >
This uses <span
class="cmss-10">etoolbox</span><a
- id="dx1-38181"></a>’s <span
+ id="dx1-71191"></a>’s <span
class="cmtt-10">\ifcsvoid </span>and does ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">true code</span>⟩ if the attribute has been set and
isn’t blank and isn’t <span
class="cmtt-10">\relax</span>. The shortcut if you need to lookup the category label
from an entry is:
-</p><!--l. 8074--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38182"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10541--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71192"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glshasattribute{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">entry-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16287,10 +20237,13 @@
<span
class="cmitt-10">code</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8077--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 8079--><p class="indent" > You can test the value of an attribute for a particular category using:
-</p><!--l. 8081--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38183"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10544--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10546--><p class="indent" > You can test the value of an attribute for a particular category using:
+
+
+
+</p><!--l. 10548--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71193"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsifcategoryattribute{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16304,10 +20257,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">false-part</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-
-
-
-</p><!--l. 8083--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10550--><p class="noindent" >
This tests if the attribute (given by ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">attribute-label</span>⟩) for the category (given by
⟨<span
@@ -16317,33 +20267,33 @@
isn’t set or is set but isn’t equal to ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">value</span>⟩, ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">false part</span>⟩ is done.
-</p><!--l. 8090--><p class="indent" > For example:
+</p><!--l. 10557--><p class="indent" > For example:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-186">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-235">
\glsifcategoryattribute{general}{nohyper}{true}{NO HYPER}{HYPER}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8093--><p class="nopar" > This does “NO HYPER” if the <span
+<!--l. 10560--><p class="nopar" > This does “NO HYPER” if the <span
class="cmss-10">general</span><a
- id="dx1-38184"></a> category has the <a
+ id="dx1-71194"></a> category has the <a
href="#catattr.nohyper"><span
class="cmss-10">nohyper</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38185"></a> attribute set to
+ id="dx1-71195"></a> attribute set to
<span
class="cmtt-10">true </span>otherwise if does “HYPER”.
-</p><!--l. 8098--><p class="indent" > With boolean-style attributes like <a
+</p><!--l. 10565--><p class="indent" > With boolean-style attributes like <a
href="#catattr.nohyper"><span
class="cmss-10">nohyper</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38186"></a>, make sure you always test for <span
+ id="dx1-71196"></a>, make sure you always test for <span
class="cmtt-10">true</span>
not <span
class="cmtt-10">false </span>in case the attribute hasn’t been set.
-</p><!--l. 8101--><p class="indent" > Again there’s a shortcut if you need to lookup the category label from a particular
+</p><!--l. 10568--><p class="indent" > Again there’s a shortcut if you need to lookup the category label from a particular
entry:
-</p><!--l. 8103--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38187"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10570--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71197"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsifattribute{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">entry-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16357,14 +20307,14 @@
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">false-part</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8105--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 8107--><p class="indent" > There’s also a shortcut to determine if a particular category has the <a
+</p><!--l. 10572--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10574--><p class="indent" > There’s also a shortcut to determine if a particular category has the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38188"></a>
+ id="dx1-71198"></a>
attribute set to “true”:
-</p><!--l. 8109--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38189"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10576--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71199"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsifregularcategory{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16373,10 +20323,10 @@
class="cmitt-10">false-part</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8111--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10578--><p class="noindent" >
Alternatively, if you need to lookup the category for a particular entry:
-</p><!--l. 8114--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38190"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10581--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71200"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsifregular{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">entry-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16384,19 +20334,19 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">false-part</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8116--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10583--><p class="noindent" >
Note that if the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38191"></a> attribute hasn’t be set, the above do ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-71201"></a> attribute hasn’t be set, the above do ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">false-part</span>⟩. There
are also reverse commands that test if the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38192"></a> attribute has been set to
+ id="dx1-71202"></a> attribute has been set to
“false”:
-</p><!--l. 8120--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38193"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10587--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71203"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsifnotregularcategory{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16405,10 +20355,10 @@
class="cmitt-10">false-part</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8122--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10589--><p class="noindent" >
or for a particular entry:
-</p><!--l. 8124--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38194"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10591--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71204"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsifnotregular{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">entry-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16416,15 +20366,15 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">false-part</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8126--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10593--><p class="noindent" >
Again, if the <a
href="#catattr.regular"><span
class="cmss-10">regular</span></a><a
- id="dx1-38195"></a> attribute hasn’t been set, the above do ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-71205"></a> attribute hasn’t been set, the above do ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">false-part</span>⟩, so these
reverse commands aren’t logically opposite in the strict sense.
-</p><!--l. 8131--><p class="indent" > You can iterate through all entries with a given category using:
-</p><!--l. 8133--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
+</p><!--l. 10598--><p class="indent" > You can iterate through all entries with a given category using:
+</p><!--l. 10600--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsforeachincategory[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary-labels</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16438,7 +20388,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">body</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8134--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10601--><p class="noindent" >
This iterates through all entries in the glossaries identified by the comma-separated
list ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">glossary-labels</span>⟩ that have the category given by ⟨<span
@@ -16451,13 +20401,13 @@
control sequences) to access the current glossary and entry label. If ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">glossary-labels</span>⟩ is
omitted, all glossaries are assumed.
-</p><!--l. 8144--><p class="indent" > Similarly, you can iterate through all entries that have a category with a given
+</p><!--l. 10611--><p class="indent" > Similarly, you can iterate through all entries that have a category with a given
attribute using:
-</p><!--l. 8146--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38196"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10613--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71206"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsforeachwithattribute[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary-labels</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16473,37 +20423,37 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">body</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8148--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10615--><p class="noindent" >
This will do ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">body</span>⟩ for each entry that has a category with the attribute ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">attribute-label</span>⟩
set to ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">attribute-value</span>⟩. The remaining arguments are as the previous command.
-</p><!--l. 8153--><p class="indent" > You can change the category for a particular entry using the standard glossary
+</p><!--l. 10620--><p class="indent" > You can change the category for a particular entry using the standard glossary
field changing commands, such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfielddef</span><a
- id="dx1-38197"></a>. Alternatively, you can
+ id="dx1-71207"></a>. Alternatively, you can
use
-</p><!--l. 8156--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38198"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10623--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71208"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsetcategory{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">entry-labels</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8158--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10625--><p class="noindent" >
This will change the category to ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">category-label</span>⟩ for each entry listed in the
comma-separated list ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">entry-labels</span>⟩. This command uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsfieldxdef</span><a
- id="dx1-38199"></a> so it will
+ id="dx1-71209"></a> so it will
expand ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">category-label</span>⟩ and make the change global.
-</p><!--l. 8164--><p class="indent" > You can also change the category for all entries with a glossary or glossaries
+</p><!--l. 10631--><p class="indent" > You can also change the category for all entries with a glossary or glossaries
using:
-</p><!--l. 8166--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-38200"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10633--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-71210"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsetcategoryforall{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">glossary-labels</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16510,7 +20460,7 @@
class="cmitt-10">category-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8168--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10635--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">glossary-labels</span>⟩ is a comma-separated list of glossary labels.
@@ -16517,15 +20467,14 @@
</p>
-<!--l. 8172--><p class="indent" > </div>
-</p><!--l. 8172--><p class="noindent" ><a
-href="#top">Top</a><div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">7. <a
+<!--l. 10639--><p class="indent" > </div>
+</p><!--l. 10639--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">8. <a
id="sec:countref"></a>Counting References</h2>
-</p><!--l. 8175--><p class="indent" > There are three basic ways of counting entry references:
+</p><!--l. 10642--><p class="indent" > There are three basic ways of counting entry references:
</p><ol class="enumerate1" >
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-39002x1">
- <!--l. 8177--><p class="noindent" >Counting the total number of times <span
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-72002x1">Counting the total number of times <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsunset </span>is used (<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsreset </span>resets
the count and is best avoided). This is provided by the base <span
@@ -16535,19 +20484,18 @@
has to be written to the <span
class="cmtt-10">.aux </span>file so that it’s available on the next
LaTeX run.
- </p><!--l. 8185--><p class="noindent" >This method is extended by <span
+ <!--l. 10652--><p class="noindent" >This method is extended by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>and is described in
<a
href="#sec:entrycount"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">7.1</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">8.1</span> </a><a
href="#sec:entrycount">Entry Counting (First Use Flag)<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:entrycount --></a>.
</p></li>
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-39004x2">
- <!--l. 8188--><p class="noindent" >Counting the total number of records. This method is only available with
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-72004x2">Counting the total number of records. This method is only available with
<a
- id="dx1-39005"></a><a
+ id="dx1-72005"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> and is intended for documents where the term should be displayed
differently if it’s only been recorded (indexed) a certain number of times.
@@ -16554,12 +20502,11 @@
See <a
href="#sec:recordcount"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">9.5</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">10.5</span> </a><a
href="#sec:recordcount">Record Counting<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:recordcount --></a> for further details.
- </p></li>
-<li
- class="enumerate" id="x1-39007x3">
- <!--l. 8194--><p class="noindent" >Counting the number of times the <span
+ </li>
+ <li
+ class="enumerate" id="x1-72007x3">Counting the number of times the <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>-like or <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstext</span>-like
commands are used. (That is, those commands that internally use
@@ -16574,13 +20521,13 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glslinkpresetkeys</span>. See <a
href="#sec:linkcount"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">7.2</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">8.2</span> </a><a
href="#sec:linkcount">Link Counting<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:linkcount --></a> for further
- details.</p></li></ol>
-<!--l. 8204--><p class="noindent" ><a
-href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">7.1 </span> <a
+ details.</li></ol>
+<!--l. 10671--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">8.1 </span> <a
id="sec:entrycount"></a>Entry Counting (First Use Flag)</h3>
-<!--l. 8207--><p class="noindent" >As mentioned in <a
+<!--l. 10674--><p class="noindent" >As mentioned in <a
href="#sec:entrycountmods"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
class="cmbx-10">2.5</span> </a><a
@@ -16588,50 +20535,50 @@
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>
modifies the <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsenableentrycount</span><a
- id="dx1-40001"></a> command to allow for the <a
+ id="dx1-73001"></a> command to allow for the <a
href="#catattr.entrycount"><span
class="cmss-10">entrycount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-40002"></a>
+ id="dx1-73002"></a>
attribute. This means that you not only need to enable entry counting with
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsenableentrycount</span><a
- id="dx1-40003"></a>, but you also need to set the appropriate attribute (see
+ id="dx1-73003"></a>, but you also need to set the appropriate attribute (see
<a
href="#sec:categories"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">6</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">7</span> </a><a
href="#sec:categories">Categories<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:categories --></a>).
-</p><!--l. 8214--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Remember that entry counting only counts the number of times an entry is used
+</p><!--l. 10681--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Remember that entry counting only counts the number of times an entry is used
by commands that change the <a
- id="dx1-40004"></a><a
+ id="dx1-73004"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use flag</a>. (That is, all those commands
-
-
-
that mark the entry as having been used.) There are many commands that
don’t modify this flag and they won’t contribute to the entry use count.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 8220--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 8222--><p class="indent" > With <span
+</p><!--l. 10687--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10689--><p class="indent" > With <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>, you may use <span
class="cmtt-10">\cgls</span><a
- id="dx1-40005"></a> instead of <span
+ id="dx1-73005"></a> instead of <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
- id="dx1-40006"></a> even if you haven’t enabled
+ id="dx1-73006"></a> even if you haven’t enabled
entry counting. You will only get a warning if you use <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsenableentrycount</span>
+
+
+
without setting the <a
href="#catattr.entrycount"><span
class="cmss-10">entrycount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-40007"></a> attribute. (With <span
+ id="dx1-73007"></a> attribute. (With <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>, commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\cgls</span><a
- id="dx1-40008"></a> will
+ id="dx1-73008"></a> will
generate a warning if <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsenableentrycount </span>hasn’t been used.) The abbreviation
shortcut <span
class="cmtt-10">\ab</span><a
- id="dx1-40009"></a> uses <span
+ id="dx1-73009"></a> uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\cgls </span>(see <a
href="#sec:abbrshortcuts"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
@@ -16639,31 +20586,31 @@
href="#sec:abbrshortcuts">Shortcut Commands<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:abbrshortcuts --></a>). The
acronym shortcut <span
class="cmtt-10">\ac</span><a
- id="dx1-40010"></a> uses <span
+ id="dx1-73010"></a> uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\cgls </span>if it’s been defined with <a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=ac</span><a
- id="dx1-40011"></a> (or
+ id="dx1-73011"></a> (or
<a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=all</span><a
- id="dx1-40012"></a>) but uses <span
+ id="dx1-73012"></a>) but uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>if it’s been defined with <a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=acronyms</span><a
- id="dx1-40013"></a> (or
+ id="dx1-73013"></a> (or
<a
href="#styopt.shortcuts"><span
class="cmss-10">shortcuts</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=acro</span><a
- id="dx1-40014"></a>).
-</p><!--l. 8235--><p class="indent" > All upper case versions (not provided by <span
+ id="dx1-73014"></a>).
+</p><!--l. 10702--><p class="indent" > All upper case versions (not provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>) are also available:
-</p><!--l. 8237--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-40015"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10704--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-73015"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\cGLS[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16671,10 +20618,10 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8239--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10706--><p class="noindent" >
and
-</p><!--l. 8241--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-40016"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10708--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-73016"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\cGLSpl[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16682,38 +20629,38 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8243--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10710--><p class="noindent" >
These are analogous to <span
class="cmtt-10">\cgls </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\cglspl </span>but they use
-</p><!--l. 8246--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-40017"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10713--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-73017"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\cGLSformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8248--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10715--><p class="noindent" >
and
-</p><!--l. 8250--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-40018"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10717--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-73018"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\cGLSplformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8252--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10719--><p class="noindent" >
which convert the analogous <span
class="cmtt-10">\cglsformat </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\cglsplformat </span>to upper
case.
-</p><!--l. 8256--><p class="indent" > Just using <span
+</p><!--l. 10723--><p class="indent" > Just using <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-187">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-236">
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{glossaries}
\makeglossaries
@@ -16726,17 +20673,17 @@
\printglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8278--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 8280--><p class="indent" > If you switch to <span
+<!--l. 10745--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 10747--><p class="indent" > If you switch to <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>you must set the <a
href="#catattr.entrycount"><span
class="cmss-10">entrycount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-40019"></a> attribute:
+ id="dx1-73019"></a> attribute:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-188">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-237">
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
\makeglossaries
@@ -16750,14 +20697,14 @@
\printglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8305--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 8307--><p class="indent" > When activated with <span
+<!--l. 10772--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 10774--><p class="indent" > When activated with <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsenableentrycount</span>, commands such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\cgls</span><a
- id="dx1-40020"></a> now
+ id="dx1-73020"></a> now
use
-</p><!--l. 8309--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-40021"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10776--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-73021"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrifcounttrigger{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16765,12 +20712,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">normal code</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8312--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10779--><p class="noindent" >
to determine if the entry trips the entry count trigger. The ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">trigger code</span>⟩ uses
commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\cglsformat </span>and unsets the <a
- id="dx1-40022"></a><a
+ id="dx1-73022"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use flag</a>. The ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">normal code</span>⟩ is the
code that would ordinarily be performed by whatever the equivalent command is (for
@@ -16781,12 +20728,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>behaviour in
⟨<span
class="cmti-10">normal code</span>⟩).
-</p><!--l. 8321--><p class="indent" > The default definition is:
+</p><!--l. 10788--><p class="indent" > The default definition is:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-189">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-238">
\newcommand*{\glsxtrifcounttrigger}[3]{%
 \glshasattribute{#1}{entrycount}%
 {%
@@ -16799,53 +20746,53 @@
 {#3}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8334--><p class="nopar" > This means that if an entry is assigned to a category that has the <a
+<!--l. 10801--><p class="nopar" > This means that if an entry is assigned to a category that has the <a
href="#catattr.entrycount"><span
class="cmss-10">entrycount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-40023"></a>
+ id="dx1-73023"></a>
attribute then the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">trigger code</span>⟩ will be used if the previous count value (the number of
times the entry was used on the last run) is greater than the value of the
attribute.
-</p><!--l. 8341--><p class="indent" > For example, to trigger normal use if the previous count value is greater than
+</p><!--l. 10808--><p class="indent" > For example, to trigger normal use if the previous count value is greater than
four:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-190">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-239">
\glssetcategoryattribute{abbreviation}{entrycount}{4}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8345--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 8347--><p class="indent" > There is a convenient command provided to enable entry counting, set the
+<!--l. 10812--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 10814--><p class="indent" > There is a convenient command provided to enable entry counting, set the
<a
href="#catattr.entrycount"><span
class="cmss-10">entrycount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-40024"></a> attribute and redefine <span
+ id="dx1-73024"></a> attribute and redefine <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
- id="dx1-40025"></a>, etc to use <span
+ id="dx1-73025"></a>, etc to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\cgls</span><a
- id="dx1-40026"></a> etc:
-</p><!--l. 8350--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-40027"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-73026"></a> etc:
+</p><!--l. 10817--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-73027"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableEntryCounting{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">categories</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">value</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8352--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10819--><p class="noindent" >
The first argument ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">categories</span>⟩ is a comma-separated list of categories. For each
category, the <a
href="#catattr.entrycount"><span
class="cmss-10">entrycount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-40028"></a> attribute is set to ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-73028"></a> attribute is set to ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">value</span>⟩. In addition, this does:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-191">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-240">
\renewcommand*{\gls}{\cgls}%
\renewcommand*{\Gls}{\cGls}%
\renewcommand*{\glspl}{\cglspl}%
@@ -16853,19 +20800,19 @@
\renewcommand*{\GLS}{\cGLS}%
\renewcommand*{\GLSpl}{\cGLSpl}%
</pre>
-<!--l. 8363--><p class="nopar" > This makes it easier to enable entry-counting on existing documents.
-</p><!--l. 8367--><p class="indent" > If you use <span
+<!--l. 10830--><p class="nopar" > This makes it easier to enable entry-counting on existing documents.
+</p><!--l. 10834--><p class="indent" > If you use <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableEntryCounting </span>more than once, subsequent uses will
just set the <a
href="#catattr.entrycount"><span
class="cmss-10">entrycount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-40029"></a> attribute for each listed category.
-</p><!--l. 8371--><p class="indent" > The above example document can then become:
+ id="dx1-73029"></a> attribute for each listed category.
+</p><!--l. 10838--><p class="indent" > The above example document can then become:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-192">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-241">
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
\makeglossaries
@@ -16878,13 +20825,13 @@
\printglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8393--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 8395--><p class="indent" > The standard entry-counting function describe above counts the number of times
+<!--l. 10860--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 10862--><p class="indent" > The standard entry-counting function describe above counts the number of times
an entry has been marked as used throughout the document. (The reset commands
will reset the total back to zero.) If you prefer to count per sectional-unit, you can
use
-</p><!--l. 8400--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-40030"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10867--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-73030"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableEntryUnitCounting{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">categories</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -16893,7 +20840,7 @@
class="cmitt-10">counter-name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8402--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10869--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">categories</span>⟩ is a comma-separated list of categories to which this feature should
be applied, ⟨<span
@@ -16900,19 +20847,19 @@
class="cmti-10">value</span>⟩ is the trigger value and ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">counter-name</span>⟩ is the name of the counter
used by the sectional unit.
-</p><!--l. 8408--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Due to the asynchronous nature of TeX’s output routine, discrepancies will occur
+</p><!--l. 10875--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Due to the asynchronous nature of TeX’s output routine, discrepancies will occur
in page spanning paragraphs if you use the <span
class="cmss-10">page</span><a
- id="dx1-40031"></a> counter. </div>
-</p><!--l. 8412--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 8414--><p class="indent" > Note that you can’t use both the document-wide counting and the per-unit
+ id="dx1-73031"></a> counter. </div>
+</p><!--l. 10879--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10881--><p class="indent" > Note that you can’t use both the document-wide counting and the per-unit
counting in the same document.
-</p><!--l. 8417--><p class="indent" > The counter value is used as part of a label, which means that <span
+</p><!--l. 10884--><p class="indent" > The counter value is used as part of a label, which means that <span
class="cmtt-10">\the</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">counter-name</span>⟩
needs to be expandable. Since <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
- id="dx1-40032"></a> also has a similar requirement and provides
+ id="dx1-73032"></a> also has a similar requirement and provides
<span
class="cmtt-10">\theH</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">counter-name</span>⟩ as an expandable alternative, <span
@@ -16922,10 +20869,10 @@
class="cmti-10">counter-name</span>⟩ if it exists otherwise it will use <span
class="cmtt-10">\the</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">counter-name</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 8424--><p class="indent" > The per-unit counting function uses two attributes: <a
+</p><!--l. 10891--><p class="indent" > The per-unit counting function uses two attributes: <a
href="#catattr.entrycount"><span
class="cmss-10">entrycount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-40033"></a> (as before) and
+ id="dx1-73033"></a> (as before) and
@@ -16932,51 +20879,51 @@
<a
href="#catattr.unitcount"><span
class="cmss-10">unitcount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-40034"></a> (the name of the counter).
-</p><!--l. 8427--><p class="indent" > Both the original document-wide counting mechanism and the per-unit counting
+ id="dx1-73034"></a> (the name of the counter).
+</p><!--l. 10894--><p class="indent" > Both the original document-wide counting mechanism and the per-unit counting
mechanism provide a command that can be used to access the current count value for
this run:
-</p><!--l. 8430--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-40035"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10897--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-73035"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentrycurrcount{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8432--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10899--><p class="noindent" >
and the final value from the previous run:
-</p><!--l. 8434--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-40036"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10901--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-73036"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryprevcount{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8436--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10903--><p class="noindent" >
In the case of the per-unit counting, this is the final value <span
class="cmti-10">for the current unit</span>. In
both commands ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ is the entry’s label.
-</p><!--l. 8441--><p class="indent" > The per-unit counting mechanism additionally provides:
-</p><!--l. 8442--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-40037"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10908--><p class="indent" > The per-unit counting mechanism additionally provides:
+</p><!--l. 10909--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-73037"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryprevtotalcount{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8444--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10911--><p class="noindent" >
which gives the sum of all the per-unit totals from the previous run for the entry
given by ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩, and
-</p><!--l. 8447--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-40038"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 10914--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-73038"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryprevmaxcount{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8449--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10916--><p class="noindent" >
which gives the maximum per-unit total from the previous run.
-</p><!--l. 8452--><p class="indent" > The above two commands are unavailable for the document-wide counting.
-</p><!--l. 8454--><p class="indent" > Example of per-unit counting, where the unit is the chapter:
+</p><!--l. 10919--><p class="indent" > The above two commands are unavailable for the document-wide counting.
+</p><!--l. 10921--><p class="indent" > Example of per-unit counting, where the unit is the chapter:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-193">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-242">
\documentclass{report}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
\GlsXtrEnableEntryUnitCounting{abbreviation}{2}{chapter}
@@ -16995,11 +20942,11 @@
\printglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8485--><p class="nopar" > In this document, the <span
+<!--l. 10952--><p class="nopar" > In this document, the <span
class="cmtt-10">css </span>entry is used three times in the first chapter. This is
more than the trigger value of 2, so <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls{css}</span></span></span> is expanded on <a
- id="dx1-40039"></a><a
+ id="dx1-73039"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuse">first use</a>
with the short form used on subsequent use, and the <span
class="cmtt-10">css </span>entries in that
@@ -17009,31 +20956,31 @@
long form is used and <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls{css}</span></span></span> doesn’t get a line added to the glossary
file.
-</p><!--l. 8496--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 10963--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">html </span>is used a total of three times, but the expansion and indexing
suppression trigger is tripped in both chapters because the per-unit total (1 for the
first chapter and 2 for the second chapter) is less than or equal to the trigger
value.
-</p><!--l. 8502--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 10969--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">sample </span>entry has only been used once, but it doesn’t trip the indexing
suppression because it’s in the <span
class="cmss-10">general</span><a
- id="dx1-40040"></a> category, which hasn’t been listed in
+ id="dx1-73040"></a> category, which hasn’t been listed in
<span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableEntryUnitCounting</span>.
-</p><!--l. 8507--><p class="indent" > The per-unit entry counting can be used for other purposes. In the following
+</p><!--l. 10974--><p class="indent" > The per-unit entry counting can be used for other purposes. In the following
example document the trigger value is set to zero, which means the index suppression
won’t be triggered, but the unit entry count is used to automatically suppress the
hyperlink for commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span><a
- id="dx1-40041"></a> by modifying the hook
-</p><!--l. 8513--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-40042"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-73041"></a> by modifying the hook
+</p><!--l. 10980--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-73042"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslinkcheckfirsthyperhook </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8515--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 10982--><p class="noindent" >
which is used at the end of the macro the determines whether or not to suppress the
hyperlink.
@@ -17040,7 +20987,7 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-194">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-243">
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
@@ -17061,22 +21008,22 @@
\printglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8550--><p class="nopar" > This only produces a hyperlink for the first instance of <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 11017--><p class="nopar" > This only produces a hyperlink for the first instance of <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls{sample}</span></span></span> on each
page.
-</p><!--l. 8554--><p class="indent" > The earlier warning about using the <span
+</p><!--l. 11021--><p class="indent" > The earlier warning about using the <span
class="cmss-10">page</span><a
- id="dx1-40043"></a> counter still applies. If the
+ id="dx1-73043"></a> counter still applies. If the
first instance of <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>occurs at the top of the page within a paragraph that
started on the previous page, then the count will continue from the previous
page.
-</p><!--l. 8559--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11026--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 8559--><p class="noindent" ><a
-href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">7.2 </span> <a
+<!--l. 11026--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">8.2 </span> <a
id="sec:linkcount"></a>Link Counting</h3>
-<!--l. 8562--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.26, an alternative method of entry counting is to count the number
+<!--l. 11029--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.26, an alternative method of entry counting is to count the number
@@ -17090,17 +21037,17 @@
class="cmtt-10">\@gls at link </span>may use <span
class="cmtt-10">\hyperlink </span>when displaying the
<a
- id="dx1-41001"></a><a
+ id="dx1-74001"></a><a
href="#glo:linktext">link-text</a>.)
-</p><!--l. 8569--><p class="indent" > To enable link counting use the preamble-only command:
-</p><!--l. 8570--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-41002"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11036--><p class="indent" > To enable link counting use the preamble-only command:
+</p><!--l. 11037--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-74002"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableLinkCounting[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">master counter</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">categories</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8572--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11039--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">categories</span>⟩ is a list of category labels. The optional argument ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">master</span>
@@ -17110,22 +21057,22 @@
incremented. This command automatically sets the <a
href="#catattr.linkcount"><span
class="cmss-10">linkcount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-41003"></a> attribute for the given
+ id="dx1-74003"></a> attribute for the given
categories. If the optional argument is present, it also sets the <a
href="#catattr.linkcountmaster"><span
class="cmss-10">linkcountmaster</span></a><a
- id="dx1-41004"></a>
+ id="dx1-74004"></a>
attribute.
-</p><!--l. 8581--><p class="indent" > When enabled, commands like <span
+</p><!--l. 11048--><p class="indent" > When enabled, commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstext </span>increment the associated
counter using
-</p><!--l. 8583--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-41005"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11050--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-74005"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrinclinkcounter{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">counter name</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8585--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11052--><p class="noindent" >
This just does <span
class="cmtt-10">\stepcounter{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">counter name</span>⟩<span
@@ -17136,38 +21083,38 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-195">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-244">
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrinclinkcounter}[1]{\refstepcounter{#1}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8591--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 8593--><p class="indent" > You can access the internal count register using
-</p><!--l. 8594--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-41006"></a> <span
+<!--l. 11058--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 11060--><p class="indent" > You can access the internal count register using
+</p><!--l. 11061--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-74006"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrLinkCounterValue{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8596--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11063--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ is the entry’s label. This will expand to 0 if the counter hasn’t been
defined.
-</p><!--l. 8600--><p class="indent" > It’s also possible to access the display value (<span
+</p><!--l. 11067--><p class="indent" > It’s also possible to access the display value (<span
class="cmtt-10">\the</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">counter</span>⟩) using
-</p><!--l. 8602--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-41007"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11069--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-74007"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrTheLinkCounter{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">counter</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8604--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11071--><p class="noindent" >
(This will expand to 0 if the counter hasn’t been defined.)
-</p><!--l. 8607--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> In order to conserve resources, the counter is only defined when it first
+</p><!--l. 11074--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> In order to conserve resources, the counter is only defined when it first
needs to be incremented so terms that have been defined but haven’t been
used in the document won’t have the associated count register allocated.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 8612--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 8614--><p class="indent" > You can test if the counter has been defined using:
-</p><!--l. 8615--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-41008"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11079--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11081--><p class="indent" > You can test if the counter has been defined using:
+</p><!--l. 11082--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-74008"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrIfLinkCounterDef{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -17175,16 +21122,16 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8617--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11084--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ is the entry’s label.
-</p><!--l. 8620--><p class="indent" > The counter name can be obtained using
-</p><!--l. 8621--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-41009"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11087--><p class="indent" > The counter name can be obtained using
+</p><!--l. 11088--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-74009"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrLinkCounterName{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8623--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11090--><p class="noindent" >
This simply expands to the counter name associated with the entry given by ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩
without any check for existence. For example, to change the display command
@@ -17192,15 +21139,15 @@
class="cmtt-10">\the</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">counter</span>⟩) using <span
class="cmss-10">etoolbox</span><a
- id="dx1-41010"></a>:
+ id="dx1-74010"></a>:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-196">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-245">
\csdef{the\GlsXtrLinkCounterName{duck}}{\Roman{\GlsXtrLinkCounterName{duck}}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8630--><p class="nopar" > This is useful if you just want to change the display for specific entries but isn’t
+<!--l. 11097--><p class="nopar" > This is useful if you just want to change the display for specific entries but isn’t
convenient if you want to change the display for all entries. Instead, it’s simpler to
redefine <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrTheLinkCounter</span>. For example:
@@ -17208,7 +21155,7 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-197">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-246">
\renewcommand*{\GlsXtrTheLinkCounter}[1]{%
 \GlsXtrIfLinkCounterDef{#1}%
 {\Roman{\GlsXtrLinkCounterName{#1}}}%
@@ -17215,12 +21162,12 @@
 {0}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8641--><p class="nopar" > In both cases, the redefinition should be implemented after <span
+<!--l. 11108--><p class="nopar" > In both cases, the redefinition should be implemented after <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableLinkCounting</span>.
-</p><!--l. 8645--><p class="indent" > Here’s an example document that uses link counting to disable the hyperlink after
+</p><!--l. 11112--><p class="indent" > Here’s an example document that uses link counting to disable the hyperlink after
the first reference. This redefines <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslinkpresetkeys</span><a
- id="dx1-41011"></a> (which is used by both <span
+ id="dx1-74011"></a> (which is used by both <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>
and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glstext</span>) instead of <span
@@ -17232,7 +21179,7 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-198">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-247">
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage[colorlinks]{hyperref}
\usepackage{glossaries-extra}
@@ -17255,32 +21202,32 @@
\printglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8687--><p class="nopar" > The use of <span
+<!--l. 11154--><p class="nopar" > The use of <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslinkpresetkeys</span><a
- id="dx1-41012"></a> means that the options can override this. For
+ id="dx1-74012"></a> means that the options can override this. For
example
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-199">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-248">
\gls[hyper=true]{sample1}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8692--><p class="nopar" > will override the <span
+<!--l. 11159--><p class="nopar" > will override the <span
class="cmtt-10">hyper=false </span>setting in <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslinkpresetkeys</span><a
- id="dx1-41013"></a>. If <span
+ id="dx1-74013"></a>. If <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslinkpostsetkeys</span><a
- id="dx1-41014"></a>
+ id="dx1-74014"></a>
is used instead, the <span
class="cmtt-10">hyper=false </span>setting will override the setting provided in the
optional argument.
-</p><!--l. 8698--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 11165--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">abbreviation</span><a
- id="dx1-41015"></a> category doesn’t have the <a
+ id="dx1-74015"></a> category doesn’t have the <a
href="#catattr.linkcount"><span
class="cmss-10">linkcount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-41016"></a> attribute set (since it’s not
+ id="dx1-74016"></a> attribute set (since it’s not
listed in the argument of <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableLinkCounting</span>). This means that
<span
@@ -17291,10 +21238,10 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-200">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-249">
\ifnum\GlsXtrLinkCounterValue{\glslabel}>1
</pre>
-<!--l. 8706--><p class="nopar" > will always be false. This means that the abbreviation won’t have <span
+<!--l. 11173--><p class="nopar" > will always be false. This means that the abbreviation won’t have <span
class="cmtt-10">hyper=false</span>
applied. If the test is changed to
@@ -17301,120 +21248,120 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-201">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-250">
\ifnum\GlsXtrLinkCounterValue{\glslabel}=1
\else
 \setkeys{glslink}{hyper=false}%
\fi
</pre>
-<!--l. 8714--><p class="nopar" > Then the abbreviation will always have <span
+<!--l. 11181--><p class="nopar" > Then the abbreviation will always have <span
class="cmtt-10">hyper=false </span>applied.
-</p><!--l. 8718--><p class="indent" > To reset the counter every section use the optional argument to set the master
+</p><!--l. 11185--><p class="indent" > To reset the counter every section use the optional argument to set the master
counter:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-202">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-251">
\GlsXtrEnableLinkCounting[section]{general}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8722--><p class="nopar" >
+<!--l. 11189--><p class="nopar" >
</p>
-<!--l. 8724--><p class="indent" > </div>
-</p><!--l. 8724--><p class="noindent" ><a
-href="#top">Top</a><div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">8. <a
+<!--l. 11191--><p class="indent" > </div>
+</p><!--l. 11191--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">9. <a
id="sec:autoindex"></a>Auto-Indexing</h2>
-</p><!--l. 8727--><p class="indent" > It’s possible that you may also want a normal index as well as the glossary,
+</p><!--l. 11194--><p class="indent" > It’s possible that you may also want a normal index as well as the glossary,
and you may want entries to automatically be added to the index (as in
this document). There are two attributes that govern this: <a
href="#catattr.indexname"><span
class="cmss-10">indexname</span></a><a
- id="dx1-42001"></a> and
+ id="dx1-75001"></a> and
<a
href="#catattr.dualindex"><span
class="cmss-10">dualindex</span></a><a
- id="dx1-42002"></a>.
-</p><!--l. 8733--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> The auto-indexing is designed for <a
- id="dx1-42003"></a><a
+ id="dx1-75002"></a>.
+</p><!--l. 11200--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> The auto-indexing is designed for <a
+ id="dx1-75003"></a><a
href="#glo:makeindex"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span></a> syntax. If you’ve used the <a
href="#styopt.xindy"><span
class="cmss-10">xindy</span></a><a
- id="dx1-42004"></a>
+ id="dx1-75004"></a>
package option, the automatic escaping of <a
- id="dx1-42005"></a><a
+ id="dx1-75005"></a><a
href="#glo:xindy"><span
class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a> special characters in the <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-42006"></a> field
+ id="dx1-75006"></a> field
may result in an incorrect sort value for the <span
class="cmtt-10">\index </span>command used by the
auto-indexing. Note also that <span
class="cmtt-10">texindy</span><a
- id="dx1-42007"></a> has a fixed set of special characters
+ id="dx1-75007"></a> has a fixed set of special characters
(corresponding to <a
- id="dx1-42008"></a><span
+ id="dx1-75008"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span>’s defaults) that can’t be customized. You may want
to consider using <a
- id="dx1-42009"></a><a
+ id="dx1-75009"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> and its dual entries as an alternative approach.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 8742--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 8745--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 11209--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11212--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrpostnamehook</span><a
- id="dx1-42010"></a> macro, used at the end of <span
+ id="dx1-75010"></a> macro, used at the end of <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentryname</span><a
- id="dx1-42011"></a> and
+ id="dx1-75011"></a> and
<span
class="cmtt-10">\Glossentryname</span><a
- id="dx1-42012"></a>, checks the <a
+ id="dx1-75012"></a>, checks the <a
href="#catattr.indexname"><span
class="cmss-10">indexname</span></a><a
- id="dx1-42013"></a> attribute for the category associated with
+ id="dx1-75013"></a> attribute for the category associated with
that entry. Since <span
class="cmtt-10">\glossentryname </span>is used in the default glossary styles, this
makes a convenient way of automatically indexing each entry name at its
location in the glossary without fiddling around with the value of the <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-42014"></a>
+ id="dx1-75014"></a>
key.
-</p><!--l. 8755--><p class="indent" > The internal macro used by the <span
+</p><!--l. 11222--><p class="indent" > The internal macro used by the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries </span>package to write the information to the
external glossary file is modified to check for the <a
href="#catattr.dualindex"><span
class="cmss-10">dualindex</span></a><a
- id="dx1-42015"></a> attribute.
-</p><!--l. 8759--><p class="indent" > In both cases, the indexing is done through
-</p><!--l. 8760--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-42016"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-75015"></a> attribute.
+</p><!--l. 11226--><p class="indent" > In both cases, the indexing is done through
+</p><!--l. 11227--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-75016"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdoautoindexname{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">attribute-label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8762--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11229--><p class="noindent" >
This uses the standard <span
class="cmtt-10">\index</span><a
- id="dx1-42017"></a> command with the sort value taken from the entry’s
+ id="dx1-75017"></a> command with the sort value taken from the entry’s
<span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-42018"></a> key and the actual value set to <span
+ id="dx1-75018"></a> key and the actual value set to <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryname{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>. As from v1.16, there are
user-level commands available to change the sort and actual value used by the
automated index.
-</p><!--l. 8769--><p class="indent" > The actual value is given by
-</p><!--l. 8770--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-42019"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11236--><p class="indent" > The actual value is given by
+</p><!--l. 11237--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-75019"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrautoindexentry{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8772--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11239--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ is the entry’s label. The default definition is:
@@ -17421,22 +21368,22 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-203">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-252">
\newcommand*{\glsxtrautoindexentry}[1]{\string\glsentryname{#1}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8777--><p class="nopar" > Note the use of <span
+<!--l. 11244--><p class="nopar" > Note the use of <span
class="cmtt-10">\string </span>to prevent <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentryname </span>from being expanded as it’s
written to the index file.
-</p><!--l. 8781--><p class="indent" > The sort value is assigned using:
-</p><!--l. 8782--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-42020"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11248--><p class="indent" > The sort value is assigned using:
+</p><!--l. 11249--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-75020"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrautoindexassignsort{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">cs</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8784--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11251--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ is the entry label and ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">cs</span>⟩ is the command which needs to be set to the
@@ -17445,67 +21392,67 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-204">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-253">
\newcommand*{\glsxtrautoindexassignsort}[2]{%
  \glsletentryfield{#1}{#2}{sort}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8791--><p class="nopar" > After this macro is called, ⟨<span
+<!--l. 11258--><p class="nopar" > After this macro is called, ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">cs</span>⟩ is then processed to escape any of <span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span><a
- id="dx1-42021"></a>’s special
+ id="dx1-75021"></a>’s special
characters. Note that this escaping is only performed on the sort not on the actual
value. The escaping of the sort value is performed by
-</p><!--l. 8796--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-42022"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11263--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-75022"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrautoindexesc </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8798--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11265--><p class="noindent" >
You can redefine this to do nothing if you want to omit the escaping. You may want
to consider providing another field to obtain the appropriate sort value if the one
provided in the <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-42023"></a> field isn’t suitable (because it may already have had special
+ id="dx1-75023"></a> field isn’t suitable (because it may already have had special
characters escaped or it may be a numeric value in the case of sort by use or
definition).
-</p><!--l. 8806--><p class="indent" > The command used to perform the actual indexing is:
-</p><!--l. 8807--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-42024"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11273--><p class="indent" > The command used to perform the actual indexing is:
+</p><!--l. 11274--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-75024"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrautoindex{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8809--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11276--><p class="noindent" >
This just does <span
class="cmtt-10">\index{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span>by default.
-</p><!--l. 8812--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> The entry’s <span
+</p><!--l. 11279--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> The entry’s <span
class="cmss-10">parent</span><a
- id="dx1-42025"></a> field isn’t referenced in this automated indexing.
+ id="dx1-75025"></a> field isn’t referenced in this automated indexing.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 8815--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 8817--><p class="indent" > For example, to index the value of the <span
+</p><!--l. 11282--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11284--><p class="indent" > For example, to index the value of the <span
class="cmss-10">first</span><a
- id="dx1-42026"></a> key, instead of the <span
+ id="dx1-75026"></a> key, instead of the <span
class="cmss-10">name</span><a
- id="dx1-42027"></a> key:
+ id="dx1-75027"></a> key:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-205">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-254">
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrautoindexentry}[1]{\string\glsentryfirst{#1}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8821--><p class="nopar" > and if the sort value also needs to be set to the <span
+<!--l. 11288--><p class="nopar" > and if the sort value also needs to be set to the <span
class="cmss-10">long</span><a
- id="dx1-42028"></a> field, if present, otherwise the
+ id="dx1-75028"></a> field, if present, otherwise the
<span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-42029"></a> field:
+ id="dx1-75029"></a> field:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-206">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-255">
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrautoindexassignsort}[2]{%
  \ifglshaslong{#2}%
  {\glsletentryfield{#1}{#2}{long}}%
@@ -17512,8 +21459,8 @@
  {\glsletentryfield{#1}{#2}{sort}}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8830--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 8832--><p class="indent" > If the value of the attribute given by ⟨<span
+<!--l. 11297--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 11299--><p class="indent" > If the value of the attribute given by ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">attribute-label</span>⟩ is “true”, no encap will be
added, otherwise the encap will be the attribute value. For example:
@@ -17520,10 +21467,10 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-207">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-256">
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{indexname}{textbf}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8838--><p class="nopar" > will set the encap to <span
+<!--l. 11305--><p class="nopar" > will set the encap to <span
class="cmtt-10">textbf </span>which will display the relevant page number in bold
whereas
@@ -17530,107 +21477,107 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-208">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-257">
\glssetcategoryattribute{general}{dualindex}{true}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8843--><p class="nopar" > won’t apply any formatting to the page number in the index.
-</p><!--l. 8846--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> The location used in the index will always be the page number not the counter
+<!--l. 11310--><p class="nopar" > won’t apply any formatting to the page number in the index.
+</p><!--l. 11313--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> The location used in the index will always be the page number not the counter
used in the glossary. (Unless some other loaded package has modified the definition of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\index </span>to use some thing else.) </div>
-</p><!--l. 8851--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 8853--><p class="indent" > By default the <span
+</p><!--l. 11318--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11320--><p class="indent" > By default the <span
class="cmss-10">format</span><a
- id="dx1-42030"></a> key won’t be used with the <a
+ id="dx1-75030"></a> key won’t be used with the <a
href="#catattr.dualindex"><span
class="cmss-10">dualindex</span></a><a
- id="dx1-42031"></a> attribute. You can
+ id="dx1-75031"></a> attribute. You can
allow the <span
class="cmss-10">format</span><a
- id="dx1-42032"></a> key to override the attribute value by using the preamble-only
+ id="dx1-75032"></a> key to override the attribute value by using the preamble-only
command:
-</p><!--l. 8857--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-42033"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11324--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-75033"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrEnableIndexFormatOverride </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8859--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11326--><p class="noindent" >
If you use this command and <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
- id="dx1-42034"></a> has been loaded, then the <span
+ id="dx1-75034"></a> has been loaded, then the <span
class="cmss-10">theindex</span><a
- id="dx1-42035"></a><a
- id="dx1-42036"></a>
+ id="dx1-75035"></a><a
+ id="dx1-75036"></a>
environment will be modified to redefine <span
class="cmtt-10">\glshypernumber</span><a
- id="dx1-42037"></a> to allow formats that use
+ id="dx1-75037"></a> to allow formats that use
that command.
-</p><!--l. 8864--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> The <a
+</p><!--l. 11331--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> The <a
href="#catattr.dualindex"><span
class="cmss-10">dualindex</span></a><a
- id="dx1-42038"></a> attribute will still be used on subsequent use even if the
+ id="dx1-75038"></a> attribute will still be used on subsequent use even if the
<a
href="#catattr.indexonlyfirst"><span
class="cmss-10">indexonlyfirst</span></a><a
- id="dx1-42039"></a> attribute (or <a
+ id="dx1-75039"></a> attribute (or <a
href="#styopt.indexonlyfirst"><span
class="cmss-10">indexonlyfirst</span></a><a
- id="dx1-42040"></a> package option) is set. However, the <a
+ id="dx1-75040"></a> package option) is set. However, the <a
href="#catattr.dualindex"><span
class="cmss-10">dualindex</span></a><a
- id="dx1-42041"></a>
+ id="dx1-75041"></a>
attribute will honour the <span
class="cmss-10">noindex</span><a
- id="dx1-42042"></a> key. </div>
-</p><!--l. 8870--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 8872--><p class="indent" > The <span
+ id="dx1-75042"></a> key. </div>
+</p><!--l. 11337--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11339--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdoautoindexname </span>command will attempt to escape any of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\makeindex</span><a
- id="dx1-42043"></a>’s special characters, but there may be special cases where it fails, so take
+ id="dx1-75043"></a>’s special characters, but there may be special cases where it fails, so take
care. This assumes the default <a
- id="dx1-42044"></a><a
+ id="dx1-75044"></a><a
href="#glo:makeindex"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span></a> actual, level, quote and encap values
(unless any of the commands <span
class="cmtt-10">\actualchar</span><a
- id="dx1-42045"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-75045"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\levelchar</span><a
- id="dx1-42046"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-75046"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\quotechar</span><a
- id="dx1-42047"></a> or <span
+ id="dx1-75047"></a> or <span
class="cmtt-10">\encapchar</span><a
- id="dx1-42048"></a>
+ id="dx1-75048"></a>
have been defined before <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>is loaded).
-</p><!--l. 8880--><p class="indent" > If this isn’t the case, you can use the following preamble-only commands to set
+</p><!--l. 11347--><p class="indent" > If this isn’t the case, you can use the following preamble-only commands to set
the correct characters.
-</p><!--l. 8882--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Be very careful of possible shifting category codes! </div>
-</p><!--l. 8884--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 8886--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-42049"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11349--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Be very careful of possible shifting category codes! </div>
+</p><!--l. 11351--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11353--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-75049"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrSetActualChar{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">char</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8888--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11355--><p class="noindent" >
Set the actual character to ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">char</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 8891--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-42050"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11358--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-75050"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrSetLevelChar{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">char</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8893--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11360--><p class="noindent" >
Set the level character to ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">char</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 8896--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-42051"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11363--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-75051"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrSetEscChar{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">char</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 8898--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11365--><p class="noindent" >
Set the escape (quote) character to ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">char</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 8901--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-42052"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11368--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-75052"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrSetEncapChar{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">char</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
@@ -17637,7 +21584,7 @@
-</p><!--l. 8903--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11370--><p class="noindent" >
Set the encap character to ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">char</span>⟩.
@@ -17644,13 +21591,12 @@
</p>
-<!--l. 8906--><p class="indent" > </div>
-</p><!--l. 8906--><p class="noindent" ><a
-href="#top">Top</a><div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">9. <a
- id="sec:bib2gls"></a><span
-class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>: Managing Reference Databases</h2>
-</p><!--l. 8909--><p class="indent" > There is a new command line application called <a
- id="dx1-43001"></a><a
+<!--l. 11373--><p class="indent" > </div>
+</p><!--l. 11373--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><div class="chapter"><h2 class="chapterHead">10. <a
+ id="sec:bib2gls"></a>bib2gls: Managing Reference Databases</h2>
+</p><!--l. 11376--><p class="indent" > There is a new command line application called <a
+ id="dx1-76001"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>, which works in much
the same way as a combination of <span
@@ -17663,7 +21609,7 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\loadglsentries</span>, the entries can instead be stored in a <span
class="cmtt-10">.bib </span>file and <a
- id="dx1-43002"></a><span
+ id="dx1-76002"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>can
selectively write the appropriate commands to a <span
class="cmtt-10">.glstex </span>file which is loaded using
@@ -17670,7 +21616,7 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrresourcefile </span>(or <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrLoadResources</span>).
-</p><!--l. 8920--><p class="indent" > This means that you can use a reference managing system, such as JabRef, to
+</p><!--l. 11387--><p class="indent" > This means that you can use a reference managing system, such as JabRef, to
maintain the database and it reduces the TeX overhead by only defining the entries
that are actually required in the document. If you currently have a <span
class="cmtt-10">.tex </span>file that
@@ -17681,32 +21627,32 @@
containing glossary definitions to a <span
class="cmtt-10">.bib </span>file using <span
class="cmtt-10">convertgls2bib</span><a
- id="dx1-43003"></a>, supplied with
+ id="dx1-76003"></a>, supplied with
<a
- id="dx1-43004"></a><span
+ id="dx1-76004"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>.)
-</p><!--l. 8931--><p class="indent" > There are some new commands and options added to <span
+</p><!--l. 11398--><p class="indent" > There are some new commands and options added to <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>to help assist
the integration of <a
- id="dx1-43005"></a><span
+ id="dx1-76005"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>into the document build process.
-</p><!--l. 8935--><p class="indent" > This chapter just provides a general overview of <a
- id="dx1-43006"></a><span
+</p><!--l. 11402--><p class="indent" > This chapter just provides a general overview of <a
+ id="dx1-76006"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>. The full details and
some sample documents are provided in the <a
- id="dx1-43007"></a><span
+ id="dx1-76007"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span><a
href="http://mirrors.ctan.org/support/bib2gls/bib2gls.pdf" >manual</a>.
-</p><!--l. 8939--><p class="indent" > An example of the contents of <span
+</p><!--l. 11406--><p class="indent" > An example of the contents of <span
class="cmtt-10">.bib </span>file that stores glossary entries that can be
extracted with <a
- id="dx1-43008"></a><span
+ id="dx1-76008"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-209">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-258">
@entry{bird,
  name={bird},
  description = {feathered animal},
@@ -17722,13 +21668,13 @@
  description={a waterbird with a long neck}
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8958--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 8960--><p class="indent" > The follow provides some abbreviations:
+<!--l. 11425--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 11427--><p class="indent" > The follow provides some abbreviations:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-210">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-259">
@string{ssi={server-side includes}}
@string{html={hypertext markup language}}
@abbreviation{shtml,
@@ -17747,13 +21693,13 @@
  description={a simple interpreted server-side scripting language}
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 8982--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 8984--><p class="indent" > Here are some symbols:
+<!--l. 11449--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 11451--><p class="indent" > Here are some symbols:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-211">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-260">
preamble{"\providecommand{\mtx}[1]{\boldsymbol{#1}}"}
@symbol{M,
  name={$\mtx{M}$},
@@ -17771,69 +21717,69 @@
  description={a set}
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9005--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 9007--><p class="indent" > To ensure that <a
- id="dx1-43009"></a><a
+<!--l. 11472--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 11474--><p class="indent" > To ensure that <a
+ id="dx1-76009"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> can find out which entries have been used in the
document, you need the <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><a
- id="dx1-43010"></a> package option:
+ id="dx1-76010"></a> package option:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-212">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-261">
\usepackage[record]{glossaries-extra}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9011--><p class="nopar" > If this option’s value is omitted (as above), the normal indexing will be switched off,
+<!--l. 11478--><p class="nopar" > If this option’s value is omitted (as above), the normal indexing will be switched off,
since <a
- id="dx1-43011"></a><a
+ id="dx1-76011"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> can also sort the entries and collate the locations.
-</p><!--l. 9016--><p class="indent" > If you still want to use an indexing application (for example, you need a custom
+</p><!--l. 11483--><p class="indent" > If you still want to use an indexing application (for example, you need a custom
<a
- id="dx1-43012"></a><a
+ id="dx1-76012"></a><a
href="#glo:xindy"><span
class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a> rule), then just use <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=hybrid</span><a
- id="dx1-43013"></a> and continue to use <span
+ id="dx1-76013"></a> and continue to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\makeglossaries </span>and
<span
class="cmtt-10">\printglossary </span>(or <span
class="cmtt-10">\printglossaries</span>), but you also need to instruct
<a
- id="dx1-43014"></a><span
+ id="dx1-76014"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>to omit sorting to save time and to prevent the <span
class="cmss-10">sort</span><a
- id="dx1-43015"></a> key from being
+ id="dx1-76015"></a> key from being
set.
-</p><!--l. 9023--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 11490--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">.glstex </span>file created by <a
- id="dx1-43016"></a><span
+ id="dx1-76016"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>is loaded using:
-</p><!--l. 9024--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-43017"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11491--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-76017"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrresourcefile[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">filename</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9026--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11493--><p class="noindent" >
(Don’t include the file extension in ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">filename</span>⟩.) There’s a shortcut version
(recommended over the above) that sets ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">filename</span>⟩ to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\jobname</span>:
-</p><!--l. 9029--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-43018"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11496--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-76018"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrLoadResources[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9031--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11498--><p class="noindent" >
On the first use, this command is a shortcut for </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
@@ -17845,8 +21791,8 @@
class="cmsy-10">}</span>
</div>
</div> On subsequent use,<span class="footnote-mark"><a
-href="#fn1x9" id="fn1x9-bk"><sup class="textsuperscript">9.1</sup></a></span><a
- id="x1-43019f1"></a> this
+href="#fn1x10" id="fn1x10-bk"><sup class="textsuperscript">10.1</sup></a></span><a
+ id="x1-76019f1"></a> this
command is a shortcut for <div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
@@ -17860,15 +21806,15 @@
</div>
</div> where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">n</span>⟩ is the current value of
-<!--l. 9043--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
+<!--l. 11510--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrresourcecount </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9044--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11511--><p class="noindent" >
which is incremented at the end of <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrLoadResources</span>. Any advisory notes
regarding <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrresourcefile </span>also apply to <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrLoadResources</span>.
-</p><!--l. 9049--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 11516--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrresourcefile </span>command writes the line </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
@@ -17883,42 +21829,42 @@
class="cmti-10">filename</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">.glstex </span>if it
exists.<span class="footnote-mark"><a
-href="#fn2x9" id="fn2x9-bk"><sup class="textsuperscript">9.2</sup></a></span><a
- id="x1-43020f2"></a>
+href="#fn2x10" id="fn2x10-bk"><sup class="textsuperscript">10.2</sup></a></span><a
+ id="x1-76020f2"></a>
-<!--l. 9059--><p class="indent" > Since the <span
+<!--l. 11526--><p class="indent" > Since the <span
class="cmtt-10">.glstex </span>file won’t exist on the first LaTeX run, the <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><a
- id="dx1-43021"></a> package
+ id="dx1-76021"></a> package
option additionally switches on <a
href="#styopt.undefaction"><span
class="cmss-10">undefaction</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=warn</span><a
- id="dx1-43022"></a>. Any use of commands like <span
+ id="dx1-76022"></a>. Any use of commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls </span>or
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glstext </span>will produce ?? in the document, since the entries are undefined at this
point. Once <a
- id="dx1-43023"></a><span
+ id="dx1-76023"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>has created the <span
class="cmtt-10">.glstex </span>file the references should be resolved.
This may cause a shift in the locations if the actual text produced once the entry is
defined is significantly larger than the placeholder ?? (as this can alter the page
breaking).
-</p><!--l. 9069--><p class="indent" > Note that as from v1.12, <span
+</p><!--l. 11536--><p class="indent" > Note that as from v1.12, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrresourcefile </span>temporarily switches the
category code of <span
class="cmtt-10">@ </span>to 11 (letter) while it reads the file to allow for any internal
commands stored in the location field.
</p>
-<!--l. 9074--><p class="noindent" ><a
-href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">9.1 </span> <a
- id="selection"></a>Selection</h3>
-<!--l. 9076--><p class="noindent" >The default behaviour is for <a
- id="dx1-44001"></a><a
+<!--l. 11541--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">10.1 </span> <a
+ id="sec:bib2glsselection"></a>Selection</h3>
+<!--l. 11544--><p class="noindent" >The default behaviour is for <a
+ id="dx1-77001"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> to select all entries that have a record in the
<span
@@ -17927,7 +21873,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">glsignore </span>format (for example, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls[format=glsignore]{duck}</span></span></span>) is recognised by
<a
- id="dx1-44002"></a><span
+ id="dx1-77002"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>as a special ignored record. This means that it will match the selection
criteria but the record won’t be added to the location list. This means that you won’t
get spurious commas in the location list (as can happen with the other indexing
@@ -17936,34 +21882,34 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-213">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-262">
\GlsXtrSetDefaultNumberFormat{glsignore}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9088--><p class="nopar" > at the start of the front matter and
+<!--l. 11556--><p class="nopar" > at the start of the front matter and
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-214">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-263">
\GlsXtrSetDefaultNumberFormat{glsnumberformat}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9092--><p class="nopar" > at the start of the main matter to prevent any records in the front matter from
+<!--l. 11560--><p class="nopar" > at the start of the main matter to prevent any records in the front matter from
occurring in the location lists.
-</p><!--l. 9096--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Note that commands like <span
+</p><!--l. 11564--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Note that commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsaddall </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsaddallunused </span>don’t
work with <a
- id="dx1-44003"></a><a
+ id="dx1-77003"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> as the command has to iterate over the internal lists of
defined entry labels, which will be empty on the first run and on subsequent
runs will only contain those entries that have been selected by <a
- id="dx1-44004"></a><span
+ id="dx1-77004"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>.
</div>
-</p><!--l. 9101--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 9103--><p class="indent" > If you want to add all entries to the glossary, you need to tell <a
- id="dx1-44005"></a><span
+</p><!--l. 11569--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11571--><p class="indent" > If you want to add all entries to the glossary, you need to tell <a
+ id="dx1-77005"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>this in the
options list. For example:
@@ -17970,32 +21916,32 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-215">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-264">
\GlsXtrLoadResources[src={terms},selection={all}]
</pre>
-<!--l. 9108--><p class="nopar" > This will add all entries, regardless of whether or not they have any records in the
+<!--l. 11576--><p class="nopar" > This will add all entries, regardless of whether or not they have any records in the
<span
class="cmtt-10">.aux </span>file. Those that don’t have any records will have an empty location list. See the
<a
- id="dx1-44006"></a><a
+ id="dx1-77006"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> user manual for more details of this option.
-</p><!--l. 9114--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11582--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 9114--><p class="noindent" ><a
-href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">9.2 </span> <a
- id="sortinganddisplayingtheglossary"></a>Sorting and Displaying the Glossary</h3>
-<!--l. 9116--><p class="noindent" >There are many sorting options provided by <a
- id="dx1-45001"></a><span
+<!--l. 11582--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">10.2 </span> <a
+ id="sec:bib2glssortprint"></a>Sorting and Displaying the Glossary</h3>
+<!--l. 11585--><p class="noindent" >There are many sorting options provided by <a
+ id="dx1-78001"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>. The default is to sort
according to the system locale. If the document has a language setting, you can use
<span
class="cmtt-10">sort=doc </span>to instruct <a
- id="dx1-45002"></a><span
+ id="dx1-78002"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>to sort according to that. (The language tag obtained
from <span
class="cmss-10">tracklang</span><a
- id="dx1-45003"></a>’s interface is written to the <span
+ id="dx1-78003"></a>’s interface is written to the <span
class="cmtt-10">.aux </span>file.) For a multilingual document
you need to explicitly set the locale using a well-formed language tag. For
example:
@@ -18003,26 +21949,26 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-216">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-265">
\GlsXtrLoadResources[
  src=terms, % data in terms.bib
  sort=de-DE-1996 % sort according to this locale
]
</pre>
-<!--l. 9129--><p class="nopar" > The locale-sensitive sort methods usually ignore most punctuation so for lists of
+<!--l. 11598--><p class="nopar" > The locale-sensitive sort methods usually ignore most punctuation so for lists of
symbols you may find it more appropriate to use one of the letter-base sort methods
that sort according to the Unicode value of each character. Alternatively you can
provide a custom rule. See the <a
- id="dx1-45004"></a><a
+ id="dx1-78004"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> manual for full details of all the available sort
methods.
-</p><!--l. 9138--><p class="indent" > Since the <span
+</p><!--l. 11607--><p class="indent" > Since the <span
class="cmtt-10">.glstex </span>file only defines those references required within the document
(selected according to the <span
class="cmtt-10">selection </span>option) and the definitions have been written in
the order corresponding to <a
- id="dx1-45005"></a><span
+ id="dx1-78005"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>’s sorted list, the glossaries can simply be
displayed using <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossary </span>(or <span
@@ -18030,9 +21976,9 @@
<a
href="#sec:printunsrt"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">10.2</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">11.2</span> </a><a
href="#sec:printunsrt">Display All Entries Without Sorting or Indexing<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:printunsrt --></a>.
-</p><!--l. 9146--><p class="indent" > Suppose the <span
+</p><!--l. 11615--><p class="indent" > Suppose the <span
class="cmtt-10">.bib </span>examples shown above have been stored in the files <span
class="cmtt-10">terms.bib</span>,
<span
@@ -18043,7 +21989,7 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-217">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-266">
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage[record]{glossaries-extra}
\setabbreviationstyle{long-short-desc}
@@ -18055,18 +22001,18 @@
\printunsrtglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9168--><p class="nopar" > The document build process (assuming the document is called <span
+<!--l. 11637--><p class="nopar" > The document build process (assuming the document is called <span
class="cmtt-10">mydoc</span>) is:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-218">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-267">
pdflatex mydoc
bib2gls mydoc
pdflatex mydoc
</pre>
-<!--l. 9175--><p class="nopar" > This creates a single glossary containing the entries: <span
+<!--l. 11644--><p class="nopar" > This creates a single glossary containing the entries: <span
class="cmtt-10">bird</span>, <span
class="cmtt-10">duck</span>, <span
class="cmtt-10">goose</span>, <span
@@ -18079,12 +22025,12 @@
class="cmtt-10">shtml </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">M </span>entries were added because
<a
- id="dx1-45006"></a><a
+ id="dx1-78006"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> detected (from the <span
class="cmtt-10">.aux </span>file) that they had been used in the document. The
other entries were added because <a
- id="dx1-45007"></a><span
+ id="dx1-78007"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>detected (from the <span
class="cmtt-10">.bib </span>files) that they
are referenced by the used entries. In the case of <span
@@ -18092,24 +22038,24 @@
class="cmtt-10">goose</span>, they are
in the <span
class="cmss-10">see</span><a
- id="dx1-45008"></a> field for <span
+ id="dx1-78008"></a> field for <span
class="cmtt-10">bird</span>. In the case of <span
class="cmtt-10">ssi </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">html</span>, they are referenced
in the <span
class="cmss-10">description</span><a
- id="dx1-45009"></a> field of <span
+ id="dx1-78009"></a> field of <span
class="cmtt-10">shtml</span>. These cross-referenced entries won’t have
a location list when the glossary is first displayed, but depending on how
they are referenced, they may pick up a location list on the next document
build.
-</p><!--l. 9192--><p class="indent" > The entries can be separated into different glossaries with different sort
+</p><!--l. 11661--><p class="indent" > The entries can be separated into different glossaries with different sort
methods:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-219">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-268">
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage[record,abbreviations,symbols]{glossaries-extra}
\setabbreviationstyle{long-short-desc}
@@ -18125,8 +22071,8 @@
\printunsrtglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9218--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 9220--><p class="indent" > Or you can have multiple instance of <span
+<!--l. 11687--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 11689--><p class="indent" > Or you can have multiple instance of <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrLoadResources </span>with the same
<span
class="cmtt-10">type</span>, which will produce a glossary with ordered sub-blocks. For example:
@@ -18134,7 +22080,7 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-220">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-269">
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage[record,style=indexgroup]{glossaries-extra}
\setabbreviationstyle{long-short-desc}
@@ -18152,10 +22098,10 @@
\printunsrtglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9249--><p class="nopar" > This will result in a glossary where the first group has the title “Abbreviations”, the
+<!--l. 11718--><p class="nopar" > This will result in a glossary where the first group has the title “Abbreviations”, the
second group has the title “Symbols” and then follow the usual letter groups. Note
that for this example to work, you must run <a
- id="dx1-45010"></a><a
+ id="dx1-78010"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> with the <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">--group</span></span></span> (or <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
@@ -18166,14 +22112,14 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-221">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-270">
pdflatex myDoc
bib2gls -g myDoc
pdflatex myDoc
</pre>
-<!--l. 9260--><p class="nopar" > The value of the <span
+<!--l. 11729--><p class="nopar" > The value of the <span
class="cmss-10">group</span><a
- id="dx1-45011"></a> field must always be a label. You can set the corresponding
+ id="dx1-78011"></a> field must always be a label. You can set the corresponding
title with <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsetgrouptitle </span>(see <a
href="#sec:glosstylemods"><span
@@ -18181,7 +22127,7 @@
class="cmbx-10">2.11</span> </a><a
href="#sec:glosstylemods">Glossary Style
Modifications<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:glosstylemods --></a>). If no title is set then the label is used as the group title.
-</p><!--l. 9266--><p class="indent" > You can provide your own custom sort rule. For example, if you are using
+</p><!--l. 11735--><p class="indent" > You can provide your own custom sort rule. For example, if you are using
<span class="HoLogo-XeLaTeX"><span class="HoLogo-Xe">X<span class="HoLogo-e">Ǝ</span></span><span class="HoLogo-LaTeX">L<span class="HoLogo-a">A</span><span class="HoLogo-TeX">T<span class="HoLogo-e">E</span>X</span></span></span> or Lua<span class="HoLogo-LaTeX">L<span class="HoLogo-a">A</span><span class="HoLogo-TeX">T<span class="HoLogo-e">E</span>X</span></span>: </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
@@ -18318,7 +22264,7 @@
</div>
</div> Remember that if you are using <span
class="cmss-10">inputenc</span><a
- id="dx1-45012"></a> then extended characters, such as é or ø,
+ id="dx1-78012"></a> then extended characters, such as é or ø,
are active and will expand when written to the <span
class="cmtt-10">.aux </span>file. So with PDFLaTeX the
above would have to be changed to protect against expansion. Some of the
@@ -18332,7 +22278,7 @@
class="cmbx-10">in the </span><span
class="cmtt-10">.aux </span><span
class="cmbx-10">file</span>. <a
- id="dx1-45013"></a><a
+ id="dx1-78013"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> will recognise this as the
character given by the hexadecimal value ⟨<span
@@ -18343,7 +22289,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\string\uE6 </span>and so on. This is quite cumbersome, but you can
use the shortcut <span
class="cmtt-10">\glshex</span><a
- id="dx1-45014"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-78014"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">E6 </span>instead, so the above needs to be written as:
<div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
@@ -18479,50 +22425,49 @@
class="cmtt-10">]</span>
</div>
</div>
-<!--l. 9314--><p class="noindent" >
+<!--l. 11783--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 9314--><p class="noindent" ><a
-href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">9.3 </span> <a
- id="x1-460009.3"></a>The <span
-class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls </span>package</h3>
-<!--l. 9317--><p class="noindent" >The package option <a
+<!--l. 11783--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">10.3 </span> <a
+ id="sec:bib2glssty"></a>The glossaries-extra-bib2gls package</h3>
+<!--l. 11786--><p class="noindent" >The package option <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=only</span><a
- id="dx1-46001"></a> (or simply <a
+ id="dx1-79001"></a> (or simply <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><a
- id="dx1-46002"></a>) automatically loads the
+ id="dx1-79002"></a>) automatically loads the
supplementary package <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-46003"></a>, which provides some commands that
+ id="dx1-79003"></a>, which provides some commands that
are specific to <a
- id="dx1-46004"></a><a
+ id="dx1-79004"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>. The package isn’t loaded by <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=hybrid</span><a
- id="dx1-46005"></a> as that option is
+ id="dx1-79005"></a> as that option is
intended for sorting with <a
- id="dx1-46006"></a><a
+ id="dx1-79006"></a><a
href="#glo:makeindex"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span></a> or <a
- id="dx1-46007"></a><a
+ id="dx1-79007"></a><a
href="#glo:xindy"><span
class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a> and it is expected that the sorting will
be switched off (with the resource option <span
class="cmtt-10">sort=none</span>).
-</p><!--l. 9326--><p class="indent" > If <span
+</p><!--l. 11795--><p class="indent" > If <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-46008"></a> is loaded via the <a
+ id="dx1-79008"></a> is loaded via the <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><a
- id="dx1-46009"></a> package option then the check for
+ id="dx1-79009"></a> package option then the check for
associated language resource files (see <a
href="#sec:lang"><span
class="tcrm-1000">§</span><span
-class="cmbx-10">14</span> </a><a
+class="cmbx-10">15</span> </a><a
href="#sec:lang">Multi-Lingual Support<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:lang --></a>)
will also search for the existence of <span
class="cmtt-10">glossariesxtr-</span>⟨<span
@@ -18532,41 +22477,41 @@
class="cmti-10">script</span>⟩ is the four letter script identifier, such as
<span
class="cmtt-10">Latn</span>).
-</p><!--l. 9334--><p class="indent" > This package provides some shortcut commands that use <span
+</p><!--l. 11803--><p class="indent" > This package provides some shortcut commands that use <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtglossary</span><a
- id="dx1-46010"></a> if the
+ id="dx1-79010"></a> if the
relevant package option has defined the associated glossary: <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtabbreviations</span><a
- id="dx1-46011"></a>,
+ id="dx1-79011"></a>,
<span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtacronyms</span><a
- id="dx1-46012"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-79012"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtsymbols</span><a
- id="dx1-46013"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-79013"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtnumbers</span><a
- id="dx1-46014"></a> and
+ id="dx1-79014"></a> and
<span
class="cmtt-10">\printunsrtindex</span><a
- id="dx1-46015"></a>.
-</p><!--l. 9340--><p class="indent" > The <a
+ id="dx1-79015"></a>.
+</p><!--l. 11809--><p class="indent" > The <a
href="#styopt.savenumberlist"><span
class="cmss-10">savenumberlist</span></a><a
- id="dx1-46016"></a> package option doesn’t have any effect with <a
- id="dx1-46017"></a><span
+ id="dx1-79016"></a> package option doesn’t have any effect with <a
+ id="dx1-79017"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>.
The location lists are saved by default, so <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-46018"></a> patches
+ id="dx1-79018"></a> patches
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsentrynumberlist</span><a
- id="dx1-46019"></a> and <span
+ id="dx1-79019"></a> and <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdisplaynumberlist</span><a
- id="dx1-46020"></a> to work with the <span
+ id="dx1-79020"></a> to work with the <span
class="cmss-10">location</span><a
- id="dx1-46021"></a>
+ id="dx1-79021"></a>
field
-</p><!--l. 9345--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-46022"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11814--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-79022"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrprovidecommand{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">cs</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
@@ -18576,18 +22521,18 @@
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">definition</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9347--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11816--><p class="noindent" >
This command is intended for use in <span
class="cmtt-10">@preamble</span>. It’s simply defined to
<span
class="cmtt-10">\providecommand </span>in <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-46023"></a> but <a
- id="dx1-46024"></a><span
+ id="dx1-79023"></a> but <a
+ id="dx1-79024"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>’s interpreter treats it as
<span
class="cmtt-10">\renewcommand</span>. This means that you can override <a
- id="dx1-46025"></a><span
+ id="dx1-79025"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>’s internal definition of a
command without overriding the command definition in the document (if it’s already
defined before the resource file is input). For example
@@ -18595,11 +22540,11 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-222">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-271">
@preamble{"\glsxtrprovidecommand{\int}{integral}"}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9358--><p class="nopar" > This will force <a
- id="dx1-46026"></a><a
+<!--l. 11827--><p class="nopar" > This will force <a
+ id="dx1-79026"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> to treat <span
class="cmtt-10">\int </span>as the word “integral” to assist sorting but if
@@ -18607,7 +22552,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">.glstex </span>file (as it is by default) then it won’t
override the current definition (provided by the kernel or redefined by a
package).
-</p><!--l. 9365--><p class="indent" > The helper commands in the resource files are defined using <span
+</p><!--l. 11834--><p class="indent" > The helper commands in the resource files are defined using <span
class="cmtt-10">\providecommand</span>.
For many of them, if you want to provide an alternative definition then you need to
define the command before the resource file is loaded. There are a few that may be
@@ -18616,8 +22561,8 @@
first LaTeX run when the <span
class="cmtt-10">.glstex </span>file doesn’t exist. In this case, you may prefer to
use:
-</p><!--l. 9372--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-46027"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11841--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-79027"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsrenewcommand{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">cs</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
@@ -18627,24 +22572,24 @@
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">definition</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9374--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11843--><p class="noindent" >
This behaves like <span
class="cmtt-10">\renewcommand </span>but only generates a warning rather than an error
if the command isn’t already defined so it won’t interrupt the document
build.
-</p><!--l. 9379--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-46028"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11848--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-79028"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrIndexCounterLink{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9381--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11850--><p class="noindent" >
If the <span
class="cmtt-10">\hyperref</span><a
- id="dx1-46029"></a> command has been defined (that is, <span
+ id="dx1-79029"></a> command has been defined (that is, <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
- id="dx1-46030"></a> has been
+ id="dx1-79030"></a> has been
loaded before <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>) then this command checks for the existence of
the <span
@@ -18665,21 +22610,21 @@
<a
href="#styopt.indexcounter"><span
class="cmss-10">indexcounter</span></a><a
- id="dx1-46031"></a> package option combined with <a
- id="dx1-46032"></a><span
+ id="dx1-79031"></a> package option combined with <a
+ id="dx1-79032"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>’s <span
class="cmtt-10">save-index-counter</span>
resource option. See the <a
- id="dx1-46033"></a><span
+ id="dx1-79033"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>manual for further details (at least version
1.4).
-</p><!--l. 9395--><p class="indent" > If you use the <span
+</p><!--l. 11864--><p class="indent" > If you use the <span
class="cmtt-10">set-widest </span>resource option, <a
- id="dx1-46034"></a><span
+ id="dx1-79034"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>v1.8+ will now
use:
-</p><!--l. 9397--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-46035"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11866--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-79035"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrSetWidest{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">type</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -18687,50 +22632,50 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">text</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9399--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11868--><p class="noindent" >
(if it has been defined) to set the widest name for the given glossary type and level.
This allows for both the <span
class="cmss-10">alttree</span><a
- id="dx1-46036"></a> style and the styles provided by <span
+ id="dx1-79036"></a> style and the styles provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossary-longextra</span><a
- id="dx1-46037"></a>,
+ id="dx1-79037"></a>,
which need to know the widest name.
-</p><!--l. 9405--><p class="indent" > If <a
- id="dx1-46038"></a><span
+</p><!--l. 11874--><p class="indent" > If <a
+ id="dx1-79038"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>can’t determine the widest name (typically because the name field
consists of commands that aren’t recognised by the interpreter) then <a
- id="dx1-46039"></a><span
+ id="dx1-79039"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>v1.8+
will now use:
-</p><!--l. 9408--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-46040"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11877--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-79040"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrSetWidestFallback{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">max depth</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9410--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11879--><p class="noindent" >
(if defined). Currently the maximum hierarchical depth ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">max depth</span>⟩ may only be 0 or
2. This command requires commands provided by the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-stylemods</span><a
- id="dx1-46041"></a>
+ id="dx1-79041"></a>
package with the <span
class="cmss-10">alttree</span><a
- id="dx1-46042"></a> style enabled. In this case, it may be simpler to just use
+ id="dx1-79042"></a> style enabled. In this case, it may be simpler to just use
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glssetwidest</span><a
- id="dx1-46043"></a>.
-</p><!--l. 9417--><p class="noindent" >
+ id="dx1-79043"></a>.
+</p><!--l. 11886--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 9417--><p class="noindent" ><a
-href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">9.3.1 </span> <a
+<!--l. 11886--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">10.3.1 </span> <a
id="sec:supplocations"></a>Supplemental Locations</h4>
-<!--l. 9420--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-47001"></a> <span
+<!--l. 11889--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-80001"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdisplaysupploc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -18743,9 +22688,9 @@
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9422--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11891--><p class="noindent" >
This is used by <a
- id="dx1-47002"></a><a
+ id="dx1-80002"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> version 1.7+ for supplemental locations, instead of using
<span
@@ -18752,11 +22697,11 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrsupphypernumber </span>with the <a
href="#catattr.externallocation"><span
class="cmss-10">externallocation</span></a><a
- id="dx1-47003"></a> attribute. This command sets up
+ id="dx1-80003"></a> attribute. This command sets up
the location counter and prefix (used in the formation of hyperlinks) and then
uses
-</p><!--l. 9428--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-47004"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11897--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-80004"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrmultisupplocation{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -18764,16 +22709,16 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">format</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9430--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11899--><p class="noindent" >
to format the actual location (with an external hyperlink, if supported).
-</p><!--l. 9434--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11903--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 9434--><p class="noindent" ><a
-href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">9.3.2 </span> <a
+<!--l. 11903--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">10.3.2 </span> <a
id="sec:recordnameref"></a>Nameref Record</h4>
-<!--l. 9437--><p class="noindent" >Normally locations are recorded in the <span
+<!--l. 11906--><p class="noindent" >Normally locations are recorded in the <span
class="cmtt-10">.aux </span>file in the form:
-</p><!--l. 9440--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
+</p><!--l. 11909--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtr at record{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -18786,16 +22731,16 @@
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9441--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11910--><p class="noindent" >
The <a
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=nameref</span><a
- id="dx1-48001"></a> option, which requires at least <a
- id="dx1-48002"></a><span
+ id="dx1-81001"></a> option, which requires at least <a
+ id="dx1-81002"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>v1.8, instead
uses:
-</p><!--l. 9445--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
+</p><!--l. 11914--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtr at record@nameref{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -18815,7 +22760,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">hcounter</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9446--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11915--><p class="noindent" >
where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">title</span>⟩ is obtained from <span
class="cmtt-10">\@currentlabelname </span>and ⟨<span
@@ -18823,34 +22768,34 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\@currentHref</span>. These commands require <span
class="cmss-10">hyperref</span><a
- id="dx1-48003"></a>. If they are undefined, ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-81003"></a>. If they are undefined, ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">title</span>⟩ and
⟨<span
class="cmti-10">href </span>⟩ will be left empty and <a
- id="dx1-48004"></a><span
+ id="dx1-81004"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>will treat it as a regular record.
-</p><!--l. 9453--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Be careful with this option as ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 11922--><p class="indent" > <div class="important" title="Important Note"> Be careful with this option as ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">href </span>⟩ will globally change on every instance of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\refstepcounter </span>but ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">title</span>⟩ won’t necessarily change. It can therefore cause
unexpected behaviour. </div>
-</p><!--l. 9457--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 9459--><p class="indent" > The final argument ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 11926--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11928--><p class="indent" > The final argument ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">hcounter</span>⟩ is obtained from <span
class="cmtt-10">\theH</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">counter</span>⟩ which provides the
partial target name associated with the indexing counter. With the original
<a
- id="dx1-48005"></a><a
+ id="dx1-81005"></a><a
href="#glo:makeindex"><span
class="cmtt-10">makeindex</span></a>/<a
- id="dx1-48006"></a><a
+ id="dx1-81006"></a><a
href="#glo:xindy"><span
class="cmtt-10">xindy</span></a> approach, it’s not possible to include this information in the
location, so the base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span><a
- id="dx1-48007"></a> package attempts to derive a prefix from which the
+ id="dx1-81007"></a> package attempts to derive a prefix from which the
⟨<span
class="cmti-10">hcounter</span>⟩ value can be reconstituted by appending the prefix. Unfortunately, not all
definitions of <span
@@ -18864,9 +22809,9 @@
<span
class="cmss-10">equation</span><a
- id="dx1-48008"></a> counter with chapters) so this can fail.
-</p><!--l. 9470--><p class="indent" > Since <a
- id="dx1-48009"></a><a
+ id="dx1-81008"></a> counter with chapters) so this can fail.
+</p><!--l. 11939--><p class="indent" > Since <a
+ id="dx1-81009"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> is customized specifically for use with <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span>, it’s now
@@ -18875,7 +22820,7 @@
href="#styopt.record"><span
class="cmss-10">record</span></a><span
class="cmss-10">=nameref</span><a
- id="dx1-48010"></a> option does this. By providing both
+ id="dx1-81010"></a> option does this. By providing both
⟨<span
class="cmti-10">href </span>⟩ and ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">hcounter</span>⟩, you can determine which target you would rather use. The default
@@ -18886,10 +22831,10 @@
using the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">href </span>⟩ target, which will take you to the nearest target before the indexing
took place.
-</p><!--l. 9481--><p class="indent" > With <a
- id="dx1-48011"></a><span
+</p><!--l. 11950--><p class="indent" > With <a
+ id="dx1-81011"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>v1.8+, normal locations are displayed using:
-</p><!--l. 9483--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
+</p><!--l. 11952--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
class="cmtt-10">\glsnoidxdisplayloc{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -18899,11 +22844,11 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9484--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11953--><p class="noindent" >
This is provided by the base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span><a
- id="dx1-48012"></a> package and is simply defined to do:
-</p><!--l. 9488--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
+ id="dx1-81012"></a> package and is simply defined to do:
+</p><!--l. 11957--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span
class="cmtt-10">\setentrycounter[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -18914,16 +22859,16 @@
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
</div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9489--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11958--><p class="noindent" >
Earlier versions of <a
- id="dx1-48013"></a><span
+ id="dx1-81013"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>only used this in the <span
class="cmss-10">loclist</span><a
- id="dx1-48014"></a> field and explicitly used
+ id="dx1-81014"></a> field and explicitly used
<span
class="cmtt-10">\setentrycounter </span>in the <span
class="cmss-10">location</span><a
- id="dx1-48015"></a> field followed by <span
+ id="dx1-81015"></a> field followed by <span
class="cmtt-10">\</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">format</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
@@ -18932,18 +22877,18 @@
the code that’s created with the default <a
href="#styopt.makeindex"><span
class="cmss-10">makeindex</span></a><a
- id="dx1-48016"></a> setting. The <span
+ id="dx1-81016"></a> setting. The <span
class="cmtt-10">\setentrycounter</span>
command sets up the prefix needed for <span
class="cmtt-10">\glshypernumber </span>to reform the target name
from the given location.
-</p><!--l. 9499--><p class="indent" > The locations identified by <span
+</p><!--l. 11968--><p class="indent" > The locations identified by <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtr at record@nameref </span>are written by <a
- id="dx1-48017"></a><span
+ id="dx1-81017"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>to
the location list using:
-</p><!--l. 9501--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-48018"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 11970--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-81018"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdisplaylocnameref{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -18963,17 +22908,17 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">file</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9503--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11972--><p class="noindent" >
With normal internal locations, ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">file</span>⟩ will always be empty. With supplemental
locations, ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">file</span>⟩ will be the external file reference.
-</p><!--l. 9508--><p class="indent" > The default definition is:
+</p><!--l. 11977--><p class="indent" > The default definition is:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-223">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-272">
\newcommand*{\glsxtrdisplaylocnameref}[8]{%
  \ifstrequal{#2}{equation}%
  {\glsxtrnamereflink{#3}{(#4)}{#2.#7}{#8}}%
@@ -18990,9 +22935,9 @@
  }%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9525--><p class="nopar" > which uses:
-</p><!--l. 9527--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-48019"></a> <span
+<!--l. 11994--><p class="nopar" > which uses:
+</p><!--l. 11996--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-81019"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnamereflink{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">format</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -19002,7 +22947,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">file</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9529--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 11998--><p class="noindent" >
This ignores the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">prefix</span>⟩, ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">counter</span>⟩ and <span
@@ -19012,22 +22957,22 @@
hyperlink with the target name obtained from ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">target</span>⟩ (and ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">file</span>⟩, if not empty).
-</p><!--l. 9533--><p class="indent" > Since pages and equations typically don’t have titles, the default definition of
+</p><!--l. 12002--><p class="indent" > Since pages and equations typically don’t have titles, the default definition of
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdisplaylocnameref </span>checks the counter was used as the location. If it’s <span
class="cmss-10">page</span><a
- id="dx1-48020"></a>
+ id="dx1-81020"></a>
or if ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">title</span>⟩ is empty, then just the location is used as the hyperlink text. If the counter
<span
class="cmss-10">equation</span><a
- id="dx1-48021"></a>, then the text is the location in parentheses. Otherwise the text is obtained
+ id="dx1-81021"></a>, then the text is the location in parentheses. Otherwise the text is obtained
from ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">title</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 9540--><p class="indent" > If ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 12009--><p class="indent" > If ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">file</span>⟩ is empty an internal link is created with:
-</p><!--l. 9541--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-48022"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12010--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-81022"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfmtinternalnameref{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">target</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -19035,10 +22980,10 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">title</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9543--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12012--><p class="noindent" >
otherwise an external link is created with:
-</p><!--l. 9545--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-48023"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12014--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-81023"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfmtexternalnameref{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">target</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -19048,13 +22993,13 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">file</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9547--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12016--><p class="noindent" >
The ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">file</span>⟩ argument is set by <a
- id="dx1-48024"></a><a
+ id="dx1-81024"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> for supplemental locations.
-</p><!--l. 9551--><p class="indent" > Here’s alternative definition that uses the ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 12020--><p class="indent" > Here’s alternative definition that uses the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">prefix</span>⟩ and ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">counter</span>⟩ to reform the
target name (as <span
@@ -19065,14 +23010,14 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-224">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-273">
\renewcommand*{\glsxtrdisplaylocnameref}[7]{%
 \glsxtrnamereflink{#3}{#5}{#6}{#7}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9558--><p class="nopar" > which uses:
-</p><!--l. 9560--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-48025"></a> <span
+<!--l. 12027--><p class="nopar" > which uses:
+</p><!--l. 12029--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-81025"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnameloclink{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -19088,10 +23033,10 @@
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">file</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9562--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12031--><p class="noindent" >
This uses the same commands as <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnamereflink </span>to produce the hyperlinks.
-</p><!--l. 9566--><p class="indent" > In both cases, the link is encapsulated with the text-block command whose
+</p><!--l. 12035--><p class="indent" > In both cases, the link is encapsulated with the text-block command whose
name is given by ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">format</span>⟩, but <span
class="cmtt-10">\glshypernumber </span>is first locally redefined to
@@ -19102,8 +23047,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">hyperbf </span>then it will simply behave like
<span
class="cmtt-10">textbf</span>.
-</p><!--l. 9573--><p class="indent" > For compactness, <a
- id="dx1-48026"></a><a
+</p><!--l. 12042--><p class="indent" > For compactness, <a
+ id="dx1-81026"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> merges normal records if the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">prefix</span>⟩, ⟨<span
@@ -19113,7 +23058,7 @@
With nameref records, you can use the <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">--merge-nameref-on</span></span></span> switch provided by
<a
- id="dx1-48027"></a><span
+ id="dx1-81027"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>v1.8+ to determine how to merge nameref records. This switch
must be followed by one of the following keywords: <span
class="cmtt-10">hcounter </span>(merge on
@@ -19128,15 +23073,15 @@
class="cmti-10">location</span>⟩, as regular records). In all cases, the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">counter</span>⟩ must also
match.
-</p><!--l. 9584--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12053--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 9584--><p class="noindent" ><a
-href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">9.3.3 </span> <a
+<!--l. 12053--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h4 class="subsectionHead"></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">10.3.3 </span> <a
id="sec:resourcecommands"></a>Helper Commands for Resource Options</h4>
-<!--l. 9587--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49001"></a> <span
+<!--l. 12056--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82001"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glshex </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9589--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12058--><p class="noindent" >
This is just defined as <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\string\u</span></span></span>, which is required when you need to indicate a
Unicode character in the form <span
@@ -19143,14 +23088,14 @@
class="cmtt-10">\u</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">hex</span>⟩ in some of the resource options (as illustrated
above).
-</p><!--l. 9595--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49002"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12064--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82002"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glscapturedgroup </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9597--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12066--><p class="noindent" >
This is just defined as <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\string\$</span></span></span> and is used for the captured group reference in a
replacement part of a regular expression substitution (requires at least <a
- id="dx1-49003"></a><span
+ id="dx1-82003"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>
version 1.5). For example:
@@ -19157,17 +23102,17 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-225">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-274">
sort-replace={{([a-zA-Z])\string\.}{\glscapturedgroup1}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9603--><p class="nopar" > This only removes a full stop that follows any of the characters a,…,z or
+<!--l. 12072--><p class="nopar" > This only removes a full stop that follows any of the characters a,…,z or
A,…,Z.
-</p><!--l. 9607--><p class="indent" > If you use the <span
+</p><!--l. 12076--><p class="indent" > If you use the <span
class="cmtt-10">save-child-count </span>resource option, you can test if the <span
class="cmtt-10">childcount</span>
field is non-zero using:
-</p><!--l. 9609--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49004"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12078--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82004"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrIfHasNonZeroChildCount{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -19175,7 +23120,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9611--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12080--><p class="noindent" >
This internally uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrIfFieldNonZero </span>and will do ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">false</span>⟩ if the field isn’t
@@ -19188,32 +23133,32 @@
is also a starred version which uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrIfFieldNonZero* </span>(don’t add
grouping).
-</p><!--l. 9620--><p class="indent" > A convenient shortcut for use in the <span
+</p><!--l. 12089--><p class="indent" > A convenient shortcut for use in the <span
class="cmtt-10">entry-type-aliases </span>setting:
-</p><!--l. 9622--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49005"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12091--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82005"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrBibTeXEntryAliases </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9624--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12093--><p class="noindent" >
This provides aliases for BibTeX’s standard entry types to <a
- id="dx1-49006"></a><a
+ id="dx1-82006"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>’s</a> <span
class="cmtt-10">@bibtexentry</span>
entry type (requires at least <a
- id="dx1-49007"></a><span
+ id="dx1-82007"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>version 1.4).
-</p><!--l. 9629--><p class="indent" > You may also want to provide storage keys for BibTeX’s standard fields rather
+</p><!--l. 12098--><p class="indent" > You may also want to provide storage keys for BibTeX’s standard fields rather
than having to alias them all. This can be done with:
-</p><!--l. 9631--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49008"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12100--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82008"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrProvideBibTeXFields </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9633--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12102--><p class="noindent" >
Note that BibTeX’s <span
class="cmtt-10">type </span>field clashes with the <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span><a
- id="dx1-49009"></a> package’s <span
+ id="dx1-82009"></a> package’s <span
class="cmss-10">type</span><a
- id="dx1-49010"></a> key, so
+ id="dx1-82010"></a> key, so
this command provides the key <span
class="cmtt-10">bibtextype </span>instead. You can alias it with
<span
@@ -19227,55 +23172,55 @@
accessed with <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrbibtype</span>. Each of these commands takes the entry label as the
sole argument.
-</p><!--l. 9644--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 12113--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-49011"></a> package also provides definitions of the missing
+ id="dx1-82011"></a> package also provides definitions of the missing
mathematical Greek commands: <span
class="cmtt-10">\Alpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49012"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82012"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Beta</span><a
- id="dx1-49013"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82013"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Epsilon</span><a
- id="dx1-49014"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82014"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Zeta</span><a
- id="dx1-49015"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82015"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Eta</span><a
- id="dx1-49016"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82016"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Iota</span><a
- id="dx1-49017"></a>,
+ id="dx1-82017"></a>,
<span
class="cmtt-10">\Kappa</span><a
- id="dx1-49018"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82018"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Mu</span><a
- id="dx1-49019"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82019"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Nu</span><a
- id="dx1-49020"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82020"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Omicron</span><a
- id="dx1-49021"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82021"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Rho</span><a
- id="dx1-49022"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82022"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Tau</span><a
- id="dx1-49023"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82023"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Chi</span><a
- id="dx1-49024"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82024"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Digamma</span><a
- id="dx1-49025"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82025"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\omicron</span><a
- id="dx1-49026"></a>. These are all
+ id="dx1-82026"></a>. These are all
defined with <span
class="cmtt-10">\providecommand</span>, so they won’t override any definitions provided by
any package loaded before <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra</span><a
- id="dx1-49027"></a>. Since <a
- id="dx1-49028"></a><span
+ id="dx1-82027"></a>. Since <a
+ id="dx1-82028"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>’s interpreter recognises
these commands, using them instead of explicitly using the Latin characters with the
same shape helps to keep the Greek symbols together when sorting. Similarly,
if <span
class="cmss-10">upgreek</span><a
- id="dx1-49029"></a> has been loaded, the missing upright Greek commands are also
+ id="dx1-82029"></a> has been loaded, the missing upright Greek commands are also
provided.
-</p><!--l. 9658--><p class="indent" > The remaining commands provide common rule blocks for use in the
+</p><!--l. 12127--><p class="indent" > The remaining commands provide common rule blocks for use in the
<span
class="cmtt-10">sort-rule </span>resource option. If you want a rule for a specific locale, you can
provide similar commands in a file called <span
@@ -19290,10 +23235,10 @@
<span
class="cmtt-10">\IfTrackedLanguageFileExists </span>in the <span
class="cmss-10">tracklang</span><a
- id="dx1-49030"></a> documentation for further details.
+ id="dx1-82030"></a> documentation for further details.
If this file is on TeX’s path and the <span
class="cmss-10">tracklang</span><a
- id="dx1-49031"></a> package (automatically loaded by
+ id="dx1-82031"></a> package (automatically loaded by
<span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span>) detects that the document has requested that language or locale, then the
file will automatically be loaded. For example, if you want to provide a rule
@@ -19304,7 +23249,7 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-226">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-275">
\ProvidesGlossariesExtraLang{welsh}[2018/02/23 v1.0]
\@ifpackageloaded{glossaries-extra-bib2gls}
{
@@ -19342,7 +23287,7 @@
}
{}% glossaries-extra-bib2gls.sty not loaded
</pre>
-<!--l. 9708--><p class="nopar" > (The use of <span
+<!--l. 12177--><p class="nopar" > (The use of <span
class="cmtt-10">\string </span>is in case the <span
class="cmtt-10">< </span>character has been made active.) You can
provide more than one rule-block per local, to allow for loanwords or foreign words.
@@ -19350,7 +23295,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrWelshIRules</span>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrWelshIIRules</span>
etc.
-</p><!--l. 9715--><p class="indent" > If the rules are for a particular script (independent of language or region) then
+</p><!--l. 12184--><p class="indent" > If the rules are for a particular script (independent of language or region) then
they can be provided in a file given by <span
class="cmtt-10">glossariesxtr-</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">script</span>⟩<span
@@ -19361,7 +23306,7 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-227">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-276">
\ProvidesGlossariesExtraLang{Cyrl}[2018/02/23 v1.0]
\newcommand*{\glsxtrGeneralCyrillicIRules}{%
  % Cyrillic rules
@@ -19370,20 +23315,20 @@
  % an alternative set of Cyrillic rules
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9727--><p class="nopar" > (Remember that the required document language scripts need to be tracked through
+<!--l. 12196--><p class="nopar" > (Remember that the required document language scripts need to be tracked through
the <span
class="cmss-10">tracklang</span><a
- id="dx1-49032"></a> package, in order for these files to be automatically loaded. This
+ id="dx1-82032"></a> package, in order for these files to be automatically loaded. This
essentially means ensuring you load the appropriate language package before
<span
class="cmss-10">tracklang</span><a
- id="dx1-49033"></a> is loaded by the base <span
+ id="dx1-82033"></a> is loaded by the base <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries</span><a
- id="dx1-49034"></a> package or any other package that uses it.
+ id="dx1-82034"></a> package or any other package that uses it.
See the <span
class="cmss-10">tracklang</span><a
- id="dx1-49035"></a> documentation for further details.)
-</p><!--l. 9735--><p class="indent" > Alternatively, if the rules are specific to a subject rather than a region or
+ id="dx1-82035"></a> documentation for further details.)
+</p><!--l. 12204--><p class="indent" > Alternatively, if the rules are specific to a subject rather than a region or
language, then you can provide a supplementary package. For example, if you have a
package called, say, <span
class="cmss-10">mapsymbols </span>that provides map symbols, then the file
@@ -19393,7 +23338,7 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-228">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-277">
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
\ProvidesPackage{mapsymbols}
 some package or font loading stuff here to provide
@@ -19409,10 +23354,10 @@
 \string< \glshex 26BD % football 0x26BD
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9756--><p class="nopar" > and the supplementary file <span
+<!--l. 12225--><p class="nopar" > and the supplementary file <span
class="cmtt-10">mapsymbols.bib </span>can provide the appropriate definitions
for <a
- id="dx1-49036"></a><a
+ id="dx1-82036"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>:
@@ -19419,17 +23364,17 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-229">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-278">
@preamble{"\glsxtrprovidecommand{\Harbour}{\char"2693}
\glsxtrprovidecommand{\Battlefield}{\char"2694}
\glsxtrprovidecommand{\Stadium}{\char"26BD}"}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9763--><p class="nopar" > Now both the preamble and rule block can be used in the resource set:
+<!--l. 12232--><p class="nopar" > Now both the preamble and rule block can be used in the resource set:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-230">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-279">
\usepackage{mapsymbols}% my custom package
\usepackage[record]{glossaries-extra}
\GlsXtrLoadResources[
@@ -19451,10 +23396,10 @@
 }
]
</pre>
-<!--l. 9788--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 9790--><p class="indent" > The following commands are provided by <span
+<!--l. 12257--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 12259--><p class="indent" > The following commands are provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra-bib2gls</span><a
- id="dx1-49037"></a>. They should be
+ id="dx1-82037"></a>. They should be
separated by the rule separator characters <span
class="cmtt-10">;</span> (semi-colon) or <span
class="cmtt-10">,</span> (comma) or
@@ -19463,21 +23408,21 @@
class="cmtt-10"><</span> (less than). See Java’s <a
href="http://docs.oracle.com/javase/8/docs/api/java/text/RuleBasedCollator.html" >RuleBasedCollator</a> documentation for
details of the rule syntax.
-</p><!--l. 9797--><p class="indent" > For example, the following will place the mathematical Greek symbols (<span
+</p><!--l. 12266--><p class="indent" > For example, the following will place the mathematical Greek symbols (<span
class="cmtt-10">\alpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49038"></a>,
+ id="dx1-82038"></a>,
<span
class="cmtt-10">\Alpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49039"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82039"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\beta</span><a
- id="dx1-49040"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82040"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Beta</span><a
- id="dx1-49041"></a> etc) in a block before Latin characters:
+ id="dx1-82041"></a> etc) in a block before Latin characters:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-231">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-280">
sort-rule={\glsxtrcontrolrules
 ;\glsxtrspacerules
 ;\glsxtrnonprintablerules
@@ -19492,38 +23437,38 @@
 <\glsxtrLatinOslash
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9814--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 9816--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49042"></a> <span
+<!--l. 12283--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 12285--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82042"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrcontrolrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9818--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12287--><p class="noindent" >
These are control characters that are usually placed at the start of a rule in the
ignored section. They typically won’t occur in any sort values, but if they do they
should normally be ignored.
-</p><!--l. 9823--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49043"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12292--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82043"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrspacerules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9825--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12294--><p class="noindent" >
These are space characters. They typically come after the control characters with the
two blocks separated by a <span
class="cmtt-10">;</span> (semi-colon).
-</p><!--l. 9829--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49044"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12298--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82044"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnonprintablerules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9831--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12300--><p class="noindent" >
These are non-printable characters (BOM, tabs, line feed and carriage return). They
typically come after the spaces separated by a <span
class="cmtt-10">;</span> (semi-colon). These characters
aren’t checked for by <a
- id="dx1-49045"></a><a
+ id="dx1-82045"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> when it determines whether or not to use the
interpreter, so a TAB or newline character may end up in the sort value if it wasn’t
interpreted.
-</p><!--l. 9839--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49046"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12308--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82046"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrcombiningdiacriticrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9841--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12310--><p class="noindent" >
These are combining diacritic marks which typically follow the space and
non-printable blocks (separated by a semi-colon). This command is defined in terms
of sub-block commands:
@@ -19531,7 +23476,7 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-232">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-281">
\newcommand*{\glsxtrcombiningdiacriticrules}{%
 \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIrules\string;
 \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIIrules\string;
@@ -19539,27 +23484,27 @@
 \glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIVrules
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9852--><p class="nopar" > If you prefer, you can use the sub-blocks directly in your required ordered.
-</p><!--l. 9856--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49047"></a> <span
+<!--l. 12321--><p class="nopar" > If you prefer, you can use the sub-blocks directly in your required ordered.
+</p><!--l. 12325--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82047"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9858--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12327--><p class="noindent" >
This contains the combining diacritics: acute, grave, breve, circumflex, caron, ring,
vertical line above, diaeresis (umlaut), double acute, tilde, dot above, combining
macron.
-</p><!--l. 9863--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49048"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12332--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82048"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9865--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12334--><p class="noindent" >
This contains the combining diacritics: short solidus overlay, cedilla, ogonek, dot
below, low line, overline, hook above, double vertical line above, double grave
accent, candrabindu, inverted breve, turned comma above, comma above,
reversed comma above, comma above right, grave accent below, acute accent
below.
-</p><!--l. 9872--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49049"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12341--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82049"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIIIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9874--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12343--><p class="noindent" >
This contains the combining diacritics: left tack below, right tack below, left angle
above, horn, left half ring below, up tack below, down tack below, plus sign below,
minus sign below, palatalized hook below, retroflex hook below, diaresis below, ring
@@ -19571,10 +23516,10 @@
dialytika tonos, Greek ypogegrammeni, double tilde, double inverted breve,
Cyrillic titlo, Cyrillic palatalization, Cyrillic dasia pneumata, Cyrillic psili
pneumata.
-</p><!--l. 9889--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49050"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12358--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82050"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrcombiningdiacriticIVrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9891--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12360--><p class="noindent" >
This contains the combining diacritics: left harpoon above, right harpoon above, long
vertical line overlay, short vertical line overlay, anticlockwise arrow above, clockwise
arrow above, left arrow above, right arrow above, ring overlay, clockwise ring overlay,
@@ -19581,19 +23526,19 @@
anticlockwise ring overlay, three dots above, four dots above, enclosing circle,
enclosing square, enclosing diamond, enclosing circle backslash, left right arrow
above.
-</p><!--l. 9901--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49051"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12370--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82051"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrhyphenrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9903--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12372--><p class="noindent" >
This contains hyphens (including the minus sign 0x2212). This rule block typically
comes after the diacritic rules separated by a comma.
-</p><!--l. 9908--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49052"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12377--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82052"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrgeneralpuncrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9910--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12379--><p class="noindent" >
This contains punctuation characters. This rule block typically comes after the
hyphen rules separated by a less than (<span
class="cmtt-10"><</span>). As with the combining diacritics, this
@@ -19603,7 +23548,7 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-233">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-282">
\newcommand*{\glsxtrgeneralpuncrules}{%
  \glsxtrgeneralpuncIrules
  \string<\glsxtrcurrencyrules
@@ -19610,11 +23555,11 @@
  \string<\glsxtrgeneralpuncIIrules
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 9922--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 9924--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49053"></a> <span
+<!--l. 12391--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 12393--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82053"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrgeneralpuncIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9926--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12395--><p class="noindent" >
This is the first punctuation sub-block containing: underscore, macron, comma,
semi-colon, colon, exclamation mark, inverted exclamation mark, question
mark, inverted question mark, solidus, full stop, acute accent, grave accent,
@@ -19623,26 +23568,26 @@
parenthesis, left square bracket, right square bracket, left curly bracket, right
curly bracket, section sign, pilcrow sign, copyright sign, registered sign, at
sign.
-</p><!--l. 9937--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49054"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12406--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82054"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrcurrencyrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9939--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12408--><p class="noindent" >
This sub-block contains some currency symbols: currency sign, Thai currency symbol
baht, cent sign, colon sign, cruzeiro sign, dollar sign, dong sign, euro sign, French
franc sign, lira sign, mill sign, naira sign, peseta sign, pound sign, rupee sign, new
sheqel sign, won sign, yen sign.
-</p><!--l. 9946--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49055"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12415--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82055"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrgeneralpuncIIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9948--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12417--><p class="noindent" >
This sub-block contains some other punctuation symbols: asterisk, backslash,
ampersand, hash sign, percent sign, plus sign, plus-minus sign, division sign,
multiplication sign, less-than sign, equals sign, greater-than sign, not sign, vertical
bar (pipe), broken bar, degree sign, micron sign.
-</p><!--l. 9955--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49056"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12424--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82056"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdigitrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9957--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12426--><p class="noindent" >
This rule block contains the Basic Latin digits (0, …, 9) and the subscript and
superscript digits (<sub class="textsubscript"><span
class="cmr-9">0</span></sub> <sup class="textsuperscript"><span
@@ -19650,36 +23595,36 @@
The digit block typically comes after the punctuation rules separated by a less than
(<span
class="cmtt-10"><</span>).
-</p><!--l. 9965--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49057"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12434--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82057"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrBasicDigitrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9967--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12436--><p class="noindent" >
This rule block contains just the Basic Latin digits (0, …, 9).
-</p><!--l. 9970--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49058"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12439--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82058"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrSubScriptDigitrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9972--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12441--><p class="noindent" >
This rule block contains just the subscript digits (<sub class="textsubscript"><span
class="cmr-9">0</span></sub> … <sub class="textsubscript"><span
class="cmr-9">9</span></sub>).
-</p><!--l. 9976--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49059"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12445--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82059"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrSuperScriptDigitrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9978--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12447--><p class="noindent" >
This rule block contains just the superscript digits (<sup class="textsuperscript"><span
class="cmr-9">0</span></sup> … <sup class="textsuperscript"><span
class="cmr-9">9</span></sup>).
-</p><!--l. 9982--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49060"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12451--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82060"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrfractionrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9984--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12453--><p class="noindent" >
This rule block contains vulgar fraction characters. The digit block typically comes
after the digit rules separated by a less than (<span
class="cmtt-10"><</span>).
-</p><!--l. 9989--><p class="indent" > There are a number of Latin rule blocks. Some of these included extended
+</p><!--l. 12458--><p class="indent" > There are a number of Latin rule blocks. Some of these included extended
characters or ligatures (such as ß or œ) but they don’t include accented
characters. If you require a Latin rule block that includes accented characters,
digraphs, trigraphs or other extended characters, then it’s best to provide similar
@@ -19688,10 +23633,10 @@
class="cmti-10">tag</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">.ldf </span>file for the particular language or
region.
-</p><!--l. 9997--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49061"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12466--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82061"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 9999--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12468--><p class="noindent" >
This is just the basic (non-extended) Latin alphabet with the superscript and
subscript Latin letters (<sup class="textsuperscript"><span
class="cmr-9">a</span></sup> <sub class="textsubscript"><span
@@ -19699,327 +23644,327 @@
don’t want the subscripts and superscripts included you can redefine <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinA</span>
etc to omit them.)
-</p><!--l. 10006--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49062"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12475--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82062"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinIIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10008--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12477--><p class="noindent" >
This is like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules </span>but it includes eth (Ð) between ‘D’ and ‘E’
and eszett (ß) treated as ‘ss’.
-</p><!--l. 10012--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49063"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12481--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82063"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinIIIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10014--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12483--><p class="noindent" >
This is like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules </span>but it includes eth (Ð) between ‘D’ and ‘E’
and eszett (ß) treated as ‘sz’.
-</p><!--l. 10018--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49064"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12487--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82064"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinIVrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10020--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12489--><p class="noindent" >
This is like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules </span>but it includes eth (Ð) between ‘D’ and ‘E’,
ae-ligature (æ) is treated as ‘ae’, oe-ligature (œ) is treated as ‘oe’, eszett (ß) treated
as ‘ss’ and thorn (þ) is treated as ‘th’.
-</p><!--l. 10026--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49065"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12495--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82065"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinVrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10028--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12497--><p class="noindent" >
This is like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules </span>but it includes eth (Ð) between ‘D’ and ‘E’,
eszett (ß) treated as ‘ss’ and thorn (þ) treated as ‘th’.
-</p><!--l. 10033--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49066"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12502--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82066"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinVIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10035--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12504--><p class="noindent" >
This is like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules </span>but it includes eth (Ð) between ‘D’ and ‘E’,
eszett (ß) treated as ‘sz’ and thorn (þ) treated as ‘th’.
-</p><!--l. 10040--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49067"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12509--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82067"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinVIIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10042--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12511--><p class="noindent" >
This is like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules </span>but it includes ae-ligature (æ) between ‘A’
and ‘B’, eth (Ð) between ‘D’ and ‘E’, insular G (Ᵹ) instead of ‘G’, oe-ligature between
‘O’ and ‘P’, long s (ſ) equivalent to ‘s’, thorn (þ) between ‘T’ and ‘U’ and wynn (Ƿ)
instead of W.
-</p><!--l. 10049--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49068"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12518--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82068"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinVIIIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10051--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12520--><p class="noindent" >
This is like <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrGeneralLatinIrules </span>but ae-ligature (æ) is treated as ‘ae’,
oe-ligature (œ) is treated as ‘oe’, eszett (ß) treated as ‘ss’, thorn (þ) is treated as ‘th’,
Ø is treated as ‘O’ and ‘Ł’ is treated as ‘L’.
-</p><!--l. 10057--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49069"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12526--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82069"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinA </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10059--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12528--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers ‘A’ but includes the sub- and superscript A.
-</p><!--l. 10063--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49070"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12532--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82070"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinE </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10065--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12534--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers ‘E’ but includes the subscript E.
-</p><!--l. 10069--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49071"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12538--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82071"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinH </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10071--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12540--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers ‘H’ but includes the subscript H.
-</p><!--l. 10075--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49072"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12544--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82072"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinK </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10077--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12546--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers ‘K’ but includes the subscript K.
-</p><!--l. 10081--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49073"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12550--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82073"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinI </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10083--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12552--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers ‘I’ but includes the superscript I.
-</p><!--l. 10087--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49074"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12556--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82074"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinL </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10089--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12558--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers ‘L’ but includes the subscript L.
-</p><!--l. 10093--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49075"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12562--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82075"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinM </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10095--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12564--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers ‘M’ but includes the subscript M.
-</p><!--l. 10099--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49076"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12568--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82076"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinN </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10101--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12570--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers ‘N’ but includes the sub- and superscript N.
-</p><!--l. 10105--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49077"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12574--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82077"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinO </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10107--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12576--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers ‘O’ but includes the sub- and superscript O.
-</p><!--l. 10111--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49078"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12580--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82078"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinP </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10113--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12582--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers ‘P’ but includes the subscript P.
-</p><!--l. 10117--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49079"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12586--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82079"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinS </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10119--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12588--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers ‘S’ but includes the subscript S.
-</p><!--l. 10123--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49080"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12592--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82080"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinT </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10125--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12594--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers ‘T’ but includes the subscript T.
-</p><!--l. 10129--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49081"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12598--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82081"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinX </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10131--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12600--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers ‘X’ but includes the subscript X.
-</p><!--l. 10135--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49082"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12604--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82082"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinEszettSs </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10137--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12606--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers eszett (ß) and makes long s (ſ) followed by short ‘s’
equivalent to ‘ß’. (This is used in the above blocks that treat ‘ß’ as ‘ss’.)
-</p><!--l. 10142--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49083"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12611--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82083"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinEszettSz </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10144--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12613--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers eszett (ß) and makes long s (ſ) followed by ‘z’ equivalent
to ‘ß’. (This is used in the above blocks that treat ‘ß’ as ‘sz’.)
-</p><!--l. 10149--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49084"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12618--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82084"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinEth </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10151--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12620--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule for eth (Ð) so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values.
-</p><!--l. 10155--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49085"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12624--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82085"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinThorn </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10157--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12626--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule for thorn (þ) so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values.
-</p><!--l. 10161--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49086"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12630--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82086"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinAELigature </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10163--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12632--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule for ae-ligature (æ) so you don’t need to remember the Unicode
values.
-</p><!--l. 10167--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49087"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12636--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82087"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinOELigature </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10169--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12638--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule for oe-ligature (œ) so you don’t need to remember the Unicode
values.
-</p><!--l. 10173--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49088"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12642--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82088"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinOslash </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10175--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12644--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule for ‘Ø’ so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values.
-</p><!--l. 10179--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49089"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12648--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82089"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinLslash </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10181--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12650--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule for ‘Ł’ so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values.
-</p><!--l. 10185--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49090"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12654--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82090"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinWynn </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10187--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12656--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule for wynn (Ƿ) so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values.
-</p><!--l. 10191--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49091"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12660--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82091"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinInsularG </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10193--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12662--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule for insular G (Ᵹ) so you don’t need to remember the Unicode
values.
-</p><!--l. 10197--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49092"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12666--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82092"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinSchwa </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10199--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12668--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule that just covers schwa (Ə) but includes the subscript schwa. (Not used in
any of the provided Latin rule blocks described above.)
-</p><!--l. 10204--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49093"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12673--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82093"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrLatinAA </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10206--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12675--><p class="noindent" >
A mini-rule for ‘Å’ so you don’t need to remember the Unicode values. (Not used in
any of the provided Latin rule blocks described above.)
-</p><!--l. 10211--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49094"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12680--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82094"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrMathGreekIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10213--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12682--><p class="noindent" >
A rule block for mathematical Greek (<span
class="cmtt-10">\alpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49095"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82095"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\beta</span><a
- id="dx1-49096"></a> etc) and upright Greek
+ id="dx1-82096"></a> etc) and upright Greek
(<span
class="cmtt-10">\upalpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49097"></a>, etc, from the <span
+ id="dx1-82097"></a>, etc, from the <span
class="cmss-10">upgreek</span><a
- id="dx1-49098"></a> package) characters that includes digamma
+ id="dx1-82098"></a> package) characters that includes digamma
(<span
class="cmtt-10">\digamma</span><a
- id="dx1-49099"></a> and <span
+ id="dx1-82099"></a> and <span
class="cmtt-10">\Digamma</span><a
- id="dx1-49100"></a>) between epsilon and zeta. The upright and italic versions
+ id="dx1-82100"></a>) between epsilon and zeta. The upright and italic versions
are gathered together into the same letter group.
-</p><!--l. 10220--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49101"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12689--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82101"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrMathGreekIIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10222--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12691--><p class="noindent" >
As <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrMathGreekIrules </span>but doesn’t include digamma.
-</p><!--l. 10225--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49102"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12694--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82102"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrMathUpGreekIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10227--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12696--><p class="noindent" >
A rule block for upright Greek (<span
class="cmtt-10">\upalpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49103"></a>, etc, from the <span
+ id="dx1-82103"></a>, etc, from the <span
class="cmss-10">upgreek</span><a
- id="dx1-49104"></a> package)
+ id="dx1-82104"></a> package)
characters that includes digamma (<span
class="cmtt-10">\digamma</span><a
- id="dx1-49105"></a> and <span
+ id="dx1-82105"></a> and <span
class="cmtt-10">\Digamma</span><a
- id="dx1-49106"></a>) between epsilon and
+ id="dx1-82106"></a>) between epsilon and
zeta.
-</p><!--l. 10233--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49107"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12702--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82107"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrMathUpGreekIIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10235--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12704--><p class="noindent" >
A rule block for upright Greek (<span
class="cmtt-10">\upalpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49108"></a>, etc, from the <span
+ id="dx1-82108"></a>, etc, from the <span
class="cmss-10">upgreek</span><a
- id="dx1-49109"></a> package) that
+ id="dx1-82109"></a> package) that
doesn’t include digamma.
-</p><!--l. 10239--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49110"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12708--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82110"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrMathItalicGreekIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10241--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12710--><p class="noindent" >
A rule block for mathematical Greek (<span
class="cmtt-10">\alpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49111"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82111"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Alpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49112"></a>, etc) characters that includes
+ id="dx1-82112"></a>, etc) characters that includes
digamma (<span
class="cmtt-10">\diagamma</span><a
- id="dx1-49113"></a> and <span
+ id="dx1-82113"></a> and <span
class="cmtt-10">\Digamma</span><a
- id="dx1-49114"></a>) between epsilon and zeta. Note that even
+ id="dx1-82114"></a>) between epsilon and zeta. Note that even
though the upper case <span
class="cmtt-10">\Delta </span>etc are actually rendered upright by LaTeX, <a
- id="dx1-49115"></a><a
+ id="dx1-82115"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>’s</a>
interpreter treats them as italic to help keep them close to the lower case
versions.
-</p><!--l. 10249--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49116"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12718--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82116"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrMathItalicGreekIIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10251--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12720--><p class="noindent" >
A rule block for mathematical Greek (<span
class="cmtt-10">\alpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49117"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82117"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Alpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49118"></a>, etc) characters that doesn’t
+ id="dx1-82118"></a>, etc) characters that doesn’t
include digamma.
-</p><!--l. 10255--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49119"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12724--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82119"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrMathItalicUpperGreekIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10257--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12726--><p class="noindent" >
A rule block for upper case mathematical Greek (<span
class="cmtt-10">\Alpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49120"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82120"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Beta</span><a
- id="dx1-49121"></a>, etc) characters that
+ id="dx1-82121"></a>, etc) characters that
includes digamma (<span
class="cmtt-10">\Digamma</span><a
- id="dx1-49122"></a>) between epsilon and zeta.
-</p><!--l. 10262--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49123"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-82122"></a>) between epsilon and zeta.
+</p><!--l. 12731--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82123"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrMathItalicUpperGreekIIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10264--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12733--><p class="noindent" >
A rule block for upper case mathematical Greek (<span
class="cmtt-10">\Alpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49124"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82124"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\Beta</span><a
- id="dx1-49125"></a>, etc) characters that
+ id="dx1-82125"></a>, etc) characters that
doesn’t include digamma.
-</p><!--l. 10268--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49126"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12737--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82126"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrMathItalicLowerGreekIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10270--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12739--><p class="noindent" >
A rule block for lower case mathematical Greek (<span
class="cmtt-10">\alpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49127"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82127"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\beta</span><a
- id="dx1-49128"></a>, etc) characters that
+ id="dx1-82128"></a>, etc) characters that
includes digamma (<span
class="cmtt-10">\digamma</span><a
- id="dx1-49129"></a>) between epsilon and zeta.
-</p><!--l. 10275--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49130"></a> <span
+ id="dx1-82129"></a>) between epsilon and zeta.
+</p><!--l. 12744--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82130"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrMathItalicLowerGreekIIrules </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10277--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12746--><p class="noindent" >
A rule block for lower case mathematical Greek (<span
class="cmtt-10">\alpha</span><a
- id="dx1-49131"></a>, <span
+ id="dx1-82131"></a>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\beta</span><a
- id="dx1-49132"></a>, etc) characters that
+ id="dx1-82132"></a>, etc) characters that
doesn’t include digamma.
-</p><!--l. 10281--><p class="indent" > Additionally, there are commands in the form <span
+</p><!--l. 12750--><p class="indent" > Additionally, there are commands in the form <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrUpAlpha</span>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrUpBeta</span>
etc and <span
@@ -20031,32 +23976,32 @@
and <span
class="cmtt-10">\Alpha</span>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\alpha </span>etc) as well as the following:
-</p><!--l. 10288--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49133"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12757--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82133"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrMathItalicPartial </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10290--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12759--><p class="noindent" >
The partial derivative symbol (<span
class="cmmi-10">∂</span>).
-</p><!--l. 10293--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-49134"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12762--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-82134"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrMathItalicNabla </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10295--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12764--><p class="noindent" >
The nabla symbol (<span
class="cmsy-10">∇</span>).
-</p><!--l. 10299--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12768--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 10299--><p class="noindent" ><a
-href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">9.4 </span> <a
- id="supplementarycommands"></a>Supplementary Commands</h3>
-<!--l. 10301--><p class="noindent" >These commands are provided by <span
+<!--l. 12768--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">10.4 </span> <a
+ id="sec:bib2glssupplementarycommands"></a>Supplementary Commands</h3>
+<!--l. 12771--><p class="noindent" >These commands are provided by <span
class="cmss-10">glossaries-extra </span>for use with <a
- id="dx1-50001"></a><a
+ id="dx1-83001"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>.
-</p><!--l. 10304--><p class="indent" > The information provided with <span
+</p><!--l. 12774--><p class="indent" > The information provided with <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrLoadResources </span>is written to the <span
class="cmtt-10">.aux </span>file
using </p><div class="alltt">
@@ -20072,13 +24017,13 @@
</div>
</div> where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">information</span>⟩ is the information to pass to <a
- id="dx1-50002"></a><span
+ id="dx1-83002"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>. The command in the
second argument
-<!--l. 10311--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50003"></a> <span
+<!--l. 12781--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83003"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrresourceinit </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10313--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12783--><p class="noindent" >
may be used to temporarily redefine commands before the information is written to
the file. This does nothing by default, but may be redefined to allow the use of short
commands for convenience. For example, with:
@@ -20086,10 +24031,10 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-234">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-283">
\renewcommand{\glsxtrresourceinit}{\let\u\glshex}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10320--><p class="nopar" > you can just use, for example, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 12790--><p class="nopar" > you can just use, for example, <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\u</span><span
class="cmtt-10"> E6</span></span></span> instead of <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\string\uE6</span></span></span> in the custom rule.
@@ -20096,28 +24041,28 @@
This redefinition of <span
class="cmtt-10">\u </span>is scoped so its original definition is restored after the write
operation.
-</p><!--l. 10325--><p class="indent" > If you have multiple resource commands and you want a default set of options you
+</p><!--l. 12795--><p class="indent" > If you have multiple resource commands and you want a default set of options you
can supply them in the definition of:
-</p><!--l. 10327--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50004"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12797--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83004"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrDefaultResourceOptions </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10329--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12799--><p class="noindent" >
For example:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-235">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-284">
\renewcommand{\GlsXtrDefaultResourceOptions}{selection=all}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10333--><p class="nopar" > This should be done before the resource commands.
-</p><!--l. 10336--><p class="indent" > It’s possible to specify label prefixes. For example, modifying the earlier
+<!--l. 12803--><p class="nopar" > This should be done before the resource commands.
+</p><!--l. 12806--><p class="indent" > It’s possible to specify label prefixes. For example, modifying the earlier
example:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-236">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-285">
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage[record,style=indexgroup]{glossaries-extra}
\setabbreviationstyle{long-short-desc}
@@ -20138,22 +24083,22 @@
\printunsrtglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10367--><p class="nopar" > If you do something like this, you may find it more convenient to define custom
+<!--l. 12837--><p class="nopar" > If you do something like this, you may find it more convenient to define custom
commands that set the prefix. For example:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-237">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-286">
\newcommand*{\sym}[2][]{\gls[#1]{sym.#2}}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10372--><p class="nopar" > The problem with this is that the custom command <span
+<!--l. 12842--><p class="nopar" > The problem with this is that the custom command <span
class="cmtt-10">\sym </span>doesn’t allow for modifiers
(such as <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls* </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls+</span>). Instead you can use:
-</p><!--l. 10376--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50005"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12846--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83005"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewgls[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">default options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20161,7 +24106,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">cs</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10378--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12848--><p class="noindent" >
which defines the command ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">cs</span>⟩ that behaves like </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
@@ -20186,24 +24131,24 @@
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-238">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-287">
\glsxtrnewgls{sym.}{\sym}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10386--><p class="nopar" > or (to default to no hyperlinks)
+<!--l. 12856--><p class="nopar" > or (to default to no hyperlinks)
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-239">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-288">
\glsxtrnewgls[hyper=false]{sym.}{\sym}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10390--><p class="nopar" > now you can use <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
+<!--l. 12860--><p class="nopar" > now you can use <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\sym+{M}</span></span></span> to behave like <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls+{sym.M}</span></span></span>.
-</p><!--l. 10393--><p class="indent" > If you also want the plural and first letter upper case versions you can
+</p><!--l. 12863--><p class="indent" > If you also want the plural and first letter upper case versions you can
use
-</p><!--l. 10395--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50006"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12865--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83006"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewglslike[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">default options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20219,18 +24164,18 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">\Glspl-like cs</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10398--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12868--><p class="noindent" >
For example:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-240">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-289">
\glsxtrnewglslike[hyper=false]{idx.}{\idx}{\idxpl}{\Idx}{\Idxpl}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10402--><p class="nopar" > For the all caps versions:
-</p><!--l. 10404--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50007"></a> <span
+<!--l. 12872--><p class="nopar" > For the all caps versions:
+</p><!--l. 12874--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83007"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewGLSlike[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">default options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20242,20 +24187,20 @@
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">\GLSpl-like cs</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10407--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12877--><p class="noindent" >
For example:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-241">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-290">
\glsxtrnewGLSlike[hyper=false]{idx.}{\IDX}{\IDXpl}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10411--><p class="nopar" >
-</p><!--l. 10413--><p class="indent" > There’s an analogous command for <span
+<!--l. 12881--><p class="nopar" >
+</p><!--l. 12883--><p class="indent" > There’s an analogous command for <span
class="cmtt-10">\rgls</span>:
-</p><!--l. 10414--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50008"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12884--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83008"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewrgls[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">default options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20263,14 +24208,14 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">cs</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10416--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12886--><p class="noindent" >
and for <span
class="cmtt-10">\rgls</span>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\rglspl</span>, <span
class="cmtt-10">\rGls </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">\rGlspl</span>:
-</p><!--l. 10419--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50009"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12889--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83009"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewrglslike[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">default options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20286,10 +24231,10 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">\rGlspl-like cs</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10423--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12893--><p class="noindent" >
and for the all caps:
-</p><!--l. 10425--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50010"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12895--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83010"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewrGLSlike[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">default options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20301,8 +24246,8 @@
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">\rGLSpl-like cs</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10428--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 10430--><p class="indent" > If you provide your own custom command with just <span
+</p><!--l. 12898--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12900--><p class="indent" > If you provide your own custom command with just <span
class="cmtt-10">\newcommand </span>that
has syntax that starts with <span
class="cmtt-10">[</span>⟨<span
@@ -20310,50 +24255,50 @@
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>, then you can notify <a
- id="dx1-50011"></a><a
+ id="dx1-83011"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>
using:
-</p><!--l. 10433--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50012"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12903--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83012"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtridentifyglslike{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">command</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10435--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12905--><p class="noindent" >
This writes information to the <span
class="cmtt-10">.aux </span>file so that <a
- id="dx1-50013"></a><span
+ id="dx1-83013"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>can search for the given
command when looking for dependencies.
-</p><!--l. 10440--><p class="indent" > Another possibility is to set up known label prefixes, with each one identified
+</p><!--l. 12910--><p class="indent" > Another possibility is to set up known label prefixes, with each one identified
by:
-</p><!--l. 10442--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50014"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12912--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83014"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtraddlabelprefix{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10444--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12914--><p class="noindent" >
These should be listed in order of precedence. Since no entries are defined on the first
LaTeX run, the final prefix should be the fallback. You can prepend a prefix to the
list using:
-</p><!--l. 10448--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50015"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12918--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83015"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrprependlabelprefix{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10450--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12920--><p class="noindent" >
which gives it the highest order of precedence.
-</p><!--l. 10453--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 12923--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">prefix</span>⟩ argument may be empty. You can clear the list with:
-</p><!--l. 10455--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50016"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12925--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83016"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrclearlabelprefixes </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10457--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 10459--><p class="indent" > You can test if a prefix is already in the list with:
-</p><!--l. 10460--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50017"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12927--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12929--><p class="indent" > You can test if a prefix is already in the list with:
+</p><!--l. 12930--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83017"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrifinlabelprefixlist{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20361,7 +24306,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">false</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10462--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12932--><p class="noindent" >
In general it’s best to avoid adding multiple instances of the same prefix, so you can
check with this command before adding a prefix to the list. However, it can be useful
@@ -20369,10 +24314,10 @@
to repeat a prefix at the end of the list so that it can be used as a fallback for entries
that haven’t yet been defined.
-</p><!--l. 10469--><p class="indent" > With the list of possible prefixes set up (including an empty prefix if necessary),
+</p><!--l. 12939--><p class="indent" > With the list of possible prefixes set up (including an empty prefix if necessary),
you can use:
-</p><!--l. 10471--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50018"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12941--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83018"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\dgls[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20380,7 +24325,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10473--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12943--><p class="noindent" >
which behaves like </p><div class="alltt">
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
@@ -20400,10 +24345,10 @@
class="cmti-10">prefix</span>⟩⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ matches a defined
entry (or the last entry in the prefix list if none match).
-<!--l. 10482--><p class="indent" > There are also analogous commands for the plural and case-changing
+<!--l. 12952--><p class="indent" > There are also analogous commands for the plural and case-changing
versions:
-</p><!--l. 10484--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50019"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12954--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83019"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\dglspl[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20411,11 +24356,11 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10486--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12956--><p class="noindent" >
(uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glspl</span>),
-</p><!--l. 10488--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50020"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12958--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83020"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\dGls[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20423,11 +24368,11 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10490--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12960--><p class="noindent" >
(uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\Gls</span>),
-</p><!--l. 10492--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50021"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12962--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83021"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\dGlspl[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20435,11 +24380,11 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10494--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12964--><p class="noindent" >
(uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\Glspl</span>),
-</p><!--l. 10496--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50022"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12966--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83022"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\dGLS[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20447,11 +24392,11 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10498--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12968--><p class="noindent" >
(uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLS</span>),
-</p><!--l. 10500--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50023"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12970--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83023"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\dGLSpl[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20459,11 +24404,11 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10502--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12972--><p class="noindent" >
(uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\GLSpl</span>),
-</p><!--l. 10504--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50024"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12974--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83024"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\dglslink[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20471,11 +24416,11 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10506--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12976--><p class="noindent" >
(uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glslink</span>),
-</p><!--l. 10508--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-50025"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 12978--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-83025"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\dglsdisp[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">options</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">]{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20483,10 +24428,10 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10510--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 12980--><p class="noindent" >
(uses <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsdisp</span>).
-</p><!--l. 10513--><p class="indent" > These commands are essentially provided for a mixture of single and dual entries.
+</p><!--l. 12983--><p class="indent" > These commands are essentially provided for a mixture of single and dual entries.
Suppose the file <span
class="cmtt-10">entries.bib </span>contains:
@@ -20493,7 +24438,7 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-242">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-291">
@index{duck}
@dualindexabbreviation{svm,
  short={SVM},
@@ -20505,12 +24450,12 @@
    diameter}
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10526--><p class="nopar" > and suppose the document code is:
+<!--l. 12996--><p class="nopar" > and suppose the document code is:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-243">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-292">
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{hyperref}
\usepackage[record,abbreviations,symbols]{glossaries-extra}
@@ -20525,7 +24470,7 @@
\printunsrtglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10545--><p class="nopar" > This uses the default empty primary prefix and <span
+<!--l. 13015--><p class="nopar" > This uses the default empty primary prefix and <span
class="cmtt-10">dual.</span> for the dual prefix, so
<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls{svm}</span></span></span> is referencing the primary entry, which is (essentially) an <span
@@ -20536,50 +24481,50 @@
class="cmtt-10">\gls{pi}</span></span></span>, which references the primary <span
class="cmtt-10">@index </span>entry rather than the
symbol.
-</p><!--l. 10554--><p class="indent" > What’s really needed is:
+</p><!--l. 13024--><p class="indent" > What’s really needed is:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-244">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-293">
\gls{duck}, \gls{dual.svm}, \gls{dual.pi}.
</pre>
-<!--l. 10557--><p class="nopar" > or with
+<!--l. 13027--><p class="nopar" > or with
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-245">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-294">
\GlsXtrLoadResources[src=entries,
 label-prefix={idx.},
 dual-prefix={}
]
</pre>
-<!--l. 10564--><p class="nopar" > then only the entries without a dual need a prefix:
+<!--l. 13034--><p class="nopar" > then only the entries without a dual need a prefix:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-246">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-295">
\gls{idx.duck}, \gls{svm}, \gls{pi}.
</pre>
-<!--l. 10568--><p class="nopar" > Using <span
+<!--l. 13038--><p class="nopar" > Using <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrnewglslike</span>, as earlier, this can be simplified to:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-247">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-296">
\idx{duck}, \gls{svm}, \gls{pi}.
</pre>
-<!--l. 10572--><p class="nopar" > but this requires remembering which terms have duals.
-</p><!--l. 10575--><p class="indent" > An alternative is to use <span
+<!--l. 13042--><p class="nopar" > but this requires remembering which terms have duals.
+</p><!--l. 13045--><p class="indent" > An alternative is to use <span
class="cmtt-10">\dgls </span>instead:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-248">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-297">
\documentclass{article}
\usepackage{hyperref}
\usepackage[record,abbreviations,symbols]{glossaries-extra}
@@ -20596,7 +24541,7 @@
\printunsrtglossaries
\end{document}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10596--><p class="nopar" > On the first LaTeX call (when the <span
+<!--l. 13066--><p class="nopar" > On the first LaTeX call (when the <span
class="cmtt-10">.glstex </span>file doesn’t exist), neither <span
class="cmtt-10">dual.svm </span>nor
<span
@@ -20613,8 +24558,8 @@
location will be added to the primary entry’s location list, unless overridden by
resource options, such as <span
class="cmtt-10">combine-dual-locations</span>.
-</p><!--l. 10608--><p class="indent" > Once <a
- id="dx1-50026"></a><a
+</p><!--l. 13078--><p class="indent" > Once <a
+ id="dx1-83026"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> has been run and the <span
class="cmtt-10">.glstex </span>file exists, then <span
@@ -20628,7 +24573,7 @@
<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls{dual.svm}</span></span></span>, which follows the abbreviation style and hyperlinks to the list of
abbreviations.
-</p><!--l. 10616--><p class="indent" > Similarly for the index-symbol combination <span
+</p><!--l. 13086--><p class="indent" > Similarly for the index-symbol combination <span
class="cmtt-10">dual.pi </span>and <span
class="cmtt-10">pi</span>. In the case of
<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
@@ -20638,19 +24583,19 @@
class="cmtt-10">\dgls{duck}</span></span></span> always behaves like
<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls{duck}</span></span></span>.
-</p><!--l. 10622--><p class="indent" > If you haven’t used <span
+</p><!--l. 13092--><p class="indent" > If you haven’t used <span
class="cmtt-10">combine-dual-locations </span>an extra <a
- id="dx1-50027"></a><span
+ id="dx1-83027"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span>+LaTeX run
may be required to correct the location lists.
-</p><!--l. 10626--><p class="indent" > If you change the label prefixes, remember to update the corresponding
+</p><!--l. 13096--><p class="indent" > If you change the label prefixes, remember to update the corresponding
<span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtraddlabelprefix{</span>⟨<span
class="cmti-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>. If no prefixes have been added to the list (or if the
list is cleared), just an empty prefix is assumed.
-</p><!--l. 10631--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.8, <a
- id="dx1-50028"></a><span
+</p><!--l. 13101--><p class="indent" > As from version 1.8, <a
+ id="dx1-83028"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>provides hooks that identify the label prefixes in the
<span
class="cmtt-10">.glstex </span>file: </p><div class="alltt">
@@ -20660,19 +24605,19 @@
<div class="obeylines-v">
<span
class="cmtt-10">\bibglstertiaryprefixlabel</span><a
- id="dx1-50029"></a><span
+ id="dx1-83029"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
<br /><span
class="cmtt-10">\bibglsdualprefixlabel</span><a
- id="dx1-50030"></a><span
+ id="dx1-83030"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
<br /><span
class="cmtt-10">\bibglsprimaryprefixlabel</span><a
- id="dx1-50031"></a><span
+ id="dx1-83031"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">prefix</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}</span>
@@ -20682,12 +24627,12 @@
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-249">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-298">
\newcommand{\bibglsprimaryprefixlabel}[1]{\glsxtraddlabelprefix{#1}}
\newcommand{\bibglsdualprefixlabel}[1]{\glsxtrprependlabelprefix{#1}}
\GlsXtrLoadResources[src=entries]
</pre>
-<!--l. 10645--><p class="nopar" > Remember that this will only have an effect once the <span
+<!--l. 13115--><p class="nopar" > Remember that this will only have an effect once the <span
class="cmtt-10">.glstex </span>file has been created.
The prefix list will be empty on the first run (which is treated as a single empty
prefix). If this isn’t a suitable fallback, it may be necessary to add one after all the
@@ -20696,25 +24641,25 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-250">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-299">
\newcommand{\bibglsprimaryprefixlabel}[1]{\glsxtraddlabelprefix{#1}}
\newcommand{\bibglsdualprefixlabel}[1]{\glsxtrprependlabelprefix{#1}}
\GlsXtrLoadResources[src=entries,label-prefix={idx.}]
\glsxtraddlabelprefix{idx.}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10656--><p class="nopar" > Although this rather defeats the purpose of using the hooks as you still have to keep
+<!--l. 13126--><p class="nopar" > Although this rather defeats the purpose of using the hooks as you still have to keep
track of the fallback prefix.
-</p><!--l. 10660--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13130--><p class="noindent" >
</p>
-<!--l. 10660--><p class="noindent" ><a
-href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">9.5 </span> <a
+<!--l. 13130--><p class="noindent" ><a
+href="#top">Top</a><h3 class="sectionHead"></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">10.5 </span> <a
id="sec:recordcount"></a>Record Counting</h3>
-<!--l. 10663--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.1 of <a
- id="dx1-51001"></a><a
+<!--l. 13133--><p class="noindent" >As from version 1.1 of <a
+ id="dx1-84001"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a>, you can save the total record count for each entry by
invoking <a
- id="dx1-51002"></a><span
+ id="dx1-84002"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>with the <span
class="cmtt-10">--record-count </span>or <span
class="cmtt-10">--record-count-unit </span>switches.
@@ -20721,38 +24666,35 @@
These options will ensure that when each entry is written to the <span
class="cmtt-10">.glstex </span>file
<a
- id="dx1-51003"></a><span
+ id="dx1-84003"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>will additionally set the following internal fields for that entry:
</p>
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 10670--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmtt-10">recordcount</span>: set to the total number of records found for the entry;
- </p></li>
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 10672--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ </li>
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmtt-10">recordcount.</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">counter</span>⟩: set to the total number of records found for the
- entry for the given counter.</p></li></ul>
-<!--l. 10675--><p class="noindent" >If <span
+ entry for the given counter.</li></ul>
+<!--l. 13145--><p class="noindent" >If <span
class="cmtt-10">--record-count-unit </span>is used then additionally: </p>
<ul class="itemize1">
- <li class="itemize">
- <!--l. 10677--><p class="noindent" ><span
+ <li class="itemize"><span
class="cmtt-10">recordcount.</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">counter</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">.</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩: set to the total number of records
- found for the entry for the given counter with the given location.</p></li></ul>
-<!--l. 10681--><p class="noindent" >Only use the unit counting option if the locations don’t contain any special characters. If
+ found for the entry for the given counter with the given location.</li></ul>
+<!--l. 13151--><p class="noindent" >Only use the unit counting option if the locations don’t contain any special characters. If
you really need it with locations that may contain formatting commands, then you
can try redefining:
-</p><!--l. 10684--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51004"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 13154--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84004"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrdetoklocation{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10686--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13156--><p class="noindent" >
so that it detokenizes ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">location</span>⟩ but take care when using <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrLocationRecordCount</span>
@@ -20759,11 +24701,8 @@
with commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\thepage </span>as they can end up becoming detokenized too
early.
-
-
-
-</p><!--l. 10692--><p class="indent" > Note that the record count includes locations that <a
- id="dx1-51005"></a><span
+</p><!--l. 13162--><p class="indent" > Note that the record count includes locations that <a
+ id="dx1-84005"></a><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls </span>discards, such as
ignored records, duplicates and partial duplicates. It doesn’t include cross-reference
records. For example, if <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
@@ -20770,6 +24709,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">\gls{bird}</span></span></span> is used twice on page 1, once on page 2 and
fours times on page 3, and <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span
class="cmtt-10">\gls[counter=section]{bird}</span></span></span> is used once in
+
+
+
section 3, then the total record count (stored in the <span
class="cmtt-10">recordcount </span>field) is
2 + 1 + 4 + 1 = 8, the total for the <span
@@ -20779,7 +24721,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">section </span>counter (stored in the
<span
class="cmtt-10">recordcount.section </span>field) is 1.
-</p><!--l. 10704--><p class="indent" > With the unit counting on as well, the field <span
+</p><!--l. 13174--><p class="indent" > With the unit counting on as well, the field <span
class="cmtt-10">recordcount.page.1 </span>is set to
2, <span
class="cmtt-10">recordcount.page.2 </span>is set to 1, <span
@@ -20786,14 +24728,14 @@
class="cmtt-10">recordcount.page.3 </span>is set to 4 and
<span
class="cmtt-10">recordcount.section.3 </span>is set to 1.
-</p><!--l. 10709--><p class="indent" > You can access these fields using the following commands which will expand to
+</p><!--l. 13179--><p class="indent" > You can access these fields using the following commands which will expand to
the field value if set or to 0 if unset:
-</p><!--l. 10711--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51006"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 13181--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84006"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrTotalRecordCount{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10713--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13183--><p class="noindent" >
This expands to the total record count for the entry given by ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩.
@@ -20800,18 +24742,18 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-251">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-300">
\GlsXtrTotalRecordCount{bird}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10718--><p class="nopar" > expands to 8.
-</p><!--l. 10721--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51007"></a> <span
+<!--l. 13188--><p class="nopar" > expands to 8.
+</p><!--l. 13191--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84007"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrRecordCount{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">counter</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10723--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13193--><p class="noindent" >
This expands to the counter total for the entry given by ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">label</span>⟩ where ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">counter</span>⟩ is the
@@ -20820,20 +24762,20 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-252">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-301">
\GlsXtrRecordCount{bird}{page}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10729--><p class="nopar" > expands to 7 and
+<!--l. 13199--><p class="nopar" > expands to 7 and
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-253">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-302">
\GlsXtrRecordCount{bird}{section}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10733--><p class="nopar" > expands to 1.
-</p><!--l. 10736--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51008"></a> <span
+<!--l. 13203--><p class="nopar" > expands to 1.
+</p><!--l. 13206--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84008"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrLocationRecordCount{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20841,27 +24783,27 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">location</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10738--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13208--><p class="noindent" >
This expands to the total for the given location. For example
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-254">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-303">
\GlsXtrLocationRecordCount{bird}{page}{3}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10742--><p class="nopar" > expands to 4. Be careful about using <span
+<!--l. 13212--><p class="nopar" > expands to 4. Be careful about using <span
class="cmtt-10">\thepage </span>in the ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">location</span>⟩ part. Remember that
due to TeX’s asynchronous output routine, <span
class="cmtt-10">\thepage </span>may not be correct.
-</p><!--l. 10747--><p class="indent" > There are commands analogous to the entry counting commands like <span
+</p><!--l. 13217--><p class="indent" > There are commands analogous to the entry counting commands like <span
class="cmtt-10">\cgls</span>
and <span
class="cmtt-10">\cglsformat </span>that are triggered by the record count. These are listed
below.
-</p><!--l. 10751--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51009"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 13221--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84009"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\rgls</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">[</span>⟨<span
@@ -20871,9 +24813,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10753--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 10754--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51010"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 13223--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13224--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84010"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\rglspl</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">[</span>⟨<span
@@ -20883,9 +24825,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10756--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 10757--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51011"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 13226--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13227--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84011"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\rGls</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">[</span>⟨<span
@@ -20895,9 +24837,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10759--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 10760--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51012"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 13229--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13230--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84012"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\rGlspl</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">[</span>⟨<span
@@ -20907,9 +24849,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10762--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 10763--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51013"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 13232--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13233--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84013"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\rGLS</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">[</span>⟨<span
@@ -20919,9 +24861,9 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10765--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 10766--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51014"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 13235--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13236--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84014"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\rGLSpl</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">modifier</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">[</span>⟨<span
@@ -20931,40 +24873,40 @@
class="cmtt-10">}[</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">] </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10768--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13238--><p class="noindent" >
These commands check the <a
href="#catattr.recordcount"><span
class="cmss-10">recordcount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-51015"></a> attribute which, if set, should be a number.
+ id="dx1-84015"></a> attribute which, if set, should be a number.
For example:
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-255">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-304">
\glssetcategoryattribute{abbreviation}{recordcount}{1}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10773--><p class="nopar" > For convenience, you can use
-</p><!--l. 10775--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51016"></a> <span
+<!--l. 13243--><p class="nopar" > For convenience, you can use
+</p><!--l. 13245--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84016"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\GlsXtrSetRecordCountAttribute{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">category list</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">n</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10777--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13247--><p class="noindent" >
to set the <a
href="#catattr.recordcount"><span
class="cmss-10">recordcount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-51017"></a> attribute to ⟨<span
+ id="dx1-84017"></a> attribute to ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">n</span>⟩ for all the categories listed in ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">category</span>
<span
class="cmti-10">list</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 10781--><p class="indent" > The <span
+</p><!--l. 13251--><p class="indent" > The <span
class="cmtt-10">\rgls</span>-like commands use
-</p><!--l. 10782--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51018"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 13252--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84018"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrifrecordtrigger{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
@@ -20972,7 +24914,7 @@
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">normal</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10785--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13255--><p class="noindent" >
to determine whether the <span
class="cmtt-10">\rgls</span>-like command should behave like its <span
class="cmtt-10">\gls</span>
@@ -20979,22 +24921,22 @@
counterpart (⟨<span
class="cmti-10">normal</span>⟩) or whether it should instead use ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">trigger code</span>⟩.
-</p><!--l. 10790--><p class="indent" > This command checks if the <a
+</p><!--l. 13260--><p class="indent" > This command checks if the <a
href="#catattr.recordcount"><span
class="cmss-10">recordcount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-51019"></a> attribute is set. If not is just does
+ id="dx1-84019"></a> attribute is set. If not is just does
⟨<span
class="cmti-10">normal</span>⟩, otherwise it tests if
-</p><!--l. 10793--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51020"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 13263--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84020"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\glsxtrrecordtriggervalue{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10795--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13265--><p class="noindent" >
is greater than the value given in the <a
href="#catattr.recordcount"><span
class="cmss-10">recordcount</span></a><a
- id="dx1-51021"></a> attribute for that entry’s category.
+ id="dx1-84021"></a> attribute for that entry’s category.
If true, this does ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">normal</span>⟩ otherwise it does ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">trigger code</span>⟩. The default definition of the
@@ -21003,90 +24945,90 @@
</p>
- <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-256">
+ <pre class="verbatim" id="verbatim-305">
\newcommand*{\glsxtrrecordtriggervalue}[1]{%
 \GlsXtrTotalRecordCount{#1}%
}
</pre>
-<!--l. 10804--><p class="nopar" > The ⟨<span
+<!--l. 13274--><p class="nopar" > The ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">trigger code</span>⟩ part writes a record with the <span
class="cmss-10">format</span><a
- id="dx1-51022"></a> set to <span
+ id="dx1-84022"></a> set to <span
class="cmtt-10">glstriggerrecordformat</span>
(which <a
- id="dx1-51023"></a><a
+ id="dx1-84023"></a><a
href="#glo:bib2gls"><span
class="cmtt-10">bib2gls</span></a> v1.1+ recognises as a special type of ignored location format) and
does ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">trigger format</span>⟩. Then it unsets the <a
- id="dx1-51024"></a><a
+ id="dx1-84024"></a><a
href="#glo:firstuseflag">first use flag</a>. Note that it doesn’t implement
the post-link hook. This ensures that the record count is correct on the next
run.
-</p><!--l. 10813--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
+</p><!--l. 13283--><p class="indent" > The ⟨<span
class="cmti-10">trigger format</span>⟩ depends on the <span
class="cmtt-10">\rgls</span>-like command used and will be one of
the following:
-</p><!--l. 10815--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51025"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 13285--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84025"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\rglsformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10817--><p class="noindent" >
-</p><!--l. 10818--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
- id="dx1-51026"></a> <span
+</p><!--l. 13287--><p class="noindent" >
+</p><!--l. 13288--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><a
+ id="dx1-84026"></a> <span
class="cmtt-10">\rglsplformat{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">label</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">}{</span>⟨<span
class="cmitt-10">insert</span>⟩<span
class="cmtt-10">} </span></div><hr>
-</p><!--l. 10820--><p class="noindent" >
@@ Diff output truncated at 1234567 characters. @@
More information about the tex-live-commits
mailing list.